R&S®SMB100A
RF and Microwave Signal Generator
Operating Manual
(>786P)
Operating Manual
Test & Measurement
1407.0806.32 ─ 12
This document describes the R&S®SMB100A, stock no. 1406.6000K02/K03 and its options.
● R&S®SMB-B1/B1H
●
R&S®SMB-B5
●
R&S®SMB-B25/B26
●
R&S®SMB-B30/B31/B32
●
R&S®SMB-B101/B102/B103/B106
●
R&S®SMB-B112/B112L/B120/B120L/B140/B140L
●
R&S®SMB-K21/K22
●
R&S®SMB-K23/K27
The firmware of the instrument makes use of the operating system LINUX® and other valuable open source software packages. The
most important of them together with their corresponding open source license and the verbatim license texts are provided on the user
documentation CD-ROM (included in delivery).
The OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/) includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com) and software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). LINUX® is a trademark of Linus Torvalds.
Rohde & Schwarz would like to thank the open source community for their valuable contribution to embedded computing.
© 2012 Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG
Muehldorfstr. 15, 81671 Munich, Germany
Phone: +49 89 41 29 - 0
Fax: +49 89 41 29 12 164
E-mail: info@rohde-schwarz.com
Internet: http://www.rohde-schwarz.com
Subject to change – Data without tolerance limits is not binding.
R&S® is a registered trademark of Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG.
Trade names are trademarks of the owners.
The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual: R&S®SMB100A is abbreviated as R&S SMB.
Basic Safety Instructions
Always read through and comply with the following safety instructions!
All plants and locations of the Rohde & Schwarz group of companies make every effort to keep the safety
standards of our products up to date and to offer our customers the highest possible degree of safety. Our
products and the auxiliary equipment they require are designed, built and tested in accordance with the
safety standards that apply in each case. Compliance with these standards is continuously monitored by
our quality assurance system. The product described here has been designed, built and tested in
accordance with the attached EC Certificate of Conformity and has left the manufacturer’s plant in a
condition fully complying with safety standards. To maintain this condition and to ensure safe operation,
you must observe all instructions and warnings provided in this manual. If you have any questions
regarding these safety instructions, the Rohde & Schwarz group of companies will be happy to answer
them.
Furthermore, it is your responsibility to use the product in an appropriate manner. This product is designed
for use solely in industrial and laboratory environments or, if expressly permitted, also in the field and must
not be used in any way that may cause personal injury or property damage. You are responsible if the
product is used for any purpose other than its designated purpose or in disregard of the manufacturer's
instructions. The manufacturer shall assume no responsibility for such use of the product.
The product is used for its designated purpose if it is used in accordance with its product documentation
and within its performance limits (see data sheet, documentation, the following safety instructions). Using
the product requires technical skills and, in some cases, a basic knowledge of English. It is therefore
essential that only skilled and specialized staff or thoroughly trained personnel with the required skills be
allowed to use the product. If personal safety gear is required for using Rohde & Schwarz products, this
will be indicated at the appropriate place in the product documentation. Keep the basic safety instructions
and the product documentation in a safe place and pass them on to the subsequent users.
Observing the safety instructions will help prevent personal injury or damage of any kind caused by
dangerous situations. Therefore, carefully read through and adhere to the following safety instructions
before and when using the product. It is also absolutely essential to observe the additional safety
instructions on personal safety, for example, that appear in relevant parts of the product documentation. In
these safety instructions, the word "product" refers to all merchandise sold and distributed by the Rohde &
Schwarz group of companies, including instruments, systems and all accessories. For product-specific
information, see the data sheet and the product documentation.
Symbols and safety labels
Symbol
Meaning
Notice, general danger location
Symbol
Meaning
ON/OFF supply voltage
Observe product documentation
Caution when handling heavy equipment
Standby indication
Danger of electric shock
Direct current (DC)
1171.0000.42 - 06
Page 1
Basic Safety Instructions
Symbol
Meaning
Symbol
Meaning
Warning! Hot surface
Alternating current (AC)
Protective conductor terminal
Direct/alternating current (DC/AC)
Ground
Device fully protected by double (reinforced)
insulation
Ground terminal
EU labeling for batteries and accumulators
For additional information, see section "Waste
disposal/Environmental protection", item 1.
Be careful when handling electrostatic sensitive
devices
EU labeling for separate collection of electrical
and electronic devices
For additonal information, see section "Waste
disposal/Environmental protection", item 2.
Warning! Laser radiation
For additional information, see section
"Operation", item 7.
Signal words and their meaning
The following signal words are used in the product documentation in order to warn the reader about risks
and dangers.
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result
in death or serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result
in death or serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result
in minor or moderate injury.
Indicates the possibility of incorrect operation which can result in damage to
the product.
In the product documentation, the word ATTENTION is used synonymously.
These signal words are in accordance with the standard definition for civil applications in the European
Economic Area. Definitions that deviate from the standard definition may also exist in other economic
areas or military applications. It is therefore essential to make sure that the signal words described here
are always used only in connection with the related product documentation and the related product. The
use of signal words in connection with unrelated products or documentation can result in misinterpretation
and in personal injury or material damage.
1171.0000.42 - 06
Page 2
Basic Safety Instructions
Operating states and operating positions
The product may be operated only under the operating conditions and in the positions specified by the
manufacturer, without the product's ventilation being obstructed. If the manufacturer's specifications are
not observed, this can result in electric shock, fire and/or serious personal injury or death. Applicable local
or national safety regulations and rules for the prevention of accidents must be observed in all work
performed.
1. Unless otherwise specified, the following requirements apply to Rohde & Schwarz products:
predefined operating position is always with the housing floor facing down, IP protection 2X, use only
indoors, max. operating altitude 2000 m above sea level, max. transport altitude 4500 m above sea
level. A tolerance of ±10 % shall apply to the nominal voltage and ±5 % to the nominal frequency,
overvoltage category 2, pollution severity 2.
2. Do not place the product on surfaces, vehicles, cabinets or tables that for reasons of weight or stability
are unsuitable for this purpose. Always follow the manufacturer's installation instructions when
installing the product and fastening it to objects or structures (e.g. walls and shelves). An installation
that is not carried out as described in the product documentation could result in personal injury or
even death.
3. Do not place the product on heat-generating devices such as radiators or fan heaters. The ambient
temperature must not exceed the maximum temperature specified in the product documentation or in
the data sheet. Product overheating can cause electric shock, fire and/or serious personal injury or
even death.
Electrical safety
If the information on electrical safety is not observed either at all or to the extent necessary, electric shock,
fire and/or serious personal injury or death may occur.
1. Prior to switching on the product, always ensure that the nominal voltage setting on the product
matches the nominal voltage of the AC supply network. If a different voltage is to be set, the power
fuse of the product may have to be changed accordingly.
2. In the case of products of safety class I with movable power cord and connector, operation is
permitted only on sockets with a protective conductor contact and protective conductor.
3. Intentionally breaking the protective conductor either in the feed line or in the product itself is not
permitted. Doing so can result in the danger of an electric shock from the product. If extension cords
or connector strips are implemented, they must be checked on a regular basis to ensure that they are
safe to use.
4. If there is no power switch for disconnecting the product from the AC supply network, or if the power
switch is not suitable for this purpose, use the plug of the connecting cable to disconnect the product
from the AC supply network. In such cases, always ensure that the power plug is easily reachable and
accessible at all times. For example, if the power plug is the disconnecting device, the length of the
connecting cable must not exceed 3 m. Functional or electronic switches are not suitable for providing
disconnection from the AC supply network. If products without power switches are integrated into
racks or systems, the disconnecting device must be provided at the system level.
5. Never use the product if the power cable is damaged. Check the power cables on a regular basis to
ensure that they are in proper operating condition. By taking appropriate safety measures and
carefully laying the power cable, ensure that the cable cannot be damaged and that no one can be
hurt by, for example, tripping over the cable or suffering an electric shock.
1171.0000.42 - 06
Page 3
Basic Safety Instructions
6. The product may be operated only from TN/TT supply networks fuse-protected with max. 16 A (higher
fuse only after consulting with the Rohde & Schwarz group of companies).
7. Do not insert the plug into sockets that are dusty or dirty. Insert the plug firmly and all the way into the
socket provided for this purpose. Otherwise, sparks that result in fire and/or injuries may occur.
8. Do not overload any sockets, extension cords or connector strips; doing so can cause fire or electric
shocks.
9. For measurements in circuits with voltages Vrms > 30 V, suitable measures (e.g. appropriate
measuring equipment, fuse protection, current limiting, electrical separation, insulation) should be
taken to avoid any hazards.
10. Ensure that the connections with information technology equipment, e.g. PCs or other industrial
computers, comply with the IEC60950-1/EN60950-1 or IEC61010-1/EN 61010-1 standards that apply
in each case.
11. Unless expressly permitted, never remove the cover or any part of the housing while the product is in
operation. Doing so will expose circuits and components and can lead to injuries, fire or damage to the
product.
12. If a product is to be permanently installed, the connection between the protective conductor terminal
on site and the product's protective conductor must be made first before any other connection is
made. The product may be installed and connected only by a licensed electrician.
13. For permanently installed equipment without built-in fuses, circuit breakers or similar protective
devices, the supply circuit must be fuse-protected in such a way that anyone who has access to the
product, as well as the product itself, is adequately protected from injury or damage.
14. Use suitable overvoltage protection to ensure that no overvoltage (such as that caused by a bolt of
lightning) can reach the product. Otherwise, the person operating the product will be exposed to the
danger of an electric shock.
15. Any object that is not designed to be placed in the openings of the housing must not be used for this
purpose. Doing so can cause short circuits inside the product and/or electric shocks, fire or injuries.
16. Unless specified otherwise, products are not liquid-proof (see also section "Operating states and
operating positions", item 1). Therefore, the equipment must be protected against penetration by
liquids. If the necessary precautions are not taken, the user may suffer electric shock or the product
itself may be damaged, which can also lead to personal injury.
17. Never use the product under conditions in which condensation has formed or can form in or on the
product, e.g. if the product has been moved from a cold to a warm environment. Penetration by water
increases the risk of electric shock.
18. Prior to cleaning the product, disconnect it completely from the power supply (e.g. AC supply network
or battery). Use a soft, non-linting cloth to clean the product. Never use chemical cleaning agents such
as alcohol, acetone or diluents for cellulose lacquers.
Operation
1. Operating the products requires special training and intense concentration. Make sure that persons
who use the products are physically, mentally and emotionally fit enough to do so; otherwise, injuries
or material damage may occur. It is the responsibility of the employer/operator to select suitable
personnel for operating the products.
1171.0000.42 - 06
Page 4
Basic Safety Instructions
2. Before you move or transport the product, read and observe the section titled "Transport".
3. As with all industrially manufactured goods, the use of substances that induce an allergic reaction
(allergens) such as nickel cannot be generally excluded. If you develop an allergic reaction (such as a
skin rash, frequent sneezing, red eyes or respiratory difficulties) when using a Rohde & Schwarz
product, consult a physician immediately to determine the cause and to prevent health problems or
stress.
4. Before you start processing the product mechanically and/or thermally, or before you take it apart, be
sure to read and pay special attention to the section titled "Waste disposal/Environmental protection",
item 1.
5. Depending on the function, certain products such as RF radio equipment can produce an elevated
level of electromagnetic radiation. Considering that unborn babies require increased protection,
pregnant women must be protected by appropriate measures. Persons with pacemakers may also be
exposed to risks from electromagnetic radiation. The employer/operator must evaluate workplaces
where there is a special risk of exposure to radiation and, if necessary, take measures to avert the
potential danger.
6. Should a fire occur, the product may release hazardous substances (gases, fluids, etc.) that can
cause health problems. Therefore, suitable measures must be taken, e.g. protective masks and
protective clothing must be worn.
7. Laser products are given warning labels that are standardized according to their laser class. Lasers
can cause biological harm due to the properties of their radiation and due to their extremely
concentrated electromagnetic power. If a laser product (e.g. a CD/DVD drive) is integrated into a
Rohde & Schwarz product, absolutely no other settings or functions may be used as described in the
product documentation. The objective is to prevent personal injury (e.g. due to laser beams).
8. EMC classes (in line with CISPR 11)
Class A: Equipment suitable for use in all environments except residential environments and
environments that are directly connected to a low-voltage supply network that supplies residential
buildings.
Class B: Equipment suitable for use in residential environments and environments that are directly
connected to a low-voltage supply network that supplies residential buildings.
Repair and service
1. The product may be opened only by authorized, specially trained personnel. Before any work is
performed on the product or before the product is opened, it must be disconnected from the AC supply
network. Otherwise, personnel will be exposed to the risk of an electric shock.
2. Adjustments, replacement of parts, maintenance and repair may be performed only by electrical
experts authorized by Rohde & Schwarz. Only original parts may be used for replacing parts relevant
to safety (e.g. power switches, power transformers, fuses). A safety test must always be performed
after parts relevant to safety have been replaced (visual inspection, protective conductor test,
insulation resistance measurement, leakage current measurement, functional test). This helps ensure
the continued safety of the product.
1171.0000.42 - 06
Page 5
Basic Safety Instructions
Batteries and rechargeable batteries/cells
If the information regarding batteries and rechargeable batteries/cells is not observed either at all or to the
extent necessary, product users may be exposed to the risk of explosions, fire and/or serious personal
injury, and, in some cases, death. Batteries and rechargeable batteries with alkaline electrolytes (e.g.
lithium cells) must be handled in accordance with the EN 62133 standard.
1. Cells must not be taken apart or crushed.
2. Cells or batteries must not be exposed to heat or fire. Storage in direct sunlight must be avoided.
Keep cells and batteries clean and dry. Clean soiled connectors using a dry, clean cloth.
3. Cells or batteries must not be short-circuited. Cells or batteries must not be stored in a box or in a
drawer where they can short-circuit each other, or where they can be short-circuited by other
conductive materials. Cells and batteries must not be removed from their original packaging until they
are ready to be used.
4. Cells and batteries must not be exposed to any mechanical shocks that are stronger than permitted.
5. If a cell develops a leak, the fluid must not be allowed to come into contact with the skin or eyes. If
contact occurs, wash the affected area with plenty of water and seek medical aid.
6. Improperly replacing or charging cells or batteries that contain alkaline electrolytes (e.g. lithium cells)
can cause explosions. Replace cells or batteries only with the matching Rohde & Schwarz type (see
parts list) in order to ensure the safety of the product.
7. Cells and batteries must be recycled and kept separate from residual waste. Rechargeable batteries
and normal batteries that contain lead, mercury or cadmium are hazardous waste. Observe the
national regulations regarding waste disposal and recycling.
Transport
1. The product may be very heavy. Therefore, the product must be handled with care. In some cases,
the user may require a suitable means of lifting or moving the product (e.g. with a lift-truck) to avoid
back or other physical injuries.
2. Handles on the products are designed exclusively to enable personnel to transport the product. It is
therefore not permissible to use handles to fasten the product to or on transport equipment such as
cranes, fork lifts, wagons, etc. The user is responsible for securely fastening the products to or on the
means of transport or lifting. Observe the safety regulations of the manufacturer of the means of
transport or lifting. Noncompliance can result in personal injury or material damage.
3. If you use the product in a vehicle, it is the sole responsibility of the driver to drive the vehicle safely
and properly. The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for accidents or collisions. Never use the
product in a moving vehicle if doing so could distract the driver of the vehicle. Adequately secure the
product in the vehicle to prevent injuries or other damage in the event of an accident.
Waste disposal/Environmental protection
1. Specially marked equipment has a battery or accumulator that must not be disposed of with unsorted
municipal waste, but must be collected separately. It may only be disposed of at a suitable collection
point or via a Rohde & Schwarz customer service center.
1171.0000.42 - 06
Page 6
Instrucciones de seguridad elementales
2. Waste electrical and electronic equipment must not be disposed of with unsorted municipal waste, but
must be collected separately.
Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG has developed a disposal concept and takes full responsibility for
take-back obligations and disposal obligations for manufacturers within the EU. Contact your
Rohde & Schwarz customer service center for environmentally responsible disposal of the product.
3. If products or their components are mechanically and/or thermally processed in a manner that goes
beyond their intended use, hazardous substances (heavy-metal dust such as lead, beryllium, nickel)
may be released. For this reason, the product may only be disassembled by specially trained
personnel. Improper disassembly may be hazardous to your health. National waste disposal
regulations must be observed.
4. If handling the product releases hazardous substances or fuels that must be disposed of in a special
way, e.g. coolants or engine oils that must be replenished regularly, the safety instructions of the
manufacturer of the hazardous substances or fuels and the applicable regional waste disposal
regulations must be observed. Also observe the relevant safety instructions in the product
documentation. The improper disposal of hazardous substances or fuels can cause health problems
and lead to environmental damage.
For additional information about environmental protection, visit the Rohde & Schwarz website.
Instrucciones de seguridad elementales
¡Es imprescindible leer y cumplir las siguientes instrucciones e informaciones de seguridad!
El principio del grupo de empresas Rohde & Schwarz consiste en tener nuestros productos siempre al día
con los estándares de seguridad y de ofrecer a nuestros clientes el máximo grado de seguridad. Nuestros
productos y todos los equipos adicionales son siempre fabricados y examinados según las normas de
seguridad vigentes. Nuestro sistema de garantía de calidad controla constantemente que sean cumplidas
estas normas. El presente producto ha sido fabricado y examinado según el certificado de conformidad
adjunto de la UE y ha salido de nuestra planta en estado impecable según los estándares técnicos de
seguridad. Para poder preservar este estado y garantizar un funcionamiento libre de peligros, el usuario
deberá atenerse a todas las indicaciones, informaciones de seguridad y notas de alerta. El grupo de
empresas Rohde & Schwarz está siempre a su disposición en caso de que tengan preguntas referentes a
estas informaciones de seguridad.
Además queda en la responsabilidad del usuario utilizar el producto en la forma debida. Este producto
está destinado exclusivamente al uso en la industria y el laboratorio o, si ha sido expresamente
autorizado, para aplicaciones de campo y de ninguna manera deberá ser utilizado de modo que alguna
persona/cosa pueda sufrir daño. El uso del producto fuera de sus fines definidos o sin tener en cuenta las
instrucciones del fabricante queda en la responsabilidad del usuario. El fabricante no se hace en ninguna
forma responsable de consecuencias a causa del mal uso del producto.
1171.0000.42 - 06
Page 7
Instrucciones de seguridad elementales
Se parte del uso correcto del producto para los fines definidos si el producto es utilizado conforme a las
indicaciones de la correspondiente documentación del producto y dentro del margen de rendimiento
definido (ver hoja de datos, documentación, informaciones de seguridad que siguen). El uso del producto
hace necesarios conocimientos técnicos y ciertos conocimientos del idioma inglés. Por eso se debe tener
en cuenta que el producto solo pueda ser operado por personal especializado o personas instruidas en
profundidad con las capacidades correspondientes. Si fuera necesaria indumentaria de seguridad para el
uso de productos de Rohde & Schwarz, encontraría la información debida en la documentación del
producto en el capítulo correspondiente. Guarde bien las informaciones de seguridad elementales, así
como la documentación del producto, y entréguelas a usuarios posteriores.
Tener en cuenta las informaciones de seguridad sirve para evitar en lo posible lesiones o daños por
peligros de toda clase. Por eso es imprescindible leer detalladamente y comprender por completo las
siguientes informaciones de seguridad antes de usar el producto, y respetarlas durante el uso del
producto. Deberán tenerse en cuenta todas las demás informaciones de seguridad, como p. ej. las
referentes a la protección de personas, que encontrarán en el capítulo correspondiente de la
documentación del producto y que también son de obligado cumplimiento. En las presentes
informaciones de seguridad se recogen todos los objetos que distribuye el grupo de empresas
Rohde & Schwarz bajo la denominación de "producto", entre ellos también aparatos, instalaciones así
como toda clase de accesorios. Los datos específicos del producto figuran en la hoja de datos y en la
documentación del producto.
Símbolos y definiciones de seguridad
Símbolo
Significado
Aviso: punto de peligro general
Observar la documentación del producto
Símbolo
Significado
Tensión de alimentación de PUESTA EN
MARCHA / PARADA
Atención en el manejo de dispositivos de peso
elevado
Indicación de estado de espera (standby)
Peligro de choque eléctrico
Corriente continua (DC)
Advertencia: superficie caliente
Corriente alterna (AC)
Conexión a conductor de protección
Corriente continua / Corriente alterna (DC/AC)
Conexión a tierra
El aparato está protegido en su totalidad por un
aislamiento doble (reforzado)
Conexión a masa
Distintivo de la UE para baterías y
acumuladores
Más información en la sección
"Eliminación/protección del medio ambiente",
punto 1.
1171.0000.42 - 06
Page 8
Instrucciones de seguridad elementales
Símbolo
Significado
Símbolo
Aviso: Cuidado en el manejo de dispositivos
sensibles a la electrostática (ESD)
Significado
Distintivo de la UE para la eliminación por
separado de dispositivos eléctricos y
electrónicos
Más información en la sección
"Eliminación/protección del medio ambiente",
punto 2.
Advertencia: rayo láser
Más información en la sección
"Funcionamiento", punto 7.
Palabras de señal y su significado
En la documentación del producto se utilizan las siguientes palabras de señal con el fin de advertir contra
riesgos y peligros.
PELIGRO identifica un peligro inminente con riesgo elevado que
provocará muerte o lesiones graves si no se evita.
ADVERTENCIA identifica un posible peligro con riesgo medio de
provocar muerte o lesiones (graves) si no se evita.
ATENCIÓN identifica un peligro con riesgo reducido de provocar
lesiones leves o moderadas si no se evita.
AVISO indica la posibilidad de utilizar mal el producto y, como
consecuencia, dañarlo.
En la documentación del producto se emplea de forma sinónima el
término CUIDADO.
Las palabras de señal corresponden a la definición habitual para aplicaciones civiles en el área
económica europea. Pueden existir definiciones diferentes a esta definición en otras áreas económicas o
en aplicaciones militares. Por eso se deberá tener en cuenta que las palabras de señal aquí descritas
sean utilizadas siempre solamente en combinación con la correspondiente documentación del producto y
solamente en combinación con el producto correspondiente. La utilización de las palabras de señal en
combinación con productos o documentaciones que no les correspondan puede llevar a interpretaciones
equivocadas y tener por consecuencia daños en personas u objetos.
Estados operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento
El producto solamente debe ser utilizado según lo indicado por el fabricante respecto a los estados
operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento sin que se obstruya la ventilación. Si no se siguen las
indicaciones del fabricante, pueden producirse choques eléctricos, incendios y/o lesiones graves con
posible consecuencia de muerte. En todos los trabajos deberán ser tenidas en cuenta las normas
nacionales y locales de seguridad del trabajo y de prevención de accidentes.
1171.0000.42 - 06
Page 9
Instrucciones de seguridad elementales
1. Si no se convino de otra manera, es para los productos Rohde & Schwarz válido lo que sigue:
como posición de funcionamiento se define por principio la posición con el suelo de la caja para
abajo, modo de protección IP 2X, uso solamente en estancias interiores, utilización hasta 2000 m
sobre el nivel del mar, transporte hasta 4500 m sobre el nivel del mar. Se aplicará una tolerancia de
±10 % sobre el voltaje nominal y de ±5 % sobre la frecuencia nominal. Categoría de sobrecarga
eléctrica 2, índice de suciedad 2.
2. No sitúe el producto encima de superficies, vehículos, estantes o mesas, que por sus características
de peso o de estabilidad no sean aptos para él. Siga siempre las instrucciones de instalación del
fabricante cuando instale y asegure el producto en objetos o estructuras (p. ej. paredes y estantes). Si
se realiza la instalación de modo distinto al indicado en la documentación del producto, se pueden
causar lesiones o, en determinadas circunstancias, incluso la muerte.
3. No ponga el producto sobre aparatos que generen calor (p. ej. radiadores o calefactores). La
temperatura ambiente no debe superar la temperatura máxima especificada en la documentación del
producto o en la hoja de datos. En caso de sobrecalentamiento del producto, pueden producirse
choques eléctricos, incendios y/o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia de muerte.
Seguridad eléctrica
Si no se siguen (o se siguen de modo insuficiente) las indicaciones del fabricante en cuanto a seguridad
eléctrica, pueden producirse choques eléctricos, incendios y/o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia
de muerte.
1. Antes de la puesta en marcha del producto se deberá comprobar siempre que la tensión
preseleccionada en el producto coincida con la de la red de alimentación eléctrica. Si es necesario
modificar el ajuste de tensión, también se deberán cambiar en caso dado los fusibles
correspondientes del producto.
2. Los productos de la clase de protección I con alimentación móvil y enchufe individual solamente
podrán enchufarse a tomas de corriente con contacto de seguridad y con conductor de protección
conectado.
3. Queda prohibida la interrupción intencionada del conductor de protección, tanto en la toma de
corriente como en el mismo producto. La interrupción puede tener como consecuencia el riesgo de
que el producto sea fuente de choques eléctricos. Si se utilizan cables alargadores o regletas de
enchufe, deberá garantizarse la realización de un examen regular de los mismos en cuanto a su
estado técnico de seguridad.
4. Si el producto no está equipado con un interruptor para desconectarlo de la red, o bien si el
interruptor existente no resulta apropiado para la desconexión de la red, el enchufe del cable de
conexión se deberá considerar como un dispositivo de desconexión.
El dispositivo de desconexión se debe poder alcanzar fácilmente y debe estar siempre bien accesible.
Si, p. ej., el enchufe de conexión a la red es el dispositivo de desconexión, la longitud del cable de
conexión no debe superar 3 m).
Los interruptores selectores o electrónicos no son aptos para el corte de la red eléctrica. Si se
integran productos sin interruptor en bastidores o instalaciones, se deberá colocar el interruptor en el
nivel de la instalación.
5. No utilice nunca el producto si está dañado el cable de conexión a red. Compruebe regularmente el
correcto estado de los cables de conexión a red. Asegúrese, mediante las medidas de protección y
de instalación adecuadas, de que el cable de conexión a red no pueda ser dañado o de que nadie
pueda ser dañado por él, p. ej. al tropezar o por un choque eléctrico.
1171.0000.42 - 06
Page 10
Instrucciones de seguridad elementales
6. Solamente está permitido el funcionamiento en redes de alimentación TN/TT aseguradas con fusibles
de 16 A como máximo (utilización de fusibles de mayor amperaje solo previa consulta con el grupo de
empresas Rohde & Schwarz).
7. Nunca conecte el enchufe en tomas de corriente sucias o llenas de polvo. Introduzca el enchufe por
completo y fuertemente en la toma de corriente. La no observación de estas medidas puede provocar
chispas, fuego y/o lesiones.
8. No sobrecargue las tomas de corriente, los cables alargadores o las regletas de enchufe ya que esto
podría causar fuego o choques eléctricos.
9. En las mediciones en circuitos de corriente con una tensión Ueff > 30 V se deberán tomar las medidas
apropiadas para impedir cualquier peligro (p. ej. medios de medición adecuados, seguros, limitación
de tensión, corte protector, aislamiento etc.).
10. Para la conexión con dispositivos informáticos como un PC o un ordenador industrial, debe
comprobarse que éstos cumplan los estándares IEC60950-1/EN60950-1 o IEC61010-1/EN 61010-1
válidos en cada caso.
11. A menos que esté permitido expresamente, no retire nunca la tapa ni componentes de la carcasa
mientras el producto esté en servicio. Esto pone a descubierto los cables y componentes eléctricos y
puede causar lesiones, fuego o daños en el producto.
12. Si un producto se instala en un lugar fijo, se deberá primero conectar el conductor de protección fijo
con el conductor de protección del producto antes de hacer cualquier otra conexión. La instalación y
la conexión deberán ser efectuadas por un electricista especializado.
13. En el caso de dispositivos fijos que no estén provistos de fusibles, interruptor automático ni otros
mecanismos de seguridad similares, el circuito de alimentación debe estar protegido de modo que
todas las personas que puedan acceder al producto, así como el producto mismo, estén a salvo de
posibles daños.
14. Todo producto debe estar protegido contra sobretensión (debida p. ej. a una caída del rayo) mediante
los correspondientes sistemas de protección. Si no, el personal que lo utilice quedará expuesto al
peligro de choque eléctrico.
15. No debe introducirse en los orificios de la caja del aparato ningún objeto que no esté destinado a ello.
Esto puede producir cortocircuitos en el producto y/o puede causar choques eléctricos, fuego o
lesiones.
16. Salvo indicación contraria, los productos no están impermeabilizados (ver también el capítulo
"Estados operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento", punto 1). Por eso es necesario tomar las
medidas necesarias para evitar la entrada de líquidos. En caso contrario, existe peligro de choque
eléctrico para el usuario o de daños en el producto, que también pueden redundar en peligro para las
personas.
17. No utilice el producto en condiciones en las que pueda producirse o ya se hayan producido
condensaciones sobre el producto o en el interior de éste, como p. ej. al desplazarlo de un lugar frío a
otro caliente. La entrada de agua aumenta el riesgo de choque eléctrico.
18. Antes de la limpieza, desconecte por completo el producto de la alimentación de tensión (p. ej. red de
alimentación o batería). Realice la limpieza de los aparatos con un paño suave, que no se deshilache.
No utilice bajo ningún concepto productos de limpieza químicos como alcohol, acetona o diluyentes
para lacas nitrocelulósicas.
1171.0000.42 - 06
Page 11
Instrucciones de seguridad elementales
Funcionamiento
1. El uso del producto requiere instrucciones especiales y una alta concentración durante el manejo.
Debe asegurarse que las personas que manejen el producto estén a la altura de los requerimientos
necesarios en cuanto a aptitudes físicas, psíquicas y emocionales, ya que de otra manera no se
pueden excluir lesiones o daños de objetos. El empresario u operador es responsable de seleccionar
el personal usuario apto para el manejo del producto.
2. Antes de desplazar o transportar el producto, lea y tenga en cuenta el capítulo "Transporte".
3. Como con todo producto de fabricación industrial no puede quedar excluida en general la posibilidad
de que se produzcan alergias provocadas por algunos materiales empleados Tlos llamados
alérgenos (p. ej. el níquel)T. Si durante el manejo de productos Rohde & Schwarz se producen
reacciones alérgicas, como p. ej. irritaciones cutáneas, estornudos continuos, enrojecimiento de la
conjuntiva o dificultades respiratorias, debe avisarse inmediatamente a un médico para investigar las
causas y evitar cualquier molestia o daño a la salud.
4. Antes de la manipulación mecánica y/o térmica o el desmontaje del producto, debe tenerse en cuenta
imprescindiblemente el capítulo "Eliminación/protección del medio ambiente", punto 1.
5. Ciertos productos, como p. ej. las instalaciones de radiocomunicación RF, pueden a causa de su
función natural, emitir una radiación electromagnética aumentada. Deben tomarse todas las medidas
necesarias para la protección de las mujeres embarazadas. También las personas con marcapasos
pueden correr peligro a causa de la radiación electromagnética. El empresario/operador tiene la
obligación de evaluar y señalizar las áreas de trabajo en las que exista un riesgo elevado de
exposición a radiaciones.
6. Tenga en cuenta que en caso de incendio pueden desprenderse del producto sustancias tóxicas
(gases, líquidos etc.) que pueden generar daños a la salud. Por eso, en caso de incendio deben
usarse medidas adecuadas, como p. ej. máscaras antigás e indumentaria de protección.
7. Los productos con láser están provistos de indicaciones de advertencia normalizadas en función de la
clase de láser del que se trate. Los rayos láser pueden provocar daños de tipo biológico a causa de
las propiedades de su radiación y debido a su concentración extrema de potencia electromagnética.
En caso de que un producto Rohde & Schwarz contenga un producto láser (p. ej. un lector de
CD/DVD), no debe usarse ninguna otra configuración o función aparte de las descritas en la
documentación del producto, a fin de evitar lesiones (p. ej. debidas a irradiación láser).
8. Clases CEM (según CISPR 11)
Clase A: dispositivo apropiado para el uso en cualquier zona excepto en áreas residenciales y en
aquellas zonas que se encuentran conectadas a una red de suministro de baja tensión que alimenta
un edificio de viviendas.
Clase B: dispositivo apropiado para el uso en áreas residenciales y en aquellas zonas que se
encuentran conectadas a una red de suministro de baja tensión que alimenta un edificio de viviendas.
Reparación y mantenimiento
1. El producto solamente debe ser abierto por personal especializado con autorización para ello. Antes
de manipular el producto o abrirlo, es obligatorio desconectarlo de la tensión de alimentación, para
evitar toda posibilidad de choque eléctrico.
1171.0000.42 - 06
Page 12
Instrucciones de seguridad elementales
2. El ajuste, el cambio de partes, el mantenimiento y la reparación deberán ser efectuadas solamente
por electricistas autorizados por Rohde & Schwarz. Si se reponen partes con importancia para los
aspectos de seguridad (p. ej. el enchufe, los transformadores o los fusibles), solamente podrán ser
sustituidos por partes originales. Después de cada cambio de partes relevantes para la seguridad
deberá realizarse un control de seguridad (control a primera vista, control del conductor de
protección, medición de resistencia de aislamiento, medición de la corriente de fuga, control de
funcionamiento). Con esto queda garantizada la seguridad del producto.
Baterías y acumuladores o celdas
Si no se siguen (o se siguen de modo insuficiente) las indicaciones en cuanto a las baterías y
acumuladores o celdas, pueden producirse explosiones, incendios y/o lesiones graves con posible
consecuencia de muerte. El manejo de baterías y acumuladores con electrolitos alcalinos (p. ej. celdas de
litio) debe seguir el estándar EN 62133.
1. No deben desmontarse, abrirse ni triturarse las celdas.
2. Las celdas o baterías no deben someterse a calor ni fuego. Debe evitarse el almacenamiento a la luz
directa del sol. Las celdas y baterías deben mantenerse limpias y secas. Limpiar las conexiones
sucias con un paño seco y limpio.
3. Las celdas o baterías no deben cortocircuitarse. Es peligroso almacenar las celdas o baterías en
estuches o cajones en cuyo interior puedan cortocircuitarse por contacto recíproco o por contacto con
otros materiales conductores. No deben extraerse las celdas o baterías de sus embalajes originales
hasta el momento en que vayan a utilizarse.
4. Las celdas o baterías no deben someterse a impactos mecánicos fuertes indebidos.
5. En caso de falta de estanqueidad de una celda, el líquido vertido no debe entrar en contacto con la
piel ni los ojos. Si se produce contacto, lavar con agua abundante la zona afectada y avisar a un
médico.
6. En caso de cambio o recarga inadecuados, las celdas o baterías que contienen electrolitos alcalinos
(p. ej. las celdas de litio) pueden explotar. Para garantizar la seguridad del producto, las celdas o
baterías solo deben ser sustituidas por el tipo Rohde & Schwarz correspondiente (ver lista de
recambios).
7. Las baterías y celdas deben reciclarse y no deben tirarse a la basura doméstica. Las baterías o
acumuladores que contienen plomo, mercurio o cadmio deben tratarse como residuos especiales.
Respete en esta relación las normas nacionales de eliminación y reciclaje.
Transporte
1. El producto puede tener un peso elevado. Por eso es necesario desplazarlo o transportarlo con
precaución y, si es necesario, usando un sistema de elevación adecuado (p. ej. una carretilla
elevadora), a fin de evitar lesiones en la espalda u otros daños personales.
2. Las asas instaladas en los productos sirven solamente de ayuda para el transporte del producto por
personas. Por eso no está permitido utilizar las asas para la sujeción en o sobre medios de transporte
como p. ej. grúas, carretillas elevadoras de horquilla, carros etc. Es responsabilidad suya fijar los
productos de manera segura a los medios de transporte o elevación. Para evitar daños personales o
daños en el producto, siga las instrucciones de seguridad del fabricante del medio de transporte o
elevación utilizado.
1171.0000.42 - 06
Page 13
Instrucciones de seguridad elementales
3. Si se utiliza el producto dentro de un vehículo, recae de manera exclusiva en el conductor la
responsabilidad de conducir el vehículo de manera segura y adecuada. El fabricante no asumirá
ninguna responsabilidad por accidentes o colisiones. No utilice nunca el producto dentro de un
vehículo en movimiento si esto pudiera distraer al conductor. Asegure el producto dentro del vehículo
debidamente para evitar, en caso de un accidente, lesiones u otra clase de daños.
Eliminación/protección del medio ambiente
1. Los dispositivos marcados contienen una batería o un acumulador que no se debe desechar con los
residuos domésticos sin clasificar, sino que debe ser recogido por separado. La eliminación se debe
efectuar exclusivamente a través de un punto de recogida apropiado o del servicio de atención al
cliente de Rohde & Schwarz.
2. Los dispositivos eléctricos usados no se deben desechar con los residuos domésticos sin clasificar,
sino que deben ser recogidos por separado.
Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co.KG ha elaborado un concepto de eliminación de residuos y asume
plenamente los deberes de recogida y eliminación para los fabricantes dentro de la UE. Para
desechar el producto de manera respetuosa con el medio ambiente, diríjase a su servicio de atención
al cliente de Rohde & Schwarz.
3. Si se trabaja de manera mecánica y/o térmica cualquier producto o componente más allá del
funcionamiento previsto, pueden liberarse sustancias peligrosas (polvos con contenido de metales
pesados como p. ej. plomo, berilio o níquel). Por eso el producto solo debe ser desmontado por
personal especializado con formación adecuada. Un desmontaje inadecuado puede ocasionar daños
para la salud. Se deben tener en cuenta las directivas nacionales referentes a la eliminación de
residuos.
4. En caso de que durante el trato del producto se formen sustancias peligrosas o combustibles que
deban tratarse como residuos especiales (p. ej. refrigerantes o aceites de motor con intervalos de
cambio definidos), deben tenerse en cuenta las indicaciones de seguridad del fabricante de dichas
sustancias y las normas regionales de eliminación de residuos. Tenga en cuenta también en caso
necesario las indicaciones de seguridad especiales contenidas en la documentación del producto. La
eliminación incorrecta de sustancias peligrosas o combustibles puede causar daños a la salud o
daños al medio ambiente.
Se puede encontrar más información sobre la protección del medio ambiente en la página web de
Rohde & Schwarz.
1171.0000.42 - 06
Page 14
Qualitätszertifikat
Certificate of quality
Certificat de qualité
Certified Quality System
ISO 9001
Certified Environmental System
ISO 14001
Sehr geehrter Kunde,
Dear customer,
Cher client,
Sie haben sich für den Kauf eines
Rohde & Schwarz-Produktes entschieden. Sie erhalten damit ein
nach modernsten Fertigungsmethoden hergestelltes Produkt. Es
wurde nach den Regeln unseres
Qualitätsmanagementsystems
entwickelt, gefertigt und geprüft.
Das Rohde & Schwarz-Qualitätsmanagementsystem ist unter
anderem nach ISO 9001 und
ISO 14001 zertifiziert.
You have decided to buy a
Rohde & Schwarz product. You
are thus assured of receiving a
product that is manufactured
using the most modern methods
available. This product was developed, manufactured and tested in compliance with our quality
management system standards.
The Rohde & Schwarz quality
management system is certified
according to standards such as
ISO 9001 and ISO 14001.
Vous avez choisi d’acheter un
produit Rohde & Schwarz. Vous
disposez donc d’un produit
fabriqué d’après les méthodes
les plus avancées. Le développement, la fabrication et les tests
respectent nos normes de gestion qualité. Le système de gestion qualité de Rohde & Schwarz
a été homologué, entre autres,
conformément aux normes
ISO 9001 et ISO 14001.
Environmental commitment
❙
❙
❙
Energie-effiziente,
RoHS-konforme Produkte
Kontinuierliche
Weiterentwicklung nachhaltiger
Umweltkonzepte
ISO 14001-zertifiziertes
Umweltmanagementsystem
Engagement écologique
❙
❙
❙
Energy-efficient products
Continuous improvement in
environmental sustainability
ISO 14001-certified
environmental management
system
❙
❙
Produits à efficience
énergétique
Amélioration continue de la
durabilité environnementale
Système de gestion de
l’environnement certifié selon
ISO 14001
1171020011
❙
1171.0200.11 V 05.00
Der Umwelt verpflichtet
EC Certificate of Conformity
Certificate No.: 2009-72
This is to certify that:
Equipment type
Stock No.
Designation
SMB100A
1406.6000.xx
Signal Generator
complies with the provisions of the Directive of the Council of the European Union on the
approximation of the laws of the Member States
- relating to electrical equipment for use within defined voltage limits
(2006/95/EC)
- relating to electromagnetic compatibility
(2004/108/EC)
Conformity is proven by compliance with the following standards:
EN 61010-1: 2001
EN 61326-1: 2006
EN 61326-2-1: 2006
EN 55011: 2007 + A2: 2007
EN 61000-3-2: 2006
EN 61000-3-3: 1995 + A1: 2001 + A2: 2005
For the assessment of electromagnetic compatibility, the limits of radio interference for Class
B equipment as well as the immunity to interference for operation in industry have been used
as a basis.
ROHDE & SCHWARZ GmbH & Co. KG
Mühldorfstr. 15, D-81671 München
Munich, 2009-12-15
1406.6000.xx
Central Quality Management MF-QZ / Radde
CE
E-1
Customer Support
Technical support – where and when you need it
For quick, expert help with any Rohde & Schwarz equipment, contact one of our Customer Support
Centers. A team of highly qualified engineers provides telephone support and will work with you to find a
solution to your query on any aspect of the operation, programming or applications of Rohde & Schwarz
equipment.
Up-to-date information and upgrades
To keep your instrument up-to-date and to be informed about new application notes related to your
instrument, please send an e-mail to the Customer Support Center stating your instrument and your wish.
We will take care that you will get the right information.
Europe, Africa, Middle East
Phone +49 89 4129 12345
customersupport@rohde-schwarz.com
North America
Phone 1-888-TEST-RSA (1-888-837-8772)
customer.support@rsa.rohde-schwarz.com
Latin America
Phone +1-410-910-7988
customersupport.la@rohde-schwarz.com
Asia/Pacific
Phone +65 65 13 04 88
customersupport.asia@rohde-schwarz.com
China
Phone +86-800-810-8228 /
+86-400-650-5896
customersupport.china@rohde-schwarz.com
1171.0200.22-06.00
R&S®SMB100A
Contents
Contents
1 Preface..................................................................................................13
1.1
Documentation Overview...........................................................................................13
1.2
Typographical Conventions.......................................................................................14
2 Preparing for Use.................................................................................15
2.1
Front Panel Tour.........................................................................................................15
2.1.1
Utility Keys....................................................................................................................16
2.1.2
Standby LEDs and Standby Key...................................................................................16
2.1.3
Display..........................................................................................................................17
2.1.4
Setup Keys....................................................................................................................17
2.1.4.1
Keys for Setting Paramters...........................................................................................17
2.1.4.2
Display Keys.................................................................................................................18
2.1.5
Keypad for data entry....................................................................................................18
2.1.6
Rotary Knob and Navigation Keys................................................................................19
2.1.7
Front Panel Connectors................................................................................................20
2.2
Rear Panel Tour...........................................................................................................21
2.2.1
Description of the Connectors.......................................................................................22
2.3
Putting into Operation................................................................................................24
2.3.1
Unpacking and Checking the Instrument......................................................................25
2.3.2
Placing or Mounting the Instrument..............................................................................26
2.3.3
Connecting the Instrument to the AC Supply................................................................27
2.3.4
Starting the Instrument..................................................................................................27
2.3.4.1
Standby and Ready state..............................................................................................28
2.3.4.2
Start Display and Booting..............................................................................................28
2.3.4.3
Function Check.............................................................................................................28
2.3.4.4
Default Settings.............................................................................................................29
2.3.5
Shutting Down the Instrument.......................................................................................30
2.3.6
Power Fuses.................................................................................................................30
2.4
Connecting External Accessories.............................................................................31
2.4.1
Connecting USB Devices..............................................................................................31
2.5
Linux Operating System.............................................................................................32
2.6
Setting Up a Network (LAN) Connection...................................................................33
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
3
R&S®SMB100A
Contents
2.6.1
Connecting the Instrument to the Network....................................................................34
2.6.2
Assigning the IP Address..............................................................................................34
2.6.3
Using Computer Names................................................................................................36
2.7
Remote Access via an External Controller...............................................................36
2.7.1
Using a Web Browser for Remote Access....................................................................37
2.7.2
Remote Access via Ultr@VNC......................................................................................38
3 Getting Started.....................................................................................44
3.1
Brief Introduction to the Instrument's Concept.......................................................44
3.2
Application Field of the Instrument...........................................................................46
3.3
Description of Individual Diagram Blocks................................................................46
3.4
Example of Setup........................................................................................................48
4 Manual Operation.................................................................................53
4.1
Key Features................................................................................................................53
4.2
Display.........................................................................................................................56
4.2.1
Settings Displayed in the Header Section.....................................................................56
4.2.2
Status Information and Messages.................................................................................57
4.2.2.1
Status Information.........................................................................................................57
4.2.2.2
Messages......................................................................................................................57
4.2.2.3
Volatile messages.........................................................................................................57
4.2.2.4
Permanent Messages...................................................................................................58
4.2.3
Info Window..................................................................................................................58
4.2.4
Block Diagram ..............................................................................................................59
4.2.4.1
Function Blocks in the Block Diagram...........................................................................59
4.2.4.2
Signal Flow and Input/Output Symbols in the Block Diagram.......................................60
4.2.5
Structure of the Dialogs.................................................................................................60
4.3
Accessing Dialogs......................................................................................................61
4.4
Setting Parameters.....................................................................................................62
4.4.1
Working with the Cursor................................................................................................63
4.4.2
Selecting a Control Element..........................................................................................63
4.4.3
Switching Parameters On/Off........................................................................................63
4.4.4
Entering a Value............................................................................................................64
4.4.5
Working with Units .......................................................................................................65
4.4.6
Selecting a Value from a List........................................................................................66
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
4
R&S®SMB100A
Contents
4.4.7
Terminating Entries with Confirmation..........................................................................67
4.4.8
Restoring the Previous Value........................................................................................67
4.5
Editors..........................................................................................................................68
4.5.1
Working with List Editor.................................................................................................68
4.6
How to Use the Help System......................................................................................70
4.7
File Management.........................................................................................................71
4.7.1
File Select Dialog..........................................................................................................72
4.7.2
File Manager.................................................................................................................73
4.7.2.1
Extensions for User Files..............................................................................................74
4.8
Legend of Front-Panel Controls................................................................................75
4.8.1
Front Panel Key Emulation...........................................................................................76
5 Instrument Function............................................................................78
5.1
Overview of Instrument Functions............................................................................78
5.2
General Instrument Settings......................................................................................79
5.2.1
Overview of General Instrument Settings.....................................................................79
5.2.2
Default Instrument Settings - Preset Key......................................................................80
5.2.3
General Configuration of Instrument - Setup Key.........................................................81
5.2.3.1
Internal Adjustments.....................................................................................................81
5.2.3.2
Hardware Config...........................................................................................................83
5.2.3.3
Software / Options.........................................................................................................84
5.2.3.4
Manage License Keys...................................................................................................85
5.2.3.5
Gui Update....................................................................................................................86
5.2.3.6
NRP-Z Info/Update........................................................................................................87
5.2.3.7
Selftest..........................................................................................................................88
5.2.3.8
Check Front Panel........................................................................................................88
5.2.3.9
Date and Time ..............................................................................................................89
5.2.3.10
Network Settings ..........................................................................................................89
5.2.3.11
Display/Keyboard Settings............................................................................................91
5.2.3.12
Remote Channel Settings.............................................................................................92
5.2.3.13
Protection......................................................................................................................95
5.2.3.14
Security.........................................................................................................................96
5.2.3.15
Save/Recall.................................................................................................................100
5.2.3.16
Factory Preset.............................................................................................................100
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
5
R&S®SMB100A
Contents
5.2.3.17
Help.............................................................................................................................101
5.2.4
Switching to Manual Control - Local Key....................................................................101
5.2.5
Generating a Hard Copy of the Display......................................................................102
5.2.5.1
Hardcopy Dialog..........................................................................................................102
5.2.5.2
Hardcopy Options.......................................................................................................103
5.2.6
Messages - Info Key...................................................................................................105
5.2.7
Help System - Help Key..............................................................................................105
5.2.8
Storing and Loading Instrument Data - File Key.........................................................106
5.2.8.1
File Menu....................................................................................................................107
5.2.8.2
Storing Instrument Settings.........................................................................................107
5.2.8.3
Loading Instrument Settings.......................................................................................108
5.2.8.4
File Manager...............................................................................................................110
5.3
RF Block.....................................................................................................................112
5.3.1
Overview of RF Signal................................................................................................112
5.3.1.1
RF Output....................................................................................................................112
5.3.1.2
RF Signal Modes and Characteristics.........................................................................113
5.3.2
RF Frequency.............................................................................................................113
5.3.2.1
RF Frequency vs. RF Output Frequency....................................................................114
5.3.2.2
Setting the RF Frequency...........................................................................................114
5.3.2.3
RF Frequency Dialog..................................................................................................115
5.3.3
Phase..........................................................................................................................116
5.3.3.1
Phase Settings............................................................................................................116
5.3.4
Reference Oscillator....................................................................................................117
5.3.4.1
Reference Oscillator Dialog........................................................................................117
5.3.5
RF Level......................................................................................................................119
5.3.5.1
Overview of RF Level..................................................................................................119
5.3.5.2
RF Level Dialog...........................................................................................................120
5.3.5.3
Power-On/EMF Settings.............................................................................................125
5.3.5.4
Automatic Level Control - ALC....................................................................................126
5.3.5.5
NRP-Z Level Control...................................................................................................128
5.3.5.6
User Correction...........................................................................................................132
5.3.6
RF Measurement........................................................................................................139
5.3.6.1
NRP-Z Power Viewer..................................................................................................139
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
6
R&S®SMB100A
Contents
5.3.7
RF Sweep and List Mode............................................................................................144
5.3.7.1
Overview.....................................................................................................................144
5.3.7.2
RF Frequency Sweep.................................................................................................145
5.3.7.3
RF Level Sweep..........................................................................................................152
5.3.7.4
List Mode.....................................................................................................................157
5.4
Modulation.................................................................................................................165
5.4.1
Overview of Modulation...............................................................................................165
5.4.1.1
Enabling/Disabling Analog Modulations using the MOD On/Off Key..........................166
5.4.1.2
Modulation Sources....................................................................................................166
5.4.2
Amplitude Modulation (AM).........................................................................................167
5.4.2.1
Amplitude Modulation Settings....................................................................................167
5.4.3
Frequency Modulation (FM)........................................................................................170
5.4.3.1
Frequency Modulation Settings...................................................................................170
5.4.4
Phase Modulation (PhiM)............................................................................................173
5.4.4.1
Phase Modulation Menu.............................................................................................173
5.4.5
Pulse Modulation (PM)................................................................................................176
5.4.5.1
Pulse Modulation Settings...........................................................................................176
5.4.6
Stereo Modulation.......................................................................................................178
5.4.6.1
Stereo Modulation Dialog............................................................................................179
5.5
Modulation Generator and LF Output.....................................................................184
5.5.1
Overview of LF Generator...........................................................................................184
5.5.2
LF Output....................................................................................................................185
5.5.2.1
LF Output Dialog.........................................................................................................185
5.5.3
LF Frequency Sweep..................................................................................................186
5.5.4
Pulse Generator..........................................................................................................191
5.5.4.1
Pulse Generator Settings............................................................................................192
5.5.4.2
Pulse Train Generation...............................................................................................194
6 Remote Control Basics......................................................................199
6.1
Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols..............................................................199
6.1.1
VISA Libraries.............................................................................................................200
6.1.2
Messages....................................................................................................................200
6.1.3
LAN Interface..............................................................................................................201
6.1.3.1
HiSLIP Protocol...........................................................................................................202
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
7
R&S®SMB100A
Contents
6.1.3.2
VXI-11 Protocol...........................................................................................................203
6.1.3.3
Socket Communication...............................................................................................203
6.1.3.4
LAN Interface Messages.............................................................................................203
6.1.4
USB Interface..............................................................................................................204
6.1.5
Serial Interface............................................................................................................204
6.1.6
GPIB Interface (IEC/IEEE Bus Interface)....................................................................205
6.1.6.1
GPIB Interface Messages...........................................................................................205
6.1.6.2
GPIB Instrument Address...........................................................................................206
6.2
Starting a Remote Control Session.........................................................................207
6.2.1
Switching to Remote Control.......................................................................................207
6.2.2
Returning to Manual Operation...................................................................................208
6.2.3
Examples....................................................................................................................208
6.2.3.1
Remote Control over GPIB.........................................................................................208
6.2.3.2
Remote Control over LAN using VXI-11 Protocol.......................................................209
6.2.3.3
Remote Control over LAN using Socket Communication...........................................213
6.3
SCPI Command Structure........................................................................................219
6.3.1
Syntax for Common Commands.................................................................................219
6.3.2
Syntax for Device-Specific Commands.......................................................................220
6.3.3
SCPI Parameters........................................................................................................222
6.3.4
Overview of Syntax Elements.....................................................................................225
6.3.5
Structure of a command line.......................................................................................226
6.3.6
Responses to Queries.................................................................................................227
6.4
Command Sequence and Synchronization............................................................227
6.4.1
Preventing Overlapping Execution..............................................................................228
6.5
Status Reporting System.........................................................................................230
6.5.1
Hierarchy of status registers.......................................................................................230
6.5.2
Structure of a SCPI Status Register............................................................................232
6.5.3
Contents of the Status Registers................................................................................233
6.5.3.1
Status Byte (STB) and Service Request Enable Register (SRE)................................233
6.5.3.2
IST Flag and Parallel Poll Enable Register (PPE)......................................................234
6.5.4
Event Status Register (ESR) and Event Status Enable Register (ESE).....................234
6.5.5
Application of the Status Reporting System................................................................235
6.5.5.1
Service Request..........................................................................................................236
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
8
R&S®SMB100A
Contents
6.5.5.2
Serial Poll....................................................................................................................236
6.5.5.3
Parallel Poll.................................................................................................................236
6.5.5.4
Query of an instrument status.....................................................................................237
6.5.5.5
Error Queue................................................................................................................237
6.5.6
Reset Values of the Status Reporting System............................................................237
6.6
General Programming Recommendations.............................................................238
7 Remote Control Commands..............................................................240
7.1
Common Commands................................................................................................240
7.2
Preset Commands.....................................................................................................245
7.3
CALibration Subsystem...........................................................................................246
7.4
DIAGnostic Subsystem............................................................................................249
7.5
DISPlay Subsystem...................................................................................................250
7.6
FORMat Subsystem..................................................................................................253
7.7
HCOPy Subsystem....................................................................................................254
7.8
KBOard Subsystem..................................................................................................261
7.9
MMEMory Subsystem...............................................................................................262
7.9.1
File Naming Conventions............................................................................................263
7.9.2
Extensions for User Files............................................................................................263
7.9.3
Examples....................................................................................................................264
7.9.4
Remote Control Commands........................................................................................265
7.10
OUTPut Subsystem...................................................................................................271
7.11
SENSe, READ and INITiate Subsystems.................................................................274
7.12
SOURce Subsystem..................................................................................................283
7.12.1
SOURce:AM Subsystem.............................................................................................283
7.12.2
SOURce:CORRection Subsystem..............................................................................286
7.12.3
SOURce:FM Subsystem.............................................................................................295
7.12.4
SOURce:FREQuency Subsystem...............................................................................298
7.12.5
SOURce:INPut Subsystem.........................................................................................305
7.12.6
SOURce:LFOutput Subsystem...................................................................................306
7.12.7
SOURce:LIST Subsystem...........................................................................................315
7.12.8
SOURce:MODulation Subsystem...............................................................................328
7.12.9
SOURce:PGEN Subsystem........................................................................................328
7.12.10
SOURce:PHASe Subsystem......................................................................................329
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
9
R&S®SMB100A
Contents
7.12.11
SOURce:PM Subsystem.............................................................................................330
7.12.12
SOURce:POWer Subsystem......................................................................................333
7.12.13
SOURce:PULM Subsystem........................................................................................344
7.12.14
SOURce:ROSCillator Subsystem...............................................................................359
7.12.15
SOURce:STEReo Subsystem.....................................................................................362
7.12.16
SOURce:SWEep Subsystem......................................................................................371
7.13
STATus Subsystem..................................................................................................381
7.14
SYSTem Subsystem.................................................................................................385
7.15
TEST Subsystem.......................................................................................................398
7.16
TRIGger Subsystem..................................................................................................400
7.17
UNIT Subsystem........................................................................................................404
7.18
Direct Commands for the Stereo/RDS Coder Option R&S SMB-B5.....................405
7.18.1
Remote-Control Commands.......................................................................................406
7.18.2
Examples....................................................................................................................426
7.18.2.1
Alternative Frequency Lists.........................................................................................426
7.18.2.2
Enhanced Other Networks..........................................................................................427
7.18.2.3
Free Format Groups (FFGs).......................................................................................428
7.18.2.4
Transparent-Mode.......................................................................................................429
8 Maintenance.......................................................................................430
8.1
Storing and Packing.................................................................................................430
9 Error Messages..................................................................................431
9.1
Status Information....................................................................................................431
9.1.1
Status information displayed between the frequency and level fields.........................431
9.1.2
Status information displayed to the left of the Info line................................................432
9.1.3
Status information displayed in the Info line................................................................433
9.2
Error Messages.........................................................................................................434
9.2.1
Volatile messages.......................................................................................................434
9.2.2
Permanent messages.................................................................................................434
9.3
SCPI-Error Messages................................................................................................435
9.4
Device-Specific Error Messages..............................................................................435
A Hardware Interfaces...........................................................................438
A.1
GPIB Bus Interface....................................................................................................438
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
10
R&S®SMB100A
Contents
List of Commands..............................................................................440
Index....................................................................................................449
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
11
R&S®SMB100A
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
Contents
12
R&S®SMB100A
Preface
Documentation Overview
1 Preface
1.1 Documentation Overview
The user documentation for the R&S SMB consists of the following parts:
●
Online Help system on the instrument,
●
"Quick Start Guide" printed manual,
●
Documentation CD-ROM with:
– Online help system (*.chm) as a standalone help,
–
Operating Manual,
–
Service Manual,
–
Data sheet and specifications,
–
Links to useful sites on the R&S internet.
Online Help
The Online Help is embedded in the instrument's firmware. It offers quick, context-sensitive access to the complete information needed for operation and programming. The
online help contains help on operating the R&S SMB and all available options.
Quick Start Guide
This manual is delivered with the instrument in printed form and in PDF format on the
Documentation CD-ROM. It provides the information needed to set up and start working
with the instrument. Basic operations and an example of setup are described. The manual
includes also general information, e.g., Safety Instructions.
Operating Manual
The Operating Manual is a supplement to the Quick Start Guide. The manual is available
in PDF format - in printable form - on the Documentation CD-ROM delivered with the
instrument. In the Operating Manual, all instrument functions are described in detail. Furthermore, it provides an introduction to remote control and a complete description of the
remote control commands with programming examples. Information on maintenance,
instrument interfaces and error messages is also given. The manual can also be orderd
in printed form (see ordering information in the data sheet).
Service Manual
This Service Manual is available in PDF format - in printable form - on the Documentation
CD-ROM delivered with the instrument. It describes how to check compliance with rated
specifications, on instrument function, repair, troubleshooting and fault elimination. It
contains all information required for repairing the instrument by the replacement of modules.
This manual can also be orderd in printed form (see ordering information in the data
sheet).
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
13
R&S®SMB100A
Preface
Typographical Conventions
Release Notes
The release notes describe new and modified functions, eliminated problems, and last
minute changes to the documentation. The corresponding firmware version is indicated
on the title page of the release notes. The current release notes are provided in the
Internet.
1.2 Typographical Conventions
The following text markers are used throughout this documentation:
Convention
Description
"Graphical user interface elements"
All names of graphical user interface elements on the screen, such as dialog boxes, menus, options, buttons, and softkeys are enclosed by quotation marks.
KEYS
Key names are written in capital letters.
File names, commands,
program code
File names, commands, coding samples and screen output are distinguished by their font.
Input
Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics.
​Links
Links that you can click are displayed in blue font.
"References"
References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quotation
marks.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
14
R&S®SMB100A
Preparing for Use
Front Panel Tour
2 Preparing for Use
The following topics will help you to get familiar with the instrument and perform the first
steps:
●
​Front Panel Tour
●
​Rear Panel Tour
●
​Putting into Operation
This section explains the control elements and connectors of the Signal Generator R&S
SMB with the aid of the front and rear views and describes how to put the instrument into
operation. It also describes the connection of peripherals such as printer, keyboard or
mouse. Specifications of interfaces can be found in the data sheet.
The ​chapter 3, "Getting Started", on page 44 of this manual provides an overview of
the generator functions and introduces the operating concept. Detailed operating instructions and an overview of menus follow in ​chapter 4, "Manual Operation", on page 53.
For all reference information concerning manual and remote control of the instrument
refer to the online help system or its printed/printable version. A more detailed description
of the hardware connectors and interfaces is also part of the help system.
2.1 Front Panel Tour
The front panel of the R&S Signal Generator consists of the VGA display, some utility
keys (left side) and the hardkey area with connectors and control interfaces (right side).
The subsequent sections provide brief explanations on the controls and connectors, the
hardkey area and the front panel.
Fig. 2-1: Front panel view
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
15
R&S®SMB100A
Preparing for Use
Front Panel Tour
2.1.1 Utility Keys
The keys to the left of the display cause the R&S SMB to return to a definite instrument
state and provide information on the instrument and assistance.
For more information refer to chapter "Instrument Settings".
PRESET
Sets the instrument to a defined state (see ​chapter 2.3.4.4, "Default Settings",
on page 29).
LOCAL
Switches from remote control to local (manual) control.
SETUP
Opens the "Setup" dialog for configuring presettings.
For more information, see ​chapter 5.2.3, "General Configuration of Instrument - Setup
Key", on page 81.
FILE
Activates the menu for storing or loading files (see ​chapter 4.7, "File Management",
on page 71).
INFO
Displays status messages, error messages and warnings.
WINBAR
Toggles between the diagram and active menus.
HELP
Displays context-sensitive help text.
2.1.2 Standby LEDs and Standby Key
The standby LEDs and the ON/STANDBY key are located in the bottom left corner of the
front panel.
The ON/STANDBY key toggles the instrument between standby and ready state (indicated by the standby LEDs).
The standby LEDs indicate the instrument states as follow:
●
the green LED (left) is on when the instrument is ready for operation,
●
the yellow LED (right) is on in the standby mode.
See also ​chapter 2.3.4.1, "Standby and Ready state", on page 28.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
16
R&S®SMB100A
Preparing for Use
Front Panel Tour
2.1.3 Display
The display clearly shows all main settings and signal generator states.
The display is divided into the following sections:
●
●
Frequency and level display with info line
– Frequency and level settings containing offset.
–
Status messages
–
Brief error messages.
To access an window with detailed information for a message, use the INFO key.
Block diagram
The block diagram shows the current configuration and the signal flow in the generator with the aid of function blocks containing an on/off switch. Selecting a function
block opens a list of associated setting menus. Active menus, info windows and
graphs are displayed on top of the block diagram. The block diagram can be displayed
in the foreground anytime with the ​DIAGRAM key.
For detailed information, see ​chapter 4.2, "Display", on page 56.
2.1.4 Setup Keys
The keys to the right of the display set parameters, select views and control the windows.
2.1.4.1
Keys for Setting Paramters
These keys provide direct access to the settings in the header of the instrument for fast
setting the RF signal.
For more information refer to chapter "Instrument Functions".
FREQ
Activates frequency entry.
LEVEL
Activates level entry.
ON/OFF TOGGLE
● Switches highlighted elements or a function block on and off.
● Switches between two or more settings, e.g. items of selection lists. At the end of a
list, the cursor is set on the first entry again.
BACKSPACE
Deletes the character to the left of the cursor.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
17
R&S®SMB100A
Preparing for Use
Front Panel Tour
2.1.4.2
Display Keys
The keys assigned right to rotary knob arrange different windows on the display, and turn
the RF signal and the modulation on and off.
DIAGRAM
Brings the block diagram to the foreground. Active menus are minimized.
ESC
The function of this key depends on the current cursor position.
● Calls the next higher selection level.
● Closes the open window without accepting new entries; the old value or parameter
is retained.
● In dialog boxes that contain a "Cancel" button it activates that button.
● Closes all kinds of dialog boxes, if the edit mode is not active.
● Quits the edit mode, if the edit mode is active.
● Switches between different entry fields of a menu.
● Shifts the entry cursor from the header display to the previously active menu, or to
the previously highlighted block in the block diagram if no menu is active.
MOD ON/OFF
Switches the modulations on and off.
"MOD OFF" is displayed in the info line of the header next to the "Level" field.
RF ON/OFF
Switches the RF signal on and off.
"RF OFF" is displayed in the header next to the "Frequency" field.
2.1.5 Keypad for data entry
The keys in the data entry keypad are used to enter alphanumeric data and units.
Data entry keys are only enabled while the cursor is placed on a data input field in a
dialog. Their function depends on the data type of the input field.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
18
R&S®SMB100A
Preparing for Use
Front Panel Tour
Keys
Description
0...9/abc
Enters the corresponding numbers (in numeric input fields) or characters (character input
fields).
.
Inserts a decimal point (numeric input fields) or dot (character input fields) at the cursor position. Multiple decimal points are not allowed.
Unit keys
Selects a unit and thus determine the absolute value, or changes the unit, i.e. trigger a recalculation without changing the absolute value. The function depends on the time at which the
UNIT key is used during parameter entry (see ​chapter 4.4.5, "Working with Units ",
on page 65).
For unit-free values, the X1 key is equivalent to ENTER. It confirms the previous entry and
deactivates the input field.
_
Adds a blank in a character input field.
*... #
Enters special characters. Toggles through the available characters if the key is pressed several times in a row.
A <-> a
Toggles between uppercase and lowercase characters.
A, B, C, D, E, Enters hexadecimal values. The letters assigned to the keys are automatically active when
F
an entry field with a hexadecimal value is active.
ENTER
Pressing the rotary knob has the same effect.
●
●
●
●
●
●
Concludes the entry of dimensionless entries. For other entries, this key can be used
instead of the default unit key. The new value is accepted.
Confirms ("OK") and closes open input windows.
In a dialog box, selects the default or focused button.
In a dialog box, activates the edit mode for the focused area, if available.
In a dialog box, activates or deactivates the selected option of the focused area, if
the edit mode is active.
Calls the next menu level.
2.1.6 Rotary Knob and Navigation Keys
The rotary knob and the arrow keys are alternative control elements for data variation
and navigation in the graphical user interface.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
19
R&S®SMB100A
Preparing for Use
Front Panel Tour
ROTARY KNOB
The rotary knob has several functions:
● Increases (clockwise direction) or decreases (counter-clockwise direction) numeric
values at a defined step width in editing mode
● Moves the cursor, e.g. to a function block in the block diagram
● Scrolls within lists, tables or tree views
● Acts like the ENTER key, when it is pressed.
● Shifts the selection bar within focused areas (e.g. lists), if the edit mode is activated.
Note: Turning or pressing the rotary knob is equivalent to pressing the UP and DOWN
keys or the ENTER key in the keypad.
NAVIGATION KEYS
The navigation keys consist of 4 arrow keys which are used for navigation, alternatively
to the rotary knob.
UP/ DOWN
KEYS
LEFT/ RIGHT
KEYS
The up and down arrow keys do the following:
●
In a numeric edit dialog box, increase or decrease the instrument
parameter.
●
In a list, table, window or dialog box, scroll vertically.
The left and right arrow keys do the following:
●
In an alphanumeric edit dialog box, move the cursor forward and
back.
●
In a list, table, window or dialog box, scroll horizontally.
2.1.7 Front Panel Connectors
The RF and LF output connectors and a connector for external modulation signals are
located on the front panel.
MOD EXT
Input for external modulation signals.
LF
Output for internal LF modulation generator signal.
See also data sheet and ​chapter 5.5.1, "Overview of LF Generator", on page 184, ​
chapter 5.5.2, "LF Output", on page 185.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
20
R&S®SMB100A
Preparing for Use
Rear Panel Tour
RF 50 Ohm
Output for RF signal.
Depending on the equipped frequency option, the RF output connectors vary.
RF Option
Microwave Option
Frequency options
Connector
type
Frequency options
Connector
type
R&S SMB- B101
N female
R&S SMB-B112/-112L
PC 3.5 mm
R&S SMB-B102
R&S SMB-B120/-B120L
R&S SMB-B103
R&S SMB-B140/-140L
PC 2.92 mm
R&S SMB-B106
NOTICE! Maximum Input Levels. Do not overload the RF output. The maximum permissible back-feed is specified in the data sheet.
2.2 Rear Panel Tour
This section gives an overview of connectors on the rear panel of the instrument. Each
connector is briefly described and a reference is given to the chapters containing detailed
information. For technical data of the connectors refer to the data sheet.
Fig. 2-2: Rear panel view
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
21
R&S®SMB100A
Preparing for Use
Rear Panel Tour
2.2.1 Description of the Connectors
FUSES
The R&S SMB is fully fused by two fuses IEC60127-T3.15H/250 V.
The fuses are accommodated in the fuse holders next to the power connector. Use only
fuses of the mentioned type.
AC SUPPLY AND POWER SWITCH
When the R&S SMB is connected to the AC supply, it automatically sets itself to the
correct range for the applied voltage (range: see type label). There is no need to set the
voltage manually or change fuses.
The power switch can be set to two positions:
● 0
The instrument is disconnected from the mains.
● I
The instrument is power-supplied. It is either ready for operation (STANDBY) or in
operating mode, depending on the position of the ON/STANDBY switch on the instrument front.
See also data sheet and ​chapter 2.3.3, "Connecting the Instrument to the AC Supply",
on page 27.
USB IN
USB (universal serial bus) interface of type B (device USB).
This interface can be used for remote control of the instrument.
USB CONNECTORS TYPE A
USB (universal serial bus) interfaces of type A (host USB).
●
●
●
Connection of peripherals such as mouse, keyboard, etc.
Connection of memory stick for file transmission
Firmware update
See also ​chapter 2.4.1, "Connecting USB Devices", on page 31.
LAN CONNECTOR
Ethernet interface
● For integrating signal generators in a network
● Remote control of signal generator
● Remote access to the signal generator
● Firmware update
See also:
● ​chapter 2.6, "Setting Up a Network (LAN) Connection", on page 33
● ​chapter 6.1.3, "LAN Interface", on page 201
IEC 625/IEEE 488
IEC-bus (IEEE 488) interface for remote control of the instrument.
See also ​chapter A.1, "GPIB Bus Interface", on page 438 and ​chapter 6.1.6, "GPIB
Interface (IEC/IEEE Bus Interface)", on page 205.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
22
R&S®SMB100A
Preparing for Use
Rear Panel Tour
Note: In order to avoid electromagnetic interference (EMI) caused by open lines, always
terminate any connected IEC-bus cable with an instrument or a controller.
STEREO R/L
Inputs for analog stereo modulation signals. External modulation sources or the internal
LF generator can be used (stereo modulation is available with option R&S SMB-B5).
See also ​chapter 5.4.6, "Stereo Modulation", on page 178.
S/P DIF
Input for digital stereo signals (stereo modulation is available with option R&S SMB-B5).
See also ​chapter 5.4.6, "Stereo Modulation", on page 178.
SIGNAL VALID
Output of valid signal. This signal marks the valid signal times (valid level and frequency
indication). The signal is generated automatically.
INSTR TRIG
Input for external trigger for sweeps and list mode.
See also ​chapter 5.3.7.4, "List Mode", on page 157 and ​chapter 5.3.7.1, "Overview",
on page 144.
PULSE VIDEO
Output of internal pulse generator signal or external pulse signal fed in via the PULSE
EXT connector (video signal).
See also​chapter 5.4.5, "Pulse Modulation (PM)", on page 176 .
PULSE EXT
Input of external pulse signal or input of external trigger/gate signal for internal pulse
generator.
See also​chapter 5.4.5, "Pulse Modulation (PM)", on page 176 .
REF OUT
Output of internal reference signal.
See also ​chapter 5.3.4, "Reference Oscillator", on page 117.
REF IN
Input for external reference signal.
See also ​chapter 5.3.4, "Reference Oscillator", on page 117.
OCXO
● Oven-controlled reference oscillator (option R&S SMB-B1)
or
● high performance oven-controlled reference oscillator (option R&S SMB-B1H)
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
23
R&S®SMB100A
Preparing for Use
Putting into Operation
The OCXO generates a very precise 10 MHz reference signal. It needs some minutes of
warm-up time to reach its nominal frequency.
Refer also to the data sheet for detailed information.
2.3 Putting into Operation
This section describes the basic steps to be taken when setting up the R&S SMB for the
first time.
Risk of injury and instrument damage
The instrument must be used in an appropriate manner to prevent electric shock, fire,
personal injury, or damage.
●
Do not open the instrument casing.
●
Read and observe the "Basic Safety Instructions" at the beginning of this manual or
on the documentation CD-ROM, in addition to the safety instructions in the following
sections. Notice that the data sheet may specify additional operating conditions.
Risk of instrument damage
Note that the general safety instructions also contain information on operating conditions
that will prevent damage to the instrument. The instrument's data sheet may contain
additional operating conditions.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
24
R&S®SMB100A
Preparing for Use
Putting into Operation
Risk of instrument damage during operation
An unsuitable operating site or test setup can cause damage to the instrument and to
connected devices. Ensure the following operating conditions before you switch on the
instrument:
●
All fan openings are unobstructed and the airflow perforations are unimpeded. The
minimum distance from the wall is 10 cm.
●
The instrument is dry and shows no sign of condensation.
●
The instrument is positioned as described in the following sections.
●
The ambient temperature does not exceed the range specified in the data sheet.
●
Signal levels at the input connectors are all within the specified ranges.
●
Signal outputs are correctly connected and are not overloaded.
Risk of electrostatic discharge
Protect the work area against electrostatic discharge to avoid damage to electronic components in the modules. For details, refer to the safety instructions at the beginning of
this manual.
EMI impact on measurement results
Electromagnetic interference (EMI) can affect the measurement results. To avoid any
impact, make sure that the following conditions are met:
●
Use suitable double-shielded cables.
●
Do not use USB connecting cables exceeding 1 m in length.
●
Use only USB devices that remain within the permissible EMI limits.
●
Always terminate any connected IEC-bus cables with an instrument or controller.
Outputs and lines have to be terminated properly with 50 Ohms.
For digital interfaces only the cable R&S SMB-Z6 is permitted for connection. The associated cable is available under part number 1415.0201.02.
2.3.1 Unpacking and Checking the Instrument
To remove the instrument from its packaging and check the equipment for completeness
proceed as follows:
1. Pull off the polyethylene protection pads from the instrument's rear feet and then
carefully remove the pads from the instrument handles at the front.
2. Pull off the corrugated cardboard cover that protects the rear of the instrument.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
25
R&S®SMB100A
Preparing for Use
Putting into Operation
3. Carefully unthread the corrugated cardboard cover at the front that protects the
instrument handles and remove it.
4. Check the equipment for completeness using the delivery note and the accessory
lists for the various items.
5. Check the instrument for any damage. If there is damage, immediately contact the
carrier who delivered the instrument. Make sure not to discard the box and packing
material.
Packing material
Retain the original packing material. If the instrument needs to be transported or shipped
at a later date, you can use the material to protect the control elements and connectors.
2.3.2 Placing or Mounting the Instrument
The R&S SMB is designed for use under laboratory conditions, either on a bench top or
in a rack using a rack adapter kit (order number see data sheet).
Bench Top Operation
If the R&S SMB is operated on a bench top, the surface should be flat. The instrument
can be used in horizontal position, standing on its feet, or with the support feet on the
bottom extended.
Risk of injury at the operating site
The feet may fold in if they are not folded out completely or if the instrument is shifted.
This may cause damage or injury.
●
Fold the feet completely in or completely out to ensure stability of the instrument.
Never shift the instrument when the feet are folded out.
●
When the feet are folded out, do not work under the instrument or place anything
underneath.
●
The feet can break if they are overloaded. The overall load on the folded-out feet
must not exceed 500 N.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
26
R&S®SMB100A
Preparing for Use
Putting into Operation
Rackmounting
The R&S SMB can be installed in a rack using a rack adapter kit (Order No. see data
sheet). The installation instructions are part of the adapter kit.
Risk of instrument damage in a rack
An insufficient airflow can cause the instrument to overheat, which may disturb the operation and even cause damage.
Make sure that all fan openings are unobstructed, that the airflow perforations are unimpeded, and that the minimum distance from the wall is 10 cm.
2.3.3 Connecting the Instrument to the AC Supply
The R&S SMB is automatically adapted to the AC voltage supplied. There is no need to
set the voltage manually or change fuses. The ​AC SUPPLY AND POWER SWITCH is
at the rear of the unit.
► Connect the instrument to the AC power source using the AC power cable delivered
with the instrument.
Note: The instrument is in compliance with safety class EN61010-1.
Connect the instrument only to a socket with earthing contact.
2.3.4 Starting the Instrument
Switching off the AC power
You can leave the AC power on permanently to preserve your last instrument settings.
Switching off is required only if the instrument must be completely disconnected from all
power supplies.
Starting up instruments with power switch
1. ​Connect the instrument to the AC supply.
2. To turn the power on, press the main power switch to position I (On).
After power-up, the instrument is in ​standby or ready state, depending on the state
of the ON/STANDBY key at the front panel of the instrument when the instrument
was switched off for the last time.
3. In case the instrument is in standby mode, i.e. the yellow LED is on, press the ON/
STANDBY key to switch the instrument to ready state.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
27
R&S®SMB100A
Preparing for Use
Putting into Operation
2.3.4.1
Standby and Ready state
The ON/STANDBY key is located in the bottom left corner of the front panel.
Switching between standby and ready state
► Press the ON/STANDBY key briefly to switch the instrument from the standby to
ready state or vice versa.
In ready state, the left, green LED is on. The instrument is ready for operation. All
modules are power-supplied and the R&S SMB initiates its ​startup procedure.
In standby state, the right, yellow LED is on. The standby power only supplies the
power switch circuits and the oven-controlled crystal oscillator to keep it at its operating temperature. In this state it is safe to switch off the AC power and disconnect
the instrument from the power supply.
2.3.4.2
Start Display and Booting
The instrument boots the operating system, starts the instrument firmware and automatically performs a selftest. If the previous session was terminated regularly, the instrument
uses the last setup with the relevant instrument settings.
Once the startup procedure has been terminated, the block diagram opened in the previous session is displayed and the instrument is ready for operation.
Use the PRESET key to return the instrument to its definite reset/preset state, if the current setup is not anymore relevant.
To customize the start settings, use the "File" dialog.
Rebooting the instrument
Press the STANDBY key for approx. 5 s. to reboot the instrument, if the software stops
unexpectedly.
2.3.4.3
Function Check
The signal generator automatically monitors the main functions when the instrument is
switched on and continuously during operation.
A detected fault is indicated by a "ERROR" message displayed in the info line together
with a brief error description. For in-depth identification of the error, press the INFO key.
In response, a description of the error(s) is displayed.
For more information, refer to ​chapter 9, "Error Messages", on page 431.
Additionaly to the automatic monitoring, the R&S SMB offers the following capabilities to
ensure correct functioning:
●
Internal Adjustments
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
28
R&S®SMB100A
Preparing for Use
Putting into Operation
Press the SETUP key and select "System > Internal Adjustments" to access the dialog for preforming and configuring of the adjustments settings. A maximum level
accuracy can be obtained, for instance.
●
2.3.4.4
Selftest
A selftest is provided for service purposes. The selftest is a protected test procedure,
which can be accessed if protection level 1 is disabled.
Default Settings
When the instrument is switched on, it is not the preset state that is active, but rather the
instrument state that was set before the instrument was switched off. It is also recomended that you use the PRESET key to return the instrument to its defined preset state
every time a new configuration is required or the current setup is not anymore relevant.
The R&S SMB offers a two-stage preset concept:
●
Preset the instrument to a predefined state
The PRESET key calls up a defined instrument setup. All parameters and switching
states are preset (also those of inactive operating modes). The default instrument
settings provide a reproducible initial basis for all other settings. However, functions
that concern the integration of the instrument into a measurement setup are not
changed, e.g. GPIB bus address or reference oscillator source settings.
●
Preset the instrument to its factory settings
The instrument can also be forced to load its default factory settings. To access the
corresponding dialog box, press the SETUP key and select the "Factory Preset".
For more information and an overview of the settings affected by the factory preset
function, see ​chapter 5.2.3.16, "Factory Preset", on page 100.
Overview of the Most Important Preset States
The following list gives an overview of the presets for the most important generator settings. The other presets can be found in the preset tables of the individual menus and
the information accompanying the remote commands.
●
"RF frequency" = 1 GHz
●
"RF level" RF output switched off
●
"Level" = 30 dBm for instruments including an attenuator
"Level" = -5 dBm for instruments with no attenuator
●
"Offsets" = 0
●
"Modulations State" = Off
●
Uninterrupted level settings are switched off
"Level Attenuator Mode" = AUTO
●
Internal level control "Level ALC" = AUTO
●
User correction "Level Ucor" = OFF
●
"LF output State" = Off
●
"Sweep State" = Off
Settings that are not affected by the PRESET key
●
Reference frequency settings ("Ref Oscillator" menu)
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
29
R&S®SMB100A
Preparing for Use
Putting into Operation
●
Power on settings ("Level/EMF" menu)
●
Network settings ("Setup" menu)
●
GPIB address ("Setup" menu)
●
*IDN? Identification and emulation ("Setup" menu)
●
Password and settings protected by passwords ("Setup" menu)
●
Start/Stop Gui Update ("Setup" menu)
●
Display and keyboard settings ("Setup" menu)
User-defined instrument states can be stored and called up in the "File" dialog.
2.3.5 Shutting Down the Instrument
To shut down the R&S SMB, proceed as described below.
Risk of losing data
If you switch off the running instrument using the rear panel switch or by disconnecting
the power cord, the instrument loses its current settings. Furthermore, program data may
be lost.
Press the ON/STANDBY key first to shut down the application properly.
1. Press the ON/STANDBY key to save the current setup, shut down the operating
system and set the instrument to standby state.
The yellow LED must be on.
2. To switch off the power, press the main power switch to position 0 (Off).
None of the front-panel LEDs should be on.
2.3.6 Power Fuses
The R&S SMB is fully fused by two fuses IEC60127-T3.15H/250 V.
The fuses are accommodated in the fuse holders next to the power connector. Use only
fuses of the mentioned type.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
30
R&S®SMB100A
Preparing for Use
Connecting External Accessories
Shock hazard
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the instrument is switched off and disconnected
from all power supplies.
Always use fuses supplied by Rohde & Schwarz as spare parts, or fuses of the same
type and rating.
2.4 Connecting External Accessories
The equivalent USB ports on the front and/or rear panel of the R&S SMB can be used to
connect a variety of accessories.
In addition the instrument provides interfaces for network integration (see ​chapter 2.6,
"Setting Up a Network (LAN) Connection", on page 33).
2.4.1 Connecting USB Devices
The USB interfaces on the front and (optionally) rear panels of the R&S SMB allow you
to connect USB devices directly to the instrument. This number can be increased as
necessary by using USB hubs. Due to the large number of available USB devices, there
is almost no limit to the expansions that are possible with the R&S SMB.
The following list shows various USB devices that can be useful:
●
Memory stick for easy transfer of data to/from a computer (e.g. firmware updates)
●
CD-ROM drives for easy installation of firmware applications
●
Keyboard or mouse to simplify the entry of data, comments, file names, etc.
●
Power sensors, e.g. of the NRP Zxy family
Installing USB devices is easy under Linux, because all USB devices are plug&play. After
a device is connected to the USB interface, the operating system automatically searches
for a suitable device driver.
If Linux does not find a suitable driver, it will prompt you to specify a directory that contains
the driver software. If the driver software is on a CD, connect a USB CD-ROM drive to
the instrument before proceeding.
When a USB device is subsequently disconnected from the R&S SMB, the operating
system immediately detects the change in hardware configuration and deactivates the
corresponding driver.
All USB devices can be connected to or disconnected from the instrument during operation.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
31
R&S®SMB100A
Preparing for Use
Linux Operating System
Connecting a memory stick or CD-ROM drive
If installation of a memory stick or CD-ROM drive is successful, the operating system
informs you that the device is ready to use. The device is made available as a new drive
(/usb). The name of the drive is manufacturer-dependent.
Connecting a keyboard
The keyboard is detected automatically when it is connected. The default keyboard layout
is English – US.
Use the "Setup > Keyboard Settings" dialog to configure the keyboard properties.
Connecting a mouse
The mouse is detected automatically when it is connected.
2.5 Linux Operating System
The instrument contains the Linux operating system. To ensure that the instrument software functions properly, certain rules must be adhered to concerning the operating system.
Risk of causing instrument unusability
The instrument is equipped with the Linux operating system. Additional software can
therefore be installed on the instrument. The use and installation of additional software
may impair instrument function. Thus, run only programs that Rohde & Schwarz has
tested for compatibility with the instrument software.
The drivers and programs used on the instrument under Linux have been adapted to the
instrument. Existing instrument software must always be modified using only update
software released by Rohde & Schwarz.
The configuration of the operating system is optimally adapted to signal generator functions in the factory. Changes in the system setup are only required when peripherals like
keyboard are installed or if the network configuration does not comply with the default
settings (see ​chapter 2.6.1, "Connecting the Instrument to the Network", on page 34).
After the R&S SMB is started, the operating system boots and the instrument firmware
is started automatically.
Accessing Operating System
The operating system cannot be accessed.
All necessary system settings can be made in the "Setup" dialog.
The R&S SMB provides an internal flash memory, it does not contain a disk drive. The
flash memory holds the operating system, the firmware and the stored data. Data transfer
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
32
R&S®SMB100A
Preparing for Use
Setting Up a Network (LAN) Connection
is possible via a memory stick connected to a USB interface. The memory stick and the
flash memory are accessed via the "File Manager".
Accsessing the File System
The instrument also supports two standard methods to access the file system form a
remote client:
●
FTP (file transfer protocol)
●
File sharing according to the SAMBA/SMB (server message block) protocol.
Both methods allow the access to the folder /var/user/share.
Default password
The FTP and SAMBA file access use the user "instrument" with default password "instrument".
In is highly recomended to change this password in the ​Setup > Security > Change User
Password dialog before connecting the instrument to the network!
Screen saver
A screen saver can be activated in the R&S SMB. When active, the display is shut off
when no entries via front panel, external mouse or external keyboard are made for a
period of time. The screen saver prolongs the life time of the display.
Use the "Setup > Display Settings" dialog to switch on or off the screen saver and to
adjust the screen saver settings.
2.6 Setting Up a Network (LAN) Connection
The R&S SMB is equipped with a network interface and can be connected to an Ethernet
LAN (local area network). Provided the appropriate rights have been assigned by the
network administrator and the Linux firewall configuration is adapted accordingly, the
interface can be used, for example:
●
To transfer data between a controller and the tester, e.g. in order to run a remote
control program.
See ​chapter 6, "Remote Control Basics", on page 199.
●
To access or control the measurement from a remote computer using the "Remote
Desktop" application, the Ultr@VNC program (or a similar tool)
●
To connect external network devices (e.g. printers)
●
To transfer data from a remote computer and back, e.g. using network folders
This section describes how to configure the LAN interface. It includes the following topics:
●
​chapter 2.6.1, "Connecting the Instrument to the Network", on page 34
●
​chapter 2.6.2, "Assigning the IP Address", on page 34
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
33
R&S®SMB100A
Preparing for Use
Setting Up a Network (LAN) Connection
Accessing Operating System
The operating system cannot be accessed.
All necessary system settings can be made in the "Setup" dialog.
2.6.1 Connecting the Instrument to the Network
There are two methods to establish a LAN connection to the instrument:
●
A non-dedicated network (Ethernet) connection from the instrument to an existing
network made with an ordinary RJ-45 network cable. The instrument is assigned an
IP address and can coexist with a computer and with other hosts on the same network.
●
A dedicated network connection (Point-to-point connection) between the instrument
and a single computer made with a (crossover) RJ-45 network cable. The computer
must be equipped with a network adapter and is directly connected to the instrument.
The use of hubs, switches, or gateways is not required, however, data transfer is still
performed using the TCP/IP protocol.
In both cases, an IP address has to be assigned to the instrument and the computer, see
​chapter 2.6.2, "Assigning the IP Address", on page 34.
The R&S SMB uses the IP addresses 192.168.xxx.yyy for this purposes, where xxx and
yyy may take values between 1...254; the subnet mask is always 255.255.255.0.
Risk of network failure
Before connecting the instrument to the network or configuring the network, consult your
network administrator. Errors may affect the entire network.
► To establish a non-dedicated network connection, connect a commercial RJ-45 cable
to one of the LAN ports.
To establish a dedicated connection, connect a (crossover) RJ-45 cable between the
instrument and a single PC.
If the instrument is connected to the LAN, the operating system automatically detects the
network connection and activates the required drivers.
The network card can be operated with a 10/100 Mbps Ethernet IEEE 802.3u interface.
2.6.2 Assigning the IP Address
Depending on the network capacities, the TCP/IP address information for the instrument
can be obtained in different ways.
●
If the network supports dynamic TCP/IP configuration using the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP), all address information can be assigned automatically.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
34
R&S®SMB100A
Preparing for Use
Setting Up a Network (LAN) Connection
●
If the network does not support DHCP, the instrument tries to obtain the IP address
via Zeroconf (APIA) protocol. If this attempt does not succeed or if the instrument is
set to use alternate TCP/IP configuration, the addresses must be set manually.
By default, the instrument is configured to use dynamic TCP/IP configuration and obtain
all address information automatically. This means that it is safe to establish a physical
connection to the LAN without any previous instrument configuration.
Risk of network errors
Connection errors can affect the entire network. If your network does not support DHCP,
or if you choose to disable dynamic TCP/IP configuration, you must assign valid address
information before connecting the instrument to the LAN. Contact your network administrator to obtain a valid IP address.
Assigning the IP address on the instrument
1. Press the SETUP key and select the "Network Settings" dialog.
2. Set the "Address Mode" to Static.
3. Select the "IP Address" and enter the IP address, for example 192.168.0.1.. The IP
address consists of four number blocks separated by dots. Every block contains 3
numbers in maximum.
4. Select the "Subnet Mask" and enter the subnet mask, for example 255.255.255.0.
The subnet mask consists of four number blocks separated by dots. Every block
contains 3 numbers in maximum.
Assigning the IP address manually on a PC
1. Obtain the IP address and subnet mask for the R&S SMB and the IP address for the
local default gateway from your network administrator. If necessary, also obtain the
name of your DNS domain and the IP addresses of the DNS and WINS servers on
your network. If you use more than one LAN connector, you need separate address
information for each connector.
2. Press the "Windows" key to access the operating system.
3. Open the "Control Panel" by selecting "Start > Settings > Control Panel".
4. Select "Network Connections".
5. Right-click "Local Area Connection" and select "Properties" from the context-sensitive menu, or
click "Local Area Connection" and then "File > Properties".
6. On the "General" tab, click "Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)" and then select "Properties".
7. Select "Use the following IP address" and enter the address information as obtained
from the network administrator.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
35
R&S®SMB100A
Preparing for Use
Remote Access via an External Controller
8. If necessary, you can also select "Use the following DNS server addresses" and enter
your own DNS addresses.
For more information refer to the Windows XP Help.
2.6.3 Using Computer Names
Alternatively to the IP address, each PC or instrument connected in a LAN can be
accessed via an unambiguous computer name. Each instrument is delivered with an
assigned computer name, but this name can be changed.
Querying and changing a computer name
1. Press the "Setup" key and select "Network Settings".
The computer name is displayed under "Hostname".
2. Press the "Setup" key, select "Protection" and enable the "Protection Level 1".
The parameter "Hostname" in the "Network Settings" dialog is now enabled for configuration.
3. Change the "Hostname".
2.7 Remote Access via an External Controller
The R&S SMB can be remote accessed from a remote computer (external controller) via
a network link. This allows convenient operation of the instrument from the desktop
although the instrument is integrated in a rack somewhere else.
For an overview of the instrument's operating concept and the different ways to control
and operate the instrument, see ​chapter 3.1, "Brief Introduction to the Instrument's Concept", on page 44.
There are different ways to establish a remote access connection to the signal generator
but all of them require an established LAN connection between the instrument and the
remote computer. The simplest way to remote access the instrument is to use a Web
browser, such as Windows Internet Explorer or Mozilla Firefox for instance. Alternatively
a remote access via a special application can be used.
The free-of-charge program Ultr@VNC for PCs with Linux/Unix or Windows operating
system is available for setting up the remote access connection. Using this application
requires additional installation.
See the following table for an overview of the different ways to establish a remote access
connection to the signal generator.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
36
R&S®SMB100A
Preparing for Use
Remote Access via an External Controller
Table 2-1: Remote access via an external computer
Remote access via
Installation of the additional appliLAN
cation
connecon the instruon the remote
tion
ment
computer
Web Browser
required
no
no
required
required
VNC Viewer
required
e.g. Windows Internet Explorer or Mozilla Firefox
see ​chapter 2.7.1, "Using a Web Browser for Remote
Access", on page 37
Ultr@VNC
for PCs with Linux/Unix or Windows operating system
see ​chapter 2.7.2, "Remote Access via Ultr@VNC",
on page 38
When the connection is set up with Ultr@VNC, direct control on the instrument is possible
while remote access is established.
For return to direct operation on the instrument, the connection must be cut. After cutting
the connection, it is still enabled and can be established again any time. The connection
is disabled only after deactivation of the program.
This section gives an information on how to use the Web browser for remote access, how
to install the applications for remote access and how to establish the connection between
the instrument and an external computer with Windows operating system. Remote
access via an external computer with Linux/Unix operating system is performed accordingly.
Default password
Remote-access and file access require the user "instrument" with default password
"instrument".
Changing the default user and security passwords
It is highly recommended to change the default user and security passwords in the menu
"Setup > Security" before connecting the instrument to the network (see section ​chapter 5.2.3.14, "Security", on page 96).
2.7.1 Using a Web Browser for Remote Access
The instrument can be remote-accessed via any Web browser, like Windows Internet
Explorer or Mozilla Firefox for instance.
To remote access the instrument via Web browser:
1. Connect the instrument and the remote computer to a LAN, see ​chapter 2.6.1, "Connecting the Instrument to the Network", on page 34.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
37
R&S®SMB100A
Preparing for Use
Remote Access via an External Controller
2. Instal the Java Runtime Environment JRE on the remote computer.
3. Type the instruments' IP address in the address field of the Web browser on your PC,
e.g. http://10.111.11.1
The "VNC Authentication" screen appears.
4. Enter the password and select "OK".
The default password is "instrument".
After the connection is established, the current signal generator screen with the block
diagram is displayed and the instrument can be remote-accessed from the remote
computer.
2.7.2 Remote Access via Ultr@VNC
Ultr@VNC is an application which can be used to access and control the instrument from
a remote computer through a LAN connection. The program is included in operating system Linux/Unix. It is available as a free-of-charge download on the internet for operating
system Window XP (http://www.uvnc.com/download/index.html) and on the instrument's
CD-ROM.
Risk of Unauthorized Access
If the VNC application is enabled on the instrument, any user in the network who knows
the computer name and login data can access it. To prevent this, make sure that the VNC
server service on the instrument is disabled.
Setting up a VNC connection
1. Connect the instrument and the remote computer to a LAN, see ​chapter 2.6.1, "Connecting the Instrument to the Network", on page 34.
2. ​Install the Ultr@VNC application and enable it on the instrument.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
38
R&S®SMB100A
Preparing for Use
Remote Access via an External Controller
3. In the ICF firewall, enable communication on the network via Ultr@VNC program.
4. Install the VNC Viewer on the remote computer with Windows operating system, see
​"Installing the VNC Viewer on a Windows PC" on page 41.
5. Set up the VNC connection between the instrument and:
a) the remote computer with Linux/Unix operating system, see ​"Setting up the VNC
connection on the Linux/Unix remote computer" on page 41;
b) the remote computer with Windows operating system, see ​"Setting up the VNC
connection on the Windows remote computer" on page 42.
Enabled Direct Control
The direct control of the instrument is not disabled and the instrument can be controlled
from the front panel and via the remote computer alternately.
Installing the Ultr@VNC application
1. Download the program from the internet and copy it to a directory that can be
accessed.
2. On the instrument, shut down firmware using the ALT+F4 key combination.
3. Double click on the setup file to start the installation.
The setup wizard leads through the installation. This description focus only on the
relevant settings.
a) Select installation of all components.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
39
R&S®SMB100A
Preparing for Use
Remote Access via an External Controller
b) In the "Additional Task Panel", enable all entries.
A successful installation is indicated by a message.
At the same time a warning is displayed stating that a password must be set.
4. Select "OK".
The "Default Local System Properties" panel opens.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
40
R&S®SMB100A
Preparing for Use
Remote Access via an External Controller
5. Enter a password with a length of at least five digits.
This password is used on the remote computer to access the instrument. Other settings may be changed according to the user-specific security requirements.
After the installation the Ultr@VNC program is automatically started together with the
operating system. On mouse over, the IP address of the instrument is indicated.
This IP address and the user-defined password are the prerequisites to enable
remote access on the remote computer. Terminated connection is indicated by
changed icon color.
Installing the VNC Viewer on a Windows PC
1. Download the Ultr@VNC program form internet and follow the installation instructions.
Only the program component VNC Viewer is required.
Note: The VNC Viewer program is included in the download for the installation of the
Ultr@VNC program on the signal generator if "Full installation" was selected in the
"Select Component" panel. In this case, the program ultr@vncviewer.exe can
be copied to the Windows PC.
2. Install VNC Viewer program component on the remote computer.
Setting up the VNC connection on the Linux/Unix remote computer
The VNC program is available per default for Linux/Unix operating systems.
1. Start a Web browser on the remote computer and enter the IP address of the instrument.
2. Enter the following address:
vnc://<IP-address of the instrument>, e.g. vnc://192.168.1.1.
A dialog is opened and the password for the remote VNC connection is requested.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
41
R&S®SMB100A
Preparing for Use
Remote Access via an External Controller
3. Enter the password as defined in the "Default Local System Properties" panel of the
Ultr@VNC program and select "Log On".
The connection is established, the instrument is remote accessed and the current
signal generator screen with the block diagram is displayed. The individual functions
are operated using the mouse and keyboard.
In contrast to remote access via Remote Desktop, the direct control of the instrument
is not disabled and the instrument can be controlled from the front panel and via the
remote computer alternately.
Setting up the VNC connection on the Windows remote computer
1. Start VNC Viewer program component on the PC, select "VNC Server" and enter IP
address of the instrument.
2. To initialize the connection, select "Connect".
A message requesting the password appears.
3. Enter the password as defined in the "Default Local System Properties" panel of the
Ultr@VNC program and select "Log On".
The connection is established, the instrument is remote accessed and the current
signal generator screen with the block diagram is displayed. The individual functions
are operated using the mouse and keyboard.
Enabled Direct Control
The direct control of the instrument is not disabled and the instrument can be controlled
from the front panel and via the remote computer alternately.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
42
R&S®SMB100A
Preparing for Use
Remote Access via an External Controller
Terminating VNC Connection
The remote access via VNC connection can be terminated either on the R&S SMB or on
the external PC. Terminating the connection does not disable it. It can be established
again any time. See the notice above concerning unauthorized access due to VNC connection!
1. Terminate the connection on the R&S SMB
a) Press the "Windows" key to access the operating system.
b) Right-click on the VNC icon on the task bar and select "Kill all clients".
2. To terminate the connection on the external Linux/Unix PC, close the internet browser
or close the signal generator window.
3. To terminate the connection on the external Windows PC, close the VNC Viewer
program.
The connection is terminated. The color of the VNC icon in the status bar of the
instrument changes.
A message on the external PC indicates the disconnection.
Disabling Remote Access via Ultr@VNC
The VNC connection can be disabled by removing the program on the instrument or by
deactivating the VNC Server service.
1. Remove the VNC program
a) Press the "Windows" key to access the operating system and open the "Add or
Remove Programs" by selecting "Start > Settings > Control Panel > Add or
Remove Programs".
b) Remove the VNC program.
2. Deactivate the VNC Server service
a) Press the "Windows" key to access the operating system and open the "Services" by selecting "Start > Settings > Control Panel > Services".
b) Deactivate the VNC Server service.
The connection is disabled, the VNC icon disappears from the task bar of the instrument.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
43
R&S®SMB100A
Getting Started
Brief Introduction to the Instrument's Concept
3 Getting Started
This section helps you to get familiar with the R&S SMB and provides an introduction to
the general concept of the instrument with a sample of the possible application fields as
well as a description of the main blocks in the signal generation flow.
This section also explains the operating concept in general and includes a brief introduction to operation by a step-by-step description of the configuration. The example is
intended to provide a quick overview of the settings provided. No additional equipment
is required.
3.1 Brief Introduction to the Instrument's Concept
The operating concept of the R&S SMB employs the following three ways of instrument
control:
●
Manual operation
●
Remote control
●
Remote access
Manual Operation
The R&S SMB can be entirely operated from the front panel. Peripherals such as mouse
or keyboard can be connected but are not essential.
The R&S SMB is equipped with an intuitive user interface. The central element of the
display is the block diagram that shows the signal flow and processing from the left on
the display to most right, i.e. the generated signal can be seen at a glance.
Each block represents a functional unit of the instrument. Thus the user always knows
the position at which a parameter has an effect in the signal flow. The main settings of a
block are indicated in the block. The interconnection of employed inputs and outputs is
also shown. The user is thus always informed about the connection of inputs and outputs
in the signal flow and where they can be configured. A window is opened for each menu
where parameters can be set. When the window is opened, an entry is made in the
"Winbar" below the display. All open menus are of equal priority (not modal) and can be
accessed any time.
The block diagram in the figure below shows a fully equipped instrument.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
44
R&S®SMB100A
Getting Started
Brief Introduction to the Instrument's Concept
Fig. 3-1: Block diagram of a fully equipped R&S Signal Generator
With the aid of the rotary knob, the user can navigate in the block diagram and the dialogs,
and can operate the instrument with one hand. The cursor is moved line by line through
the block diagram or dialog. Turning the button clockwise advances the cursor. The
selected block can be activated or deactivated with the TOGGLE key. Active blocks are
highlighted by a colored background.
The instrument comprises a comprehensive info and help system. Context-sensitive help
can be called any time with the HELP (F1) key. The help system indicates the currently
selected parameter and offers additional services such as cross references, index and
contents. The content of the help system corresponds to the operating manual of the
instrument.
Warning and conflict messages caused by incorrect operation as well as further information are displayed in the "Info" line. A complete list of existing conflicts is displayed
when the INFO (CTRL+I) key is pressed. Additional information on entries can be requested from the help system. The history function permits display of all messages.
Assistants simplify the completion of tables. After data entry in the assistant, the table is
modified only after the "Accept" button has been pressed. Pressing the "Accept" button
also stores the assistant data.
For an introduction into the manual operating of the instrument, detailed operating
instructions and an overview of menus refer to ​chapter 4, "Manual Operation",
on page 53.
For an indepth description of the dialog boxes and the instrument functions refer to section ​chapter 5.1, "Overview of Instrument Functions", on page 78.
Remote Control
Remote control is an operation of the instrument by means of remote control commands
or programs that automatize repeating settings. The instrument is connected to a computer running the program.
This way of operation and the instructions how to set up a connection for remote control
are described in the ​chapter 6, "Remote Control Basics", on page 199. The description
of the remote control commands is provided in ​chapter 7, "Remote Control Commands", on page 240.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
45
R&S®SMB100A
Getting Started
Application Field of the Instrument
Remote Access
Remote access is the operating of the instrument from a remote computer. Both the R&S
SMB and the computer are connected in a LAN.
Remote access in contrast to remote control does not use remote-control commands
but a separate software which is installed on the remote computer. After its start, the
software simulates the user interface of the instrument. The instrument can thus be operated from the remote computer as on the unit itself. The individual functions are operated
using the mouse and keyboard. Specific instrument functions can be executed using
specific key combinations on the keyboard or a front panel key emulation that can be
operated with the mouse.
This way of operation and the instructions how to set up a connection for remote access
are described in ​chapter 2.7, "Remote Access via an External Controller", on page 36.
3.2 Application Field of the Instrument
The main field of application of the R&S SMB is the generation of sine wave signals with
very high spectral purity. These signals are needed e.g. for adjacent channel or phase
noise measurements. In addition, the RF signal can be modulated with the internal modulations waveforms sine waves and rectangular signals.
3.3 Description of Individual Diagram Blocks
The signal path of the instrument is configured by installing a frequency option that comprises all required modules.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
46
R&S®SMB100A
Getting Started
Description of Individual Diagram Blocks
One of the following options must be installed.
●
R&S SMB-B101 (9 kHz to 1.1 GHz)
●
R&S SMB-B102 (9 kHz to 2.2 GHz)
●
R&S SMB-B103 (9 kHz to 3.2 GHz)
●
R&S SMB-B106 (9 kHz to 6 GHz)
●
R&S SMB-B112 (100 kHz to 12,75 GHz)
●
R&S SMB-B112L (100 kHz to 12,75 GHz, without attenuator)
●
R&S SMB-B120 (100 kHz to 20 GHz)
●
R&S SMB-B120L (100 kHz to 20 GHz, without attenuator)
●
R&S SMB-B140 (100 kHz to 40 GHz)
●
R&S SMB-B140L (100 kHz to 40 GHz, without attenuator)
Instruments without step attenuator provide a restricted level range at the RF output.
Refer to the data sheet for detailed information.
You can additionally get the following options for 20 or 40 GHz instruments:
●
up to 20 GHz (R&S SMB-B120/-B120L)
– high output power option R&S SMB-B31
–
●
low harmonic filter option R&S SMB-B25
up to 40 GHz (R&S SMB-B140/-B140L)
– high output power option R&S SMB-B32
–
low harmonic filter option R&S SMB-B26
See data sheet for detailed information.
Up-to-date information is available at R&S SMB homepage on the internet http://
www2.rohde-schwarz.com/products/smb100a.html.
Mod Gen block
The internal modulation sources are configured in this block. Also, the "LF frequency
sweep" can be activated here.
An internal LF generator is available as the internal source for the analog modulations
AM, FM and PHiM. Available modulation shapes are sine and rectangle.
The internal modulation signals are provided at the LF output at the front of the instrument.
The LF output signal and the modulations sources for the analog modulations AM, FM
and PhiM can be selected independently from each other.
A pulse generator provides single and double pulse modulation with selectable pulse
widths and periods. Additionally, an option is available to generate pulse train signals.
The R&S SMB offers three different sweep types (frequency sweep, level sweep and LF
sweep) to be activated alternatively. Each type has 6 modes which differ with respect to
the sweep cycle mode (continuous, individual and step-by-step) and triggering mode
(automatic, internal and external). In the "Mod Gen" block, the LF sweep is configured.
Frequency and level sweep settings are accessed via the "RF" block.
The status display in the block shows whether LF generator and/or a sweep are active.
The selected internal LF generator and/or noise source are switched on or off with the
TOGGLE ON/OFF key.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
47
R&S®SMB100A
Getting Started
Example of Setup
Modulation block
The internal and external analog modulations are configured and activated in this block.
The MOD ON/OFF key switches the active modulation(s) on/off.
The internal modulation sources are configured in the "Mod Gen" block. External amplitude, frequency or phase modulation signals can be fed in at the input connector MOD
EXT at the front of the instrument. An external pulse signal is fed in via the BNC connector
PULSE EXT at the rear of the instrument. AC or DC coupling for external feed is possible.
Modulation signals of up to two sources (internal and external source) can be combined
for AM/FM and PhiM modulation.
Available internal and external analog modulation modes are:
● Amplitude modulation (AM)
● Frequency modulation (FM)
● Phase modulation (PhiM)
● Pulse modulation (Pulse)
● Stereo modulation (Stereo)
Note: For modulation modes that can be simultaneously used, refer to the R&S SMB
data sheet.
The status display in the block shows the active modulation(s). Use the TOGGLE ON/
OFF key to switch the active modulation of the block on or off.
RF block
In this block, the RF parameters and frequency/level sweep settings are set.
The active sweep is displayed in the block. The RF ON/OFF key switches the RF signal
on and off. When the signal is switched off, the switch before the RF output symbol is
open.
RF settings include:
● Frequency and reference frequency
● Level settings; if required.
● NRP-Z Power Viewer using power sensors
● Frequency and level sweep
● List Mode settings. In this mode, extremely fast frequency and level settings can be
made.
The RF 50 OHM output connector at the front of the instrument provides the RF signal.
An external trigger/gate signal for sweeps is input via the INST TRIG connector at the
rear of the instrument
Note: Frequency and level are set fast with the aid of the FREQ and LEVEL keys.
Use the TOGGLE ON/OFF key to switch the RF output on or off.
3.4 Example of Setup
This section provides an example on how to configure the instrument for generating of
an amplitude modulated signal.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
48
R&S®SMB100A
Getting Started
Example of Setup
Generation of an Amplitude-Modulated Signal
To generate a simple AM-modulated signal, proceed as follow:
1. Activate default (preset) state
Press the PRESET key to set a defined instrument state.
2. Select and activate AM modulation
a) Turn the rotary knob and select the "Modulation" block.
b) Press the rotary knob to open the dialog where the modulation can be selected.
Note: Different modulation modes are available depending on the options installed.
The "Amplitude Mod..." menu is the first menu and is highlighted per default.
c) Turn the rotary knob and highlight "Amplitude Mod...".
Press the rotary knob to open the "Amplitude Modulation" dialog.
d) Turn the rotary knob to select parameter "AM Depth", press the rotary knob to
allow editing and enter the preferred AM depth with the aid of the numeric keypad
and the unit keys.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
49
R&S®SMB100A
Getting Started
Example of Setup
e) Finally, select "State" and press the rotary knob to switch on the AM modulation.
f)
Press the DIAGRAM key to display the complete block diagram.
To indicate the active state, the "Modulation" block is displayed in blue. The "RF" is
not yet active, which means that no RF signal is output.
3. Set frequency and level and activate RF signal
a) Press the FREQ key to activate the editing mode for frequency entry. The "Frequency" entry field in the header section of the display is highlighted.
Enter the frequency using the numeric keypad and terminate the entry by pressing a unit key.
b) Press the LEVEL key and enter the level settings in the same way.
c) Press the DIAGRAM key to display the complete block diagram.
d) Turn the rotary knob to select the "RF" block.
Press the RF ON/OFF key to activate the "RF" block.
The AM modulation signal is now present at the RF output.
Generation of an RF Frequency Sweep Signal
In the example, an RF frequency sweep is configured. Proceed as follow:
1. Activate default (preset) state
Press the PRESET key to set a defined instrument state.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
50
R&S®SMB100A
Getting Started
Example of Setup
2. Configure and activate RF frequency sweep.
a) Turn the rotary knob and select the "RF" block.
b) Press the rotary knob to open the dialog where the RF frequency sweep can be
selected.
c) Turn the rotary knob and highlight "RF Frequency Sweep...".
Press the rotary knob to open the "RF Frequency Sweep" dialog.
All sweep parameters are default except for the sweep mode. The default settings
are not changed.
d) Turn the rotary knob to select parameter "Mode", press the rotary knob to open
the selection list and select "Single".
e) Press the rotary knob to apply the selection.
For triggering, the "Execute Single Sweep" and "Reset Sweep" buttons are displayed.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
51
R&S®SMB100A
Getting Started
Example of Setup
f)
Finally, select "State" and press the rotary knob to switch on the RF frequency
sweep.
g) Press the DIAGRAM key to display the complete block diagram.
The "RF" is not yet active, which means that no RF signal is output.
3. Activate RF signal.
a) Turn the rotary knob to select the "RF" block.
b) Press the RF ON/OFF key to activate the "RF" signal output.
To indicate the active state, the RF block is displayed in blue. An RF signal with the
default frequency and level settings is output, i.e. 1 GHz and -30 dBm.
The sweep is not yet active, it must be triggered in the sweep dialog.
4. Trigger RF frequency sweep
a) Press the WINBAR key to switch to the "RF Frequency Sweep" dialog.
Turn the rotary knob to select the "Execute Single Sweep" button.
Press the rotary knob to trigger (start) the frequency sweep.
A linear single sweep signal is now present at the RF output, starting at 100 MHz.
The sweep is processed in 1 MHz steps with dwell time of 10 ms per step up to the
stop frequency of 500 MHz.
The sweep starts at 100 MHz, stops at 500 MHz in 1 MHz steps is output with a dwell
time of 10 ms per step.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
52
R&S®SMB100A
Manual Operation
Key Features
4 Manual Operation
The R&S SMB can be operated intuitively either via the interactive block diagram or via
a menu tree. All menus are in the form of windows that can be operated in the same way.
Rotary knob, keys and softkeys, or alternatively a mouse, allow direct and therefore convenient access to entries and settings.
The clear-cut display shows the current signal generator state. Numerous help functions
support the user in signal configuration.
This section describes the concept of manual operation of the signal generator. This
includes a description of the general structure of a dialog box, working with dialog boxes
and the block diagram and the setting of parameters.
For an in-depth description of the dialog boxes and the instrument functions refer to section "Instrument Functions".
4.1 Key Features
The manual operating concept of the R&S SMB enables the user to make settings as
intuitively as possible and at the same time gives a permanent overview of characteristics
of the generated signal and of the current instrument state. Numerous online help functions support user settings.
Block diagram
The block diagram is the core of the operating concept.
A graphics display shows the current configuration and the signal flow in the form of a
block diagram. All graphical elements can be accessed for operation. An element is
selected by means of the arrow keys and the associated setting function is called by
pressing Enter. Required menus and graphs are displayed on the block diagram which
is displayed again in the foreground whenever the DIAGRAM (CTRL+D) key is pressed.
Permanent frequency and level display
The main characteristics of the RF signal, frequency and level, are permanently displayed
in the header section of the screen and can be directly set in the display fields after the
FREQ (CTRL+F) or LEVEL (CTRL+L) key is pressed. Status messages for the output
signal are displayed in addition to frequency and level.
Operation via Graphical User Interface
●
Functional blocks
Menus are assigned to the specific function blocks in the block diagram. The function
blocks represent elements of signal generation. Function blocks displayed with a blue
frame can be directly switched on and off by means of the TOGGLE ON/OFF (CTRL
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
53
R&S®SMB100A
Manual Operation
Key Features
+T) key. The menus of the highlighted function blocks can be called by pressing the
ENTER key.
– Example:
The "Modulation" block contains all menus required for modulation signal configuration.
In this block all modulations can be selected.
●
Signal flow
The signal flow between the function blocks and the employed inputs and outputs are
also shown.
●
Menu tree
The menu tree can be opened and closed with the MENU (CTRL+M) key. The menu
tree is organized in the same way as the directories under Windows. The function
blocks correspond to the first directory level, the menus to subdirectories.
Operation corresponds to the Windows concept
To offer the user a familiar environment, operation is very similar to operation of Windows
user interfaces. All menus and tables are made up of known elements, such as selection
lists, check boxes and entry fields.
A blue frame indicates that the selected item is active. In the highlighted element, entries
can be made.
Rotary knob
Operation is possible via front-panel keys, an external keyboard and the mouse. However, most of the settings can be easily made with the rotary knob:
●
Turning the rotary knob shifts the entry focus to the target element.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
54
R&S®SMB100A
Manual Operation
Key Features
●
Pressing the rotary knob activates the selected entry field.
Depending on the parameter, the submenu is called, the numeric value varied, the
list entry selected or the check box activated or deactivated.
●
If a value is entered, the entry is stored by another click on the rotary knob and the
editing mode is exited.
Clear settings with the aid of independent subdialogs
A separate window is opened for each dialog and subdialog. The dialogs can be operated
independently of each other, i.e. none of the dialogs requires that settings in other dialogs
be completed before it can be closed. This ensures flexible operation at all times.
Keys with assigned simple functions
Most keys on the front panel of the R&S SMB directly perform a simple function.
Since a great number of settings can thus be made by a keystroke, operation is easy.
For instance, the CLOSE (ESC) key closes the active menu; with the RF ON/OFF (CTRL
+R) key the RF output signal can be switched on or off.
An exception are keys that call a menu such as the MENU (CTRL+M) key which opens
the complete menu tree of the instrument, the SETUP (CTRL+E) key which opens the
menus for general instrument settings or the FILE (CTRL+S) key which opens the menu
for file management.
Help functions for user support
Numerous help functions support the user in signal configuration.
●
Value ranges
The valid setting range is displayed for each numeric parameter. This requires a short
wait after activation of the entry field. The range is then displayed automatically after
a few seconds.
If the entered value is outside the permissible range, the next permissible value is
automatically set and a message is output.
●
Context-sensitive help
Context-sensitive help for each parameter can be called with the HELP or F1 key.
●
Comprehensive online help
Each help page is part of a comprehensive online help function which can be called
by means of an index, a content tree or the "Previous/Next" buttons.
Info line with messages for indication of the current instrument state
A great variety of different messages such as status messages, error messages, warnings or information are displayed in the header field of the screen. With the aid of the
INFO (CTRL+I) key, help pages can be called for most of the messages. They provide
background information on the message and indicate operating steps that may be
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
55
R&S®SMB100A
Manual Operation
Display
required. All messages are explained in the online help which can be called with the
HELP (F1) key.
4.2 Display
The display shows the current signal generator state and offers graphical elements for
direct operation. It is divided into three sections:
●
The frequency and level display with info line indicates the main output signal parameters and reports the current state with status, error and warning messages.
●
The block diagram shows the instrument configuration, the signal characteristic as
well as the inputs and outputs used and permits interactive operation via graphics
elements. Active menus and graphs are displayed on top of the block diagram.
●
Winbar with labelled softkeys for menu display.
The block diagram in the figure below shows a fully equipped instrument.
Fig. 4-1: Block diagram of a fully equipped R&S Signal Generator
4.2.1 Settings Displayed in the Header Section
Frequency/level settings and a few status messages (see ​chapter 4.2.2, "Status Information and Messages", on page 57) are displayed in the header field of the screen.
The display may vary depending on the instrument's operating mode:
●
In the sweep mode, the current frequency or level of the output signal is displayed.
The status message "SweepMode" is displayed in the info line.
●
In the list mode, neither the current frequency nor level is displayed, the indication is
dimmed.
●
If user correction is active, the status message "UCorr" is displayed in the info line.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
56
R&S®SMB100A
Manual Operation
Display
The value displayed in the "Freq" and "Level" field does not consider any offset set or
multiplier factor.
For more information see ​chapter 5.3.2, "RF Frequency", on page 113 and ​chapter 5.3.5.1, "Overview of RF Level", on page 119.
The frequency and level indication can be enlarged so that it covers the complete display
of the R&S SMB by using the DIAGR key. This key toggles between block diagram,
magnified frequency and level indication and the display of the active dialog. This requires
the "Summary Screen Toggle" to be enabled.
See also ​"Toggle Summary Screen" on page 92.
4.2.2 Status Information and Messages
The status information and messages are displayed in the header section of the screen.
The messages differ with respect to their importance (errors, warnings, info) and the time
of their appearance (brief and permanent messages). They require different treatment
by the user. Further information on all messages can be called in the info window (see ​
chapter 4.2.3, "Info Window", on page 58).
Refer to ​chapter 9, "Error Messages", on page 431 for an overview of all status information and messages as well as instructions for error elimination.
4.2.2.1
Status Information
The status information gives the user an overview of the main operating states and settings of the instrument. The states are indicated for information only and do not necessitate any action by the user.
Status information is displayed between the frequency and level fields, at the left of the
info line or in the info line itself.
4.2.2.2
Messages
Messages indicate errors in the instrument. They are displayed in the info line in different
colors depending on their importance and display duration. Errors (e.g. no calibration
data) are displayed in red, information (e.g. file not found) and warnings in black. Warnings indicate less significant errors (e.g. the instrument operates outside specified data).
4.2.2.3
Volatile messages
Brief messages report automatic settings in the instrument (e.g. switching off of incompatible types of modulation) or on illegal entries that are not accepted by the instrument
(e.g. range violations). They are displayed in the info line on a yellow background. They
are displayed on top of status information or permanent messages.
Volatile messages do not normally demand user actions and disappear automatically
after a brief period of time. They are stored in the history, however.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
57
R&S®SMB100A
Manual Operation
Display
These messages can be read from remote using ​SYST:ERR? or ​SYST:ERR:ALL?.
4.2.2.4
Permanent Messages
Permanent messages are displayed if an error occurs that impairs further instrument
operation, e.g. a hardware fault. The error signalled by a permanent message must be
eliminated before correct instrument operation can be ensured.
The message is displayed until the error is eliminated. It covers the status display in the
info line. After error elimination, the message automatically disappears and is also recorded in the history.
These messages can be read from remote using ​SYST:SERR?.
4.2.3 Info Window
A few operating states and the current message are displayed in the info line.
The INFO window with a list of current permanent messages and a detailed description
of each message can be opened with the INFO (CTRL+I) key.
The upper section of the info window contains a list of all current permanent messages
in the order of their occurrence, i.e. the most recent message is displayed first. In the
lower section of the window, additional information on the highlighted message is displayed. A history of all messages that have occurred since instrument switch-on can be
called with the "History" key. The most recent message is displayed first.
The messages are color-coded according to their level. Device-specific messages are
red, info and remote control error are black. The level is also indicated in the "Lev" column
(Err, Sys or Info). Column "SCPI" indicates the SCPI error code.
With the aid of the softkey buttons, error messages can be cleared and a history of all
messages called.
Delete
Clears the highlighted message.
This button is available only if the history of the messages is displayed.
Delete All
Clears all messages.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
58
R&S®SMB100A
Manual Operation
Display
This button is available only if the history of the messages is displayed.
History
Calls the list of all messages that have occurred since instrument switch-on. The most
recent messages are displayed at the top of the list. When the button is pressed again,
the list of current messages is displayed.
SCPI command:
​SYSTem:​ERRor[:​NEXT]?​ on page 394 or ​STATus:​QUEue[:​NEXT]?​ on page 385
Each time a SYST:ERR? or STAT:QUE? query is sent, the oldest entry in the error queue
is returned and at the same time cleared in the list.
4.2.4 Block Diagram
The block diagram shows provided options, signal configuration and the currently
selected signal flow of the generator with inputs and outputs used. Signal generation can
be completely operated from the block diagram. The highlighted function block can be
directly switched on and off with the TOGGLE ON/OFF (CTRL+T) key. Pressing the Enter
opens the associated setting menu.
Fig. 4-2: Block diagram of the R&S SMB
4.2.4.1
Function Blocks in the Block Diagram
Each block represents a function of signal generation. The function is indicated in the
headline of the block. In the check box, the respective function can be quickly activated/
deactivated with the TOGGLE ON/OFF (CTRL+T) key. After activation, the block is displayed in blue. Status information is displayed below the check box. It is different for the
different blocks.
Pressing the rotary knob (front panel) or the "Config..." button (mouse) opens the associated setting menu.
Example: Modulation block
In this block, the modulation signals are set. The status information of the "Modulation"
block indicates the selected modulation.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
59
R&S®SMB100A
Manual Operation
Display
4.2.4.2
Signal Flow and Input/Output Symbols in the Block Diagram
The input/output symbols in the block diagram show the currently used inputs and outputs
of the signal generator. Unused inputs and outputs are not shown. The lines indicate the
signal flow.
Symbols and labels refer to the corresponding inputs and outputs on the front and rear
panel of the signal generator. The direction - input or output - is indicated by an arrow.
Example:
The symbols indicate the input for the external pulse signal on the
instrument rear panel.
4.2.5 Structure of the Dialogs
The parameters are set in the menus. Menus are accessed either via the function blocks
in the diagram or by means of the MENU (CTRL+M) key. The menus are displayed on
top of the block diagram.
The WINBAR key toggles between the active menus. The REARR key toggles between
the enlarged and normal sized menus.
Working with menus and dialog boxes is described in ​chapter 4.3, "Accessing Dialogs",
on page 61; the setting of parameters in ​chapter 4.4, "Setting Parameters",
on page 62.
The menus are in Windows format. The menus differ in details depending on their function
but they consist of the same main elements. Each menu consists of a menu header and
one or more menu areas with various fields for setting parameters.
The header line contains the name of the menu and the buttons for minimizing and closing
the menu. To operate the buttons, use the mouse or the front key CLOSE (ESC).
Several fields of associated but separately set parameters are organized in menu areas.
A menu area is framed and labelled with the function common to all parameters.
Example: Pulse Generator
Each of the setting fields is assigned a parameter name. The kind of setting varies
depending on the parameter to be set. Some settings can only be made in a specific
configuration. If setting is not permitted with the specific configuration selected, the
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
60
R&S®SMB100A
Manual Operation
Accessing Dialogs
respective item is disabled and displayed in gray and the entry or selection field cannot
be accessed.
4.3 Accessing Dialogs
The MENU (CTRL+M) key opens the complete menu tree. Selecting a functional block
and pressing the ENTER key opens the menu associated with this block.
An alternatively way to access a dialog is to use the CLOSE (ESC), DIAGRAM (CTRL
+D) and REARR (CTRL+A) keys on the front panel.
For a quick access to the dialogs, use one of the following alternative methods.
Displaying the block diagram or a dialog in the foreground
► Press the DIAGRAM (CTRL+D) key to move the cursor to the block diagram.
All active menus are minimized.
Enlarging the indication of the header section
► Press the DIAGRAM key twice to enlarge the indication of the header section.
Tip: Use the REARR key to toggle between the enlarged and normal sized dialogs.
Accessing the menu tree
► Press the MENU (CTRL+M) key to open the complete menu tree.
Calling the File or Setup dialog
► Use the FILE (CTRL+S) or SETUP (CTRL+E) keys to open the respective dialog.
Closing an active menu
► Press the CLOSE key to close an active menu.
Tip: If the cursor is at the highest menu level, you can also use the ESC key to close
the active menu.
Accessing the header area
► Press the FREQ (CTRL+F) and LEVEL (CTRL+L) keys to activate the "Frequency"
or "Level" entry fields in the header area.
Keyboard Shortcuts
Keyboard shortcuts (e.g. "Ctrl + D" for the displaying the block diagram in the foreground)
provide direct access to all utility dialogs of the instrument (see ​chapter 4.8, "Legend of
Front-Panel Controls", on page 75).
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
61
R&S®SMB100A
Manual Operation
Setting Parameters
4.4 Setting Parameters
The R&S SMB offers several and sometimes alternative possibilities for setting parameters. Operation is possible from the front panel, with the aid of a mouse and/or from a
PC keyboard.
The examples whitin this description focus on the operation from the front panel.
For more information, refer to:
●
​chapter 4.8, "Legend of Front-Panel Controls", on page 75 for an overview of key
functions and a cross-reference between the front panel keys and the keyboard
shortcuts
●
section "Instrument Functions" for a detailed description of key functions.
Most of the parameters are set in the different menus. The R&S SMB provides alternative
ways for accessing the dialogs. Turn the rotary knob and navigate to the corresponding
block in the block diagram and press the knob to open the dialog or perform a mouse
click on the "Config..." button.
An exception are the "Setup" and "File" dialogs. In the "Setup" dialog, general settings
are made which are not directly concerned with signal generation, e.g. setting of the
GPIB-bus address. In the "File" dialog, files and lists are managed.
These menus can only be called with the SETUP (CTRL+E) and FILE (CTRL+S) keys.
Frequency and level are directly set in the header area of the display using the FREQ
and LEVEL keys.
Specific settings can also be made directly in the block diagram, e.g. activating a function
block by means of the TOGGLE ON/OFF (CTRL+T) key or switching the RF output on
and off with the aid of the RF ON/OFF (CTRL+R) key. Changes affecting the signal flow
are immediately visible in the graphics display.
This section provides an information about the parameter handling that comprises of the
following main steps:
●
​chapter 4.4.1, "Working with the Cursor", on page 63
●
​chapter 4.4.2, "Selecting a Control Element", on page 63
●
​chapter 4.4.3, "Switching Parameters On/Off", on page 63
●
​chapter 4.4.4, "Entering a Value", on page 64
●
​chapter 4.4.5, "Working with Units ", on page 65
●
​chapter 4.4.6, "Selecting a Value from a List", on page 66
●
​chapter 4.4.7, "Terminating Entries with Confirmation", on page 67
●
​chapter 4.4.8, "Restoring the Previous Value", on page 67
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
62
R&S®SMB100A
Manual Operation
Setting Parameters
4.4.1 Working with the Cursor
After the instrument is switched on, the cursor is always on the first function block of the
diagram (default setting).
Moving the cursor on the display
► To move the cursor, use one of the following alternative methods:
a) Use the rotary knob or the arrow keys.
b) Use the WINBAR key to toggle between the active dialogs.
c) Use the ESC key.
Tip: Be aware that the function of the ESC key depends on the current cursor position.
The function of this key depends on the current cursor position.
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Calls the next higher selection level.
Closes the open window without accepting new entries; the old value or parameter is retained.
In dialog boxes that contain a "Cancel" button it activates that button.
Closes all kinds of dialog boxes, if the edit mode is not active.
Quits the edit mode, if the edit mode is active.
Switches between different entry fields of a menu.
Shifts the entry cursor from the header display to the previously active menu, or
to the previously highlighted block in the block diagram if no menu is active.
Moving the coursor to the heading area
► Press the FREQ (CTRL+F) or LEVEL (CTRL+L) key to move the cursor to the header
area.
4.4.2 Selecting a Control Element
Control elements are always selected in the same way no matter whether a function block
in the diagram, a menu in the menu tree, a parameter in the menu or an entry in a list or
table is concerned.
► To activate an element, put the cursor on it.
An active element is highlighted by a blue frame.
4.4.3 Switching Parameters On/Off
A parameter can be activated and deactivated using a button or a check box.
1. Select the parameter.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
63
R&S®SMB100A
Manual Operation
Setting Parameters
2. To change the state of a parameter, use the "Enter" function of the different control
media:
●
●
●
Press the rotary knob
Press ENTER
Press the TOGGLE ON OFF (CTRL+T) key.
Colour and label of a button change, the check box is ticked or the tick is removed.
4.4.4 Entering a Value
Numeric and alphanumeric values can be edited in the entry fields. In the editing mode,
cursors of different colour are used. A blue cursor indicates the overwrite mode, a green
cursor the insert mode.
Numeric and alphanumeric values can either be newly entered or the existing value can
be changed. Incorrect entries are cleared with the BACKSPACE key.
Entering a new numerical value
1. Select the parameter.
2. Press a numeric key to activate the editing mode.
The previous value is cleared and the new value can be entered.
Editing a value in the insert mode (default setting)
1. Press the rotary knob (= Enter) to activate the editing mode.
If the cursor is placed at the right of the total value, the insert mode is always active.
2. Set the cursor to the left of the number to be changed using the LEFT/RIGHT arrow
keys.
The cursor is displayed in green.
3. Click on a numeric key to insert a new value.
Editing a value in the overwrite mode
1. Activate the editing mode.
2. Set the cursor on the numeric digit to be changed using the LEFT/RIGHT arrow keys.
The cursor is displayed in blue and the number to be replaced is highlighted.
3. Click on a numeric key to overwrite the highlighted value.
Varying a value
1. Activate the editing mode.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
64
R&S®SMB100A
Manual Operation
Setting Parameters
2. Set the cursor to the left of the number to be changed using the LEFT/RIGHT arrow
keys.
The value at the cursor position is varied.
3. To vary the selected value, use the UP/DOWN arrow key or turn the rotary knob.
The value is increased or decreased.
Entering a new alphanumerical value
1. Select the parameter.
2. Press an alphanumeric key to start the editing mode.
The new value is entered.
Editing an alphanumerical value
An existing value, e.g. a file name, can be changed in the insert mode (see example) or
in the overwrite mode.
1. Select the paramter and activate the editing mode.
2. Set the cursor to the left of the alphanumerical value using the LEFT/RIGHT arrow
keys.
Tip: If hexadecimal values are to be entered, the numeric front-panel keys are automatically changed to hexadecimal values.
3. Click on an alphanumeric key to insert a new alphanumerical value.
Terminating the entry of a numeric value
To terminate the entry of a numeric value:
1. Press the rotary knob (= Enter).
2. Press a UNIT key on the front panel.
3. Select a "Unit" in the selection field next to the parameter value.
4.4.5 Working with Units
The unit of a parameter is displayed next to the value. When the parameter is edited, the
unit is selected either from the list or by means of the front-panel keys. When the entry
is completed, the unit can be changed. In this case the value remains unchanged but is
automatically adapted to the new unit.
While operating the instrument by means of a mouse, assign the unit to the selected
parameter before entering its value.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
65
R&S®SMB100A
Manual Operation
Setting Parameters
Assigning a unit
To assign a unit to a value, use one of the following alternatives:
1. Press a UNIT key on the front panel.
2. Select a "Unit" in the selection field next to the parameter value.
Press the ENTER key.
The unit displayed in the entry field next to the value is assigned.
Changing a unit
To subsequently change a unit, i.e. after the entry has been terminated and when the
editing mode is not active, use one of the following alternatives:
1. Press a UNIT key on the front panel.
2. Select"Unit" in the selection field next to the parameter value.
The value remains unchanged but the display is automatically adapted to the new
unit, i.e. the value is recalculated to suit the new unit.
The new unit is indicated in the value field of the menu.
4.4.6 Selecting a Value from a List
Selection lists provide a list of predefined values for the selected parameter.
To select a item from a list, proceed as follow:
1. Press ENTER key to open the list.
2. Use one of the following alternatives to navigate through the list:
a) Turn the rotary knob or use the UP/DOWN arrow keys.
The selected item is highlighted.
b) Press TOGGLE ON/OFF key several times until the preferred entry is displayed
in the selection field.
3. To confirm the selection, press the ENTER key.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
66
R&S®SMB100A
Manual Operation
Setting Parameters
4.4.7 Terminating Entries with Confirmation
The instrument behaves different by the termination of entries deppending on the parameter type and the way this parameter is set.
Confirming settings
► To confirm the settings, press the rotary knob or one of the UNIT keys (see also ​
chapter 4.4.5, "Working with Units ", on page 65) .
Note: Variations by means of the rotary knob are immediately set.
Confirming multiple values
In some cases, like for instance when editing data in a user correction table, it is useful
first to enter few values and to confirm them together. Such settings require additional
confirmation. Not yet confirmed settings are displayed on a yellow background as an
indication that the currently displayed values do not represent the target signal.
► To confirm these settings, select the "Save" or "Accept" button, respectively.
Confirming parameters with On/Off state
Most of the instrument functions with enabled and disabled states are calculated and
effective only after this functions have been enabled. However, there are functions like
the frequency variation of the reference oscillator for instance, that are immediately set
after confirmation.
► To confirm a parameter with On/Off state, enable the parameter.
4.4.8 Restoring the Previous Value
Parameter variations with the rotary knob are immediately set and therefore not reversible.
Normally, values cannot be restored in the case of mouse control because no explicit
confirmation is required in this case and entries are automatically confirmed when the
entry or selection field is exited.
Restoring values
In the case of front-panel control or operation from the keyboard, previous values can be
restored as long as the new value is not confirmed, i.e. the entry is not completed.
► To restore the values, press the ESC key.
Restoring values that require confirmation
All settings that are not confirmed with the "Accept" button but require this additional
confirmation can be restored.
1. Press the ESC key.
A confirmation query is displayed.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
67
R&S®SMB100A
Manual Operation
Editors
2. Confirm with "OK" to abort the changes.
Select "Cancel" to return to the dialog. The previous selected settings are displayed.
Restoring values after an extended calculation has been started
Calculation and setting might require different period of time. Many settings are made
without noticeable calculation times; such operations are indicated by a "BUSY" message
displayed in the status field of the header section.
A window with a progress indicates that the instrument performs an extended calculation
that requires longer calculation time. The termination of such a calculation restores the
previous values.
► Press the ABORT button to terminate the calculation.
All previous values are restored.
4.5 Editors
The R&S SMB provides user-friendly editors for defining lists. Lists containing frequency
and level value pairs are used for the list mode and the user-defined level correction.
The lists are saved to files and may thus have any length. The file name of the lists and
the directory to which the files are saved are user-selectable. The file prefix is different
for each list type and is permanently assigned by the system.
For information about file handling and overview of the automatically assigned file prefixes, refer to ​chapter 4.7, "File Management", on page 71.
4.5.1 Working with List Editor
The "User Correction" and "List Mode" dialogs provide a list editor for defining the frequency/level value pairs.
Editing list mode data lists
1. To access a list editor and open an existing data list for editing, use the cursor keys
to select the associated button "Edit User Correction Data..." or "Edit List Mode
Data..." (if available) in the individual menu.
The selected list is displayed and the cursor marks the first row of the "Frequency/
Hz" column.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
68
R&S®SMB100A
Manual Operation
Editors
If no list has been selected, a blank list of only one row is displayed.
2. Press the LEFT/RIGHT arrow keys to change between the colums.
Use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to mark a row.
3. Use the numeric keys to enter the value for the value pairs in the "Frequency/Hz" and
"Power/dBm" table columns. A blank row is inserted at the end of the list.
Terminate the entry by pressing a UNIT key.
4. To select a row, select the "GoTo" button and press the ENTER key.
Use the numeric keys to enter the row index in the entry field and press the
ENTER key to confirm the entry.
The cursor moves to the selected row.
5. To insert a new row in the table, select the row above which the new row is to be
inserted and select "Insert Row(s)".
A row is inserted above the currently marked row.
If no row has been selected, a row is inserted at the beginning of the list.
6. Use the "Save" function to save the edited list under its current name.
Enter the file name in the "File Select" dialog and select the directory (see ​chapter 4.7.1, "File Select Dialog", on page 72).
Only complete value pairs are taken into consideration; rows containing an entry in
only one column are ignored.
Creating a new list mode data list
A new list can be created under a new name either by generating a blank file in the "File
Select" menu (see section ​chapter 4.7, "File Management", on page 71) or by changing
an existing list which will then be saved under a new name.
1. To create an empty data list, select "RF > List Mode > List Mode Data... > New
List" or respectively "RF > User Correction > User Cor. Data... > New User Correction
Data" and enter the file name of the new data list.
2. To open the data list for editing, select the associated button "Edit User Correction
Data..." or "Edit List Mode Data..." in the individual menu.
Edit the list and save it under a new name.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
69
R&S®SMB100A
Manual Operation
How to Use the Help System
4.6 How to Use the Help System
The R&S SMB is equipped with a context-sensitive help function. A help page is available
for each parameter and can be called any time during instrument operation.
Compiled online help systems are also available for all functions of the R&S SMB on the
CD-ROM supplied with the instrument. This help program can be called on any controller
with Internet Explorer version V4.0 and higher.
Calling context-sensitive and general help
► To display the general help dialog box, press the HELP (F1) key.
The help dialog is displayed. A topic containing information about the current menu
or the currently opened dialog box and its function is displayed.
On top, the help dialog box contains a navigation bar with:
●
"Contents" - accesses a table of help contents
●
"Index" - switches to an index table
●
"Back "/"Previous"/"Next" for navigation to further help topics
Navigating in the table of contents
1. To move through the displayed contents entries, use the UP/DOWN keys. Entries
that contain further entries are marked with a plus sign.
2. To display a help topic, press the "ENTER" key.
The corresponding help topic is displayed.
Navigating in the help topics
1. To scroll through a page, use the UP/DOWN arrow keys.
2. To jump to the linked topic, press the link text.
3. Use the "Previous" or "Next" links to jump to the corresponding topic.
4. Use the "Scroll Right" or "Scroll Left" buttons to shift the indicated area of the navigation window to the left or right.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
70
R&S®SMB100A
Manual Operation
File Management
Using the Index
1. Select "Index".
2. Enter the first characters of the topic you are interested in. The entries starting with
these characters are displayed.
3. Press the ENTER key to change the focus.
4. Use the UP/DOWN keys to navigate and select the suitable keyword.
5. Press the ENTER key to display the help topic.
The corresponding help topic is displayed.
Closing the help window
► Press the HELP (F1) key.
4.7 File Management
The R&S SMB uses files to save all instrument data, i.e. system and user data.
The user data includes saved instrument settings and lists and the user correction.
The files are stored in the internal memory of the instrument or on a USB memory stick.
The /var directory can be used to save user-defined data; any subdirectory structure
can be created on /var. Some default subdirectories are predefined, but can be changed
at any time.
The /opt directory is a protected system drive and therefore unaccessible system directory. The files on this directory contain data that must not be changed. Therefore, this
drive should not be accessed, since reconstruction of the system partition will lead to data
loss. To prevent inadvertent deletion or overwriting of system files, this drive is not specified in the file menus.
Files can be exchanged either via a memory stick or a connected network. A memory
stick is connected to the USB interface and is assigned the /usb drive. In the case of a
connected network, all network drives that can be accessed are available. The files are
accessed in a "Save/Recall" dialog in the individual menus.
The files are differentiated according to their extensions; each type of file is assigned a
specific file content. The extension is usually of no consequence to the user since access
to the files occurs in the individual menus where only the relevant type of file is available.
See ​chapter 4.7.2.1, "Extensions for User Files", on page 74 for an overview of the
supported file extensions.
The user data can be roughly divided into the following data types:
●
Settings
Instrument settings can be saved and loaded. In case of saveing, the current setting
is saved to the specified file.
●
Lists
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
71
R&S®SMB100A
Manual Operation
File Management
Lists, e.g. user correction lists, can be loaded. They can be generated either externally or internally. For internal generation, a new list must be created in the "File
Select" dialog which will then be edited in the list editor of the individual menu.
For more information, refer to:
●
​chapter 4.8, "Legend of Front-Panel Controls", on page 75 for an overview of key
functions and a cross-reference between the front panel keys and the keyboard
shortcuts
●
to section "Instrument Functions" for a detailed description of key functions.
Accessing files with user data
1. To access an editable user data file, select the "Save/Recall" or "File Manger" function
in the individual dialog.
2. To access a loadable data file, select the "Select/New" or "File Manager" function in
the individual dialog.
3. To access the "File Manager" function, press the SETUP (CTRL+E) key and select
"Save/Recall > File Manager".
A "File Select" window for loading, saving or creating a file or the "File Manager"
dialog for managing all files is displayed.
Saving and loading of all instrument settings
All instrument settings are saved and loaded in the "File" menu.
To access the "File" menu, press the FILE (CTRL+S) key.
For more information, see ​chapter 5.2.8, "Storing and Loading Instrument Data - File
Key", on page 106.
4.7.1 File Select Dialog
The "Save/Recall" dialaog displays the available drives and directories. In the upper part,
"Recent Data Sets", the files last used are listed.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
72
R&S®SMB100A
Manual Operation
File Management
The available drives and directories and the files of the selected directory are displayed.
The currently selected path is displayed above the window. Only the relevant files without
file extensions are displayed. If the area is opened several times, the path last selected
is displayed. When a file is saved or created, its name is user-selectable; the extension
is assigned automatically and cannot be entered. The file is saved to the selected path.
In addition to the files saved by the user, some menus also offer files containing predefined contents. These files are saved to a specific directory on system drive; for this reason, this directory cannot be chosen from the "File Select" menu.
Working with the File Select dialog
1. Access the "File Select" dialog (see ​"Accessing files with user data" on page 72).
2. Navigate in the "File Select" dialog.
3. Load an existing file.
In the "Recall Settings" dialog, mark a file and press the "Select" button.
4. Save a file.
In the "Save Settings" dialog, enter file name in the "File Name:" field.
Select the directory to which the file is to be saved and then select the "Save" button.
5. Create a new file.
To create a new file, use the "Save Settings" functionality, i.e. specify file name and
directory and save the file.
The created file is empty; it must be filled with the necessary values in the individual
editor.
4.7.2 File Manager
The "File Manager" allows general file management such as copying, shifting, renaming
and deleting files as well as generating new directories.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
73
R&S®SMB100A
Manual Operation
File Management
Use the "File Type" to select a file type form the list. This can be used to process either
all files (all files (*) selection) or a specific selection of files. See ​chapter 4.7.2.1, "Extensions for User Files", on page 74 for an overview of the supported file extensions. The
available drives and directories and the files of the selected directory are displayed. The
currently selected path is displayed above the windows. If the area is opened several
times, the path last selected is displayed. Unlike the "File Select" window, the "File Manager" displays the full file names including extensions.
Working with the File Manager dialog
1. Accessing the "File Manager" dialog (see ​"Accessing files with user data"
on page 72).
2. Navigating in the "File Manager" dialog.
Operation is similar to the operation of menus with several areas.
3. Moving, duplicating, deleting or renaming files
To move a file, select the file and press the "Cut" button. Mark the directory to which
the file is to be moved and select the "Paste" button. If the target directory already
contains a file with the same name, a confirmation query is displayed to confirm
overwriting of this file.
Perform the similar steps and cut/copy/rename/delete the file.
Tip: The operation corresponds to the Windows concept.
4. Creating a new directory
Mark drive or directory level where the new directory is to be created, select the
"Create New Directory" button and enter the name of the new directory in the entry
window that opens. Confirm with ENTER.
4.7.2.1
Extensions for User Files
The following table list all available file extensions for user files. The currently available
files on the instrument depends on the installed options.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
74
R&S®SMB100A
Manual Operation
Legend of Front-Panel Controls
Table 4-1: List of the automatically assigned file extensions in the instrument
Function
List type
Contents
File suffix
Instrument State
Settings
Instrument settings
*.savrcltxt
"User Correction"
List
User-defined level correction values
*.uco
Export Data
*.txt or *.csv
User-defined frequency/level value pairs
*.lsw
Export Data
*.txt or *.csv
User-defined offtime/ontime/repetition values
*.pulstrn
NRP Settings
*.nrp
"List Mode"
List
"Pulse Train List"
NRP Settings
Settings
4.8 Legend of Front-Panel Controls
The following table lists all key functions available on the front panel. Key combinations
used on the PC keyboard to trigger key functions on the instrument front panel are also
described. Keyboard labels are described in alphabetical order.
In addition, a front panel key emulation and an on-screen keyboard can be used for
manual operation by mouse only.
Table 4-2: Cross-reference between the front panel keys and keyboard shortcuts
Front-panel key
Key of PC keyboard
Turning the rotary knob Tab key (towards the right)
Function
Sets the cursor with the rotary knob.
Shift + Tab (towards the left)
Pressing the rotary
knob
Enter
Pressing the rotary knob confirms an entry; it has the
same function as the ENTER key.
Arrow keys
Arrow keys
Moves the cursor.
. / *...#
. / *...#
Enters a period/decimal point. Enters a special character.
- / A<->a
- / (shift+) a—z
Enters the sign.
Switches between upper-case and lower-case letters.
0-9 / a...z
CTRL+ 0-9 / a...z CTRL
Enters the number/letter.
BACKSPACE
Backspace
Clears the last entry (number, sign or decimal point)
DIAGR
CTRL+ D
Sets the cursor on the block diagram and hides all
menus.
ENTER / *1 / dB(m)
Enter
Terminates an entry.
ALT + F12
Confirms entries in the base unit and values without
a unit.
Selects dBm for the RF level and dB for level offset
and level step width.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
75
R&S®SMB100A
Manual Operation
Legend of Front-Panel Controls
Front-panel key
Key of PC keyboard
Function
ESC / CLOSE
ESC / CTRL + G
Selects the next higher menu/selection level. When
the editing mode is exited with ESC, the previous
value is restored.
Closes an active menu.
FILE
CTRL + S
Activates the menu for storing instrument settings.
FREQ
CTRL+ F
Activates the frequency entry.
G/n / dBuV
ALT + F9
Selects the unit Giga/Nano, dBuV for the RF level
and dBu for the LF level.
HELP
F1
Opens/closes context-sensitive help.
INFO
CTRL + I
Opens/closes the info window
k/m / mV
ALT + F11
Selects the units kilo/milli and mV for RF levels.
LEVEL
CTRL + L
Activates the level entry.
LOCAL
CTRL + Q
Switches the instrument from remote control to manual control.
M/u / uV
ALT + F10
Selects the units Mega/Micro and uV for RF levels.
MOD ON/OFF
CTRL + O
Switches modulation on/off. "MOD OFF" is indicated
in the status line.
ON/OFF TOGGLE
CTRL + T
Switches a block or parameter on/off.
Toggles between the different possibilities of setting
a selection parameter.
PRESET
CTRL + P
Restores a defined basic instrument setup.
RF ON/OFF
CTRL + R
Switches the RF output signal on/off. "RF OFF" is
indicated in the status line.
SETUP
CTRL + E
Opens the setup menu for general instrument settings.
WINBAR
CTRL + W
Toggles between the active menus.
4.8.1 Front Panel Key Emulation
The R&S SMB provides a front panel key emulation to enable execution of the front panel
key functions by mouse e.g. for remote access. The emulation is called by a right mouse
click. The front panel key functions are executed by a mouse click on the associated
button.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
76
R&S®SMB100A
Manual Operation
Legend of Front-Panel Controls
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
77
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
Overview of Instrument Functions
5 Instrument Function
5.1 Overview of Instrument Functions
This chapter explains the functions of the R&S SMB and the options available in the
setting menus. The associated SCPI command is specified for each parameter (where
applicable).
The description starts with the general instrument settings which do not directly affect
signal generation. The majority of these settings can be accessed by means of frontpanel softkey menus and not by means of function block menus.
The signal generation functions are then described, beginning with the functions which
affect the RF signal ("RF" block) and the analog modulations ("Mod" block). The configuration of the modulation generators (LF generators and pulse generator) and of the LF
sweep is offered in the "Mod Gen" block. The clock synthesis signal is set in the "Clock
Synthesis" block.
The general instrument settings include various functions, such as:
●
Setting a defined basic setup using the PRESET key
see ​chapter 5.2.2, "Default Instrument Settings - Preset Key", on page 80
●
Switching from remote control to manual control using the LOCAL key
see ​chapter 5.2.4, "Switching to Manual Control - Local Key", on page 101
●
Configuring the generator and its interfaces in the "Setup" dialog - e.g. setting the
GPIB address, starting an adjustment, querying instrument data
see ​chapter 5.2.3, "General Configuration of Instrument - Setup Key", on page 81
●
Calling up the online help using the HELP key
see ​chapter 5.2.7, "Help System - Help Key", on page 105
●
Querying messages using the INFO key
see ​chapter 5.2.6, "Messages - Info Key", on page 105
●
Loading and storing complete instrument settings in the "File" menu
see ​chapter 5.2.8, "Storing and Loading Instrument Data - File Key", on page 106
The RF signal and the reference oscillator are configured in the "RF" function block:
●
CW mode
see ​chapter 5.3.1, "Overview of RF Signal", on page 112
●
List mode
see ​chapter 5.3.7.4, "List Mode", on page 157
●
Frequency and Level Sweep mode
see ​chapter 5.3.7.1, "Overview", on page 144
●
Reference Oscillator
see ​chapter 5.3.4, "Reference Oscillator", on page 117
●
RF Level
see ​chapter 5.3.5.1, "Overview of RF Level", on page 119
●
RF Level Sweep
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
78
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
General Instrument Settings
see ​chapter 5.3.7.3, "RF Level Sweep", on page 152
●
ALC
see ​chapter 5.3.5.4, "Automatic Level Control - ALC", on page 126
●
Power Sensors
see ​chapter 5.3.6.1, "NRP-Z Power Viewer", on page 139
●
User Correction
see ​chapter 5.3.5.6, "User Correction", on page 132
The analog and external digital modulations are activated in the "Modulation" function
block:
●
Amplitude Modulation
see ​chapter 5.4.2, "Amplitude Modulation (AM)", on page 167
●
Frequency Modulation
see ​chapter 5.4.3, "Frequency Modulation (FM)", on page 170
●
Phase Modulation
see ​chapter 5.4.4, "Phase Modulation (PhiM)", on page 173
●
Pulse Modulation
see ​chapter 5.4.5, "Pulse Modulation (PM)", on page 176
●
Stereo Modulation
see ​chapter 5.4.6, "Stereo Modulation", on page 178
The internal LF generators, the LF frequency sweep and the pulse generator are configured in the "Mod Gen" function block:
●
LF Frequency Sweep
see ​chapter 5.5.3, "LF Frequency Sweep", on page 186
●
LF output
see ​chapter 5.5.2, "LF Output", on page 185
5.2 General Instrument Settings
5.2.1 Overview of General Instrument Settings
This section describes the settings which do not directly affect signal generation. Most of
these settings can only be accessed by means of menus which are opened using keys
or key combinations on the external keyboard or keys on the front panel key emulation.
The general instrument settings therefore affect various functions, such as storing instrument settings using the FILE key or setting the GPIB address in the menu of the
SETUP key. The order in which the descriptions are given corresponds to the layout of
the keys on the front panel of the R&S SMB (from top left to bottom right).
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
79
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
General Instrument Settings
5.2.2 Default Instrument Settings - Preset Key
The PRESET key calls up a defined instrument setup. All parameters and switching
states are preset (also those of inactive operating modes). The default instrument settings
provide a reproducible initial basis for all other settings.
However, functions that concern the integration of the instrument into a measurement
setup are not changed, e.g. GPIB address or reference oscillator source settings.
When the instrument is switched on, it is not the preset state that is active, but rather the
instrument state that was set before the instrument was switched on.
User-defined instrument states can be stored and called up in the "File" menu.
Resetting the instrument to the factory state is possible with the ​Factory Preset function.
Preset
Presets all parameters and switching states.
The following list gives an overview of the presets for the most important generator settings. The other presets can be found in the preset tables of the individual menus and
the information accompanying the remote commands.
● "RF frequency" = 1 GHz
● "RF level" RF output switched off
● "Level" = 30 dBm for instruments including an attenuator
"Level" = -5 dBm for instruments with no attenuator
● "Offsets" = 0
● "Modulations State" = Off
● Uninterrupted level settings are switched off
"Level Attenuator Mode" = AUTO
● Internal level control "Level ALC" = AUTO
● User correction "Level Ucor" = OFF
● "LF output State" = Off
● "Sweep State" = Off
Settings that are not affected by the PRESET key
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Reference frequency settings ("Ref Oscillator" menu)
Power on settings ("Level/EMF" menu)
Network settings ("Setup" menu)
GPIB address ("Setup" menu)
*IDN? Identification and emulation ("Setup" menu)
Password and settings protected by passwords ("Setup" menu)
Start/Stop Gui Update ("Setup" menu)
Display and keyboard settings ("Setup" menu)
SCPI command:
​*RST​ on page 243
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
80
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
General Instrument Settings
5.2.3 General Configuration of Instrument - Setup Key
The SETUP key opens the "Setup" dialog.
The "Setup" dialog is divided into several sections.
●
The "System" section is used to set general instrument parameters.
●
The "Test" section is used to perform function tests.
●
The "Environment" section is used to configure the controller interfaces.
●
The "Remote" section is used to configure the remote control interfaces.
●
The "Protection" is used to set the protection level for service functions and security
settings.
●
The "Settings" section is used to save or recall instrument settings or to preset the
instrument to factory settings.
Most submenus of this key can be accessed only via the SETUP key or the menu tree
( MENU key), with the following exceptions:
5.2.3.1
●
The "Reference Oscillator" dialog can also be called up in the "RF" block and is
therefore described in the section on this block (see ​chapter 5.3.4, "Reference Oscillator", on page 117).
●
The "Save/Recall" dialog can also be called up with the FILE key and is therefore
described in the section on this key (see ​chapter 5.2.8, "Storing and Loading Instrument Data - File Key", on page 106.
Internal Adjustments
The R&S Signal Generator is extremely accurate thanks to the integrated procedures for
adjustments.
All internal adjustments for which no external measuring equipment is needed can be
started in the "Internal Adjustments..." dialog. The adjustments with external measuring
equipment are described in the Service Manual (on CD ROM, supplied with the instrument).
Adjustment is recommended if the temperature range in which the instrument is operated
changes, or prior to all applications which require maximum level and frequency accuracy.
During adjustment a bar indicates the status of progress. If an error occurs, adjustment
is terminated and an error message is output in the info line.
Risk of invalid adjustment
In order to achieve correct adjustment of the instrument, make sure that the instrument
is warm before performing adjustments. The warm-up time is 30 minutes.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
81
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
General Instrument Settings
Risk of damage to the DUT
High power at the RF output may destroy a connected DUT (Device Under Test).
During level adjustments instruments without step attenuator, i.e. with frequency options
R&S SMB-BxxxL, temporarily apply high power at the RF output. This may damage the
DUT. Therefore, it is required that the RF connector is terminated during adjustment.
Disconnect the DUT and replace it by a 50 Ohm terminating resistor.
To access the "Internal Adjustments" dialog, press the SETUP or MENU key under
"System".
The adjustments offered also depend on the installed options.
Adjust All
Starts all internal adjustments for which no external measuring equipment is needed. The
adjustments with external measuring equipment are described in the Service Manual
(supplied).
Adjustment may take some time. Especially in instruments with frequencies above 6 GHz,
it may last up to 15 minutes.
SCPI command:
​:​CALibration:​ALL[:​MEASure]?​ on page 247
Adjust Synthesis
Performs all adjustments which affect the frequency.
SCPI command:
​:​CALibration<hw>:​FREQuency[:​MEASure]?​ on page 247
Adjust Level
Performs all adjustments which affect the level. The acquired correction values improve
the settling time and the signal quality.
SCPI command:
​:​CALibration<hw>:​LEVel[:​MEASure]?​ on page 247
Adjustment Data
Selects the data used for external level correction.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
82
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
General Instrument Settings
By default the instrument uses correction data obtained in the factory before delivery. In
addition, customer data can be used for external level correction. The customer data is
obtained using a R&S NRP power sensor. External level correction is a protected function
(see Service Manual, chapter 2, "Adjustment").
SCPI command:
​:​CALibration<hw>:​LEVel:​EXTern:​DATA​ on page 248
Adjust Stereo Coder
Performs all adjustments which affect the analog channels of the stereo coder. For the
adjustment of the S/P DIF see Service Manual, chapter 2, "Adjustment".
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​CALibration:​STEReo:​ANALog[:​MEAS]?​ on page 248
5.2.3.2
Hardware Config
In the "Hardware Config" dialog, the installed assemblies together with their variants and
revision states can be displayed for servicing purposes.
To open the "Hardware Config" dialog, select "System" and press the SETUP or
MENU key.
Section "Counter" in the upper part of the menu shows the "Operation Time" (in hours)
and the number of power-on ("Power On Counter").
The second part of the menu is a table that lists the installed assemblies. It is divided into
the sections:
●
"Common Assembly"
●
"RF Assembly"
●
"Baseband Assembly"
Operation Time / h
Displays the operation time in hours.
SCPI command:
​:​DIAGnostic:​INFO:​OTIMe?​ on page 250
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
83
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
General Instrument Settings
Power On Count
Displays the number of power-on.
SCPI command:
​:​DIAGnostic:​INFO:​POCount?​ on page 250
Assembly
The tables list the installed assemblies.
"Assembly"
Assembly name
"Part Number"
Part Number of assembly
"Revision"
Revision state of assembly
SCPI command:
​:​DIAGnostic<hw>:​BGINfo?​ on page 249
5.2.3.3
Software / Options
The "Software/Options" dialog shows the firmware version of the instrument software as
well as all installed hardware and software options.
Software options purchased at a later stage can be activated with a keycode. The activation code is supplied with the software option. How to install options is described in
Chapter 4 of the Service Manual (supplied with the instrument).
The installation of hardware options purchased at a later stage is also described in Chapter 4 of the Service Manual (supplied with the instrument). Most hardware options need
to be installed at an authorized Rohde&Schwarz service shop.
To access the "Software/Options" dialog, select "System" and press the SETUP or
MENU key.
The menu is devided into the following sections:
●
"Firmware"
●
"Hardware Options"
●
"Software Options"
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
84
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
General Instrument Settings
Firmware
The Firmware section of the menu shows the firmware version and the version of the
software platform.
Note: Your instrument is delivered with the latest firmware version available. Firmware
updates as well as the Release Notes describing the improvements and modifications
are provided on the Internet at the download site of the Rohde & Schwarz Signal generator home page. This home page always offers the latest information on your signal generator, e.g. also on changes of the firmware update procedure.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Hardware Options / Software Options
The tables in the sections "Hardware" and "Software" list the installed hardware and
software options.
"Option"
Short name of option
"Designation"
Name of Option
SCPI command:
​*OPT?​ on page 242
​*IDN?​ on page 241
Loaded Modules
Section "Loaded Modules" is provided for service purposes. It lists all loaded software
modules with their versions and offers a short description of each module.
SCPI command:
n.a.
5.2.3.4
Manage License Keys
This dialog is the central dialog for managing licenses, like enabling newly purchased
and/or newly registered options or performing the required instrument related steps during the process of unregistration of licenses.
An option is ready to operate after it is enabled by means of a license key code supplied
with the option. The license key is delivered as a file or on paper. Unregistered licenses
must be registered for a particular instrument prior to the corresponding option can be
enabled for operation.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
85
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
General Instrument Settings
License Registration
If your purchased license is delivered unregistered, you must register it before you can
activate the option.
For detailed information about the license registration, refer to the installation instructions
provided with the option (Supplement A) and the documentation of the online tool "Manage Licenses" (https://extranet.rohde-schwarz.com/service).
Only if the R&S Signal Generator is equipped with an older firmware version, a firmware
update prior to enabling the software option may be required. The information on the valid
firmware versions for the purchased software option is provided together with the option.
The firmware update is described in the service manual, chapter 4 (on CD ROM, supplied
with the instrument).
Device ID
Displays the instrument specific identification number. The device ID is an unique string
with the following structure:
<stock number>-<serial number>-<checksum>
Enter License Key
Type here the license key provided with the option.
For license keys delivered as a file, use ​Import License Key from File....
Import License Key from File...
Opens a dialog for selecting the file with the license key.
Export Deactivation Response to File...
Exports the generated deactivation response key to a file and opens a file management
dialog to save the file. This key is required during the unregistration process.
Status Information
Displays status information.
5.2.3.5
Gui Update
The "Start/Stop Gui Update" dialog provides the possibility to switch off update of the
displayed parameters in order to increase speed for certain settings.
The indicated values are not updated and may therefore differ from the intern, used values.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
86
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
General Instrument Settings
On/Off GUI Update
Switchs on/off update of the displayed parameters.
Switching off the update of the displayed parameters increases the speed for certain
settings.
Note: It is especially recommended to switch off the GUI update for optimum sweep
performance with short dwell times and for fast settling times.
SCPI command:
​:​SYSTem:​DISPlay:​UPDate​ on page 392
5.2.3.6
NRP-Z Info/Update
In the "NRP-Z Info/Update…" dialog, the connected power sensors are indicated together
with their serial number, revision state and features. The software of a connected sensor
can be updated to a new version.
To access the "NRP-Z Info/Update…" dialog, select "System" and press the SETUP or
MENU key.
Current Sensors
Section "Current Sensors" lists the sensors that are connected to the generator and indicates their serial number, the revision state and some features.
Tip: Click on a sensor to get quick information about the firmware version and whether
this sensor measures the peak of the signal.
SCPI command:
​SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​TYPE?​ on page 282
​SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​SVERsion?​ on page 281
​SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​SNUMber?​ on page 280
Update
Section "Update" provides access to the file system in order to select a file for an R&S
NRP sensor update (Button "Select NRP File"), the selected file is indicated to the left of
the button. On the left side, the sensor to be updated is selected.
Button "Run Update" starts the update. If the update is interrupted for example by accidently pulling off the sensor, selection "Rescue" is offered to restart the update process.
Prerequisite is that no other sensor is connected to the instrument.
The procedure is as follows:
● Do not reconnect the sensor but keep it ready to be connected
● Select "Rescue" in the left sensor selection field
● Activate "Run Update"
● Confirm query in message box
● Connect sensor within 4 seconds
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
87
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
General Instrument Settings
The update starts, a bar informs about the progress.
SCPI command:
n.a.
5.2.3.7
Selftest
A selftest is provided for service purposes. The selftest is a protected test procedure,
which can be accessed if protection level 1 is disabled. The protection dialog is called in
the "Setup" menu (see ​chapter 5.2.3.13, "Protection", on page 95).
The following tests are only available via remote control:
●
​:​TEST<hw>:​DIRect​ on page 399
Selftest
Performs a selftest on all installed hardware options.
A list of the performed tests cases and the result of each of them (passed or failed) is
displayed.
SCPI command:
​:​TEST<hw>:​ALL:​STARt​ on page 399
​:​TEST<hw>:​ALL:​RESult?​ on page 399
5.2.3.8
Check Front Panel
The "Check Front Panel" dialog is used to check whether the front panel keys are functioning correctly. The menu displays all the front panel keys arranged in the same way
as on the front panel. The respective function is executed by pressing the associated key.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
88
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
General Instrument Settings
5.2.3.9
Date and Time
The "Date/Time..." dialog provides access to the system time and date settings. It is
opened using the SETUP or MENU key under "Environment". The time is used on the
internal controller.
To prevent accidental changes, "Date" and "Time" are protected functions. They can be
accessed with protection level 1, see ​chapter 5.2.3.13, "Protection", on page 95.
Date
Indicates the date in the format day.month.year.
In order to prevent accidental changes, this parameter is protected. It can be accessed
with protection level 1, ​chapter 5.2.3.13, "Protection", on page 95.
SCPI command:
​:​SYSTem:​DATE​ on page 392
Time
Indicates the time in the format hour.minute.second
In order to prevent accidental changes, this parameter is protected. It can be accessed
with protection level 1, see ​chapter 5.2.3.13, "Protection", on page 95.
SCPI command:
​:​SYSTem:​TIME​ on page 398
5.2.3.10
Network Settings
The "Network Settings" dialog provides access to the network settings. To access this
dialog, press the SETUP or MENU key under "Environment". The R&S SMB is equipped
with a network interface and can be connected to an Ethernet LAN (local area network).
How to connect the signal generator to the network is described in ​chapter 2.6.1, "Connecting the Instrument to the Network", on page 34.
Risk of network errors!
Connecting errors may affect the entire network.
We recommend to coordinate the connection of the instrument to the network with the
network administrator.
Do not connect or disconnect the network cable until the instrument is switched off
(standby). Only then the network connection can be reliably detected and impairments
to instrument operation can be avoided.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
89
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
General Instrument Settings
The dialog provides an access to the network settings, like settings about the general
network environment and specific identification of the computer in the network, as well
as an indication whether the instrument is connected to the network or not.
Network Status
Indicates whether the instrument is connected to the network or not.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Hostname
Enters the individual computer name of the R&S Signal Generator.
Note: The computer name can only be changed after protection level 1 is deactivated
(see ​chapter 5.2.3.13, "Protection", on page 95).
A predefined name is indicated and can be used for network connections.
SCPI command:
​:​SYSTem:​COMMunicate:​NETWork[:​COMMon]:​HOSTname​ on page 388
Workgroup
Enters the individual windows workgroup name of the R&S Signal Generator. This
parameter is necessary in case the instrument is integrated in a windows network.
Note: The workgroup can only be changed after protection level 1 is deactivated (see ​
chapter 5.2.3.13, "Protection", on page 95).
SCPI command:
​:​SYSTem:​COMMunicate:​NETWork[:​COMMon]:​WORKgroup​ on page 388
Address Mode
Selects if the IP address is assigned automatically or manually.
"Auto (DHCP)"
The IP address is assigned automatically.
The network used must support automatic assignment of IP address
via DHCP or APIPA (Zeroconf) in order to use this function.
"Static"
The IP address is assigned manually.
SCPI command:
​:​SYSTem:​COMMunicate:​NETWork:​IPADdress:​MODE​ on page 388
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
90
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
General Instrument Settings
IP Address
Displays the IP address. To enter the IP address manually, select "Static" Address Mode.
SCPI command:
​:​SYSTem:​COMMunicate:​NETWork:​IPADdress​ on page 389
Subnet Mask
Displays the Subnet mask. To enter the Subnet mask manually, select "Static" Address
Mode.
This number is used together with the IP address to identify the network segment the
instrument is in.
SCPI command:
​:​SYSTem:​COMMunicate:​NETWork[:​IPADdress]:​SUBNet:​MASK​ on page 389
Default Gateway
Displays the IP address of the default gateway. To enter the default gateway manually,
select "Static" Address Mode.
This address identifies the router on the same network as the instrument that is used to
forward traffic to destinations beyond the local network.
SCPI command:
​:​SYSTem:​COMMunicate:​NETWork[:​IPADdress]:​GATeway​ on page 389
Restart Network
Shuts down the network connection of the instrument and subsequently re-establishes
the connection.
This function can be used to resolve network problems.
Note: Only the connection of the instrument to the network restarts, the network itself is
not affected.
SCPI command:
n.a.
5.2.3.11
Display/Keyboard Settings
In the "Display/Keyboard Settings" menu the power-save mode and external keyboard
settings are made. It is opened using the SETUP or MENU key under "Environment".
Screen Saver Active
Activates/deactivates the screen-save mode of the display.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
91
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
General Instrument Settings
If activated, the display including backlight is completely switched off after the elapse of
the "Wait Time" when no entries via front panel, external mouse or external keyboard are
made.
This mode is recommended for preserving the display especially if the instrument is
exclusively operated via remote control.
SCPI command:
​:​DISPlay:​PSAVe[:​STATe]​ on page 252
Wait Time
Enters the idle time that must elapse before the display lamp is shut off when no entries
are made.
SCPI command:
​:​DISPlay:​PSAVe:​HOLDoff​ on page 252
Toggle Summary Screen
Activates/deactivates the magnified frequency and level indication. If activated, the frequency and level indication covers the complete display.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Layout (Keyboard)
Selects the keyboard layout for the selected keyboard language.
The assignment of some keys depends on the selected layout and language.
SCPI command:
​:​KBOard:​LAYout?​ on page 262
​:​KBOard:​LANGuage​ on page 261
5.2.3.12
Remote Channel Settings
The "Remote Channel Settings" dialog provides access to the settings for remote control.
The dialog is opened using the SETUP or MENU key under "Remote".
Besides the standard GPIB-setting, the selection of one of the possible emulations and
a user defined definition of the *IDN and *OPT string is possible.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
92
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
General Instrument Settings
Language
Selects the instrument whose remote command set is emulated by the R&S SMB.
The R&S SMB can also be remote controlled via the command set of several other generators, e.g. of an HP generator. You find the available command sets for the generator
in the selection list. This feature allows to replace a generator by an R&S SMB in existing
test setups. Refer to the corresponding Application Note at the download area of the
product site on the Internet. The Application Note is also provided on the user documentation CD-ROM (included in delivery).
The selected instrument also defines the identification string that is retrieved with query
*IDN?. If required, use the parameter ​"Mode" and ​"IDN String" to change this string.
As any other parameter, the remote control command set can also be changed remotely
by means of the SCPI command SYST:LANG. However, this remote control command is
enabled only in the instrument's specific SCPI command set, i.e. it is possible to change
the command set remotely from the original one (SYST:LANG SCPI) to the command
set to be emulated but not vice versa.
Note: While working in an emulation mode, the R&S SMB specific command set is disabled, i.e. the SCPI command SYST:LANG will be discarded.
To return to the SCPI command set of the R&S SMB, use the appropriate command of
the selected command set. If for example a HP generator is emulated, the HP command
EX returns to the instrument-specific GPIB command set.
SCPI command:
​:​SYSTem:​LANGuage​ on page 396
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
93
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
General Instrument Settings
Identification Mode
Selects the way the instrument identification is performed.
"Automatic"
The "IDN String" and the "OPT String" are set automatically for the
instrument select with the parameter "Language".
"User Defined"
Enables the selection of user definable "IDN String" and "OPT String"
for the instrument selected with the parameter "Language".
SCPI command:
​:​SYSTem:​IDENtification​ on page 395
Set to default
Overwrites the user-defined *IDN and *OPT strings with default strings.
The default strings vary depending on the selected emulation mode (​Language)
SCPI command:
n.a.
IDN String
Indicates the identification string of the instrument when queried with the common command *IDN?.
In addition to the preset values, a user defined identification string can be entered, e.g.
to provide individual identification for each generator, like 'MY_R&S SMB' for instance.
SCPI command:
*IDN?
OPT String
Indicates the option string of the instrument as queried with common command *OPT?.
If a "User Defined" ​Identification Mode is selected, a user defined option string can be
created, additionally to the automatically created one.
SCPI command:
*OPT?
GPIB channel address
Sets the GPIB address of the instrument.
SCPI command:
​:​SYSTem:​COMMunicate:​GPIB[:​SELF]:​ADDRess​ on page 387
RS232 using USB adapter
Requires a USB serial adapter (recommended extra, see data sheet)
Sets the parameters of the serial interface.
Either a RS232 interface or a Bluetooth connection can be used for remote control via
the serial interface. The settings are effective for both interfaces (see also ​chapter 5.2.3.14, "Security", on page 96).
SCPI command:
​:​SYSTem:​COMMunicate:​SERial:​BAUD​ on page 391
​:​SYSTem:​COMMunicate:​SERial:​PARity​ on page 391
​:​SYSTem:​COMMunicate:​SERial:​SBITs​ on page 391
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
94
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
General Instrument Settings
Visa Resource Strings
Indicates the visa resource strings, used for remote control of the instrument. A separate
string is provided for remote control via the different interfaces.
SCPI command:
​:​SYSTem:​COMMunicate:​HISLip:​RESource​ on page 387
​:​SYSTem:​COMMunicate:​NETWork:​RESource​ on page 390
​:​SYSTem:​COMMunicate:​SOCKet:​RESource?​ on page 391
​:​SYSTem:​COMMunicate:​GPIB:​RESource?​ on page 390
​:​SYSTem:​COMMunicate:​USB:​RESource?​ on page 390
​:​SYSTem:​COMMunicate:​SERial:​RESource?​ on page 390
Local (Remote Channel Settings)
Switches the instrument to operate in local control mode.
Switching from remote to local control mode can be also done with one of the following
actions:
● manually with the LOCAL key on the front panel
● with the interface command &GTL via the remote-control interface
● with the key combination CTRL + Q.
SCPI command:
&GTL
5.2.3.13
Protection
This "Protection" dialog provides access to the unlocking of different protection levels.
To open this dialog, use the SETUP or MENU key under "Protection".
After the instrument has been switched on, the protection levels 1 to 5 are automatically
activated. To deactivate the protection, the correct password has to be entered. With the
corresponding check boxes, you can activate the protection again.
The following functions are protected in the rerspective levels:
●
Protection Level 1
protects against accidental changes to certain settings, such as clock and date, network settings or instrument names,etc. This level is accessible to the user.
●
Protection Level 2
provides access to the unlocking of protected service functions. It is accessible to
authorized personnel of R&S Service Departments only.
●
Protection Level 3-5
are reserved for factory internal use.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
95
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
General Instrument Settings
Protection Level/Password
Protection Level 1 can be activated to expand the functionality of the internal adjustment
and to access the selftests.
The password is 123456.
For access to service functions of protection level 2, see the service manual of your R&S
SMB.
SCPI command:
​:​SYSTem:​PROTect<ch>[:​STATe]​ on page 397
5.2.3.14
Security
The "Security" dialog provides access to the passwords and mass storage security settings. To open this menu, use the SETUP or MENU key under "Protection".
The menu is divided into the password sections and the security settings section. In the
password section, the passwords for securing a controlled access to the instrument are
defined and changed.
A change of passwords for the operating system and security password requires the entry
of the old and new password and the conformation of the new password. All settings are
only accepted after the "Change Password" button is pressed.
User Name
Indicates the user name used for access to the Linux operating system and valid for VNC,
FTP and SAMBA access.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
96
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
General Instrument Settings
The user name and password are required for remote access to the instrument via VNC,
FTP or SAMBA.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Old Password (User Password)
Enters the currently used user password. The default password is "instrument".
Note: It is highly recommended to change the default user password before connecting
the instrument to the network.
New Password (User Password)
Enters the new security password.
The security password may contain decimal characters only.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Confirm Password (User Password)
Enters the new password for conformation.
The new password is only valid after the "Change Password" button is pressed.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Change Password (User Password)
Changes the password accordingly.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Old Password (Security Password)
Enters the currently used security password. The default password is '123456'.
Note: It is highly recommended to change the default security password before connecting the instrument to the network.
The security password is required when changing the status of the USB and LAN interface.
SCPI command:
n.a.
New Password (Security Password)
Enters the new security password.
The security password may contain decimal characters only.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Confirm Password (Security Password)
Enters the new password for conformation.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
97
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
General Instrument Settings
The new password is only valid after the "Change Password" button is pressed.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Change Password (Security Password)
Changes the password accordingly.
SCPI command:
n.a.
LAN Services
Opens the "LAN Services" dialog for individually enabling or disabling the available LAN
interface services.
Enable LAN Interface ← LAN Services
Enables the LAN interface in general, and thus provides remote access via all unlocked
services.
The settings in this dialog require the entry of the ​Security Password, and are only
accepted after the ​Accept - Security button is pressed.
Enable LAN Services individually ← LAN Services
Enables or disables the following interface services individually.
"SCPI over
LAN"
activates access over LAN to remotely control the instrument using
SCPI (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments) commands.
"VNC"
activates access via VNC (Virtual Network Computing) interface, a
graphical desktop sharing system that uses RFB protocol to remotely
control the instrument.
"SSH"
activates access via SSH (Secure Shell), a network protocol for secure
data communication.
"HTTP"
activates access via HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer Protocol), the application protocol for hypermedia information systems.
"FTP"
activates access via FTP (File Transfer Protocol), used to transfer files
from a host to the instrument and vice versa.
"SMB
(Samba)"
activates access to SMB (Server Message Block), used for providing
shared access to files, printers and serial ports of a network.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
98
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
General Instrument Settings
"Avahi (Zeroconf)"
activates Avahi, a service for automatic configuration of the instrument
in a network environment.
SCPI command:
n.a.
USB Storage
Activates the access to external USB storage media.
This setting has no effect on a mouse or a keyboard, connected via USB.
The setting requires the entry of the security password and is only accepted after the
"Accept" button is pressed.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Annotation Frequency
Enables/disables the display of the currently used frequency in the header of the instrument.
The setting requires the entry of the security password and is only accepted after the
"Accept" button is pressed.
SCPI command:
​:​DISPlay:​ANNotation:​FREQuency​ on page 251
Annotation Amplitude
Enables/disables the display of the currently selected level in the header of the instrument.
The setting requires the entry of the security password and is only accepted after the
"Accept" button is pressed.
SCPI command:
​:​DISPlay:​ANNotation:​AMPLitude​ on page 251
Display
Enables/disables the display.
If this parameter is disabled, the instrument cannot be operated manually via the user
interface, i.e. display, front panel keys and external keyboard are disabled. Remote control of the insrument is enabled.
The setting requires the entry of the security password and is only accepted after the
"Accept" button is pressed.
SCPI command:
​:​SYSTem:​DLOCk​ on page 392
Keyboard
Enables/disables an external keyboard and mouse connected to the instrument, the front
pannel keys of the instrument, the rotary knob and the on-screen keyboard.
If this parameter is disabled, the instrument cannot be manually controlled but changes
in the settings are shown on the display. Remote access and remote control are enabled.
The setting requires the entry of the security password and is only accepted after the
"Accept" button is pressed.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
99
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
General Instrument Settings
To enable the keyboard, type the security password on the external keyboard or use the
SYST:KLOC OFF command over remote control.
SCPI command:
​:​SYSTem:​KLOCk​ on page 395
Security Password
Enters the password that is required to enable or to disable the settings protected by a
security password. Default is '123456'.
Note: It is highly recommended to change the default security password before connecting the instrument to the network.
All settings are only accepted after the "Accept" button is pressed.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Accept - Security
Accepts a new entry or selection and changes the settings accordingly.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Bluetooth Pin
Requires a USB Bluetooth adapter (recommended extra, see data sheet).
Enters the Bluetooth pin of an external Bluetooth device. The pin is required to enable
remote control via an external Bluetooth device.
SCPI command:
n.a.
5.2.3.15
Save/Recall
The "Save/Recall" submenu can also be called up with the FILE key and is therefore
described in the section of this key (see ​chapter 5.2.8, "Storing and Loading Instrument
Data - File Key", on page 106).
5.2.3.16
Factory Preset
The "Factory Preset" dialog provides a function to reset the instrument's settings to their
factory state. This function is activated by pressing the "Execute Factory Preset" button.
Factory Preset
Reset the instrument's settings to their factory state.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
100
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
General Instrument Settings
Note: Since Factory Preset resets the Remote Channel and network settings to the
default values, executing Factory Preset via remote control terminates the connection to
the instrument, if these settings had been configured to values different to the default
ones!
The factory preset function resets nearly all instrument settings. In addition to the regular
preset by means of the PRESET key, a "Factory Preset" resets also the following values:
● Reference frequency settings ("Ref Oscillator" menu)
● Power on settings ("Level/EMF" menu)
● Network settings including hostname ("Setup" menu)
● Remote Channel settings including GPIB address ("Setup" menu)
● Start/Stop Gui Update ("Setup" menu)
● Display and keyboard settings ("Setup" menu).
To maintain security, password settings and all settings protected by these passwords
like disabled USB and LAN connections are not changed.
Not affected by the "Factory Preset" are also user data, lists or instrument settings files,
created for example by means of the Save/Recall function.
SCPI command:
​:​SYSTem:​FPReset​ on page 246
5.2.3.17
Help
The "Help" dialog offers comprehensive online help for the R&S Signal Generator. A
desired topic can be selected via the table of contents (select "Manual") or the index
(select "Index").
For context-sensitive information about a marked parameter, press the HELP key. For a
description of the "Help" menu, refer to the section covering to the HELP key (see ​chapter 5.2.7, "Help System - Help Key", on page 105).
5.2.4 Switching to Manual Control - Local Key
In remote control mode a status message appears in the display header. The rest of the
display remains unchanged and shows the current instrument status, i.e. the status which
exists under the remote control settings. The instrument can be operated (e.g. menus
can be opened). However, it is not possible to enter or change values.
The status message additionally indicates whether the LOCAL key is disabled or enabled.
If the "REMOTE" status message is shown, the LOCAL key switches the instrument from
remote control to manual control. The current command must be fully processed before
the mode is switched, otherwise the instrument switches immediately back to remote
control.
If the "REM-LLO" status message is displayed, the instrument can be switched from
remote control to manual control by means of remote control only (e.g. with the Visual
Basic command CALL IBLOC (generator%)); the LOCAL key is disabled. The key is
disabled by remote control with the command LLO.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
101
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
General Instrument Settings
When switching from remote to manual control, the display update suppression function,
if active ("SETUP > GUI Update" is Off), is automatically deactivated ("SETUP > GUI
Update" is On).
5.2.5 Generating a Hard Copy of the Display
The generation of a hardcopy of the display requires that an external keyboard is connected to the instrument. The hardcopy dialog is called with the key combination CTRL
+Z or CTRL+Y depending on the used keyboard settings.
5.2.5.1
Hardcopy Dialog
Destination
Indicates that the hardcopy is stored in a file (see also ​"File Options" on page 103).
SCPI command:
​:​HCOPy:​DEVice​ on page 255
Options
Opens the Hardcopy Options dialog for configuring the hardcopy parameters (see ​"File
Options" on page 103.
SCPI command:
n.a.
File
Some configuration parameters are already offered in the Hardcopy dialog. All configuration parameters are available in ​"File Options" on page 103.
Automatic Naming
Activates, deactivates automatic generation of the file name. Automatic naming is configured in the "Options…" submenu, see ​"File Options" on page 103.
SCPI command:
​:​HCOPy:​FILE[:​NAME]:​AUTO:​STATe​ on page 260
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
102
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
General Instrument Settings
File Info
Indicates the file name. The file name can be entered either manually via the file manager
(button "File…") or generated automatically (Automatic naming checkbox). Automatic
naming is configured in the "Options…" submenu.
SCPI command:
​:​HCOPy:​FILE[:​NAME]​ on page 256
​:​HCOPy:​FILE[:​NAME]:​AUTO:​FILE?​ on page 257
5.2.5.2
Hardcopy Options
This section describes the "Hardcopy Options" dialog.
File Options
Dialog for setting the file parameters.
"Size"
Defines the size of the bitmap in terms of pixels. The first value of the
size setting defines the width, the second value the height of the image.
SCPI command:
​:​HCOPy:​IMAGe:​SIZE​ on page 261
"Format"
Selects the image format. Several bitmap formats are available.
SCPI command:
​:​HCOPy:​DEVice:​LANGuage​ on page 255
"Automatic
Naming"
Determines the rules to create the file names and sets the directory the
files are saved into.
As default the automatically generated file name is composed of:
<Path>/<Prefix><YYYY><MM><DD><Number>.<Format>
Each component can be deactivated/activated separately to individually design the file name. The resulting file name is indicated.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
103
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
General Instrument Settings
"Path..."
Opens the "Select Hard Copy Destination Path" dialog to select a path
for storing the hardcopy.
Note: For selecting the destination path a file name must be entered
as well. Otherwise the error message "The name of a list may not be
empty" is displayed and the selection will be canceled.
Directory, path and file name are displayed in the infoline right to the
"Path" button.
SCPI command:
​:​HCOPy:​FILE[:​NAME]:​AUTO:​DIRectory​ on page 257
​:​HCOPy:​FILE[:​NAME]:​AUTO?​ on page 256
"Clear Path"
Deletes all image files with extensions bmp, img, png, xpm and csv in
the directory set for automatic naming.
Before deleting the image files a warning message is displayed requiring the confirmation.
SCPI command:
​:​HCOPy:​FILE[:​NAME]:​AUTO:​DIRectory:​CLEar​ on page 257
"Prefix"
Activates the usage of the prefix in the automatic file name. The prefix
is entered in the field to the right of checkbox.
SCPI command:
​:​HCOPy:​FILE[:​NAME]:​AUTO[:​FILE]:​PREFix:​STATe​ on page 260
"Enter prefix"
Enters the prefix for the automatically generated file name. The use of
the prefix is activated in the checkbox to the left.
SCPI command:
​:​HCOPy:​FILE[:​NAME]:​AUTO[:​FILE]:​PREFix​ on page 259
"Date - Year /
Month / Day"
Defines the components of the automatically generated file name. The
selectable parameters are year, month and day. If activated the current
year, month or day used in the file name.
SCPI command:
​:​HCOPy:​FILE[:​NAME]:​AUTO[:​FILE]:​YEAR:​STATe​ on page 260
​:​HCOPy:​FILE[:​NAME]:​AUTO[:​FILE]:​MONTh:​STATe​ on page 259
​:​HCOPy:​FILE[:​NAME]:​AUTO[:​FILE]:​DAY:​STATe​ on page 258
"Current Auto
Number"
Indicates the number which is used in the automatically generated file
name.
Note: On initially switching on the device the number will be reset to
the lowest possible value. Starting with number 0 the output directory
will be scanned for already existing files. As long as files with the same
name are existing the number will be increased by 1. The number will
be automatically set to a number so that the resulting file name will be
unique within the selected path. The current number will not be saved
in the save recall file but will be temporarily stored within the database.
On subsequent saves the number will be increased.
SCPI command:
​:​HCOPy:​FILE[:​NAME]:​AUTO[:​FILE]:​NUMBer?​ on page 259
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
104
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
General Instrument Settings
"Resulting File
Name"
Indicates the automatically generated file name.
SCPI command:
​:​HCOPy:​FILE[:​NAME]:​AUTO:​FILE?​ on page 257
Save
Triggers the generation of a hardcopy.
SCPI command:
​:​HCOPy[:​EXECute]​ on page 256
5.2.6 Messages - Info Key
The INFO key opens a window containing a detailed description of every message displayed in the info bar, see ​chapter 4.2.3, "Info Window", on page 58 and ​chapter 9, "Error
Messages", on page 431.
5.2.7 Help System - Help Key
The HELP key opens a browser window containing a context-sensitive description of the
highlighted parameter.
The context-sensitive page which is opened with the HELP key is part of a comprehensive
help system. It is possible to move from this context-sensitive page to any page of the
help system. The following navigation aids are available:
●
Internal links in the text
They open pages which are directly linked to the described function. In this way it is
possible, for example, to call up the description of the GPIB command for any particular function.
●
Previous/Next links
The Previous/Next links allow scroll through the help pages. The sequence of the
described functions corresponds to their position in the menus.
●
Back button
The Back button calls up the page last viewed.
●
Contents in the navigation panel
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
105
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
General Instrument Settings
The contents list is used to open the individual help pages. It has a hierarchical structure. The highlighted line indicates where the currently displayed page is within the
contents list.
●
Index in the navigation panel
The index is used to call up all pages which contain the selected entry. The index has
an alphabetical structure and also contains all GPIB commands.
●
Find
The find function allows you to look for freely selectable terms in all help pages. A list
of the pages containing the entered term is displayed as the search result. The search
can be limited to words in the page title to increase the number of hits.
5.2.8 Storing and Loading Instrument Data - File Key
The R&S SMB allows complete instrument settings to be stored in files either on the
internal flash memory or on external USB memory devices.
Defined and complex instrument settings can then be reproduced at any time by loading
this data. If required, these settings can be loaded to various signal generators.
The corresponding menu is available under "Save/Recall" in the "Setup" menu. The
instrument settings are saved in files which can be stored in data directories.
Additionally there are intermediate memories in which the current instrument setting can
be stored and then called up again by just pressing a key. This provides fast switching
between different instrument settings.
Only settings which differ from the preset values and configuration data for the operating
elements (e.g. window positions) are stored. As a result the files remain relatively small.
Furthermore, instrument settings can easily be transferred between different equipped
signal generators since the files contain only relevant information. When loaded, the referenced settings are implemented and all non-referenced parameters are set to the
associated preset values.
If list data is part of the instrument settings, e.g. a list of user correction data, a reference
to this list is stored, not the list itself. The list is reactivated when the associated settings
are loaded, but the list may have been modified or deleted in the meantime or may not
be available on a different instrument. If the list has been modified, the new entries will
be used. An error message appears if an attempt is made to access a non-existing list
or to activate settings which are not supported by the instrument.
●
Network settings and remote settings are not saved and restored.
●
Lists are stored and loaded in the appropriate menus. For example, the user correction data list is created and stored in the "User Correction" menu.
When loading an instrument setting, it is possible to select whether the current frequency
and level setting is to be retained or whether the stored settings are to be activated. It is
possible to delete stored instrument settings. A file can be copied by loading it with
"Recall" and then storing it under a new name.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
106
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
General Instrument Settings
Settings can be transferred easily between instruments with different equipment options
and/or firmware versions because only the settings which differ from the preset values
are affected. When settings are loaded, only those which are possible on the instrument
are implemented. Error messages indicate the settings which cannot be implemented.
The stored file is transferred from one instrument to another using the memory stick.
General file management functions such as copying and moving data are available in the
"File Manager" dialog.
5.2.8.1
File Menu
The settings available in the File menu "Save/Recall" depend on the operation selected
under "Select Operation".
For more information, see ​chapter 4.7.1, "File Select Dialog", on page 72.
Select Operation
Selects the file function.
5.2.8.2
"Save…"
Calls the menu for storing the current instrument setting (see ​chapter 5.2.8.2, "Storing Instrument Settings", on page 107).
"Recall..."
Calls the menu for calling up a stored instrument setting (see ​chapter 5.2.8.3, "Loading Instrument Settings", on page 108).
Storing Instrument Settings
If "Save" is selected under "Select Operation", the File menu provides options for storing
the current instrument setting in a file.
Recent files
Displays the files last used.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
107
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
General Instrument Settings
Directory
Selects the directory in which the file is to be stored.
The window opposite lists all settings files in this directory.
A new directory can be created in the "File Manager" dialog.
SCPI command:
​:​MMEMory:​CDIRectory​ on page 266
File List
Displays the files which are in the selected directory.
If a file is highlighted, it is overwritten when the file is stored.
SCPI command:
​:​MMEMory:​CATalog?​ on page 265
File Name
Enter the file name of the file without file extension. This file is then created.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Save
Stores the current instrument settings under the specified path.
SCPI command:
​*SAV​ on page 243
​:​MMEMory:​STORe:​STATe​ on page 270
Save Immediate x
Stores the current instrument setting in one of the three intermediate memories.
These instrument settings are retained until a different instrument setting is stored in the
intermediate memory. When the instrument is switched off, the contents of the intermediate memories are retained.
SCPI command:
​*SAV​ on page 243
File Manager
Calls the "File Management" menu.
Directories can be created and files managed in this menu (see ​chapter 5.2.8.4, "File
Manager", on page 110).
SCPI command:
n.a.
5.2.8.3
Loading Instrument Settings
If "Recall" is selected under "Select Operation", the "File" menu provides options for
loading complete instrument settings. Here it is possible to select whether the current or
stored frequency and level settings are to be used.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
108
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
General Instrument Settings
Recent data sets
Displays the files last used. The entire path is shown.
If the desired file is in the list, it can be selected.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Directory
Enter the directory in which the file with the instrument setting to be loaded is located.
The "Selected file" window lists all the files in this directory.
SCPI command:
​:​MMEMory:​CDIRectory​ on page 266
File List
Selects the file with the desired instrument configuration.
SCPI command:
​:​MMEMory:​CATalog?​ on page 265
Exclude Frequency
The current frequency is retained when a stored instrument setting is loaded.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FREQuency[:​CW|:​FIXed]:​RCL​ on page 300
Exclude Level
The current level is retained when a stored instrument setting is loaded.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer[:​LEVel][:​IMMediate]:​RCL​ on page 337
Recall
Load the selected configuration.
If an instrument setting in which a sweep was activated is stored, the sweep is started
when the recall command is called.
If an instrument setting which accesses lists is stored, this list is also loaded.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
109
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
General Instrument Settings
If the list has been deleted in the meantime, an error message appears when the instrument setting is loaded. If the list has been overwritten in the meantime, the new entries
will be used.
SCPI command:
​:​MMEMory:​LOAD:​STATe​ on page 269
​*RCL​ on page 243
Recall Immediate x
Loads the selected configuration from one of the three intermediate memories.
If an instrument setting in which a sweep was activated is stored, the sweep is started
when the recall command is called.
If an instrument setting which accesses lists is stored, this list is also loaded.
If the list has been deleted in the meantime, an error message appears when the instrument setting is loaded. If the list has been overwritten in the meantime, the new entries
will be used.
A message appears if no instrument configuration is stored in this memory.
SCPI command:
​*RCL​ on page 243
5.2.8.4
File Manager
The "File Management" dialog provides all the functions required for file management.
Directories can be created, and files copied, deleted and moved between the directories
on the devices (internal flash memory and memory stick).
For more information, see ​chapter 4.7.2, "File Manager", on page 73.
File Type
Selects the file types to be indicated. If a file type with a specific file extension is selected
only files with this extension are indicated in the selected directory.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
110
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
General Instrument Settings
Directory and File Name
Selects the directory in which the file to be deleted or copied is located. The window lists
all files in this directory. The file to be deleted or copied can be highlighted. The path is
indicated above the directory window.
SCPI command:
​:​MMEMory:​CDIRectory​ on page 266
Cut
Cuts the selected file. It can be pasted into a different directory using the "Paste" button.
SCPI command:
​:​MMEMory:​DELete​ on page 268
Copy
Copies the selected file. It can be pasted into a different or the same directory using the
"Paste" button. When pasting the file into the same directory file name
Copy of <file name> is given automatically. When pasting the file into a different
directory, the original file name is kept.
SCPI command:
​:​MMEMory:​COPY​ on page 267
Paste
Pastes the file that has been copied or cut before.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Rename
Renames the selected file or directory. The new name can be entered in the "New Filename" dialog.
SCPI command:
​:​MMEMory:​MOVE​ on page 269
Delete
Deletes the selected file. Before the file is deleted, a message appears prompting the
user to confirm deletion of the file.
SCPI command:
​:​MMEMory:​DELete​ on page 268
Create New Directory
Creates a new directory. The name of the new directory can be entered in the "New
Directory" dialog.
Note: When the subdirectory is entered, it is possible to enter an absolute path name
(e.g. /var/USER/MEAS) or the path relative to the current directory (e.g. ../MEAS).
The directory is created as a subdirectory in the selected level.
SCPI command:
​:​MMEMory:​MDIRectory​ on page 269
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
111
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
RF Block
5.3 RF Block
5.3.1 Overview of RF Signal
Settings for the RF output signal and analog modulation are made under "RF Signal".
These settings can be accessed in the block diagram by way of the "RF" function block,
or by means of the menu with the same name which is opened using the MENU key.
The function block is available for the basic unit (R&S SMB + frequency option R&S SMBB10x) without additional equipment options.
5.3.1.1
RF Output
To activate and deactivate the RF output signal, use one of the following alternatives:
●
by means of the RF ON/OFF key (the current entry focus is irrelevant)
●
by changing the state of the "RF" functional block (see ​"State RF" on page 112)
●
by enabling/disabling the RF in the "Configure" menu of the "RF" block (see ​"RF
Output State" on page 113).
The current state of the RF output (activated and deactivated) is indicated in the block
diagram by means of the different block color and the status of the "On" checkbox.
An active sweep is also indicated in the block.
To query the impedance of the RF outputs, use the command ​:​OUTPut<hw>:​
IMPedance?​ on page 273.
State RF
Activated/deactivates the RF output by changing the state of the "RF" functional block.
Alternatively, the RF ON/OFF key can be used.
SCPI command:
​:​OUTPut<hw>[:​STATe]​ on page 274
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
112
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
RF Block
RF Output State
Activated/deactivates the RF output by enabling/disabling the RF in the "Configure" dialog of the "RF" block.
SCPI command:
​:​OUTPut<hw>[:​STATe]​ on page 274
5.3.1.2
RF Signal Modes and Characteristics
●
CW
The RF signal is generated with the set frequency and level. This is the default mode.
●
Sweep
The RF signal is generated as a sweep with the set parameters.
It is not possible to activate frequency, level and LF sweep simultaneously.
●
List Mode
The RF signal is generated on the basis of a list of predefined frequency and level
values. The duration of the individual steps can be predefined.
Instruments connected downstream can be taken into consideration when setting the
frequency and level by entering a frequency and/or level offset.
Automatic level control ("ALC") ensures maximum level accuracy.
User-specific lists which contain level correction values for any frequency range ("User
Correction") can be created to, for example, compensate the cable attenuation in a test
assembly setup.
The R&S Signal Generator generates the RF signal in unmodulated or analog form. The
signal generator is equipped therefore with the following sources for analog modulations:
●
an internal LF generator
●
an internal pulse generator
●
the external modulation inputs MOD EXT and PULSE EXT.
An external trigger signal for the analog modulations, the sweeps and the LIST mode can
be provided at the INST TRIG input.
The input REF IN is used to input an external instrument reference, and the output REF
OUT serves as the output of the reference frequency (internal or external).
5.3.2 RF Frequency
The value of the RF frequency is displayed in the header of the instrument's display
("Freq"). This field provides the direct input of the RF frequency. Alternatively, you can
enter the RF frequency in the "Frequency/Phase" dialog.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
113
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
RF Block
Be aware that the displayed RF frequency in the header, and the RF output frequency,
entered in the "Frequency/Phase" dialog can be different, as explained in the following
section.
5.3.2.1
RF Frequency vs. RF Output Frequency
The signal generator offers the possibility, to take additional frequency modifications of
a downstream instrument into consideration, such as an offset set by a mixer, or a multiple
of the frequency by a frequency multiplier. The R&S SMB indicates the resulting frequency, including offset and multiplication factor in the header of the screen. I.e. the
indicated frequency corresponds to the frequency at the output of the downstream instrument. However, the frequency at the RF output of your signal generator always corresponds to the frequency set in the "Frequency/Phase" dialog.
In this dialog, you can also enter the values of the downstream instrument.
A set frequency offset is indicated by the "FREQ OFFSET" status message.
The correlation between the RF frequency, the RF output frequency and the frequency
offset is as follows:
"Freq" (in header) = "RF output frequency" (Frequency in dialog) * "Multiplier" factor
(Multiplier in dialog) + "Freq offset" (Offset in dialog)
If you have the R&S SMB equipped with one of the options R&S SMB-B112, -B120, or B140, you can, in addition, operate an R&S SMZxx frequency multiplier. xx represents
the multiplier type that you can use according to the target frequency range.
5.3.2.2
Setting the RF Frequency
To change the RF frequency, press the FREQ key and enter the desired frequency.
Changes to the RF frequency have an immediate effect (without confirmation with the
ENTER key) on the output signal.
RF Freq
Enters the RF frequency, considering the frequency offset.
Note: The SCPI command sets the level of the "Freq" display, i.e. an entered frequency
offset and multiplier factor are taken into consideration in the frequency value.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FREQuency[:​CW|:​FIXed]​ on page 299
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
114
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
RF Block
5.3.2.3
RF Frequency Dialog
In the combined "Frequency/Phase" dialog, you can enter the frequency, the frequency
offset and multiplication factor of a downstream instrument, set the step width for the
frequency entry using the rotary knob, and set the phase for the RF output signal.
To open the "RF Frequency / Phase" dialog, select "RF" > "Configure" > "Frequency" or
use the MENU key under "RF".
The "RF Frequency / Phase" dialog is divided into the several sections.
Frequency and offset of the RF output signal are set in the "Frequency Settings" section
in the upper part of the dialog. In addition, the multiplier factor of an externally connected
multiplier is specified.
The step width which is used when setting the frequency using the rotary knob (with
"Variation Active On") is set in the "User Variation" section.
The phase of the output signal can be changed in the "Phase Settings" section. The
"Phase Settings" menu is described in ​chapter 5.3.3, "Phase", on page 116.
Frequency Settings
The frequency, offset and multiplier factor are set in the top section of the menu.
Frequency - RF Signal
Sets the RF frequency of the RF output connector. The frequency entered and displayed
here corresponds to the frequency at the RF output, i.e. any offset entry is not taken into
consideration.
Note: The SCPI command SOUR:FREQ sets the frequency of the "FREQ" display, i.e.
the frequency containing offset.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Offset - RF Signal
Sets the frequency offset relative to the RF frequency. The frequency offset of a downstream instrument (e.g. a mixer) is entered.
The entry does not change the value of the RF frequency at the RF output. It only changes
the RF frequency displayed in the display header. The value of the RF frequency in the
header corresponds to the frequency at the output of the downstream instrument.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FREQuency:​OFFSet​ on page 302
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
115
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
RF Block
Multiplier - RF Signal
Sets the multiplication factor for the RF frequency.
In the frequency field of the status bar, the instrument adjusts its frequency display
according to the set multiplication factor. This frequency value shows the frequency at
the output of the downstream multiplier. The entry does not change the RF frequency at
the RF output of the R&S SMB.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FREQuency:​MULTiplier​ on page 302
User Variation
If the frequency is set using the rotary knob, the step width is defined in the "User Variation" section.
Variation Active - RF Signal
Activates the user-defined step width used when varying the frequency value with the
rotary knob.
"ON"
The frequency value set with the rotary knob is varied using the userdefined step width which is entered under "Variation Step".
"OFF"
The frequency value set with the rotary knob is varied in steps of one
unit at the cursor position (standard operating mode).
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FREQuency:​STEP:​MODE​ on page 305
Variation Step - RF Signal
Sets the user-defined step width. This step width is used when entering the RF frequency
using the rotary knob. Frequency variation with this step width must also be activated
with "Variation Active".
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FREQuency:​STEP[:​INCRement]​ on page 304
5.3.3 Phase
The phase of the RF output signal can be changed in the "Phase Settings" section of the
"RF Frequency/Phase" dialog.
5.3.3.1
Phase Settings
To open the "RF Frequency/Phase" menu, select "RF" > "Configure" >"Frequency /
Phase" or use the MENU key under "RF".
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
116
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
RF Block
Delta Phase - RF Signal
Sets the phase of the RF signal. The current phase of the signal is used as the reference.
This function allows, for example, the phase of the output signal to be synchronized with
the phase of a signal from a second signal generator.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PHASe​ on page 329
Reset Delta Phase Display - RF Signal
Resets delta phase value. The set phase is adopted as the new current phase, i.e. the
delta phase value is reset to 0.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PHASe:​REFerence​ on page 329
5.3.4 Reference Oscillator
In the internal reference mode the internal reference signal is available at the REF
OUT connector. The frequency of the internal reference signal is permanently set to 10
MHz.
The settings of the reference oscillator are not influenced by an instrument preset
("PRESET" key).
5.3.4.1
Reference Oscillator Dialog
To open the "Reference Oscillator" dialog, select "RF > Configure > Reference Oscillator" or use the MENU key under "RF".
The menu is used to select the source and to adjust the reference frequency. In case an
external source is selected, the reference frequency is displayed.
Source - Reference Oscillator
Selects the source of the reference frequency.
"Internal"
The internal reference signal of 10 MHz is used, comprising either the
calibrated or a user-defined adjustment value.
"External"
An external reference signal is used. The frequency of the external reference signal must be selected under "External Reference Frequency".
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​ROSCillator:​SOURce​ on page 362
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
117
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
RF Block
Deactivate RF Output - Reference Oscillator
Determines if the RF output is switched off in case of a missing external reference signal
for selection external source.
If enabled, this setting ensures that no improper RF signal due to the missing external
reference signal is output and used for measurements.
In addition to the error message "Ext Ref missing", the information "RF output deactivated" is indicated.
This setting is not influenced by a reset.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​ROSCillator:​EXTernal:​RFOFf[:​STATe]​ on page 360
External Reference Frequency
Selects the frequency of the external reference signal. You can select an external reference signal having a frequency of 5 MHz or 10 MHz; however, for 5 MHz the version of
the RF board must be at least 1406.7220 or higher, see ​chapter 5.2.3.2, "Hardware Config", on page 83.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​ROSCillator:​EXTernal:​FREQuency​ on page 360
Synchronization Bandwidth - RF Signal
(Source External only)
Selects the synchronization bandwidth for an external reference signal. The wideband
setting is provided for using very good reference sources of high spectral purity.
"Narrow"
Synchronization bandwidth is 1 Hz.
"Wide"
Synchronization bandwidth is 750 Hz.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​ROSCillator:​EXTernal:​SBANdwidth​ on page 361
Adjustment Active - Reference Oscillator
Selects adjustment mode.
"OFF"
The calibrated adjustment value of the internal reference frequency is
used. This value is determined at one of the R&S service shops during
calibration.
"ON"
A user-defined adjustment value is used. The value is entered under
"Adjustment DAC Value".
This allows the frequency to be impaired freely, for example to simulate
a frequency error.
The instrument is no longer in the calibrated state. However, the calibration value is not changed and the instrument resumes the calibrated
state after switching the "Adjustment State" to Off.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​ROSCillator[:​INTernal]:​ADJust[:​STATe]​ on page 361
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
118
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
RF Block
Adjustment DAC Value
Enters a user-defined adjustment value for the internal reference frequency. This value
is not used unless "Adjustment Active On" is selected.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​ROSCillator[:​INTernal]:​ADJust:​VALue​ on page 361
5.3.5 RF Level
5.3.5.1
Overview of RF Level
Message "Level overrange/underrange"
If this message appears in the status line, the set level ("Level") is in the overrange (see
data sheet).
The correct level setting and signal quality cannot be guaranteed if the set level is in the
overrange/underrange.
The value of the RF level is displayed in the level field in the header of the instrument's
display and the easiest way to set the RF level is to set it directly in this field.
Be aware, that there is a difference between the RF level displayed in the header and
the RF output level set in the "Level/EMF" dialog of the "RF" block.
RF level vs. RF output level
The level entered and displayed in the "Level" field takes the offset of any downstream
attenuators/amplifiers into consideration by way of calculation. This means that with a
level offset the level displayed in the header does not correspond to the level at the RF
output, but rather to the level at the output of the downstream instrument.
This allows the desired level at the output of downstream instruments to be entered. The
R&S Signal Generator changes the RF output level according to the set offset.
However, the level entered and displayed in the "Level" menu of the "RF" function block
always corresponds to the RF output level. Any level offset is not taken into consideration.
The level offset is entered in the "Level" menu. Here it is also possible to set the level
without taking the offset into consideration, and to make other settings, such as level
offset, attenuator mode, power-on state.
The correlation is as follows:
"Level" (in header) = "RF output level" (Level in menu) + "Level offset" (Offset in menu)
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
119
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
RF Block
The RF output is protected against overloading by an external signal applied to the RF
output (see ​"Reverse Power Protection" on page 125).
Setting the RF level
To change the RF level, press the LEVEL key and enter the desired level. Changes to
the RF level have an immediate effect (without confirmation with the Enter key) on the
output signal.
RF Level
Enters the RF level, considering the level offset (see ​"RF level vs. RF output level"
on page 119).
dBm, dBuV, mV and uV can be used as the level units. The 4 unit keys are labeled with
these units.
Note: The SCPI command sets the level of the "Level" display, i.e. an entered level offset
is taken into consideration in the level value.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer[:​LEVel][:​IMMediate][:​AMPLitude]​ on page 336
5.3.5.2
RF Level Dialog
To open the "RF Level / EMF" dialog, select "RF" > "Configure" > "Level / Attenuator" or
use the MENU key under "RF".
The combined "RF Level / EMF" dialog is divided into the several sections.
The top sections of this dialog provide access to the level settings.
The offset-free level, level offset and level limit are set in the top section of the menu. The
attenuator mode is set in the "Attenuator Settings" section.
The step width which is used when setting the level using the rotary knob (with "Variation
Active On") is set in the "User Variation" section.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
120
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
RF Block
The power-on behavior of the instrument and the level display in the display header are
set in the "Power-On / EMF Settings" section (see ​chapter 5.3.5.3, "Power-On/EMF Settings", on page 125).
Level Settings
The offset-free level, attenuation mode, level offset and level limit are set in the top section
of the menu.
If you have the instrument equipped with a harmonic filter, (options R&S SMB-B25/-B26),
you can also configure the filter.
RF Mode
Selects the level mode for signal output.
This function allows you, to optimize the RF output signal for applications, where
improved harmonic suppression or a low Signal-to-Noise ratio is required.
Note: The modes "Low Distortion" and "Low Noise", for improving harmonic suppression
or the S/N ratio require that an attenuator is fitted.
"Normal"
The generator provides an RF output signal with high signal to noise
ratio as well as low distortion, according to the data sheet.
"LOW Noise"
This setting forces the generator to optimize the signal to noise ratio.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
121
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
RF Block
"LOW Distortion"
The generator reduces distortion (harmonics) of the RF signal.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​LMODe​ on page 338
Amplitude
Sets the RF level of the RF output connector.
The level entered and displayed here corresponds to the level at the RF output, i.e. any
offset entry is not taken into consideration.
Note: The SCPI command ​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer[:​LEVel][:​IMMediate][:​
AMPLitude]​ sets the level of the "Level" display, i.e. the level containing offset.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​POWer​ on page 340
Limit - RF Level
Sets an upper limit for the RF output power.
You can use it to protect your DUT from damage due to high input power. If you enter an
RF level above this value, the instrument limits the output power to this specified value,
and generates a warning message.
However, the level indication in the status bar is not affected.
Note: The limit value is always effective, regardless of whether you work with "NRP-Z
Power Control" or not.
The value is not affected by an instrument preset (PRESET key), *RST and the "Save/
Recall" function. It is influenced only by the ​Factory Preset and the factory value is equal
to maximum level.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​LIMit[:​AMPLitude]​ on page 337
Offset (Level)
Sets the level offset relative to the RF level.
The level offset of a downstream instrument (e.g. an attenuator or amplifier) is entered.
The entry does not change the value of the RF level at the RF output. It only changes the
RF level displayed in the display header. The value of the RF level in the header corresponds to the level at the output of the downstream instrument.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer[:​LEVel][:​IMMediate]:​OFFSet​ on page 336
Low Harmonic Filter Settings
In 20 GHz or 40 GHz instruments (option R&S SMB-B120(L) /-B140(L)), it is possible to
install a low harmonic filter (option R&S SMB-B25 /-B26), in order to improve the harmonic
performance.
For a fitted low harmonic filter, you can define its operating mode in section "Low Harmonic Filter" of the "RF Level / EMF" dialog. Otherwise, the section is hidden.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
122
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
RF Block
► To access the filter settings, select "RF > Config > RF Level > Low Harmonic Filter".
Mode
Selects between automatic or manual switching of the filter.
"Auto"
The filter switches automatically on and off, according to the given
operating conditions. It is active within a certain frequency and level
range and automatically turns off, if the frequency falls below the lower
limit, or the level exceeds the upper limit.
The corresponding limit values are given in the data sheet.
Note: The ​State field shows the current state of the filter.
"Manual"
In this mode, you can switch the filter individually.
SCPI command:
​:​OUTPut<hw>:​FILTer:​AUTO​ on page 272
State
Switches the filter in manual mode.
Note: If you work in the "Auto" ​Mode, this parameter shows the current state of the filter.
If you then change the state, the operation mode automatically turns to manual operation.
SCPI command:
​:​OUTPut<hw>:​FILTer[:​LPASs]:​STATe​ on page 273
Attenuator Settings
The R&S SMB can be configured to provide level settings without interruption. This
applies to instruments with, as well as without step attenuator. The attenuator mode is
set in the "Attenuator Settings" section of the "RF level / EMF" dialog.
Attenuator Mode
Sets the attenuator mode at the RF output.
"Auto"
Standard mode.
"Fixed"
When this operating mode is switched on, the attenuator, relays and
amplifier stages are fixed in their current positions to provide level settings without interruption. The resulting variation range is defined and
displayed under "Attenuator Fixed Range".
Note: The function is effective when automatic level control is activated
("ALC State = On").
If the normal variation range is overranged or underranged, level errors
increase considerably and the warning "Level under/overrange"
appears in the info line. The spectral purity of the output signal decreases with high attenuation.
SCPI command:
​:​OUTPut<hw>:​AMODe​ on page 272
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
123
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
RF Block
Fixed Range (PEP) In
Displays the level range in which the level is set without interruption for the "Attenuator
Mode fixed" setting.
SCPI command:
​:​OUTPut<hw>:​AFIXed:​RANGe:​UPPer?​ on page 271
​:​OUTPut<hw>:​AFIXed:​RANGe:​LOWer?​ on page 271
RF OFF Mode
Selects the attenuator mode, when the RF signal is switched off.
The setting of the RF OFF mode is not affected by an instrument preset (PRESET key),
*RST and the "Save/Recall" function. This parameter is influenced only by the ​Factory
Preset.
"Unchanged"
Freezes the setting of the attenuator when RF is switched off. The
attenuator is only activated when RF is switched on.
This setting recommended if a constant VSWR (Voltage Standing Wave
Ratio) is required.
Furthermore, on instruments equipped with a mechanical attenuator, it
provides fast and wear-free operation.
"Full Attenuation"
Sets attenuation to maximum when the RF signal is switched off. This
setting is recommended for applications that require a high level of
noise suppression.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​ATTenuation:​RFOFf:​MODE​ on page 335
User Variation
If the level is set using the rotary knob, the step width is defined in the "User Variation"
section.
Variation Active
Activates the user-defined step width used when varying the level value with the rotary
knob.
"ON"
The level value set with the rotary knob is varied using the user-defined
step width which is entered under "Variation Step".
"OFF"
The level value set with the rotary knob is varied in steps of one unit at
the cursor position (standard operating mode).
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​STEP:​MODE​ on page 343
Variation Step
Sets the user-defined step width for entering the RF level using the rotary knob. Level
variation with this step width must also be activated with "Variation Active".
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​STEP[:​INCRement]​ on page 343
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
124
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
RF Block
Reverse Power Protection
The reverse power protection prevents against overload by an external signal applied to
the RF output of the R&S Signal Generator.
The R&S SMB equipped with frequency options up to 6 GHz includes a reverse power
protection as standard. For instruments equipped with frequency option R&S SMB-B112
or R&S SMB-B112L a reverse power protection option R&S SMB-B30 is available. Refer
to the data sheet for additional information and the respective option.
Refer to the data sheet for additional information and the respective options.
The reverse power protection is tripped when the power of the external signal becomes
too high. A relay opens and interrupts the internal connection to the RF output. This
condition is indicated in the display header by the "OVERLOAD" status message.
Overload
If an "Overload" status message is indicated in the display header, reset the overload
protection by pressing the RF ON/OFF key.
The RF input is activated when the overload protection is reset.
SCPI command:
​:​OUTPut<hw>:​PROTection:​TRIPped?​ on page 273
​:​OUTPut<hw>:​PROTection:​CLEar​ on page 273
​:​OUTPut<hw>[:​STATe]​ on page 274
5.3.5.3
Power-On/EMF Settings
The power-on behavior of the R&S SMB and the level display in the display header are
set in the "Power-On / EMF Settings" section of the "RF Level/EMF" dialog.
To open the "RF Level/EMF" dialog, select "RF > Configure > EMF" or use the MENU
key under "RF".
Power-On State - RF Signal
Selects the state which the RF output is to assume after the instrument is switched on.
"RF Off"
The output is deactivated when the instrument is switched on.
"Previous Setting"
When the instrument is switched on, the output assumes the same state
as it had when the instrument was switched off.
SCPI command:
​:​OUTPut<hw>[:​STATe]:​PON​ on page 274
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
125
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
RF Block
Display Level as Voltage of EMF - RF Level
Activates display of the signal level as voltage of the EMF (no-load voltage). If this setting
is deactivated, the level is displayed as a voltage over a 50 Ohm load (preset state).
SCPI command:
n.a.
5.3.5.4
Automatic Level Control - ALC
Your signal generator is equipped with an automatic level control unit to obtain best RF
level accuracy.
Automatic Level Control (ALC) is an adaptive control system to stabilize the RF output
level. It continuously monitors the current level and adjusts it to keep a steady state over
temperature and time.
ALC is active in almost all applications by default. However, the Pulse Modulation mode
excludes ALC, as the control loop would detect incorrect values and result in level deviations.
Also note that ALC may detect incorrect values in multi-transmitter test setups. If multiple generators are coupled, reverse power may affect the ALC readings. Based on
incorrect values, ALC would have an impact on the signal to intermodulation ratio.
ALC States
The following description basically explains the ALC states and their principle of operation. In particular ALC OFF (Sample & Hold) gives an overview on the function in terms
of the equipment of the generator.
The R&S SMB offers the ALC states:
●
AUTO
automatically adjusts the output level to the operating conditions.
●
On
enables ALC permanently, regardless of the currently selected mode.
●
Off
deactivates ALC.
The instrument switches to Sample & Hold (S&H) state, which still allows to maintain
a constant output level.
The following section explains the functionality of "Sample & Hold", to provide an overview
and to indicate what is to be considered. "On" and "Auto" require no additional explanation. Furthermore, find the ALC state settings described in detail in ​State - ALC.
ALC OFF (Sample & Hold)
In "S&H" mode, the signal generator switches for a short period of time into CW mode
and activates ALC. ALC adjusts the level to the set value and the generator holds the
value (freeze). Then, the generator switches ALC off again and back to the operating
mode.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
126
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
RF Block
RF output behavior during Sample & Hold depends on the configuration of your instrument. Instruments equipped with...:
●
an electronic step attenuator
The level is decreased by 30 dB.
●
a mechanical step attenuator
By default, the mechanical step attenuator is not switched during S&H cycles to optimize the settling time. The instrument provides the output power for 3 ... 5 ms.
However, you can affect the attenuation at the output by the setting "RF during Power
Search" to "Minimum", see ​RF During Power Search - ALC. Then the generator
decreases the level by 30 dB with the mechanical attenuator. Note that this may take
a certain period of time.
High frequency instruments, such as the R&S SMB with one of the high frequency
options R&S SMB-B120 or R&S SMB-B140, are equipped with a mechanical step
attenuator.
●
no step attenuator
The signal generator outputs the set level for 3 to 5 ms after level or frequency setting
during a Sample & hold measurement.
Instruments equipped with one of the options R&S SMB-B112L, R&S SMB-B120L or
R&S SMB-B140L come without step attenuator.
The level control status is permanently displayed as a status message in the info line.
Automatic Level Control Settings
To open the "Automatic Level Control" dialog, select "RF" > "Configure" > "Automatic
Level Control" or use the MENU key under "RF".
The combined dialog "ALC / UCOR" is divided into the several sections and provides
access to the "Automatic Level Control" settings and to function "User Correction", see ​
chapter 5.3.5.6, "User Correction", on page 132).
State - ALC
Activates/deactivates internal level control.
"Auto"
The instrument selects the most appropriate ALC mode automatically.
ALC is on in most operating conditions. Default state.
"On"
Activates ALC, regardless of the operating conditions.
If "Attenuator Mode Fixed" is selected in addition, the instrument adjusts
the level of every level and frequency setting.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
127
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
RF Block
"Off (Sample &
Hold)"
Deactivates internal level control.
Sample & hold closes the level control loop at every frequency and level
change for a short period of time. The level control voltage is sampled
and then clamped.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​ALC[:​STATe]​ on page 335
RF During Power Search - ALC
Activates the mode for the mechanical step attenuator and for output during ALC power
search.
"Normal"
The RF output is active during power search.
"Minimum"
The RF output is inactive during power search.
SCPI command:
​:​OUTPut<hw>:​ALC:​SEARch:​MODE​ on page 272
Search Once - ALC
Forces the generator to execute level adjustment once, although the "Sample & Hold"
mode is active.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​ALC:​SONCe​ on page 334
5.3.5.5
NRP-Z Level Control
With the NRP-Z Level Control function, you can achieve a very stable and accurate RF
power supplied to your DUT. With the aid of a downstream control circuit, a closed loop
power control, you can detect frequency response characteristics of the used components, such as losses due to cables, modules or components like power amplifiers, and
compensate these effects accordingly.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
128
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
RF Block
Example: How to set up a closed loop power control
Fig. 5-1: Example of a test setup with NRP-Z Level Control
As shown in the example, the sensor measures a proportional power in defined time
intervals, derivated from a coupler. It considers optionally given S-parameters and sends
the results back to the generator. The signal generator compares the measured level with
the set value and adjusts its output level accordingly.
This allows you to control the external signal level continuously and reliably reach a constant input level at the DUT in real time.
"NRP-Z Level Control" automatically disables ​NRP-Z Power Viewer, and vice versa.
Please keep in mind that modulated signals may differ from CW signals regarding mean
power and peak power. This affects the operation of "NRP-Z Level Control".
Beyond that, it is strongly recommended that you disable the "List" mode, since it also
falsifies the power control loop.
NRP-Z Level Control Settings
To open the "NRP-Z Level Control" dialog, select "RF > Configure > NRP-Z Level Control" or use the MENU key under "RF".
Sensor
Selects the R&S NRP-Z power sensor for power control.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
129
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
RF Block
Note: In remote control, the sensors are set up using the SENSe commands. The remote
measurement is triggered by the READ query which also provides the measurement
results.
The software version of the connected power sensor can be retrieved by means of the
remote control command :SENS:POW:TYPE?.
Use the "Setup >" ​chapter 5.2.3.6, "NRP-Z Info/Update", on page 87 dialog to update the
sensor software.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​SPC:​SELect​ on page 341
State
Activates power control using the selected sensor.
The control loop periodically adjusts the generator output. After switching off, the running
loop is completed.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​SPC:​STATe​ on page 341
Measured Level
Indicates the current reading of the sensor.
Zero - Power Sensors
Activates the auto zero function.
Zeroing calibrates the external power sensor by adjusting its reading at zero signal power.
For this purpose, the RF power source must be switched off or disconnected from the
sensor (see tips below). R&S power sensors automatically detect the presence of any
significant input power. This aborts zeroing and generates an error message. Zeroing
can take a few seconds, depending on the sensor model; refer to the documentation of
your external power sensor for more information.
Tips for zeroing
Zeroing should be performed:
● During warm-up after switching on or connecting the instrument
● After a substantial change of the ambient temperature
● After fastening the power sensor module to an RF connector at high temperature
● After several hours of operation
● When very low-power signals are to be measured, e.g. less than 10 dB above the
lower measurement limit.
● Switch off the RF power source for zeroing; do not disconnect it from the power sensor. In this way you will maintain the thermal equilibrium, and zeroing will also compensate for the noise superimposed on the measured signal (e.g. from a broadband
amplifier).
SCPI command:
​SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​ZERO​ on page 282
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
130
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
RF Block
Target Level
Specifies the nominal level expected at the input of the sensor. The signal generator
adjusts the output power accordingly, in order to meet the target value at the sensor input,
and thus the power required at the DUT.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​SPC:​TARGet​ on page 342
Limit - RF Level
Sets an upper limit for the RF output power.
You can use it to protect your DUT from damage due to high input power. If you enter an
RF level above this value, the instrument limits the output power to this specified value,
and generates a warning message.
However, the level indication in the status bar is not affected.
Note: The limit value is always effective, regardless of whether you work with "NRP-Z
Power Control" or not.
The value is not affected by an instrument preset (PRESET key), *RST and the "Save/
Recall" function. It is influenced only by the ​Factory Preset and the factory value is equal
to maximum level.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​LIMit[:​AMPLitude]​ on page 337
Catch Range +/Sets the capture range of the control system.
Within the range:
Target Level +/- Catch Range
the power control locks and tries to achieve the target level. Readings outside the range
are not considered.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​SPC:​CRANge​ on page 340
Delay Time
Defines a waiting period between the level adjustment of the generator and the next
measurement of the power sensor.
With this parameter, you can take into account any dead times in the controlled system.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​SPC:​DELay​ on page 341
Use Peak Power
Activates control by means of the peak power values, provided the power sensor supports
this function. Otherwise, the dialog does not show this parameter.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​SPC:​PEAK​ on page 341
Use SParameter - Power Sensors
Activates the use of the S-Parameter correction data of the connected power sensor. For
sensors with attenuator this checkbox is automatically checked.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
131
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
RF Block
Refer to the manual of the connected R&S NRP-Zxx power sensor for a description on
how to use the SParameter table.
SCPI command:
​SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​CORRection:​SPDevice:​STATe​ on page 276
5.3.5.6
User Correction
The "User Correction" function is used to create and activate lists in which level correction
values predefined by the user are freely assigned to RF frequencies. Correction is performed by the user-defined table values being added to the output level for the respective
RF frequency.
With frequencies which are not contained in the list, the level correction is determined by
interpolation of the closest correction values.
The lists are created in the "List Editor". Each list is stored in its own file with the predefined
file extension *. uco. The name of the User Correction file can be freely selected. The
files are loaded from the "Lists..." file manager. Externally created tables with pairs of
frequency and level values can be converted into User Correction files using the import
function. The external files must have the file extension *.txt or *.csv. These file
formats are provided e.g. by the Microsoft Excel program. The separators for table columns and for decimal floating-point numerals can be set. In addition, internally created
User Correction data can be exported into ASCII files using the export function.
The amplitude can also be linearized automatically by means of an R&S NRP power
sensor connected to one of the generator output signals. With the aid of the "Fill with
Sensor" function, a table with correction values for external test assemblies can be automatically determined, e.g. for compensating the frequency response of cables. The User
Correction list with the correction values acquired by the sensor is generated in the "Edit
User Correction List" menu. The correction values can be acquired any time irrespective
of the modulation settings of the generator.
If user correction is activated, the "UCOR" display (User Correction) is shown in the
header together with the "Level" display. The RF output level is the sum of both values.
"Level" + "UCOR" = Output level
If activated, user correction is effective in all operating modes.
User Correction Menu
To open the "User Correction" menu, select "RF > Configure > User Correction" or use
the MENU key under "RF".
The combined menu "ALC/UCOR" is divided into the several sections.
User Correction Settings
The "User Correction" settings are set in the most lower section of the combined dialog;
this section is used to activate/deactivate user correction, and to create, select and activate the lists.
The upper section provides access to the automatic level control settings, see ​chapter 5.3.5.4, "Automatic Level Control - ALC", on page 126.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
132
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
RF Block
State - User Correction
Activates/deactivates user correction.
The "UCOR" status message appears in the frequency and level display.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​CORRection[:​STATe]​ on page 294
User Correction Value - User Correction
Indicates the current value for level correction.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​CORRection:​VALue?​ on page 295
User Cor. Data - User Correction
Calls the "File Select" menu for selecting and creating a list or the "File Manager".
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​CORRection:​CSET:​DELete​ on page 290
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​CORRection:​CSET[:​SELect]​ on page 294
Edit User Cor. Data - User Correction
Calls the editor for editing the selected user correction list.
A list consists of any number of frequency/level value pairs. The currently selected list is
displayed.
Each list is saved as a separate file with extension *.uco. The file name and the directory
to which the file is saved are user-selectable.
Note: Save list only after filling both columns (frequency and level), otherwise the entries
are lost.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
133
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
RF Block
"Frequency /
Hz"
Enters the frequency to which the level correction value applies.
"Power/dB"
Enters the level correction value to which the specified frequency
applies. The values can be entered manually or automatically with the
"Fill With Sensor" function (available in the "Edit" sub menu).
"Goto"
Selects row for editing.
Note: The "Fill..." function allows to automatically enter any number of
frequencies with freely selectable range and increment.
Using the "Fill With Sensor" function of the "Edit" sub menu requires
only the entry of the frequency values. The level values are automatically acquired by the connected power sensor.
If Goto row is selected, a window opens for entering the requested row.
"Edit"
Calls a selection of possible actions described below.
"Insert Row"
Insert a new row before the marked row.
"Insert Range"
Insert new rows before the marked row. The number of rows to be
inserted can be defined in an entry window.
"Fill...."
Opens a sub menu for defining a set of list values to be automatically
entered in the ucor list (see ​"Filling the Correction List automatically"
on page 136).
"Fill With Sensor"
Calls the menu to activate the filling of the user correction list with level
values acquired by the selected power sensor (see ​"Filling the Correction List with Power Sensor Measurement Data" on page 138).
"Delete Row"
Deletes the marked row.
"Delete
Range..."
Allows to delete any number of rows starting with the marked row. The
number of rows to be deleted can be defined in an entry window.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
134
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
RF Block
"Save"
The list is saved under its current name.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​CORRection:​CSET[:​SELect]​ on page 294
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​CORRection:​CSET:​DATA:​FREQuency​ on page 288
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​CORRection:​CSET:​DATA:​POWer​ on page 288
Import/Export
User correction list can be imported from externally created files or exported into text or
CSV-files. The import/export settings are available after clicking the "Import/Export" button.
Import/Export >>>
Expands the menu with the area for import and export of user correction files.
Externally edited Excel tables with any number of frequency/level value pairs can be
imported as text or CSV-files and used for user correction.
Conversely, you can also export internally created user correction lists as text or CSVfiles.
Mode - User Correction
Selects if user correction lists should be imported or exported. The settings offered
depend on the selected mode.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​CORRection:​DEXChange:​MODE​ on page 293
Extension - User Correction
Selects the file extension of the ASCII file to be imported or exported. Selection "TXT"
(text file) or "CSV" (Excel file) is available.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​CORRection:​DEXChange:​AFILe:​EXTension​ on page 290
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
135
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
RF Block
Decimal Point - User Correction
Selects the decimal separator used in the ASCII data between '.' (decimal point) and ','
(comma) with floating-point numerals.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​CORRection:​DEXChange:​AFILe:​SEParator:​DECimal​
on page 292
Column Separator- User Correction
Selects the separator between the frequency and level column of the ASCII table the user
correction list is exported to or imported from.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​CORRection:​DEXChange:​AFILe:​SEParator:​COLumn​
on page 291
Select ASCII Source / Destination - User Correction
Calls the "File Manager" for selecting the ASCII file to be imported into a user correction
list (source) or the ASCII file the user correction list is exported (destination) in.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​CORRection:​DEXChange:​AFILe:​SELect​ on page 291
Destination / Source - User Correction
Calls the "File Manager" for selecting the user correction list to be exported (source) into
an ASCII file or the destination for the ASCII file to be imported (destination) in.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​CORRection:​DEXChange:​SELect​ on page 293
Import / Export - User Correction
Starts the export or import of the selected file.
When import is selected, the ASCII file is imported as user correction list.
When export is selected, the user correction list is exported into the selected ASCII file.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​CORRection:​DEXChange:​EXECute​ on page 292
Filling the Correction List automatically
The "Fill Table" menu enables you to automatically set the level correction values.
The start line and the number of rows to be filled are defined under "From" and "Range."
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
136
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
RF Block
The column to be filled is selected under "Select column to fill". Depending on the selection here, the default for start, end, and increment value are set. As the settings are
interdependent, a change of one parameter may result in the automatic change of one
or more of the other parameters. The filling of the column with the selected value settings
is started with button "Fill".
The correction list entries are only computed when the "Fill" button is pressed.
From
Sets the start value of the index range.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Range
Sets the range for filling the table.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Select column to fill
Selects either the frequency or the level column to be filled with the value defined below.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Start value
Sets the start value for the frequency or the level entries.
SCPI command:
n.a.
End value
Displays the end value for the frequency or the level entries.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Increment value
Sets the increment for the frequency or the level entries.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Fill
Fills the selected column in the set range with values, starting with the start value and
using the set increment.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
137
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
RF Block
Filling the Correction List with Power Sensor Measurement Data
The level correction values for the user correction list can be acquired by means of R&S
NRP power sensors. The R&S NRP sensors are connected to either the SENSOR connector or to one of the USB interfaces. Configuration of the connection is performed in
the "Power Sensor" menu (see ​chapter 5.3.6.1, "NRP-Z Power Viewer", on page 139).
The filling of the ucor list with measurement data is performed in the ucor list editor (see
​"Edit User Cor. Data - User Correction" on page 133).
In the editor, the frequencies for which the correction values are to be acquired are
entered in the frequency column (either manually or by means of the "Fill..." menu).
Do not save the list at this point, because the frequency entries are lost as long as there
are no entries for the level column also. In the following these entries are automatically
acquired by the connected power sensor.
All level correction values for the given frequency values are measured using the Power
Sensor and automatically filled in the selected list after the "Execute" button is pressed.
The list is automatically stored and recalled again after filling.
Fill User Correction Data with Sensor Settings
The "Fill with Sensor" button of the "Edit User Correction Data" menu opens the associated menu.
The menu indicates the relevant generator settings.
Fill User Correction Data with Sensor
All settings are read-only, except the "Sensor". In case more than one sensor is connected to the instrument, the sensor can be selected in the "Sensor" field of menu.
The "Execute" button is only enabled if a sensor is detected and the user correction list
contains at least one frequency value.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​CORRection:​CSET:​DATA[:​SENSor<ch>][:​POWer]:​SONCe​
on page 289
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
138
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
RF Block
5.3.6 RF Measurement
5.3.6.1
NRP-Z Power Viewer
The R&S signal generator supports R&S NRP-Z power sensors to measure the power
of the output signal in the RF path or any freely selectable source. The generator performs
up to four power measurements, with the sensors either directly connected, or via the
R&S NRP-Z5 USB Sensor Hub.
The R&S NRP-Z5 USB Sensor Hub (high-speed USB 2.0) can host up to 4 R&S NRP-Z
sensors and provides simultaneous internal and external triggering of all connected sensors.
You can directly connect the R&S NRP-Z Sensors to the standard NRP sensor connectors of the hub. The hub is connected to the R&S instrument via USB with the adapter
cable R&S NRP-Z4.
See also the R&S website http://www.rohde-schwarz.com in section "Power Meters &
Voltmeters > R&S NRP-Z Sensors" for information on the sensor hub and the available
accessories.
To connect a sensor directly at a USB interface, the USB adapters R&S NRP-Z3 or R&S
NRP-Z4 are available.
The instrument automatically detects a connected R&S NRP-Z power sensor and indicates it in the "NRP-Z Power Viewer" dialog. In addition, you find device specific information on the connected sensor in the ​chapter 5.2.3.6, "NRP-Z Info/Update",
on page 87. For information on the scope of your power sensor refer to the manual of
your R&S NRP-Zxx power sensor.
A sensor continuously measures the average signal power of the selected source. The
signal generator shows the result in either the "NRP-Z Power Viewer" dialog, or directly
in the block diagram. You can activate the permanent display in the block diagram in the
"NRP-Z Power Viewer" dialog. This dialog provides access to all parameters concerning
sensor settings, like average or peak display, reference source, filter and level offset, see
​NRP-Z Power Viewer Settings.
The signal generator also supports the use of R&S NRP-Z power sensors for the acquisition of level correction data. The acquired level correction data is used to create and
activate lists in which level correction values predefined by the user are freely assigned
to RF frequencies. Correction is performed by the user-defined table values being added
to the output level for the respective RF frequency (see ​chapter 5.3.5.6, "User Correction", on page 132).
"NRP-Z Power Viewer" automatically disables ​NRP-Z Level Control, and vice versa.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
139
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
RF Block
NRP-Z Power Viewer Settings
To open the "NRP-Z Power Viewer" menu, select "RF" > "Configure" > "NRP-Z Power
Viewer" or use the MENU key under "RF".
The dialog shows the settings and measurement values of the sensor selected in the field
next to the connector symbol. For indicating the parameters of another sensor, switch to
the respective sensor in the selection list.
When you connect your power sensor(s) via the R&S NRP-Z5 USB sensor hub, each
channel of the hub is firmly assigned to the associated sensor channel in the generator.
Sensor - Power Viewer
Selects the R&S NRP-Z power sensor for indication.
In remote control, the sensors are set up using the SENSe commands. The remote measurement is triggered by the READ query which also provides the measurement results.
The sensor is selected by suffix 1, 2, 3 or 4 in key word SENSe or READ of the command
header.
Suffix 1 denotes the sensor connected at the first USB interface, and suffix 2, 3 and 4 are
assigned to further sensors connected via USB. The suffix is identical to the index which
is assigned automatically to each sensor upon connection.
Note: The software version of the connected power sensor can be retrieved by means
of the remote control command :SENS:POW:TYPE?.
Use the "Setup >" ​chapter 5.2.3.6, "NRP-Z Info/Update", on page 87 dialog to update the
sensor software.
SCPI command:
​SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​STATus[:​DEVice]?​ on page 281
Type - Power Sensors
Indicates the type and the serial number of the connected R&S NRP-Z power sensor.
The sensor type is automatically detected.
SCPI command:
​SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​TYPE?​ on page 282
​SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​SNUMber?​ on page 280
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
140
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
RF Block
State - Power Sensors
Activates/deactivates level measurement by the power sensor.
The local state is set with the INIT command. Switching the local state off enhances the
measurement performance.
In remote control, the sensors are set up using the SENSe commands. The remote measurement is triggered by the READ query which also provides the measurement results.
The state is not influenced by these commands, measurements results can be retrieved
with local State on or off.
The sensor is selected by suffix 1, 2, 3 or 4 in key word SENSe or READ of the command
header.
Suffix 1 denotes the sensor connected at the first USB interface, and suffix 2, 3 and 4 are
assigned to further sensors connected via USB. The suffix is identical to the index which
is assigned automatically to each sensor upon connection.
To query the availability of a sensor at a given connector, use the command ​
SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​STATus[:​DEVice]?​ on page 281.
SCPI command:
​:​INITiate<ch>[:​POWer]:​CONTinuous​ on page 275
Level (Peak) - Power Sensors
With certain power sensors only, e.g. R&S NRP-Z81.
Indicates the measured peak level value with the selected unit.
SCPI command:
​:​READ<ch>[:​POWer]?​ on page 275
Level (Avg.) - Power Sensors
Indicates the measured level value with the selected unit.
SCPI command:
​:​READ<ch>[:​POWer]?​ on page 275
Unit - Power Sensors
Selects the unit used for result display.
The power sensor provides the measured value in Watt.
In which unit the measured value is indicated is selected here and might be Watt, dBm
or dBuV.
SCPI command:
​SENSe<ch>:​UNIT[:​POWer]​ on page 282
Permanent Display State - Power Sensors
Activates the permanent indication of the power measurement result in the upper right
corner of the block diagram. The instrument shows the type of sensor, the corresponding
connector, the measurement source and - if set - the offset.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
141
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
RF Block
It is possible to switch the permanent display active for several sensors. In this case, the
instrument indicates the values of the sensor with the lowest port number in the display.
SCPI command:
​SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​DISPlay:​PERManent:​STATe​ on page 276
Display Priority - Power Sensors
Selects whether the average or the peak power measurement result is indicated when
permanent display is active.
SCPI command:
​SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​DISPlay:​PERManent:​PRIority​ on page 277
Zero - Power Sensors
Activates the auto zero function.
Zeroing calibrates the external power sensor by adjusting its reading at zero signal power.
For this purpose, the RF power source must be switched off or disconnected from the
sensor (see tips below). R&S power sensors automatically detect the presence of any
significant input power. This aborts zeroing and generates an error message. Zeroing
can take a few seconds, depending on the sensor model; refer to the documentation of
your external power sensor for more information.
Tips for zeroing
Zeroing should be performed:
● During warm-up after switching on or connecting the instrument
● After a substantial change of the ambient temperature
● After fastening the power sensor module to an RF connector at high temperature
● After several hours of operation
● When very low-power signals are to be measured, e.g. less than 10 dB above the
lower measurement limit.
● Switch off the RF power source for zeroing; do not disconnect it from the power sensor. In this way you will maintain the thermal equilibrium, and zeroing will also compensate for the noise superimposed on the measured signal (e.g. from a broadband
amplifier).
SCPI command:
​SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​ZERO​ on page 282
Source - Power Sensors
Selects the source for measurement.
"RF"
Measurement source is the RF signal of the generator. The RF frequency is used as the measurement frequency of the sensor and the
corresponding correction factor is used.
In this mode the RF frequency of the generator is send to the sensor
automatically if changed.
"User"
Measurements source is any freely selectable source. The frequency
is entered manually under frequency (e.g. for measurement of amplifier
gain with 2 sensors).
SCPI command:
​SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​SOURce​ on page 281
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
142
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
RF Block
Frequency - Power Sensors
Source User only
Enters the frequency for measurement source "User".
SCPI command:
​SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​FREQuency​ on page 280
Level Offset - Power Sensors
Activates and defines a level offset which is added to the measured value. This allows
e.g. an attenuator in the signal path to be taken into account. The offset is always entered
in dB, irrespective of the selected unit for result display.
SCPI command:
​SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​OFFSet:​STATe​ on page 280
​SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​OFFSet​ on page 280
Auto Once
Searches for the optimum filter length for the current measurement conditions and indicates value in the "Filter Length" field above.
SCPI command:
​SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​FILTer:​SONCe​ on page 279
Filter Length - Power Sensors
Selects the filter length used for measurement. The filter length is the multiplier for the
measurement time and thus directly influences it.
The averaging filter is used to reduce fluctuations in the measured result to the extent
desired. Such fluctuations can be caused by inherent noise of the measuring instrument,
modulation of the measurement signal or beats from the superposition of adjacent carriers. A more stable display has to be traded off against longer measurements. The measurement result is obtained from a two-stage averaging process.
Note: Longer measurements does not mean that it takes longer to display a new result,
but rather that it takes longer for the result to settle when the power changes.
Measurements are continuously repeated in a predefined time window. The measurement result is obtained by averaging the measured values for the last 2N time windows.
The number N is the filter length, the factor of 2 arises because the output signals from
the microwave detector to suppress low-frequency noise are chopped at the same rate
as the time windows, which means that an independent measured value can only be
obtained from two consecutive values. As the filter length is the multiplier for the time
window it directly influences the measurement time.
The filter length can be selected automatically or can be manually set to a fixed value.
As a preliminary, you should always check if the auto mode is giving satisfactory results
because you will always have to adjust an optimal, manual filter-length setting if the power
is not constant.
Selection "Fixed Noise" is offered for reaching defined measurement accuracy.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
143
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
RF Block
"Auto"
The filter length is automatically selected and adapted to the currently
measured value. With very high signals the filter length and therefore
the measurement time can be short. With very low signal levels the filter
length and therefore the measurement time is increased in order to
reduce noise. The used filter length is indicated in the field to the right.
"User"
The filter length is set manually.
The filter length is entered in the entry window to the right. As the filter
length works as a multiplier for the time window, this results in a constant measurement time. Values 1 and 2^n are settable.
Note: The time window varies depending on the used sensor. For most
sensors it is fixed to 20 ms. For the R&S NRP-Z81 sensor it is 10 us.
Therefore, the user filter length for the R&S NRP-Z81 has be about
1000 times larger than the filter length for other sensors in order to
achieve the same filtering result.
The "Auto Once" button can be used to search for the optimum filter
length for the current measurement conditions. The found filter length
is indicated in the field to the right.
"Fixed Noise"
The averaging factor is selected so that the sensor's intrinsic noise (2
standard deviations) does not exceed the specified noise content.
The desired noise content is entered in the entry field to the right.
To avoid very long settling times when the power is low, the averaging
factor can be limited with the "Timeout" parameter.
SCPI command:
​SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​FILTer:​TYPE​ on page 279
​SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​FILTer:​LENGth:​AUTO?​ on page 277
​SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​FILTer:​LENGth[:​USER]​ on page 277
​SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​FILTer:​NSRatio​ on page 278
​SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​FILTer:​NSRatio:​MTIMe​ on page 278
Use SParameter - Power Sensors ← Filter Length - Power Sensors
Activates the use of the S-Parameter correction data of the connected power sensor. For
sensors with attenuator this checkbox is automatically checked.
Refer to the manual of the connected R&S NRP-Zxx power sensor for a description on
how to use the SParameter table.
SCPI command:
​SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​CORRection:​SPDevice:​STATe​ on page 276
5.3.7 RF Sweep and List Mode
5.3.7.1
Overview
The R&S Signal Generator offers three different sweep types (frequency sweep, level
sweep and LF sweep) to be activated alternatively. Each type has 6 modes which differ
with respect to the sweep cycle mode (continuous, individual and step-by-step) and triggering mode (automatic, internal and external).
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
144
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
RF Block
Sweeps and List mode can not be activated simultaneously, they deactivate each other.
Setting a sweep
A sweep is set in five basic steps which are shown below taking a frequency sweep as
an example.
The LF sweep is activated and configured in the "Mod Gen" block.
1. Set the sweep range ("Start Freq" and "Stop Freq" or "Center Freq" and "Span").
2. Select linear or logarithmic sweep spacing ("Spacing").
3. Set the step width ("Step Lin/Log") and dwell time ("Dwell Time").
4. Activate the sweep ("Mode" to Auto, Single, Step or Extern Single, Extern Step).
5. Trigger the sweep, except for Auto mode ("Execute Single Sweep", Current Frequency or External Trigger Signal).
It is recommended to switch off the GUI update for optimum sweep performance especially with short dwell times (see ​chapter 5.2.3.5, "Gui Update", on page 86).
5.3.7.2
RF Frequency Sweep
The dialog is used to activate and configure a sweep for the RF frequency.
To open the "Frequency Sweep" menu, select "RF > Configure > RF Frequency
Sweep" or use the menu tree of the MENU key under "RF".
In the top section of the menu, the RF sweep mode is activated and the sweep mode is
selected.
The buttons are used to reset the RF sweep (all sweep modes) or to execute the RF
sweep ("Single" mode).
The sweep range, sweep spacing and dwell time are set in the bottom section.
For the frequency sweep, an output signal at the LF connector can be activated. It provides a linear voltage ramp from start to stop of the sweep. The output voltage can be
used e.g. to control an oscilloscope.
The sweep range of the RF sweep can be entered in two ways, either by entering the
"Start" and "Stop" value or by entering the "Center" and "Span".
The two sets of parameters influence each other in the following way:
●
"Start Freq" = "Center Freq" - "Span"/2
●
"Stop Freq" = "Center Freq" + "Span"/2
●
"Center Freq" = ("Start Freq" + STOP FREQ)/2
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
145
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
RF Block
●
"Span" = "Stop Freq" - "Start Freq"
RF Frequency Sweep Settings
State - Frequency Sweep
Activates/deactivates RF sweep mode.
Note: Activating the RF-Sweep mode automatically disables other sweep modes, and
the list mode.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FREQuency:​MODE​ on page 301
Mode - Frequency Sweep
Selects the sweep instrument operating mode and the sweep mode.
"Auto"
Sets an automatic repeated sweep cycle. If a different sweep mode was
activated prior to the "Auto" mode, the cycle continues from the current
sweep setting.
The "Reset Sweep" button resets the sweep to the start frequency.
Example:
SOUR:SWE:FREQ:MODE AUTO
TRIG:FSW:SOUR AUTO
SOUR:FREQ:MODE SWE
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
146
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
RF Block
"Single"
Sets a single sweep cycle. The sweep is triggered by the "Execute Single Sweep" button.
If a different sweep mode was activated prior to the "Single" mode, the
current sweep is stopped. The "Single" sweep always starts at the start
frequency when triggered.
The "Reset Sweep" button resets the sweep to the start frequency.
Example:
SOUR:SWE:FREQ:MODE AUTO
TRIG:FSW:SOUR SING
SOUR:FREQ:MODE SWE
SOUR:SWE:FREQ:EXEC
"Step"
Sets a step-by-step sweep cycle.
When mode "Step" is activated, the frequency is set to the sweep "Start
Freq".
To step through the sweep frequencies manually, open the "Current
Freq" field for input and use the UP / DOWN navigation keys or the
rotary knob.
You can determine the step width below in the entry field "Step Lin" or
"Step Log", see ​Step Lin/Log - Frequency Sweep.
If a sweep range border frequency ("Start Freq" or "Stop Freq") is
reached, step commands in direction out of the sweep range are
ignored.
The "Reset Sweep" button resets the sweep to the start frequency.
Note: To step through the sweep frequencies in remote control mode,
use the FREQ:MAN command with the UP or DOWN parameter.
Example:
SOUR:FREQ:CENT 300MHz
SOUR:FREQ:SPAN 400MHz
SOUR:SWE:FREQ:SPAC LIN
SOUR:SWE:FREQ:STEP:LIN 100MHz
SOUR:FREQ:MODE MAN
set sweep mode "Step".
SOUR:FREQ:MODE SW
activate sweep mode, the frequency is set to "Start Freq".
SOUR:FREQ:MAN UP
set the frequency to the next higher sweep frequency.
SOUR:FREQ:MAN DOWN
set the frequency to the next lower sweep frequency.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
147
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
RF Block
"Extern Single" Sets a single sweep cycle. The sweep is triggered by an external trigger
signal.
If a different sweep mode was activated prior to the "Extern Single"
mode, the current sweep is stopped. The "Extern Single" sweep always
starts at the start frequency when triggered.
Refer to the description of the rear panel for information about the connectors for external trigger signal input (see ​chapter 2.2, "Rear Panel
Tour", on page 21).
The "Reset Sweep" button resets the sweep to the start frequency.
Example:
SOUR:SWE:FREQ:MODE AUTO
TRIG:FSW:SOUR EXT
SOUR:FREQ:MODE SWE (External trigger)
"Extern Step"
Sets a step-by-step sweep cycle. Each sweep step is triggered by an
external trigger signal (trigger source as described under "Extern Single"). The step width is set below at entry field "Step Lin" or "Step
Log".
If a different sweep mode was activated prior to the "Extern Step" mode,
the current sweep is stopped. The "Extern Step" sweep always starts
at the start frequency when triggered.
The "Reset Sweep" button resets the sweep to the start frequency.
Example:
SOUR:SWE:FREQ:MODE STEP
SOUR:SWE:FREQ:SPAC LIN
SOUR:SWE:FREQ:STEP:LIN 1MHz
TRIG:FSW:SOUR EXT
SOUR:FREQ:MODE SWE (External trigger)
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
148
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
RF Block
"Extern Start/
Stop"
Sets an automaticly repeated sweep cycle that is started, stopped and
restartet by subsequent external trigger events.
The first external trigger signal starts the sweep (Start).
The next external trigger signal stops the sweep at the current frequency (Stop).
The third external trigger signal starts the sweep at the start frequency
(Start).
If a different sweep mode was activated prior to the "Extern Start/
Stop" mode, the current sweep is stopped and the "Extern Start/Stop"
sweep starts at the start frequency when triggered.
The "Reset" button resets the sweep to the start frequency.
Refer to the description of the rear panel for information about the connectors for external trigger signal input.
The external trigger signal is input at the rear of the instrument (BNC
connector INST TRIG).
Example:
SOUR:SWE:FREQ:MODE AUTO
TRIG:FSW:SOUR EAUT
SOUR:FREQ:MODE SWE (External trigger)
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​MODE​ on page 373
​:​TRIGger<hw>:​FSWeep:​SOURce​ on page 401
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FREQuency:​MODE​ on page 301
Execute Single Sweep - Frequency Sweep
Triggers the sweep manually. A manual sweep can only be triggered if "Mode Single" is
selected.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​EXECute​ on page 372
Reset Sweep - Frequency Sweep
Resets the sweep. The start frequency is set and the next sweep starts from there.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep:​RESet[:​ALL]​ on page 381
Start Freq - Frequency Sweep
Sets the start frequency.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FREQuency:​STARt​ on page 303
Stop Freq - Frequency Sweep
Sets the stop frequency.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FREQuency:​STOP​ on page 303
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
149
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
RF Block
Center Freq - Frequency Sweep
Sets the center frequency.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FREQuency:​CENTer​ on page 298
Span - Frequency Sweep
Sets the span.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FREQuency:​SPAN​ on page 302
Current Freq - Frequency Sweep
Displays the current frequency.
If "Step" is set, the frequency for the next frequency step of the sweep is entered here.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FREQuency:​MANual​ on page 300
Spacing - Frequency Sweep
Selects linear or logarithmic sweep spacing.
"Linear"
With the linear sweep, the step width is a fixed frequency value which
is added to the current frequency. The step width is entered below.
"Logarithmic"
With the logarithmic sweep, the step width is a constant fraction of the
current frequency. This fraction is added to the current frequency. The
logarithmic step width is entered below in %.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​SPACing​ on page 376
Shape - RF Frequency Sweep
Selects the cycle mode for a sweep sequence (shape).
"Sawtooth"
One sweep runs from start to stop frequency. Each subsequent sweep
starts at the start frequency, i.e. the shape of the sweep sequence
resembles a sawtooth.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
150
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
RF Block
"Triangle"
One sweep runs from start to stop frequency and back, i.e. the shape
of the sweep resembles a triangle. Each subsequent sweep starts at
the start frequency.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​SHAPe​ on page 375
Step Lin/Log - Frequency Sweep
Sets the step width for the individual sweep steps. This entry is effective for all sweep
modes.
"Step Lin" or "Step Log" is displayed depending on whether "Spacing Lin" or "Log" is
selected.
"Step Lin"
With the linear sweep, the step width is a fixed frequency value which
is added to the current frequency. The linear step width is entered
in Hz.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​STEP[:​LINear]​ on page 376
"Step Log"
With the logarithmic sweep, the step width is a constant fraction of the
current frequency. The logarithmic step width is entered in %.
Successive frequencies are calculated as follows:
●
start_f < stop_f
f2 = f1 * (1 + step_log / 100)
If f2 > stop_f: f2 is set to stop_f.
●
start_f > stop_f
f2 = f1 / (1 + step_log / 100)
If f2 < stop_f: f2 is set to stop_f.
When the shape "Triangle" is set, the frequency values on the slope
from stop_f back to start_f are the same as on the slope from start_f
to stop_f.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​STEP:​LOGarithmic​ on page 377
Dwell Time - Frequency Sweep
Sets the dwell time. The dwell time determines the duration of the individual sweep steps.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
151
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
RF Block
The "Dwell Time" set by the user is used as the step time of the sweep. The effective net
dwell time is shorter, reduced by the setting time. This setting time may be greater than
the time specified in the data sheet.
Note:
It is recommended to switch off the GUI update for optimum sweep performance especially with short dwell times (see ​chapter 5.2.3.5, "Gui Update", on page 86).
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​DWELl​ on page 372
Use LF connector to output sweep voltage - RF Frequency Sweep
Activates the output of a linear voltage ramp from sweep start to sweep stop at the LF
connector. This signal can be used for the X-deflection of an oscilloscope. The voltage
range is determined below.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​LFConnector​ on page 373
Output Voltage Start Freq - RF Frequency Sweep
Sets the voltage at the sweep start frequency.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​OVOLtage:​STARt​ on page 374
Output Voltage Stop - RF Frequency Sweep
Sets the voltage at the sweep stop frequency..
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​OVOLtage:​STOP​ on page 374
Trigger Input Slope
Sets the polarity of the active slope of an applied instrument trigger.
This setting affects the INST TRIG input (BNC connector at the rear of the instrument).
"Positive"
The rising edge of the trigger signal is active.
"Negative"
The falling edge of the trigger signal is active.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​INPut:​TRIGger:​SLOPe​ on page 305
5.3.7.3
RF Level Sweep
To open the "Level Sweep" menu, select "RF > Configure > Level Sweep" or use the
MENU key under "RF".
RF Level Sweep Settings
In the top section, the Level Sweep is activated and the sweep mode is selected. The
buttons are used to reset the level sweep (all sweep modes) or to execute the level sweep
("Single" mode).
The sweep range, sweep spacing and dwell time are set in the bottom section.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
152
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
RF Block
State - Level Sweep
Activates Level Sweep mode.
Note: Activating the RF level sweep mode automatically disables other sweep modes,
and the list mode.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​MODE​ on page 339
Mode - Level Sweep
Selects the level sweep instrument operating mode and the sweep mode.
"Auto"
Sets an automatically repeated sweep cycle. If a different sweep mode
was activated prior to the "Auto" mode, the cycle continues from the
current sweep setting.
The "Reset Sweep" button resets the sweep to the start level.
Example:
SOUR:SWE:POW:MODE AUTO
TRIG:PSW:SOUR AUTO
SOUR:POW:MODE SWE
"Single"
Sets a single sweep cycle. The sweep is triggered by the "Execute Single Sweep" button.
If a different sweep mode was activated prior to the "Single" mode, the
current sweep is stopped. The single sweep always starts at the start
level.
The "Reset Sweep" button resets the sweep to the start level.
Example:
SOUR:SWE:POW:MODE AUTO
TRIG:PSW:SOUR SING
SOUR:POW:MODE SWE
SOUR:SWE:POW:EXEC
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
153
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
RF Block
"Step"
Sets a step-by-step sweep cycle.
If this mode is activated, the cursor moves to the value displayed for
"Current Level". Each sweep step is triggered by a variation of the value
in the "Current Level" entry window. The step width is set below at entry
field "Step".
If this mode is activated, the cursor moves to the value displayed for
"Current Level". If a different sweep mode was activated prior to the
"Step" mode, the current sweep is stopped. The step sweep starts at
the current level value.
The "Reset Sweep" button resets the sweep to the start level.
Example:
SOUR:SWE:POW:MODE MAN
SOUR:SWE:POW:STEP 0.5
SOUR:POW:MODE SWE
SOUR:POW:MAN -16
The value entered with command SOUR:SWE:POW:STEP sets the step
width.
The value entered with command SOUR:POW:MAN has no effect, the
command only triggers the next sweep step. However, the value has to
be in the currently set sweep range (start to stop). In remote control only
a step-by-step sweep from start to stop frequency is possible.
"Extern Single" Sets a single sweep cycle. The sweep is triggered by an external trigger
signal.
If a different sweep mode was activated prior to the "Extern Single"
mode, the current sweep is stopped. The "Extern Single" sweep always
starts at the start level.
Refer to the description of the rear panel for information about the connectors for external trigger signal input (see ​chapter 2.2, "Rear Panel
Tour", on page 21).
The "Reset Sweep" button resets the sweep to the start level.
Example:
SOUR:SWE:POW:MODE AUTO
TRIG:PSW:SOUR EXT
SOUR:POW:MODE SWE (External trigger)
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
154
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
RF Block
"Extern Step"
Sets a step-by-step sweep cycle. Each sweep step is triggered by an
external trigger signal (trigger source as described under "Extern Single"). The step width corresponds to the step width of the rotary knob.
If a different sweep mode was activated prior to the "Extern Step" mode,
the current sweep is stopped. The "Extern Step" sweep always starts
at the start level.
The "Reset Sweep" button resets the sweep to the start level.
Example:
SOUR:SWE:POW:MODE STEP
SOUR:SWE:POW:STEP 0.5
TRIG:PSW:SOUR EXT
SOUR:POW:MODE SWE (External trigger)
"Extern Start/
Stop"
Sets an automatically repeated sweep cycle that is started, stopped and
restartet by subsequent external trigger events.
The first external trigger signal starts the sweep (Start).
The next external trigger signal stops the sweep at the current frequency (Stop).
The third external trigger signal starts the sweep at the start frequency
(Start).
If a different sweep mode was activated prior to the "Extern Start/
Stop" mode, the current sweep is stopped and the "Extern Start/Stop"
sweep starts at the start frequency when triggered.
The "Reset" button resets the sweep to the start level.
Refer to the description of the rear panel for information about the connectors for external trigger signal input (see section "Legend for Rear
Panel View").
Example:
SOUR:SWE:POW:MODE AUTO
TRIG:PSW:SOUR EAUT
SOUR:POW:MODE SWE (External trigger)
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep:​POWer:​MODE​ on page 378
​:​TRIGger<hw>:​PSWeep:​SOURce​ on page 403.
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​MODE​ on page 339
Reset Sweep - Level Sweep
Resets the sweep. The start level is set and the next sweep starts from there.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep:​RESet[:​ALL]​ on page 381
Execute Single Sweep - Level Sweep
Triggers the sweep manually. A manual sweep can only be triggered if "Mode Single" is
selected.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
155
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
RF Block
Example:
SOUR:SWE:POW:MODE AUTO
TRIG:PSW:SOUR SING
SOUR:POW:MODE SWE
SOUR:SWE:EXEC
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep:​POWer:​EXECute​ on page 378
Start Level - Level Sweep
Sets the start level.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​STARt​ on page 342
Stop Level - Level Sweep
Sets the stop level.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​STOP​ on page 343
Current Level - Level Sweep
Displays the current level.
If "Step" is set, the level for the next level step of the sweep is entered here.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​MANual​ on page 338
Shape - RF Level Sweep
Selects the cycle mode for a sweep sequence (shape).
"Sawtooth"
One sweep runs from the start level to the stop level. The subsequent
sweep starts at the start level again, i.e. the shape of sweep sequence
resembles a sawtooth.
"Triangle"
One sweep runs from start to stop level and back, i.e. the shape of the
sweep resembles a triangle. Each subsequent sweep starts at the start
level again.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep:​POWer:​SHAPe​ on page 379
Step - Level Sweep
Sets the step width for the individual sweep steps. This entry is effective for all sweep
modes.
With the level sweep, the logarithmic step width is a constant fraction of the current level.
This fraction is added to the current level. The logarithmic step width is entered in dB.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep:​POWer:​STEP[:​LOGarithmic]​ on page 380
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
156
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
RF Block
Dwell Time - Level Sweep
Enters the dwell time and determines the duration of the individual sweep steps.
The "Dwell Time" set by the user is used as the step time of the sweep. The effective net
dwell time is shorter, reduced by the setting time. This setting time may be greater than
the time specified in the data sheet.
Note:
It is recommended to switch off the GUI update for optimum sweep performance especially with short dwell times (see ​chapter 5.2.3.5, "Gui Update", on page 86).
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep:​POWer:​DWELl​ on page 378
Trigger Input Slope
Sets the polarity of the active slope of an applied instrument trigger.
This setting affects the INST TRIG input (BNC connector at the rear of the instrument).
"Positive"
The rising edge of the trigger signal is active.
"Negative"
The falling edge of the trigger signal is active.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​INPut:​TRIGger:​SLOPe​ on page 305
5.3.7.4
List Mode
Similar to a sweep, a series of previously defined frequency and level points is processed
in List mode. In contrast to a sweep, however, a list with freely selectable value pairs
(frequency and level) can be created. The value range for frequency and level covers the
entire configurable value range of the instrument.
List mode and sweeps can not be activated simultaneously, they deactivate each other.
The lists can be created in the "List Editor". Each list is stored in its own file with the
predefined file extension *.lsw. The name of the list file can be freely selected. The files
are loaded from the "Lists..." file manager. Externally created tables with pairs of fre-
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
157
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
RF Block
quency and level values can be converted into List files using the import function. The
external files must have the file extension *.txt or *.csv. These file formats are provided e.g. by the Microsoft®Excel program. The separators for table columns and for
decimal floating-point numerals can be set. In addition, internally created List data can
be exported into ASCII files using the export function.
The necessary hardware settings are calculated the first time a list is processed. With
long dwell times, this calculation can be performed while the list is being processed; the
entered dwell times are observed. With very short dwell times, calculation of the hardware
settings increases the dwell time for the initial processing cycle; the entered value is only
observed from the second processing cycle onwards. In this case a message appears to
inform the user that there is a deviation between the current and set dwell times. No
further calculations are required after the first run through a list. The current dwell times
will definitely no longer deviate from the set dwell times.
The list is processed from the beginning to the end of the list (modes "Auto", ("External") "Single", ("External") "Step").
List Mode Dialog
To open the "List Mode" menu, select "RF > Configure > List Mode" or use the MENU
key under "RF".
The menu is used to activate/deactivate the operating mode List, to create, select and
activate the lists, and to select the trigger mode and the dwell time.
General Settings
State - List Mode
Activates/deactivates the List mode. The currently selected list is processed.
In case of a new or modified list, the necessary hardware settings are automatically
determined on activation of the list mode. The data determined in this way is stored along
with the list and is available whenever the list is used again.
This means that when activating the list mode, the system checks whether any hardware
settings are present. If so, the list is started immediately, but if not they are automatically
determined (the list is learnt).
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
158
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
RF Block
A "Learn List Mode Data" button is available for deliberately activating list learning.
Note: Activating the list mode automatically deactivates all sweeps. During list mode the
frequency and level indications do not display the currently set values.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FREQuency:​MODE​ on page 301
Mode - List Mode
Selects the cycle mode of the List mode.
"Auto"
Cycle from the beginning to the end of the list with automatic restart at
the beginning. If a different mode was activated prior to the Auto mode,
the cycle continues from the beginning of the list. The duration of a list
step is determined by the set dwell time.
Button "Reset" restarts the list at the starting point.
"Single"
Single cycle from the beginning to the end of the list. If "Single" is
selected, the cycle is not started immediately. The "Execute Single"
button appears under the "Mode" line. The cycle is started with this
button. The duration of a list step is determined by the set dwell time.
Button "Reset" restarts the list at the starting point.
"Step"
Manual, step-by-step processing of the list. Activating "Step" stops the
current list and the cursor moves to the value displayed for "Current
Index". It is now possible to scroll up and down in the list in discrete
steps by varying the index. The duration of a list step is determined by
the time between two index entries.
Button "Reset" restarts the list at the starting point.
"Extern Single" Single cycle from the beginning to the end of the list as with "Single",
but started by an external trigger.
The external trigger signal is input at the BNC connector INST TRIG.
Button "Reset" restarts the list at the starting point.
"Extern Step"
Step-by-step cycle using the external trigger signal. Each trigger event
starts a single step. The duration of a list step is determined by the time
between two trigger events.
The external trigger signal is input at the BNC connector INST TRIG.
Button "Reset" restarts the list at the starting point.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​MODE​ on page 325
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​TRIGger:​SOURce​ on page 327
Execute Single - List Mode
Triggers the list manually. This button is available only if mode "Single" is selected.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​TRIGger:​EXECute​ on page 327
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
159
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
RF Block
Reset - List Mode
Resets the list to the starting point.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​RESet​ on page 326
Dwell Time - List Mode
Enters the dwell time. The dwell time determines the duration of a list step in list operating
modes "Auto", "Single" and "Extern Single". In these modes a complete list is processed
either once or continuously.
In list operating modes "Step" and "Extern Step", the set dwell time does not affect signal
generation. In this case, the duration of a list step is determined by the time between two
(internal or external) trigger events.
The "Dwell Time" set by the user is used as the step time of the list mode. The effective
net dwell time is shorter, reduced by the setting time. This setting time may be greater
than the time specified in the data sheet.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​DWELl​ on page 322
Current Index - List Mode
Sets the list index in "Step" mode.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​INDex​ on page 323
Learn List Mode Data... - List Mode
Starts the determination of the hardware setting for the selected list. The data determined
in this way is stored along with the list.
It may be necessary to deliberately activate list learning in the event of greatly altered
environmental conditions that require new hardware settings.
If this is not done, a previously learned hardware setting will continue to be used when
list mode is switched on ("State = On"). If no setting is available, e.g. when the list is used
for the first time, learning is automatically activated.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​LEARn​ on page 325
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
160
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
RF Block
List Mode Data... - List Mode
Calls the "File Select" menu for selecting and creating a list or the "File Manager".
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​SELect​ on page 327
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​DELete​ on page 317
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​DELete:​ALL​ on page 317
Edit List Mode Data... - List Mode
Calls the editor for editing the selected list. A list consists of any number of frequency/
level value pairs. The currently selected list is displayed.
"Frequency /
Hz"
Enter the frequency of the frequency/power value pair.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​FREQuency​ on page 322
"Power /dBm"
Enter the level of the frequency/power value pair.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​POWer​ on page 326
"Goto"
Selects row for editing.
If "Goto row" is selected, a window opens for entering the requested
row.
"Edit"
Calls a selection of possible actions described below.
"Insert Row"
Inserts a new row before the marked row.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
161
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
RF Block
"Insert Range"
Inserts new rows before the marked row. The number of rows to be
inserted can be defined in an entry window.
"Fill...."
Opens a sub menu for defining a set of list values to be automatically
entered in the List Mode table (see ​"Filling the List Mode Data automatically" on page 164).
"Delete Row"
Deletes the marked row.
"Delete
Range..."
Allows to delete any number of rows starting with the marked row. The
number of rows to be deleted can be defined in an entry window.
"Save"
The list is saved under its current name.
List Range In - List Mode
Defines an index range in the current list by setting the start and stop index. Only the
values in the selected index range are processed in List mode, all other list entries are
ignored.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​INDex:​STARt​ on page 324
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​INDex:​STOP​ on page 324
Trigger Input Slope
Sets the polarity of the active slope of an applied instrument trigger.
This setting affects the INST TRIG input (BNC connector at the rear of the instrument).
"Positive"
The rising edge of the trigger signal is active.
"Negative"
The falling edge of the trigger signal is active.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​INPut:​TRIGger:​SLOPe​ on page 305
Import/Export
Lists can be imported from externally created files or exported into text or CSV-files. The
import/export settings are available after clicking the "Import/Export" button.
Import/Export - List Mode
Expands the menu with the area for import and export of list mode files.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
162
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
RF Block
Externally edited Excel tables with frequency/level pairs can be imported as text or CSVfiles and used for list mode.
On the other hand, internally created list mode lists can be exported as text or CSV-files.
Mode - List Mode
Selects if list mode lists should be imported or exported. The settings offered below
depend on the selected mode.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​DEXChange:​MODE​ on page 321
Extension - List Mode
Selects the file extension of the ASCII file to be imported or exported. Selection TXT (text
file) or CSV (Excel file) is available.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​DEXChange:​AFILe:​EXTension​ on page 318
Decimal Point - List Mode
Selects the decimal separator used in the ASCII data between '.' (decimal point) and ','
(comma) with floating-point numerals.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​DEXChange:​AFILe:​SEParator:​DECimal​ on page 320
Column Separator- List Mode
Selects the separator between the frequency and level column of the ASCII table.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​DEXChange:​AFILe:​SEParator:​COLumn​ on page 319
Select ASCII Source / Destination - List Mode
Calls the "File Manager" for selecting the ASCII file to be imported into a list mode list
(source) or the ASCII file the list mode list is exported (destination) in.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​DEXChange:​AFILe:​SELect​ on page 319
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
163
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
RF Block
Select Destination / Source - List Mode
Calls the "File Manager" for selecting the list mode list to be exported (source) into an
ASCII file or the destination for the ASCII file to be imported (destination) in.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​DEXChange:​SELect​ on page 321
Import / Export - List Mode
Starts the export or import of the selected file.
When import is selected, the ASCII file is imported as list mode list.
When export is selected, the list mode list is exported into the selected ASCII file.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​DEXChange:​EXECute​ on page 320
Filling the List Mode Data automatically
The "Fill List Mode Data" menu enables you to automatically set the values in the List
Mode table.
The start line and the number of rows to be filled are defined under "From" and
"Range".
The column to be filled is selected under "Select column to fill". Depending on the selection here, the default for start, end, and increment value are set. As the settings are
interdependent, a change of one parameter may result in the automatic change of one
or more of the other parameters.
The filling of the column with the selected value settings is started with button "Fill".
The list entries are only computed when the "Fill" button is pressed.
From
Sets the start value of the index range.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
164
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
Modulation
Range
Sets the range for filling the table.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Select column to fill
Selects either the frequency or the level column to be filled with the value defined below.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Start value
Sets the start value for the frequency or the level entries.
SCPI command:
n.a.
End value
Sets the end value for the frequency or the level entries.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Increment value
Sets the increment for the frequency or the level entries.
SCPI command:
n.a.
Fill
Fills the selected column in the set range with values, starting with the start value and
using the set increment.
SCPI command:
n.a.
5.4 Modulation
5.4.1 Overview of Modulation
The R&S SMB provides amplitude modulation (AM), frequency modulation (FM), phase
modulation (PM), pulse modulation and stereo modulation. In addition, the RF signal can
be modulated with internal modulations waveforms, e.g. sine waves and rectangular signals.
Amplitude, frequency and phase modulation are available for the basic unit (R&S SMB
+ frequency option R&S SMB-B10x) without additional equipment options. A standard LF
generator is provided for internal modulation. A Pulse Generator is provided by option
R&S SMB-K23. Option R&S SMB-K22, Pulse Modulation, is designed for instruments
equipped with frequency-options up to 6 GHz and R&S SMB-K21 for instruments with
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
165
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
Modulation
high frequency options. Stereo modulation is available with option Stereo/RDS coder,
R&S SMB-B5.
Settings for the modulation are made in separate modulation menus. These menus can
be accessed in the block diagram by way of the "Modulation" function block, or by means
of the menu with the same name which is opened using the MENU key.
5.4.1.1
Enabling/Disabling Analog Modulations using the MOD On/Off Key
The MOD ON/OFF key switches the modulations on and off.
MOD ON/OFF
Press the MOD ON/OFF key to enable/disable analog modulations.
Pressing the key again restores the status that was active before the last switch-off. "MOD
OFF" is displayed in the info line of the header next to the "Level" field.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​MODulation[:​ALL]:​STATe​ on page 328
5.4.1.2
Modulation Sources
The following modulations use internal and external modulation sources:
●
Amplitude modulation
●
Pulse modulation
●
Frequency modulation
●
Phase modulation
Internal Modulation Sources
An LF generator and a pulse generator are available as internal modulation sources for
a fully equipped instrument. The LF generator supplies sinusoidal or rectangular signals.
The optional pulse generator (option R&S SMB-K27) provides single and double pulse
modulation with selectable pulse widths and periods or a user-definable pulse train.
See also ​chapter 5.5.1, "Overview of LF Generator", on page 184.
External Modulation Sources
The modulation inputs MOD EXT and PULSE EXT at the rear of the instrument are provided as the external modulation source for amplitude, pulse, frequency and phase modulation.
The external audio signal for stereo modulation is input via the analog L and R inputs or
via the digital S/P DIF interface at the rear of the instrument.
The external modulation signal at the input must have a voltage of US = 1 V (UEFF = 0.707
V) in order to achieve the displayed modulation depth and range. The input voltage should
not exceed 1.1 Vs, otherwise modulation distortions might occur. With external pulse
modulation, the switching point is max. 2.4 V and the voltage at the input should not
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
166
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
Modulation
exceed 5 V. The maximum modulation frequency is 10 MHz for frequency and phase
modulation.
Simultaneous Operation of Several Modulations or Other Operating Modes
The table shows the modulations and operating modes which can be activated simultaneously (+) or which deactivate each other (-).
AM
FM
PhiM
Pulse
Amplitude modulation (AM)
/
+
+
(+)
Frequency modulation (FM)
+
/
-
+
Phase modulation (PhiM)
+
-
/
+
Pulse modulation (Pulse) R&S SMB-K22
(+)
+
+
/
5.4.2 Amplitude Modulation (AM)
An internal and/or external source can be selected for amplitude modulation. The LF
modulation generator is available as the internal source.
Two-tone AM is possible by simultaneously switching on the external and internal source.
The MOD EXT input connector for external feed of analog modulation signals is at the
front of the instrument. The coupling mode of the input (AC or DC) can be selected.
The AM modulation depth is limited by the maximum peak envelope power (PEP).
Exponentional AM (Instruments with 12, 20, or 40 GHz frequency options)
Besides the linear amplitude modulation, whereby the signal voltage is proportional to
the modulation signal, instruments equipped with the frequency options (R&S SMBB112(L) /-B120(L) /-B140(L)) in addition provide a level-proportional power or amplitude
modulation.
In this case, the R&S SMB exponentially distorts the modulation signal, before it is output
at the LF CONNECTOR - regardless of the ​AM Source Int, or Ext . The ​AM Depth is then
indicated in dB.
Signal Sources for Exponential AM
You can perform exponential AM using either the internal, or an external modulation
signal. However, in contrast to linear AM, the signal at the LF output connector is distorted
in any operating mode. ​AM Source Int+Ext is not available.
5.4.2.1
Amplitude Modulation Settings
To open the "Amplitude Modulation" dialog, select "Modulation > Configure > Amplitude
Modulation" or use the MENU key under "Modulation".
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
167
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
Modulation
In the upper section of the dialog, the modulation source is selected and the modulation
switched on. The modulation source can be selected independently for the different
modulation types and the LF output.
The configuration of the selected external and/or internal modulation source is performed
in the lower section of the dialog or in the "LF Output" dialog (internal source only).
These settings affect all modulations which use the same modulation source.
State
Activates/deactivates AM modulation.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​AM:​STATe​ on page 286
AM Source
Selects the source for the AM signal.
"Internal"
Selects the internal LF generator as the source for AM modulation.
"External"
Selects the external source.
The external signal is input via the MOD EXT connector.
"Intern +
Extern"
Selects the internal and external source at the same time, e.g. for performing two-tone AM.
Note: This setting applies to linear AM, see ​"Exponentional AM (Instruments with 12, 20, or 40 GHz frequency options)" on page 167.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​AM:​SOURce​ on page 285
AM Type
Selects between linear or exponential (logarithmic) amplitude modulation, if you work with
an instrument that is equipped with a 12 GHz, or higher frequency option.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​AM:​TYPE​ on page 286
AM Depth
Sets the modulation depth in percent.
Note: With two-tone modulation, observe that the set modulation depth is valid for both
signals and the sum modulation depth is determined by doubling the set modulation
depth. This results in overmodulation if the maximal value for modulation depth is exceeded (see data sheet).
For instruments with frequency option 12 GHz or higher, you can additionally select ​AM
Type Exponential. In this case, the generator sets modulation depth in dB (logarithmic).
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
168
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
Modulation
Modulation is possible both, upwards and downwards. Accordingly, the dynamic range
extends for instruments without attenuator from minimum to maximum level. For instruments with attenuator, the dynamic range corresponds to the ​Fixed Range (PEP) In;
these are downwards about 20 dB, and upwards about 5 dB, i.e. in total about 25 dB
around the set level.
Effects of positive/negative modulation depth:
● ​AM Source Int
– positive depth -> downwards modulation
– negative depth -> upwards modulation
● ​AM Source Ext
– positive depth and negative external voltage -> downwards modulation
– positive depth and positive external voltage -> upwards modulation
– negative depth and negative external voltage -> upwards modulation
– negative depth and positive external voltage -> downwards modulation
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​AM:​DEPTh:​LINear​ on page 284
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​AM:​DEPTh:​EXPonential​ on page 284
LF Gen Frequency
Sets the frequency of the LF generator.
This setting affects all analog modulations which use the LF generator as the internal
modulation source.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput<ch>:​FREQuency​ on page 307
LF Gen Shape
Selects the waveform shape of the LF signal.
Note: The setting "Sawtooth" requires the RF board version 1406.7207.02 or later.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput<ch>:​SHAPe​ on page 314
AM Sensitivity
(Source External only)
Displays the input sensitivity of the MOD EXT input in % per Volt in ​AM Type Linear mode,
and dB/V for ​AM Type Exponential.
The modulation depth entered under "AM Depth" is reached with 1 volt modulation of the
input.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​AM:​SENSitivity?​ on page 285
AM External Coupling
(Source External only)
Selects the coupling mode (AC or DC) for external feed.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
169
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
Modulation
Note: Coupling for external feed via input MOD EXT is set for all modulations with external
source.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​AM:​EXTernal:​COUPling​ on page 284
External Input Impendance
(Source External only)
Selects the impedance for external feed via the EXT MOD input.
Selection 600 Ohm and high (>100 kOhm) is available.
Note: This setting affects all analog modulations which use the external modulation
source.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​INPut:​MODext:​IMPedance​ on page 305
5.4.3 Frequency Modulation (FM)
An internal and/or external source can be selected for frequency modulation. The LF GEN
modulation generator is available as the internal source. Two-tone FM is possible by
simultaneously switching on the external and internal source.
The MOD EXT input connectors for external feed of analog modulation signals are at the
front of the instrument. The coupling mode of the input (AC or DC) can be selected.
Selection between three modulation modes is possible:
●
"Normal" mode with full setting range for modulation bandwidth and FM deviation.
●
"Low Noise" mode with better signal/noise ratio, but reduced setting range for modulation bandwidth
●
"High Deviation" mode with full setting range for FM deviation and a reduced setting
range for modulation bandwidth (see data sheet).
It is not possible to use frequency modulation simultaneously with phase modulation.
5.4.3.1
Frequency Modulation Settings
To open the "Frequency Modulation" menu, select "Modulation > Configure > Frequency
Modulation" or use the MENU key under "Modulation".
In the upper section of the menu, the modulation source is selected and the modulation
is switched on. The modulation source can be selected independently for the different
modulation types and the LF output.
The configuration of the selected external and/or internal modulation source is performed
in the lower section of the menu (internal source only).
These settings affect all modulations which use the same modulation sources.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
170
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
Modulation
State
Activates/deactivates FM modulation.
Activation of FM deactivates phase modulation.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FM:​STATe​ on page 297
FM Source
Selects the source for the FM signal.
"Internal"
Selects the internal LF generator as the source for FM modulation.
"External"
Selects the external source.
The external signal is input via the MOD EXT connector.
"Internal +
External"
Selects the internal and external source at the same time.
This setting enables two-tone FM modulation.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FM:​SOURce​ on page 297
FM Mode
Selects the mode for the frequency modulation.
"Normal"
The maximum range for modulation bandwidth and FM deviation is
available.
"Low Noise"
Frequency modulation with phase noise and spurious characteristics
close to CW mode. The range for modulation bandwidth and FM deviation is reduced (see data sheet).
"High Deviation"
Frequency modulation with full setting range for FM deviation. The
range for modulation bandwidth is reduced (see data sheet).
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FM:​MODE​ on page 296
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
171
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
Modulation
FM Deviation
Sets the modulation deviation in Hz.
The maximal deviation depends on the RF frequency set and the selected modulation
mode (see data sheet). It is possible to enter a deviation that is too high for a certain RF
frequency or to vary the RF frequency to a range in which the deviation can no longer be
set. In this case the maximally possible deviation is set and an error message is displayed.
The deviation of the internal source must not exceed the deviation of the external source
in case of modulation source "Int+Ext".
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FM[:​DEViation]​ on page 295
LF Gen Frequency
Sets the frequency of the LF generator.
This setting affects all analog modulations which use the LF generator as the internal
modulation source.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput<ch>:​FREQuency​ on page 307
LF Gen Shape
Selects the waveform shape of the LF signal.
Note: The setting "Sawtooth" requires the RF board version 1406.7207.02 or later.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput<ch>:​SHAPe​ on page 314
FM Sensitivity
(Source External only)
Displays the input sensitivity of the MOD EXT input in Hz/V.
The modulation depth entered under "FM Depth" is reached with 1 Volt (= Upeak) of the
input signal.
Note: The input voltage should not exceed 1.1 Vp otherwise modulation distortions might
occur.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FM:​SENSitivity?​ on page 297
Adjust FM Offset
Starts the adjustment for the FM/PhiM modulator. The option is adjusted with respect to
DC-offset.
SCPI command:
​:​CALibration<hw>:​FMOFfset[:​MEASure]?​ on page 247
FM External Coupling
(Source External only)
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
172
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
Modulation
Selects the coupling mode (AC or DC) for external feed.
Note: Coupling for external feed via input MOD EXT is set for all modulations with external
source.
"AC"
The d.c. voltage content is separated from the modulation signal.
"DC"
The modulation signal is not altered.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FM:​EXTernal:​COUPling​ on page 296
External Input Impendance
(Source External only)
Selects the impedance for external feed via the EXT MOD input.
Selection 600 Ohm and high (>100 kOhm) is available.
Note: This setting affects all analog modulations which use the external modulation
source.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​INPut:​MODext:​IMPedance​ on page 305
5.4.4 Phase Modulation (PhiM)
It is not possible to use phase modulation simultaneously with frequency modulation.
An internal and/or external source can be selected for phase modulation. The LF GEN
modulation generator is available as the internal source.
The MOD EXT input connector for external feed of analog modulation signals is at the
front of the instrument. The coupling mode of the input (AC or DC) and the impedance
can be selected.
Selection between the following modulation modes is possible:
5.4.4.1
●
"Normal" mode with full setting range for modulation bandwidth and PhiM deviation.
●
"Low Phase" mode with better signal/noise ratio, but reduced setting range for modulation bandwidth and deviation (see data sheet)
●
"High Deviation" mode with full setting range for PhiM deviation and a reduced setting
range for modulation bandwidth. Phase noise is reduced in the lower modulation
frequency range compared to the default mode.
Phase Modulation Menu
To open the "Phase Modulation" menu, select "Modulation > Configure > Phase Modulation" or use the MENU key under "Modulation".
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
173
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
Modulation
In the upper section of the menu, the modulation source is selected and the modulation
switched on. The modulation source can be selected independently for the different
modulation types and the LF output.
The configuration of the selected external and/or internal modulation source is performed
in the lower section of the menu (internal source only).
These settings affect all modulations which use the same modulation sources.
An LF generator and a pulse generator are available as internal sources.
State
Activates/deactivates PhiM modulation.
Activation of PhiM deactivates frequency modulation.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PM:​STATe​ on page 333
PhiM Source
Selects the source for the PhiM signal.
"Internal"
Selects the internal LF generator as the source for PhiM modulation.
"External"
Selects the external source.
The external signal is input via the MOD EXT connector.
"Internal +
External"
Selects the internal and external source at the same time.
The external signal is input via the MOD EXT connector.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PM:​SOURce​ on page 333
PhiM Mode
Selects the mode for the phase modulation.
"Normal"
The full range for modulation bandwidth and PM deviation is available.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
174
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
Modulation
"High Deviation"
The maximum range for PhiM deviation is available. Phase noise is
improved for low frequencies compared to the default mode. The range
for modulation frequency is limited (see data sheet).
This mode is recommended for low modulation frequencies and/or high
PhiM deviation.
"Low Noise"
Phase modulation with phase noise and spurious characteristics close
to CW mode. The range for modulation bandwidth and PM deviation is
reduced (see data sheet).
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PM:​MODE​ on page 331
PhiM Deviation
Sets the modulation depth in RAD or degrees.
The maximal deviation depends on the RF frequency set and the selected modulation
mode (see data sheet). It is possible to enter a deviation that is too high for a certain RF
frequency or to vary the RF frequency to a range in which the deviation can no longer be
set. In this case the maximally possible deviation is set and an error message is displayed.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PM[:​DEViation]​ on page 330
LF Gen Frequency
Sets the frequency of the LF generator.
This setting affects all analog modulations which use the LF generator as the internal
modulation source.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput<ch>:​FREQuency​ on page 307
LF Gen Shape
Selects the waveform shape of the LF signal.
Note: The setting "Sawtooth" requires the RF board version 1406.7207.02 or later.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput<ch>:​SHAPe​ on page 314
PhiM Sensitivity
(Source External only)
Displays the input sensitivity of the MOD EXT input in RAD/V.
The modulation depth entered under "PhiM Depth" is reached with 1 volt (=Upeak) of the
input signal.
Note: The input voltage should not exceed 1.1 Vp otherwise modulation distortions might
occur.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PM:​SENSitivity?​ on page 332
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
175
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
Modulation
Mod External Coupling
Selects the coupling mode (AC OR DC) for external feed.
Note: Coupling for external feed via input MOD EXT is set for all modulations with external
source.
"AC"
The DC voltage content is separated from the modulation signal.
"DC"
The modulation signal is not altered.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PM:​EXTernal:​COUPling​ on page 330
External Input Impendance
(Source External only)
Selects the impedance for external feed via the EXT MOD input.
Selection 600 Ohm and high (>100 kOhm) is available.
Note: This setting affects all analog modulations which use the external modulation
source.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​INPut:​MODext:​IMPedance​ on page 305
5.4.5 Pulse Modulation (PM)
External and internal Pulse modulation requires options R&S SMB-K22, Pulse Modulator
and R&S SMB-K23, Pulse Generator. Option R&S SMB-K27, Pulse Train, enables generation of pulse trains.
An internal or external source can be selected for pulse modulation. In case of external
source, the external signal is input via the PULSE EXT connector at the rear of the instrument. In case of internal source, this connector can be used as external trigger or gate
signal input for internal pulse modulation. The polarity and input impedance of the connector can be selected.
The pulse signal is output at the PULSE VIDEO connector at the rear of the instrument.
Automatic Level Control is deactivated with pulse modulation!
When pulse modulation is activated, the ALC state of the R&S SMB is automatically
changed to "ALC OFF" ("Sample & Hold"). In this state, the ALC loop is opened and the
output level is not regulated but the level modulator is set directly. In order to set the
correct output level, a sample & hold measurement is executed after each frequency or
level setting.
The level is decreased by 30 dB during "Sample&Hold" measurement.
5.4.5.1
Pulse Modulation Settings
To open the "Pulse Modulation" menu, select "Modulation > Configure > Pulse Modulation" or use the MENU key under "Mod".
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
176
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
Modulation
In the upper section of the menu, the modulation source is selected and the modulation
switched on. The configuration of the selected external and/or internal modulation source
is performed in the lower section of the menu.
The menu varies according to the selected modulation source.
In case of modulation source pulse generator, the settings for the pulse characteristics
and the trigger are offered in the "Pulse Generator" section of the "Pulse Modulation"
dialog. Option R&S SMB-K23 offers extended features, e.g. generation of double pulse
or selection of trigger mode. For description of the pulse generator dialog, see ​chapter 5.5.4, "Pulse Generator", on page 191.
Additionally, you can use the internally generated Valid Signal for synchronizsation of the
pulse modulation, and assign this signal to the VALID SIGNAL connector. See also ​
chapter 5.5.4, "Pulse Generator", on page 191 for description.
Option R&S SMB-K27 enables the generation of pulse trains. For description of the pulse
train dialog, see ​chapter 5.5.4.2, "Pulse Train Generation", on page 194.
State
Activates/deactivates pulse modulation.
When the internal modulation source (pulse generator) is selected, the pulse generator
is switched on automatically and the video/sync signal is output at the PULSE VIDEO
output at the rear of the instrument. Signal output can be switched off in the "Pulse Generator" dialog (see ​chapter 5.5.4, "Pulse Generator", on page 191).
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​STATe​ on page 349
Source
Selects the source for the pulse modulation signal.
"Pulse Genera- Selects the Pulse Generator as modulation source.
The internally generated reactangular signal is used for the pulse modtor"
ulation.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
177
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
Modulation
"External"
Selects the external source.
The external modulation signal is input via the PULSE EXT connector.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​SOURce​ on page 348
Polarity
(External Source only)
Selects the polarity of the modulation signal.
"Normal"
The RF signal is On while the level is high at the modulation input.
"Inverse"
The RF level is Off if the level is high at the modulation input.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​POLarity​ on page 348
5.4.6 Stereo Modulation
Options R&S SMB-B5, Stereo/RDS Coder enables generation of stereo-modulated RF
signals according to standard. Beside the MPX (FM stereo multiplex) signal, also the
radio traffic service ARI (Automotive Radio Information) and Radio Data System (RDS)
are supported by the option.
An internal or external source can be selected for the audio signal of the stereo modulation. In case of external source, the external signal is input via the analog L and R inputs
or via the digital S/P DIF interface at the rear of the instrument. In case of internal source,
the LF generator is used. Measurements can be performed in the operating modes L and
R, and L = R, L = –R and R!=L (ext. signals only).
A typical setup with the R&S SMB with the option Stereo/RDS Coder in connection with
the Audio Analyzer UPV is shown in the following graph.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
178
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
Modulation
5.4.6.1
Stereo Modulation Dialog
To open the "Stereo Modulation" dialog, select "Modulation > Configure > Stereo Modulation" or use the MENU key under "Modulation".
In the upper section of the menu, the stereo modulation is configured and switched on.
The configuration and activation of the additional pilot tone, ARI and RDS settings is
performed in the lower section of the dialog.
General Settings
State - Stereo Modulation
Activates/deactivates stereo modulation.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​STATe​ on page 370
FM Deviation - Stereo Modulation
Sets the MPX (Multiplex stereo signal) deviation.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​STEReo[:​DEViation]​ on page 371
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
179
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
Modulation
Audio Source - Stereo Modulation
Selects the source for the audio signal.
"Off"
No audio signal is provided, ARI and RDS signal can be generated
separately.
"Ext L,R"
The external audio stereo signal is feed in via the analog L and R inputs.
"Ext S/P Diff"
The external audio signal is feed in via the digital S/P DIF input.
"LF Gen"
The audio stereo signal is internally generated by the LF generator.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​SOURce​ on page 370
Mode - Stereo Modulation
Selects the mode for the audio signal. If the internal LF generator is selected as audio
source, the signal is generated according to the selection here. For external signals, the
signal type has to be entered.
"Mono Left"
A mono signal containing the left channel is generated/fed in.
"Mono Right"
A mono signal containing the right channel is generated/fed in.
"Stereo R=L"
A stereo signal with right and left channel is generated/fed in. The
channels have the same frequency and phase.
"Stereo R=-L"
The signal on the left external audio input is used for both channels, left
and right. The right channel is inverted.
"Stereo R!=L"
(External source only)
A stereo signal containing different, independent right and left channels
is fed in. It is possible, for example, to feed a fixed audio frequency to
the first channel while a frequency sweep is being performed in the
second channel.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​AUDio:​MODE​ on page 365
LF Gen Freq - Stereo Modulation
(Audio source "LF Gen" only)
Sets the frequency of the LF generator signal.
This setting affects all analog modulations which use the LF generator as the internal
modulation source.
SCPI command:
(two alias commands are available)
​[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​AUDio[:​FREQuency]​ on page 366
​[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput<ch>:​FREQuency​ on page 307
LF Gen Shape - Stereo Modulation
(Audio source "LF Gen" only)
Selects the shape of the LF generator signal.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
180
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
Modulation
This setting affects all analog modulations which use the LF generator as the internal
modulation source.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput<ch>:​SHAPe​ on page 314
External R/L Impedance - Stereo Modulation
(External analog audio signal input only)
Selects the input impedance for the external analog audio signal inputs L and R.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​EXTernal:​IMPedance​ on page 367
Preemphasis - Stereo Modulation
Activates and sets the pre-emphasis used for signal generation.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​AUDio:​PREemphasis:​STATe​ on page 366
​[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​AUDio:​PREemphasis​ on page 365
Max Modulation Freq- Stereo Modulation
Sets the maximum modulation frequency that may be used.
This parameter is valid/required only when pre-emphasis has been activated and an
external modulation source is used.
Pre-emphasis increases the high-frequency portions of the signal in the level before the
FM modulator is reached. This can lead to internal overload of the modulator in the case
of sinewave signals with full modulation. The MMF parameter is used to reduce the internal full modulation to such an extent that sinewave signals with nominal voltage can be
transmitted with low distortion at the stereo input even when pre-emphasis up to the set
frequency has been activated. However, this reduces the S/N ratio on the basis of the
increase in level by the pre-emphasis (at the MMF that has been set).
In the case of normal modulation signals such as voice or music, this parameter can be
left at its default value because the amplitude of the high-frequency portions of these
signals normally decreases substantially.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​MMF​ on page 367
Stereo Pilot Tone Settings
The 19 kHz pilot tone is configured in the "Stereo Pilot Tone Settings" section.
Pilot State - Stereo Modulation
Activates/deactivates the pilot tone generation.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​PILot:​STATe​ on page 368
Pilot Deviation - Stereo Modulation
Sets the deviation of the pilot tone.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​PILot[:​DEViation]​ on page 368
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
181
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
Modulation
Pilot Phase - Stereo Modulation
Sets the phase of the pilot tone in relation to the 38 kHz carrier signal of the receiver. For
a correct demodulation, the pilot tone must be in phase with the 38 kHz carrier.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​PILot:​PHASe​ on page 367
ARI Settings
The radio traffic service ARI (Automotive Radio Information) is configured in the "ARI
Settings" section.
ARI State - Stereo Modulation
Activates/deactivates the ARI signal generation. ARI signals can be generated simultaneously with MPX and RDS signals.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​ARI:​STATe​ on page 363
ARI Deviation - Stereo Modulation
Sets the frequency deviation of the ARI subcarrier signal.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​ARI[:​DEViation]​ on page 364
ARI Identification - Stereo Modulation
Selects the generated identifiers of the ARI signal.
"Off"
Only the 57 kHz subcarrier is generated (Senderkennung). It marks the
stations which broadcast traffic programs and enables the receiver to
recognize the frequency as being ARI-capable.
"DK"
The message identification (Durchsagekennung) is generated in addition (low-frequency 30% AM). It signalizes that a traffic message is currently broadcasted.
"BK"
The area identification (Bereichskennung) is generated in addition
(60% AM). This code is used to identify the geographical region covered
by the radio station. The specific code is selected below.
"DK+BK"
The area and message identification are generated in addition.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​ARI:​TYPE​ on page 363
ARI BK - Stereo Modulation
Selects the specific area identification (BK) code of the ARI signal. The six letters (six
different frequencies) identify a specific region in each country.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​ARI:​BK[:​CODE]​ on page 363
RDS Settings
The RDS (Radio Data System) is configured in the RDS Settings section, RDS is a communications protocol standard from the European Broadcasting Union for sending digital
information embedded in conventional FM radio broadcasts. The RDS system standard-
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
182
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
Modulation
ises several types of transmitted information, including time, track/artist info and station
identification.
RDS State - Stereo Modulation
Activates/deactivates the RDS signal generation. RDS signals can be generated simultaneously with MPX and ARI signals.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​RDS:​STATe​ on page 369
RDS Deviation - Stereo Modulation
Sets the deviation of the RDS subcarrier.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​RDS[:​DEViation]​ on page 370
RDS Data Set - Stereo Modulation
Selects the data set used in the RDS signal. Five data sets are provided on the instrument.
The values of the data sets can be defined via remote control (command
SOURce:STEReo:DIRect)
Each of these data sets contains predefined values for:
● PI (program identification, identifies the broadcast station )
● PS or scrolling PS (program service name, represents the station identity name)
● TP (traffic program, mark stations with regular traffic programs )
● TA (traffic announcement, marks the start of a traffic program)
● PTY (program type, predefined genres of broadcasting programs, e.g. news)
● PTYN (program type name)
● DI (decoder information)
● MS (music /speech)
● CT (clock time, used for synchronization)
The following values are empty:
● RT (radio text, two text blocks with 64 symbols each)
● AF (alternative frequencies, maximum of five lists with 25 frequencies each, enables
the receiver to re-tune to a different frequency providing the same station when the
first signal becomes too weak)
● TMC (traffic message channel)
● EON (enhanced other networks, eight PS with five EON AF lists each, enables the
receiver to automatically tune into these stations if a traffic programs are broadcasted)
The program identification and the program service name of the selected data set are
indicated in the menu.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​RDS:​DATaset​ on page 368
RDS Program Service Name - Stereo Modulation
Indicates the RDS program service name.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​DIRect​ on page 366
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
183
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
Modulation Generator and LF Output
RDS Program Identification - Stereo Modulation
Indicates the RDS program identification.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​DIRect​ on page 366
RDS Traffic Program State - Stereo Modulation
Activates the RDS traffic program (TP function). The receiver can recognize a frequency
as being capable of traffic information only if the TP function is active.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​RDS:​TRAFfic:​PROGram[:​STATe]​ on page 369
RDS Traffic Announcement State - Stereo Modulation
Activates the RDS traffic announcement (TA function). If activated, the receiver switches
from the current status, e.g. playing a CD, to the receive mode and enables the broadcast
of a traffic announcement. The TP state has to be on.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​RDS:​TRAFfic:​ANNouncement[:​STATe]​ on page 369
Adjustment Data
Indicates the adjustment state of the analog channels of the stereo coder. For the adjustment of the S/P DIF see service manual, chapter 2, "Adjustment".
See also ​"Adjust Stereo Coder" on page 83.
5.5 Modulation Generator and LF Output
5.5.1 Overview of LF Generator
An LF generator providing sinusoidal and square signals in the frequency range 0.1 Hz
to 1 MHz is available for the basic unit without additional equipment options.
The LF-Generator is the internal source for the analog modulations AM, FM and PhiM,
and provides the signal also at the LF output (front) of the instrument.
The frequency setting for the LF generator can be made both in the modulation dialogs
and in the "LF Generator / Output" dialog. The settings are effective for all modulations
using the internal modulation source.
A change to the frequency of the LF generator automatically has an effect on modulation
if the LF generator is selected as the modulation source (i.e. "Internal" is selected as
"Source").
The LF Sweep mode is activated in the "LF Frequency Sweep" dialog (see ​chapter 5.5.3,
"LF Frequency Sweep", on page 186). "RF frequency" and "RF Level" sweeps are activated in the respective dialogs of the RF block.
The option Pulse Generator (R&S SMB-K23) enables the generation of single and double
pulse signals.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
184
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
Modulation Generator and LF Output
Option (R&S SMB-K27), Pulse Train, enables generation of pulse trains.
The generator is activated and configured in the "Pulse Generator" dialog of the "Mod
Gen" block or in the "Pulse Modulation" dialog of the "Modulation" block ("Pulse Generator" is selected as "Source").
5.5.2 LF Output
To open the "LF Generator / Output" dialog, select "Mod Gen" > "Configure" > "LF Generator / Output" or use the MENU key under "Mod Gen".
The "LF Output" dialog provides access to the configuration of the internal modulation
generators. In addition, the LF output is configured in this menu. The available settings
depend on the source selected and on the installed options.
In the upper section of the menu, the LF output is switched on. The configuration of the
internal source is performed in the lower section of the "LF Output" menu or in the individual modulation menus (e.g. "Amplitude Modulation" menu). These settings affect all
modulations which use the same modulation sources and the LF output.
AM Exponential (Instruments with 12, 20, or 40 GHz frequency options)
If you perform exponential AM (​AM Type Exponential) with the internal signal of the LF
generator, the LF output provides the exponential modulation signal.
Using ​AM Source External, the instrument supplies the distorted external signal. The
signal of the internal modulation generator is not available, as well as setting the parameters ​LF Gen Frequency and ​"LF Gen Shape" on page 169.
5.5.2.1
LF Output Dialog
State - LF Output
Activates/deactivates the LF output. This setting has no effect on the modulations.
The modulation signal is output at the LF OUTPUT connector of the instrument.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput[:​STATe]​ on page 309
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
185
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
Modulation Generator and LF Output
Output Voltage - LF Output
Sets the output voltage of the LF output. The entered value determines the peak voltage.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput:​VOLTage​ on page 314
LF Gen Frequency
Sets the frequency of the LF generator.
This setting affects all analog modulations which use the LF generator as the internal
modulation source.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput<ch>:​FREQuency​ on page 307
LF Gen Shape
Selects the waveform shape of the LF signal.
Note: The setting "Sawtooth" requires the RF board version 1406.7207.02 or later.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput<ch>:​SHAPe​ on page 314
LF Source Impedance
Selects the output impedance of the LF generator. Selection LOW and 600 Ohm are
available.
Note: The setting "600 Ohm" requires the RF board version 1406.7207.02 or later.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput:​SIMPedance​ on page 314
5.5.3 LF Frequency Sweep
The "LF Frequency Sweep" dialog is used to activate and configure a sweep for the LF
frequency.
To open the "LF Frequency Sweep" dialog, select "Mod Gen" > "Configure" > "LF Frequency Sweep" or use the MENU key under "Mod Gen".
In the top section, the LF Sweep mode is activated and the sweep mode is selected. The
buttons are used to reset the LF sweep (all sweep modes) or to execute the LF sweep
("Single" mode).
The sweep range, sweep spacing and dwell time are set in the bottom of the section.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
186
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
Modulation Generator and LF Output
State - LF Sweep
Activates LF Sweep mode.
Note: Activating the LF frequency sweep automatically deactivates the list mode, RF
level sweep and RF frequency sweep.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput:​FREQuency:​MODE​ on page 308
Mode - LF Sweep
Selects the Sweep instrument operating mode and Sweep mode.
"Auto"
Sets are automatic repeated sweep cycle. If a different sweep mode
was activated prior to the "Auto" mode, the cycle continues from the
current sweep setting.
The "Reset Sweep" button resets the sweep to the start frequency.
Example:
SOUR:LFO:SWE:FREQ:MODE AUTO
TRIG0:SWE:SOUR AUTO
SOUR:LFO:FREQ:MODE SWE
"Single"
Sets a single sweep cycle. The sweep is triggered by the "Execute Single Sweep" button.
If a different sweep mode was activated prior to the "Single" mode, the
current sweep is stopped. The "Single" sweep always starts at the start
frequency.
The "Reset Sweep" button resets the sweep to the start frequency.
Example:
SOUR:LFO:SWE:FREQ:MODE AUTO
TRIG0:SWE:SOUR SING
SOUR:LFO:FREQ:MODE SWE
SOUR:LFO:SWE:FREQ:EXEC
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
187
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
Modulation Generator and LF Output
"Step"
Sets a step-by-step sweep cycle. Each sweep step is triggered by a
variation of the value in the "Current Freq" entry window.
If this mode is activated, the cursor moves to the value displayed for
"Current Freq". If a different sweep mode was activated prior to the
"Step" mode, the current sweep is stopped. The "Step" sweep starts at
the current LF frequency.
The "Reset Sweep" button resets the sweep to the start frequency.
Example:
SOUR:LFO:SWE:FREQ:MODE MAN
SOUR:LFO:FREQ:MODE SWE
SOUR:LFO:SWE:FREQ:SPAC LIN
SOUR:LFO:SWE:FREQ:STEP:LIN 1E34
SOUR:LFO:FREQ:MAN 12 kHz
The value entered with command
SOUR:LFO:SWE:FREQ:STEP:LIN|LOG sets the step width.
The value entered with command SOUR:LFO:FREQ:MAN has no effect,
the command only sets the next sweep step. In remote control only a
step-by-step sweep from start to stop frequency is possible
"Extern Single" Sets a single sweep cycle. The sweep is triggered by an external trigger
signal.
If a different sweep mode was activated prior to the "Extern Single"
mode, the current sweep is stopped. The "Extern Single" sweep always
starts at the start frequency.
The external trigger signal is input at the BNC connector INST TRIG.
The "Reset Sweep" button resets the sweep to the start frequency.
Example:
SOUR:LFO:SWE:FREQ:MODE AUTO
TRIG0:SWE:SOUR EXT
SOUR:LFO:FREQ:MODE SWE (External trigger)
"Extern Step"
Sets a step-by-step sweep cycle. Each sweep step is triggered by an
external trigger signal (trigger source as described under "Extern Single"). The step width corresponds to the step width set for the rotary
knob.
If a different sweep mode was activated prior to the "Extern Step" mode,
the current sweep is stopped. The "Extern Step" sweep always starts
at the LF start frequency.
The "Reset Sweep" button resets the sweep to the start frequency.
Example:
SOUR:LFO:SWE:FREQ:MODE AUTO
TRIG0:SWE:SOUR EXT
SOUR:LFO:FREQ:MODE SWE (External trigger)
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
188
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
Modulation Generator and LF Output
"Extern Start/
Stop"
Sets an automatically repeated sweep cycle that is started, stopped and
restartet by subsequent external trigger events.
The first external trigger signal starts the sweep (Start).
The next external trigger signal stops the sweep at the current frequency (Stop).
The third external trigger signal starts the sweep at the start frequency
(Start).
If a different sweep mode was activated prior to the "Extern Start/
Stop" mode, the current sweep is stopped and the "Extern Start/Stop"
sweep starts at the start frequency when triggered.
The "Reset" button resets the sweep to the start frequency.
The external trigger signal is input at the BNC connector INST TRIG.
Example:
SOUR:LFO:SWE:FREQ:MODE AUTO
TRIG0:SWE:SOUR EAUT
SOUR:LFO:FREQ:MODE SWE (External trigger)
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​MODE​ on page 310
​:​TRIGger<hw>[:​SWEep]:​SOURce​ on page 404
​[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput:​FREQuency:​MODE​ on page 308
Execute Single Sweep - LF Sweep
Triggers the sweep manually. A manual sweep can only be triggered if "Mode Single" is
selected.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​EXECute​ on page 310
Reset Sweep - LF Sweep
Resets the sweep. The start frequency is set and the next sweep starts from there.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep:​RESet[:​ALL]​ on page 381
Start Freq - LF Sweep
Sets the start frequency.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput:​FREQuency:​STARt​ on page 308
Stop Freq - LF Sweep
Sets the stop frequency.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput:​FREQuency:​STOP​ on page 309
Current Freq - LF Sweep
Displays the current frequency.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
189
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
Modulation Generator and LF Output
If "Step" is set, the frequency for the next frequency step of the sweep is entered here.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput:​FREQuency:​MANual​ on page 307
Spacing - LF Sweep
Selects linear or logarithmic sweep spacing.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​SPACing​ on page 312
Shape - LF Frequency Sweep
Selects the cycle mode for a sweep sequence (shape)
"Sawtooth"
One sweep runs from start to stop frequency. Each subsequent sweep
starts at the start frequency, i.e. the shape of the sweep sequence
resembles a sawtooth.
"Triangle"
One sweep runs from start to stop frequency and back, i.e. the shape
of the sweep resembles a triangle. Each subsequent sweep starts at
the start frequency.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​SHAPe​ on page 312
Step Lin/Log - LF Sweep
Sets the step width for the individual sweep steps. This entry is effective for all sweep
modes.
"Step Lin" or "Step Log" is displayed depending on whether "Spacing Lin" or "Log" is
selected.
"Step Lin"
With the linear sweep, the step width is a fixed frequency value which
is added to the current frequency. The linear step width is entered in
Hz.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​STEP[:​LINear]​ on page 312
"Step Log"
With the logarithmic sweep, the step width is a constant fraction of the
current frequency. This fraction is added to the current frequency. The
logarithmic step width is entered in %.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​STEP:​LOGarithmic​ on page 313
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
190
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
Modulation Generator and LF Output
Dwell Time - LF Sweep
Sets the dwell time. The dwell time determines the duration of the individual sweep steps.
The "Dwell Time" set by the user is used as the step time of the sweep. The effective net
dwell time is shorter, reduced by the setting time. This setting time may be greater than
the time specified in the data sheet.
Note:
It is recommended to switch off the GUI update for optimum sweep performance especially with short dwell times (see ​chapter 5.2.3.5, "Gui Update", on page 86).
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​DWELl​ on page 310
Trigger Input Slope
Sets the polarity of the active slope of an applied instrument trigger.
This setting affects the INST TRIG input (BNC connector at the rear of the instrument).
"Positive"
The rising edge of the trigger signal is active.
"Negative"
The falling edge of the trigger signal is active.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce]:​INPut:​TRIGger:​SLOPe​ on page 305
5.5.4 Pulse Generator
The "Pulse Generator" dialog is used to activate and configure a pulse modulation signal.
To open the "Pulse Generator" dialog, select "Mod Gen" > "Configure" > "Pulse Generator" or use the MENU key under "Mod gen". Alternatively, you can configure the pulse
generator in the "Pulse Modulation" dialog of the "Modulation" block.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
191
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
Modulation Generator and LF Output
5.5.4.1
Pulse Generator Settings
The dialog provides the settings for the pulse characteristics and trigger mode.
Video Sync Signal State - Pulse Generator
Switches on/off the output of the video/sync signal at the PULSE VIDEO connector. The
signal output and the pulse generator are automatically switched on with activation of
pulse modulation if pulse generator is selected as modulation source. The signal output
can be switched off subsequently.
Pulse modulation of the RF carrier is activated in the "Pulse modulation" menu of the
"Modulation" block.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PGEN:​STATe​ on page 328
Pulse Mode - Pulse Generator
Sets the mode of the pulse generator.
"Single"
A single pulse is generated in one pulse period.
"Double"
Two pulses are generated in one pulse period. Additional settings for
the double pulse are available in the menu.
"Train"
Requires option R&S SMB-K27.
A user-defined pulse train is generated. Additional settings for the pulse
train are available in the menu after selection of the pulse train mode
(see ​chapter 5.5.4.2, "Pulse Train Generation", on page 194).
A pulse train is a sequence of pulses with user-defined on and off times.
The ontime/offtime value pairs are defined in a pulse train list. The currently used pulse train file is displayed in the sub menu.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​MODE​ on page 346
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
192
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
Modulation Generator and LF Output
Pulse Period - Pulse Generator
Sets the period of the generated pulse. The period determines the repetition frequency
of the internal signal.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​PERiod​ on page 347
Pulse Width - Pulse Generator
Sets the width of the generated pulse. The width determines the pulse length. The pulse
width must be at least 20 ns less than the set pulse period.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​WIDTh​ on page 359
Pulse Delay - Pulse Generator
(External trigger only)
Sets the pulse delay. The pulse delay determines the time that elapses after a trigger
event before pulse modulation starts. The pulse delay is not effective for double pulse
generation.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​DELay​ on page 345
Double Pulse Width - Pulse Generator
(Double Pulse only)
Sets the width of the second pulse.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​DOUBle:​WIDTh​ on page 346
Double Pulse Delay - Pulse Generator
(Double Pulse only)
Sets the delay from the start of the first pulse to the start of the second pulse.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​DOUBle:​DELay​ on page 345
Trigger Mode - Pulse Generator
Selects the trigger mode for pulse modulation.
"Auto"
The pulse generator signal is generated continuously.
"Ext Triggered" The pulse generator signal is triggered by an external trigger event. The
trigger signal is supplied via the PULSE EXT connector.
"Ext Gated"
The pulse generator signal is gated by an external gate signal.
The signal is supplied via the PULSE EXT connector.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRIGger:​MODE​ on page 354
External Trigger Input Slope - Pulse Generator
(External Trigger only)
Sets the polarity of the active slope of an applied trigger signal.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
193
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
Modulation Generator and LF Output
"Positive"
The pulse generator is triggered on the positive slope of the external
trigger signal.
"Negative"
The pulse generator is triggered on the negative slope of the external
trigger signal.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRIGger:​EXTernal:​SLOPe​ on page 354
Gate Input Polarity - Pulse Generator
(Trigger Mode External Gated only)
Selects the polarity of the Gate signal.
The signal is supplied via the PULSE EXT connector.
"Normal"
The pulse signal is generated while the gate signal is high.
"Inverse"
The pulse signal is generated while the gate signal is low.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRIGger:​EXTernal:​GATE:​POLarity​ on page 353
Pulse External Input Impedance
Selects the input impedance (10 kOhm or 50 Ohm) for the external trigger and gate signal
input (PULSE EXT).
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRIGger:​EXTernal:​IMPedance​ on page 354
Use SIGNAL VALID as Pulse Sync
Configures the signal at the SIGNAL VALID connector (rear panel):
"selected"
"cleared"
Indicates the validity of the RF signal at the output:
●
high: while the signal settles.
●
low: when it is stable (valid).
Generates a single pulse at the beginning of a pulse sequence, e.g. to
synchronize pulse modulation.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​OUTPut:​SYNC[:​STATe]​ on page 347
5.5.4.2
Pulse Train Generation
Upon selection of mode pulse train the menu is extended for configuring a user-defined
pulse train.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
194
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
Modulation Generator and LF Output
A pulse train is a sequence of pulses with user-defined on and off times. The ontime/
offtime value pairs are defined in a pulse train list. The currently used pulse train file is
displayed in the sub menu.
An internally created pulse train list can be exported or externally created list can be
imported.
Pulse Train Data – Pulse Generator
Calls the "File Select" menu for selecting and creating a pulse train file or to open the
"File Manager".
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRAin:​CATalog?​ on page 349
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRAin:​SELect​ on page 353
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRAin:​DELete​ on page 350
Edit Pulse Train Data – Pulse Generator
Calls the ​Pulse Train Dialog.
Pulse Train Dialog
The pulse train defined by the selected file is displayed.
The display of the pulse train can be zoomed, the zoom center is defined by the blue
marker.
"Edit"
Calls the ​Edit Pulse Train Data dialog for editing the pulse train.
"Zoom Position"
Positions the blue marker in the pulse train. The marker defines the
center of any zoom in or zoom out action.
"Zoom In/Out"
Zooms in or out the graphical display of the pulse train. The zoom factor
of each zoom action is 2.
Edit Pulse Train Data
(For Pulse Mode Train only)
Calls the editor for editing the ontime/offtime values of the selected file. A file consists of
any number of ontime/offtime value pairs. The currently selected file is displayed.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
195
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
Modulation Generator and LF Output
"Ontime/us"
Sets the ontime of the ontime/offtime value pair.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRAin:​ONTime​ on page 351
"Offtime/us"
Sets the offtime of the ontime/offtime value pair.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRAin:​OFFTime​ on page 350
"Count"
Sets the number of repetitions for each ontime/offtime value pair.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRAin:​REPetition​ on page 352
"Goto"
Selects row for editing.
If Goto row is selected, a window opens for entering the requested row.
(it is not possible to change individual positions of the list)
"Edit"
Calls a selection of possible actions described below.
"Insert Row"
Insert a new row before the marked row.
"Insert Range"
Insert new rows before the marked row. The number of rows to be
inserted can be defined in an entry window.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
196
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
Modulation Generator and LF Output
"Fill...."
Opens a sub menu for defining a set of list values to be automatically
entered in the list.
The start line and the number of rows to be filled are defined under
"From" and "Range".
The column to be filled is selected under "Select column to fill". Depending on the selection here, the default for start, end, and increment value
are set. As the settings are interdependent, a change of one parameter
may result in the automatic change of one or more of the other parameters.
The filling of the column with the selected value settings is started with
button "Fill".
"Delete Row"
Deletes the marked row.
"Delete Range" Deletes the selected number of rows including the marked row. The
number of rows to be inserted can be defined in an entry window.
"Save As"
Open the file menu to save the list under a new name.
Each list is saved to the CpompactFlashTM card as a separate file with
the file prefix *.pulstrn. The file name and the directory to which the
file is saved are user-selectable.
"Save"
The list is saved under its current name.
Import/Export - Pulse Train Mode
Expands the menu with the area for import and export of pulse train files.
Externally edited Excel tables with on/off time and repetition triplets can be imported as
text files or CSV files and used for pulse train mode.
On the other hand, internally created pulse train lists can be exported as text files or CSV
files.
Mode – Import/Export Pulse Train Files
Selects if pulse train lists should be imported or exported. The settings offered below
depend on the selected mode.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRAin:​DEXChange:​MODE​ on page 358
Extension – ASCII File Settings
Selects the file extension of the ASCII file to be imported or exported. Selection TXT (text
file) or CSV (Excel file) is available.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRAin:​DEXChange:​AFILe:​EXTension​ on page 356
Decimal Point - ASCII File Settings
Selects the decimal separator used in the ASCII data between '.' (decimal point) and ','
(comma) with floating-point numerals.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRAin:​DEXChange:​AFILe:​SEParator:​DECimal​
on page 357
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
197
R&S®SMB100A
Instrument Function
Modulation Generator and LF Output
Column Separator- ASCII File Settings
Selects the separator between the frequency and level column of the ASCII table.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRAin:​DEXChange:​AFILe:​SEParator:​COLumn​
on page 357
Select ASCII Source / Destination - Import/Export Pulse Train Files
Calls the "File Manager" for selecting the ASCII file to be imported into a pulse train list
(source) or the ASCII file the pulse train list is exported (destination) in.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRAin:​DEXChange:​AFILe:​CATalog?​ on page 355
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRAin:​DEXChange:​AFILe:​SELect​ on page 356
Select Destination / Source - Import/Export Pulse Train Files
Calls the "File Manager" for selecting the pulse train list to be exported (source) into an
ASCII file or the destination for the ASCII file to be imported (destination) in.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRAin:​DEXChange:​SELect​ on page 359
Import / Export - Import/Export Pulse Train Files
Starts the export or import of the selected file.
If import is selected, the ASCII file is imported as pulse train list.
If export is selected, the pulse train list is exported into the selected ASCII file.
SCPI command:
​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRAin:​DEXChange:​EXECute​ on page 358
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
198
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Basics
Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols
6 Remote Control Basics
This chapter provides basic information on operating an instrument via remote control.
6.1 Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols
The instrument supports different interfaces for remote control. The following table gives
an overview.
Table 6-1: Remote control interfaces and protocols
Interface
Protocols, VISA*) address string
Remarks
Local Area Network (LAN)
Protocols:
A LAN connector is located on the front or rear panel of the instrument, or both.
●
●
●
Serial Interface
HiSLIP High-Speed LAN Instrument
Protocol (IVI-6.1)
VISA*) address string:
TCPIP::host address::
hislip0[::INSTR]
VXI-11
VISA*) address string:
TCPIP::host address[::
LAN device name][::INSTR]
socket communication (Raw Ethernet,
simple telnet)
VISA*) address string:
TCPIP::host address[::
LAN device name]::<port>::
SOCKET
VISA*) address string:
ASRL[0-9][::INSTR]
GPIB (IEC/IEEE
Bus Interface)
VISA*) address string:
GPIB::primary address[::INSTR]
(no secondary address)
The interface is based on TCP/IP and supports various protocols.
For a description of the protocols refer to:
●
​chapter 6.1.3.1, "HiSLIP Protocol", on page 202
●
​chapter 6.1.3.2, "VXI-11 Protocol", on page 203
●
​chapter 6.1.3.3, "Socket Communication", on page 203
For a description of the interface refer to ​chapter 6.1.5, "Serial
Interface", on page 204.
Optional GPIB bus interfaces according to standard IEC 625.1/
IEEE 488.1 are located on the rear panel of the instrument.
For a description of the interface refer to ​chapter 6.1.6, "GPIB
Interface (IEC/IEEE Bus Interface)", on page 205.
*)
VISA is a standardized software interface library providing input and output functions to communicate with instruments. A VISA
installation on the controller is a prerequisite for remote control over LAN (when using VXI-11 or HiSLIP protocol), USB and serial
interface. However, no VISA installation is necessary to remote control while using socket communication. For more information, see
​chapter 6.1.1, "VISA Libraries", on page 200.
Within this interface description, the term GPIB is used as a synonym for the IEC/IEEE
bus interface.
SCPI (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments)
SCPI commands - messages - are used for remote control. Commands that are not taken
from the SCPI standard follow the SCPI syntax rules. The instrument supports the SCPI
version 1999. The SCPI standard is based on standard IEEE 488.2 and aims at the
standardization of device-specific commands, error handling and the status registers.
The tutorial "Automatic Measurement Control - A tutorial on SCPI and IEEE 488.2" from
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
199
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Basics
Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols
John M. Pieper (R&S order number 0002.3536.00) offers detailed information on concepts and definitions of SCPI.
Tables provide a fast overview of the bit assignment in the status registers. The tables
are supplemented by a comprehensive description of the status registers.
6.1.1 VISA Libraries
VISA is a standardized software interface library providing input and output functions to
communicate with instruments. The I/O channel (LAN or TCP/IP, USB, GPIB,...) is
selected at initialization time by means of the channel–specific address string ("VISA
resource string"), or by an appropriately defined VISA alias (short name). A VISA installation is a prerequisite for remote control using the following interfaces:
●
​chapter 6.1.3, "LAN Interface", on page 201
●
​chapter 6.1.3.2, "VXI-11 Protocol", on page 203
●
​chapter 6.1.4, "USB Interface", on page 204
●
​chapter 6.1.6, "GPIB Interface (IEC/IEEE Bus Interface)", on page 205
●
​chapter 6.1.5, "Serial Interface", on page 204
For more information about VISA refer to the user documentation.
6.1.2 Messages
The messages transferred on the data lines are divided into the following categories:
●
Interface messages
Interface messages are transmitted to the instrument on the data lines, with the
attention line being active (LOW). They are used to communicate between the controller and the instrument. Interface messages can only be sent by instruments that
have GPIB bus functionality. For details see the sections for the required interface.
●
Instrument messages
Instrument messages are employed in the same way for all interfaces, if not indicated
otherwise in the description. Structure and syntax of the instrument messages are
described in ​chapter 6.3, "SCPI Command Structure", on page 219. A detailed
description of all messages available for the instrument is provided in the chapter
"Remote Control Commands".
There are different types of instrument messages, depending on the direction they
are sent:
– Commands
–
Instrument responses
Commands
Commands (program messages) are messages the controller sends to the instrument.
They operate the instrument functions and request information. The commands are subdivided according to two criteria:
●
According to the effect they have on the instrument:
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
200
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Basics
Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols
●
–
Setting commands cause instrument settings such as a reset of the instrument
or setting the frequency.
–
Queries cause data to be provided for remote control, e.g. for identification of the
instrument or polling a parameter value. Queries are formed by directly appending
a question mark to the command header.
According to their definition in standards:
– Common commands: their function and syntax are precisely defined in standard
IEEE 488.2. They are employed identically on all instruments (if implemented).
They refer to functions such as management of the standardized status registers,
reset and self test.
–
Instrument control commands refer to functions depending on the features of
the instrument such as frequency settings. Many of these commands have also
been standardized by the SCPI committee. These commands are marked as
"SCPI compliant" in the command reference chapters. Commands without this
SCPI label are device-specific, however, their syntax follows SCPI rules as permitted by the standard.
Instrument responses
Instrument responses (response messages and service requests) are messages the
instrument sends to the controller after a query. They can contain measurement results,
instrument settings and information on the instrument status.
6.1.3 LAN Interface
To be integrated in a LAN, the instrument is equipped with a LAN interface, consisting of
a connector, a network interface card and protocols. For remote control via a network,
the PC and the instrument must be connected via the LAN interface to a common network
with TCP/IP network protocol. They are connected using a commercial RJ45 cable. The
TCP/IP network protocol and the associated network services are preconfigured on the
instrument. Software for instrument control and (for specified protocols only) the VISA
program library must be installed on the controller.
VISA library
Instrument access via VXI-11 or HiSLIP protocols is usually achieved from high level
programming platforms using VISA as an intermediate abstraction layer. VISA encapsulates the low level VXI or GPIB function calls and thus makes the transport interface
transparent for the user. See ​chapter 6.1.1, "VISA Libraries", on page 200 for details.
IP address
Only the IP address or the computer name (LAN device name) is required to set up the
connection. The IP address/computer name is part of the "visa resource string" used by
the programs to identify and control the instrument.
Forms of the VISA resource string:
TCPIP::host address[::LAN device name][::INSTR]
or
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
201
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Basics
Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols
TCPIP::host address::port::SOCKET
where
●
TCPIP designates the network protocol used
●
host address is the IP address or host name of the device
●
LAN device name defines the protocol and the instance number of a sub-instrument:
– inst0 selects the VXI-11 protocol (optional, default)
–
hislip0 selects the newer HiSLIP protocol
●
INSTR indicates the instrument resource class (optional)
●
port determines the used port number
●
SOCKET indicates the raw network socket resource class
Example:
●
Instrument has the IP address 192.1.2.3; the valid resource string using VXI-11 protocol is:
TCPIP::192.1.2.3::INSTR
●
The DNS host name name is RSSM1; the valid resource string is:
TCPIP::RSSM1::hislip0 (HiSLIP)
TCPIP::RSSM1::INSTR (VXI-11)
●
A raw socket connection can be established using:
TCPIP::192.1.2.3::5025::SOCKET
Identifying instruments in a network
If several instruments are connected to the network, each instrument has its own IP
address and associated resource string. The controller identifies these instruments by
means of the resource string.
6.1.3.1
HiSLIP Protocol
The HiSLIP (High Speed LAN Instrument Protocol) is the successor protocol for VXI-11
for TCP-based instruments specified by the IVI foundation. The protocol uses two TCP
sockets for a single connection - one for fast data transfer, the other for non-sequential
control commands (e.g. Device Clear or SRQ).
HiSLIP has the following characteristics:
●
High performance as with raw socket network connections
●
Compatible IEEE 488.2 support for Message Exchange Protocol, Device Clear,
Serial Poll, Remote/Local, Trigger, and Service Request
●
Uses a single IANA registered port (4880), which simplifies the configuration of firewalls
●
Supports simultaneous access of multiple users by providing versatile locking mechanisms
●
Usable for IPv6 or IPv4 networks
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
202
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Basics
Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols
Note that HiSLIP data is sent to the device using the "fire and forget" method with immediate return, as opposed to VXI-11, where each operation is blocked until a VXI-11 device
handshake returns. Thus, a successful return of a VISA operation such as viWrite()
does not guarantee that the instrument has finished or started the requested command,
but is delivered to the TCP/IP buffers.
6.1.3.2
VXI-11 Protocol
The VXI-11 standard is based on the ONC RPC (Open Network Computing Remote
Procedure Call) protocol which in turn relies on TCP/IP as the network/transport layer.
The TCP/IP network protocol and the associated network services are preconfigured.
TCP/IP ensures connection-oriented communication, where the order of the exchanged
messages is adhered to and interrupted links are identified. With this protocol, messages
cannot be lost.
6.1.3.3
Socket Communication
An alternative way for remote control of the software is to establish a simple network
communication using sockets. The socket communication, also referred as “Raw Ethernet communication”, does not necessary require a VISA installation on the remote controller side.
The simplest way to establish socket communication is to use the built-in telnet program.
The telnet program is part of every operating system and supports a communication with
the software on a command-by-command basis. For better utilization and to enable automation by means of programs, user defined sockets can be programmed.
Socket connections are established on a specially defined port. The socket address is a
combination of the IP address or the host name of the instrument and the number of the
port configured for remote-control. All R&S Signal Generator use port number 5025 for
this purpose. The port is configured for communication on a command-to-command basis
and for remote control from a program.
6.1.3.4
LAN Interface Messages
In the LAN connection, the interface messages are called low–level control messages.
These messages can be used to emulate interface messages of the GPIB bus.
Command
Long term
Effect on the instrument
&ABO
Abort
Aborts processing of the commands just received.
&DCL
Device Clear
Aborts processing of the commands just received and sets
the command processing software to a defined initial state.
Does not change the instrument setting.
&GTL
Go to Local
Transition to the "local" state (manual control).
&GTR
Go to Remote
Transition to the "remote" state (remote control).
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
203
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Basics
Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols
Command
Long term
Effect on the instrument
&GET
Group Execute Trigger
Triggers a previously active instrument function (e.g. a
sweep). The effect of the command is the same as with that
of a pulse at the external trigger signal input.
&LLO
Local Lockout
Disables switchover from remote control to manual control
by means of the front panel keys.
&NREN
Not Remote Enable
Enables switchover from remote control to manual operation by means of the front panel keys
&POL
Serial Poll
Starts a serial poll.
6.1.4 USB Interface
For remote control via the USB connection, the PC and the instrument must be connected
via the USB type B interface. A USB connection requires the VISA library to be installed.
VISA detects and configures the R&S instrument automatically when the USB connection
is established. You do not have to enter an address string or install a separate driver.
USB address
The used USB address string is:
USB::<vendor ID>::<product ID>::<serial number>[::INSTR]
where:
●
<vendor ID> is the vendor ID for Rohde&Schwarz
●
<product ID> is the product ID for the R&S instrument
●
<serial number> is the individual serial number on the rear of the instrument
Example:
USB::0x0AAD::0x0054::100001::INSTR
0x0AAD is the vendor ID for Rohde&Schwarz
0x54 is the product ID for the R&S SMB
100001 is the serial number of the particular instrument
6.1.5 Serial Interface
Remote control via the serial interface is possible either via RS232 interface or via a
Bluetooth connection. The controller/Bluetooth device and the instrument must be connected via an external USB/serial-adapter (see recommended extras, data sheet) and a
serial crossover (null modem) cable. A USB connection requires the VISA library to be
installed on the controller. VISA will detect and configure the R&S SMB automatically
when the USB connection is established.
Serial address
The used serial address string is:
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
204
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Basics
Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols
ASRL[0-9][::INSTR]
where ASRL[0-9] determines the number of the COM port on the controller side, that
has to be used for the serial connection.
Access via a bluetooth device requires the entry of the bluetooth pin in addition (see ​
chapter 5.2.3.14, "Security", on page 96).
To enable an error-free and correct data transmission, the parameters of the generator
and the controller must have the same setting. The serial interface is preset for a baud
rate 115200, no parity and one stop bit. The parameters can be manually changed in
"Remote Channel Settings" dialog (see ​chapter 5.2.3.12, "Remote Channel Settings",
on page 92).
6.1.6 GPIB Interface (IEC/IEEE Bus Interface)
To be able to control the instrument via the GPIB bus, the instrument and the controller
must be linked by a GPIB bus cable. A GPIB bus card, the card drivers and the program
libraries for the programming language used must be provided in the controller. The controller must address the instrument with the GPIB bus address (see ​chapter 6.1.6.2,
"GPIB Instrument Address", on page 206).
Characteristics
The GPIB interface is described by the following characteristics:
●
Up to 15 instruments can be connected
●
The total cable length is restricted to a maximum of 15 m; the cable length between
two instruments should not exceed 2m.
●
A wired "OR"-connection is used if several instruments are connected in parallel,
since the slowest instrument determines the speed.
Any connected IEC bus cable must be terminated by an instrument or controller.
6.1.6.1
GPIB Interface Messages
Interface messages are transmitted to the instrument on the data lines, with the attention
line (ATN) being active (LOW). They are used for communication between the controller
and the instrument and can only be sent by a computer which has the function of a GPIB
bus controller. GPIB interface messages can be further subdivided into:
●
Universal commands: act on all instruments connected to the GPIB bus without
previous addressing
●
Addressed commands: only act on instruments previously addressed as listeners
Universal Commands
Universal commands are encoded in the range 10 through 1F hex. They affect all instruments connected to the bus and do not require addressing.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
205
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Basics
Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols
Command
Effect on the instrument
DCL (Device Clear)
Aborts the processing of the commands just received and sets the command
processing software to a defined initial state. Does not change the instrument
settings.
IFC (Interface Clear) *)
Resets the interfaces to the default setting.
LLO (Local Lockout)
The LOC/IEC ADDR key is disabled.
SPE (Serial Poll Enable)
Ready for serial poll.
SPD (Serial Poll Disable)
End of serial poll.
PPU (Parallel Poll Unconfigure)
End of the parallel-poll state.
*) IFC is not a real universal command, it is sent via a separate line; however, it also affects all instruments
connected to the bus and does not require addressing
Addressed Commands
Addressed commands are encoded in the range 00 through 0F hex. They only affect
instruments addressed as listeners.
6.1.6.2
Command
Effect on the instrument
GET (Group Execute Trigger)
Triggers a previously active instrument function (e.g. a sweep). The
effect of the command is the same as with that of a pulse at the
external trigger signal input.
GTL (Go to Local)
Transition to the "local" state (manual control).
GTR (Go to Remote)
Transition to the "remote" state (remote control).
PPC (Parallel Poll Configure)
Configures the instrument for parallel poll.
SDC (Selected Device Clear)
Aborts the processing of the commands just received and sets the
command processing software to a defined initial state. Does not
change the instrument setting.
GPIB Instrument Address
In order to operate the instrument via remote control, it must be addressed using the
GPIB address. The remote control address is factory preset, but it can be changed if it
does not fit in the network environment. For remote control, addresses 0 through 30 are
allowed. The GPIB address is maintained after a reset of the instrument settings.
Changing the GPIB address of the instrument
The GPIB address can be changed manually or using a remote control command.
1. Manually: press the SETUP key and select "Remote > GPIB".
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
206
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Basics
Starting a Remote Control Session
Select parameter "GPIB channel address" and set the GPIB address.
2. Using remote control command:
SYST:COMM:GPIB:ADDR 18
6.2 Starting a Remote Control Session
The instrument and the controller have to be connected with the suitable cable and
switched on.
A remote control program must open a connection to the instrument (using VISA functionality), before it can send commands to and receive device responses from the instrument.
Instrument Address
In order to operate the instrument via remote control it must be addressed using the
defined interface address. See ​chapter 6.1.3, "LAN Interface", on page 201, ​chapter 6.1.4, "USB Interface", on page 204, ​chapter 6.1.5, "Serial Interface", on page 204or
​chapter 6.1.6, "GPIB Interface (IEC/IEEE Bus Interface)", on page 205 for details.
The VISA resource strings are indicated in the "Setup > Remote Channel Settings" menu.
Refer to ​chapter 6.2.3, "Examples", on page 208 for practical examples on setting up of
a remote control link and starting of a remote control session.
6.2.1 Switching to Remote Control
When it is switched on, the instrument is always in the manual operating state and can
be operated via the front panel controls (for instruments equipped with a display) or via
mouse and external keyboard.
Starting remote control
1. Send a command from a controller to the instrument.
The instrument is switched to remote control as soon as it receives a command from
the controller.
While remote control is active, operation via the front panel or via mouse and keyboard is disabled and "REMOTE" is displayed in the status line.
The instrument remains in the remote state until it is reset to the manual state via the
instrument or via the remote control interface (see ​chapter 6.2.2, "Returning to Manual Operation", on page 208).
Tip: Switching from manual operation to remote control and vice versa does not affect
the other instrument settings.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
207
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Basics
Starting a Remote Control Session
2. Although operation via front panel, mouse and keyboard is disabled, the dialog boxes
can still be opened, e.g. to verify settings, but buttons and setting fields are displayed
in gray and cannot be activated.
Use the command SYST:KLOC ON to disable the access to the dialogs.
3. To prevent unintentional return to manual operation, disable the LOCAL key of the
instrument using the &LLO command (see ​chapter 6.1.3.4, "LAN Interface Messages", on page 203).
The instrument switches to "REM-LLO" state and transition to manual mode is not
anymore possible via the remote control command *GTL.
Switching to manual mode is only possible via remote control then.
4. Enable the LOCAL key with the interface message &NREN.
6.2.2 Returning to Manual Operation
Before returning to manual control, command processing must be completed. Otherwise,
the instrument switches back to remote control immediately.
► To return to manual operation, use one of the following ways:
a)
b)
c)
d)
Press the LOCAL key on the front panel.
Select "Setup > Remote Control Channels" and press "Local".
While using the socket communication, terminate the remote control session.
Send the interface command &GTL via the remote control interface.
Tip: Use the &NREN to enable the LOCAL key if the key is disabled.
6.2.3 Examples
This sections provides examples for setting up of remote control connection and starting
a remote control session over LAN and GPIB interfaces.
This section assumes basic knowledge of programming and operation of the controller.
A description of the interface commands can be obtained from the relevant manuals.
6.2.3.1
Remote Control over GPIB
The program example in this section is written in VISUAL BASIC. A condition for programming in VISUAL BASIC is that the modules NIGLOBAL (Niglobal.bas) and
VBIB32 (Vbib_32.bas) are added to the projects.
Drivers for instrument, e.g. IVI-COM and LabVIEW drivers, are available in the download
area of the product website (http://www2.rohde-schwarz.com/en/products/
test_and_measurement/product_categories/signal_generation/).
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
208
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Basics
Starting a Remote Control Session
Starting a remote control session over GPIB
As a prerequisite, the GPIB address of the instrument, which is factory-set to 28, must
not have been changed.
1. Connect instrument and controller using GPIB cable and switch them on.
2. Execute following commands on the controller:
a) Open port to the instrument
CALL IBFIND("DEV1", generator%)
b) Inform controller about instrument address
CALL IBPAD(generator%, 28)
c) Reset instrument
CALL IBWRT(generator%, "*RST;*CLS")
d) Set instrument to new address
CALL IBWRT(generator%, "SYST:COMM:GPIB:ADDR 18")
e) Inform controller about new address
CALL IBPAD(generator%, 18)
The GPIB address of the instrument is changed.
3. To return to manual operation, press the LOCAL key at the front panel.
6.2.3.2
Remote Control over LAN using VXI-11 Protocol
Through the examples in this section, the program 'Measurement & Automation Explorer'
from National Instruments under Windows operating system is used for setting up a LAN
remote control link and starting a remote control session.
Configuring the controller
The instrument is preconfigured for networks using DHCP (dynamic host configuration
protocol). If this configuration is used, enter the computer name in the position of the IP
address.
To enable the external controller to communicate with the software via TCP/IP protocol,
set up a remote control link as follow:
1. Connect the controller and the instrument to the network (network cable) and switch
them on.
2. Start the 'Measurement & Automation Control' program on the controller.
3. Select "Devices and Interfaces > Create New".
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
209
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Basics
Starting a Remote Control Session
4. Select "VISA TCP/IP Resource" and confirm with "Next".
5. Choose the type of TCP/IP resource you wish to add and select Next.
6. Enter the IP address or the host name of the R&S SMB and select "Next".
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
210
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Basics
Starting a Remote Control Session
7. Enter the alias name if required.
The alias name must not be mistaken for the computer name. It is only used for
instrument identification within the program and displayed in the menu as an option
in case of an Ethernet link.
8. Confirm the settings with "Finish".
The instrument is configured and the settings are displayed in the "TCP/IP Settings" tab.
9. To test the connection, select "Validate".
A message indicates whether the link to the instrument can be set up or not.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
211
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Basics
Starting a Remote Control Session
If a connection cannot be set up, check whether the controller and the instrument are
connected to the network (network cable) and switched on. Correct spelling of the IP
address or the computer name can also be checked. For further error location, inform
the network administrator. In large networks, specification of additional addresses
may be required for link setup, e.g. gateway and subnet mask, which are known to
the network administrator.
The instrument is now registered in the program and can be addressed via the
resource string or alias name.
Starting a remote control over LAN (using VXI-11)
1. Start the 'Measurement & Automation Explorer' on the controller.
2. In the "Configuration" window, select "Device and Interfaces > VISA TCP/IP Resources", select the required instrument and select "Open VISA Test Panel".
3. In the "viWrite" tab, write the command to be send to the instrument and select
"Execute".
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
212
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Basics
Starting a Remote Control Session
Instrument responses are displayed on the "viRead" tab.
Tip: For further program operation refer to the online help of the program.
6.2.3.3
Remote Control over LAN using Socket Communication
This chapter provides an example on how to establish a remote control connection over
telnet protocol and a simple sockets-based program example that can be further developed.
Setting up a Telnet Connection
To control the software, only a telnet program is required. The telnet program is part of
every operating system.
1. To establish a Telnet connection with the R&S SMB, start the telnet program and
enter the socket address.
The socket address is a combination of the IP address or the host name of the R&S
SMB and the number of the port configured for remote-control via telnet.
Tip: The R&S SMB uses the port number 5025 for remote connection via Telnet.
The connection to the instrument is set up and remote-control commands can be
sent.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
213
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Basics
Starting a Remote Control Session
2. Even if the cursor is not visible on the screen, enter blind a remote-control command
and confirm with Enter.
After the first remote-control command had been send, the instrument is in the
"REMOTE" state, i.e. instrument control from the front panel or via mouse and keyboard is disabled and "REMOTE" is displayed in the status line.
Telnet program examples
The following program example shows a simple TcpClient class that is intended to explain
on how to get started with programming of sockets.
The example sets up a socket communication to R&S SMB and opens a simple user
interface, very similar to the telnet, which allows input of commands. To enable real
automation, further development of the program is required.
TcpClient.h
#include <string>
//defines structs for socket handling
#include <netinet/in.h>
using namespace std;
typedef struct sockaddr_in SockAddrStruct;
typedef struct hostent
HostInfoStruct;
class TcpClient
{
public:
TcpClient();
~TcpClient();
void connectToServer( string &hostname, int port );
void disconnect( );
void transmit( string &txString );
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
214
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Basics
Starting a Remote Control Session
void receive( string &rxString );
string getCurrentHostName( ) const;
int
getCurrentPort( ) const;
private:
string
currentHostName;
int
currentPort;
int
currentSocketDescr;
SockAddrStruct
serverAddress;
HostInfoStruct * currentHostInfo;
bool
clientIsConnected;
int
receiveBufferSize;
};
TcpClient.cpp
#include <string>
//defines structs for socket handling
#include <netinet/in.h>
using namespace std;
typedef struct sockaddr_in SockAddrStruct;
typedef struct hostent
HostInfoStruct;
class TcpClient
{
public:
TcpClient();
~TcpClient();
void connectToServer( string &hostname, int port );
void disconnect( );
void transmit( string &txString );
void receive( string &rxString );
string getCurrentHostName( ) const;
int
getCurrentPort( ) const;
private:
string
currentHostName;
int
currentPort;
int
currentSocketDescr;
SockAddrStruct
serverAddress;
HostInfoStruct * currentHostInfo;
bool
clientIsConnected;
int
receiveBufferSize;
};
#include <netdb.h>
#include <netinet/in.h>
#include <unistd.h>
#include "TcpClient.h"
TcpClient::TcpClient()
: currentHostName( "" )
, currentPort( 0 )
, currentSocketDescr( 0 )
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
215
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Basics
Starting a Remote Control Session
, serverAddress ( )
, currentHostInfo( NULL )
, clientIsConnected( false )
, receiveBufferSize( 1024 )
{
}
TcpClient::~TcpClient()
{
currentHostInfo = NULL;
}
void TcpClient::connectToServer( string &hostname, int port )
{
currentHostInfo = gethostbyname( hostname.c_str( ) );
if( currentHostInfo == NULL )
{
currentHostName
= "";
currentPort
= 0;
currentHostInfo
= NULL;
clientIsConnected = false;
printf("error connecting host\n" );
}
currentHostName = hostname;
currentPort
= port;
currentSocketDescr = socket(AF_INET, SOCK_STREAM, 0);
if( currentSocketDescr == 0 )
{
currentHostName
= "";
currentPort
= 0;
currentHostInfo
= NULL;
clientIsConnected = false;
printf("can't create socket\n" );
}
serverAddress.sin_family = currentHostInfo->h_addrtype;
serverAddress.sin_port
= htons( currentPort );
memcpy( (char *) &serverAddress.sin_addr.s_addr,
currentHostInfo->h_addr_list[0], currentHostInfo->h_length );
if( connect( currentSocketDescr, ( struct sockaddr *) &serverAddress,
sizeof( serverAddress ) ) < 0 )
{
throw string("can't connect server\n" );
}
clientIsConnected = true;
}
void TcpClient::disconnect( )
{
if( clientIsConnected )
{
close( currentSocketDescr );
}
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
216
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Basics
Starting a Remote Control Session
currentSocketDescr = 0;
currentHostName
= "";
currentPort
= 0;
currentHostInfo
= NULL;
clientIsConnected
= false;
}
void TcpClient::transmit( string &txString )
{
if( !clientIsConnected )
{
throw string("connection must be established before any data can be sent\n");
}
char * transmitBuffer = new char[txString.length() +1];
memcpy( transmitBuffer, txString.c_str(), txString.length() );
transmitBuffer[txString.length()] = '\n'; //newline is needed!
if( send( currentSocketDescr, transmitBuffer, txString.length() + 1, 0 ) < 0 )
{
throw string("can't transmit data\n");
}
delete [] transmitBuffer;
}
void TcpClient::receive( string &rxString )
{
if( !clientIsConnected )
{
throw string("connection must be established before any data can be received\n");
}
char * receiveBuffer = new char[receiveBufferSize];
memset( receiveBuffer, 0, receiveBufferSize );
bool receiving = true;
while( receiving )
{
int receivedByteCount = recv( currentSocketDescr,
receiveBuffer, receiveBufferSize, 0 );
if( receivedByteCount < 0 )
{
throw string("error while receiving data\n");
}
rxString += string( receiveBuffer );
receiving = ( receivedByteCount == receiveBufferSize );
}
delete [] receiveBuffer;
}
string TcpClient::getCurrentHostName( ) const
{
return currentHostName;
}
int TcpClient::getCurrentPort( ) const
{
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
217
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Basics
Starting a Remote Control Session
return currentPort;
}
TelnetClient.cpp
#include <iostream>
#include "TcpClient.h"
void printUsage()
{
cout<<"usage: EthernetRawCommand <server-ip> [scpi-command]"<<endl;
}
int main( int argc, char *argv[] )
{
int errorCode
= 0; //no error
bool useSingleCommand = false;
string singleCommand
= "";
string hostname
= "";
int
= 5025;
port
string input
= "";
TcpClient client;
switch( argc )
{
case 3:
useSingleCommand = true;
singleCommand
= argv[2];
case 2:
hostname
= argv[1];
break;
default:
printUsage();
return(-1);
}
try
{
client.connectToServer( hostname, port );
bool terminate = false;
while( !terminate )
{
char buffer[1024];
if( useSingleCommand )
{
input =
singleCommand; //send string
}
else
{
cin.getline( buffer, 1024 );
input = buffer;
if( input == "end" )
{
terminate = true;
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
218
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Basics
SCPI Command Structure
}
}
if( !terminate)
{
client.transmit( input ); //send string
int qPos = input.find( "?", 0 );
//receive string only when needed
if( qPos > 0 )
{
string rcStr = "";
client.receive( rcStr );
cout << rcStr << endl;
}
}
if( useSingleCommand )
{
terminate = true;
}
}
}catch( const string errorString )
{
cout<<errorString<<endl;
}
client.disconnect( );
return errorCode;
}
6.3 SCPI Command Structure
SCPI commands consist of a so-called header and, in most cases, one or more parameters. The header and the parameters are separated by a "white space" (ASCII code 0
to 9, 11 to 32 decimal, e.g. blank). The headers may consist of several mnemonics (keywords). Queries are formed by appending a question mark directly to the header.
The commands can be either device-specific or device-independent (common commands). Common and device-specific commands differ in their syntax.
6.3.1 Syntax for Common Commands
Common (=device-independent) commands consist of a header preceded by an asterisk
(*) and possibly one or more parameters.
Examples:
*RST
RESET
Resets the instrument.
*ESE
EVENT STATUS ENABLE
Sets the bits of the event status enable
registers.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
219
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Basics
SCPI Command Structure
*ESR?
EVENT STATUS QUERY
Queries the contents of the event status
register.
*IDN?
IDENTIFICATION QUERY
Queries the instrument identification
string.
6.3.2 Syntax for Device-Specific Commands
Not all commands used in the following examples are necessarily implemented in the
instrument.
For demonstration purposes only, assume the existence of the following commands for
this section:
●
DISPlay[:WINDow<1...4>]:MAXimize <Boolean>
●
FORMat:READings:DATA <type>[,<length>]
●
HCOPy:DEVice:COLor <Boolean>
●
HCOPy:DEVice:CMAP:COLor:RGB <red>,<green>,<blue>
●
HCOPy[:IMMediate]
●
HCOPy:ITEM:ALL
●
HCOPy:ITEM:LABel <string>
●
HCOPy:PAGE:DIMensions:QUADrant[<N>]
●
HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation LANDscape | PORTrait
●
HCOPy:PAGE:SCALe <numeric value>
●
MMEMory:COPY <file_source>,<file_destination>
●
SENSE:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] <numeric_value>
●
SENSe:FREQuency:STOP <numeric value>
●
SENSe:LIST:FREQuency <numeric_value>{,<numeric_value>}
Long and short form
The mnemonics feature a long form and a short form. The short form is marked by upper
case letters, the long form corresponds to the complete word. Either the short form or the
long form can be entered; other abbreviations are not permitted.
Example:
HCOPy:DEVice:COLor ON is equivalent to HCOP:DEV:COL ON.
Case-insensitivity
Upper case and lower case notation only serves to distinguish the two forms in the manual, the instrument itself is case-insensitive.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
220
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Basics
SCPI Command Structure
Numeric suffixes
If a command can be applied to multiple instances of an object, e.g. specific channels or
sources, the required instances can be specified by a suffix added to the command.
Numeric suffixes are indicated by angular brackets (<1...4>, <n>, <i>) and are replaced
by a single value in the command. Entries without a suffix are interpreted as having the
suffix 1.
Example:
Definition: HCOPy:PAGE:DIMensions:QUADrant[<N>]
Command: HCOP:PAGE:DIM:QUAD2
This command refers to the quadrant 2.
Different numbering in remote control
For remote control, the suffix may differ from the number of the corresponding selection
used in manual operation. SCPI prescribes that suffix counting starts with 1. Suffix 1 is
the default state and used when no specific suffix is specified.
Some standards define a fixed numbering, starting with 0. If the numbering differs in
manual operation and remote control, it is indicated for the corresponding command.
Optional mnemonics
Some command systems permit certain mnemonics to be inserted into the header or
omitted. These mnemonics are marked by square brackets in the description. The instrument must recognize the long command to comply with the SCPI standard. Some commands are considerably shortened by these optional mnemonics.
Example:
Definition: HCOPy[:IMMediate]
Command: HCOP:IMM is equivalent to HCOP
Optional mnemonics with numeric suffixes
Do not omit an optional mnemonic if it includes a numeric suffix that is relevant for the
effect of the command.
Example:
Definition:DISPlay[:WINDow<1...4>]:MAXimize <Boolean>
Command: DISP:MAX ON refers to window 1.
In order to refer to a window other than 1, you must include the optional WINDow parameter with the suffix for the required window.
DISP:WIND2:MAX ON refers to window 2.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
221
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Basics
SCPI Command Structure
Parameters
Parameters must be separated from the header by a "white space". If several parameters
are specified in a command, they are separated by a comma (,). For a description of the
parameter types, refer to ​chapter 6.3.3, "SCPI Parameters", on page 222.
Example:
Definition:HCOPy:DEVice:CMAP:COLor:RGB <red>,<green>,<blue>
Command:HCOP:DEV:CMAP:COL:RGB 3,32,44
Special characters
|
Parameters
A vertical stroke in parameter definitions indicates alternative possibilities in the sense of "or". The effect
of the command differs, depending on which parameter is used.
Example:
Definition:HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation LANDscape | PORTrait
Command HCOP:PAGE:ORI LAND specifies landscape orientation
Command HCOP:PAGE:ORI PORT specifies portrait orientation
Mnemonics
A selection of mnemonics with an identical effect exists for several commands. These mnemonics are
indicated in the same line; they are separated by a vertical stroke. Only one of these mnemonics needs
to be included in the header of the command. The effect of the command is independent of which of the
mnemonics is used.
Example:
DefinitionSENSE:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] <numeric_value>
The two following commands with identical meaning can be created:
SENS:BAND:RES 1
SENS:BWID:RES 1
[]
Mnemonics in square brackets are optional and may be inserted into the header or omitted.
Example: HCOPy[:IMMediate]
HCOP:IMM is equivalent to HCOP
{}
Parameters in curly brackets are optional and can be inserted once or several times, or omitted.
Example: SENSe:LIST:FREQuency <numeric_value>{,<numeric_value>}
The following are valid commands:
SENS:LIST:FREQ 10
SENS:LIST:FREQ 10,20
SENS:LIST:FREQ 10,20,30,40
6.3.3 SCPI Parameters
Many commands are supplemented by a parameter or a list of parameters. The parameters must be separated from the header by a "white space" (ASCII code 0 to 9, 11 to 32
decimal, e.g. blank). Allowed parameters are:
●
Numeric values
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
222
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Basics
SCPI Command Structure
●
Special numeric values
●
Boolean parameters
●
Text
●
Character strings
●
Block data
The parameters required for each command and the allowed range of values are specified in the command description.
Numeric values
Numeric values can be entered in any form, i.e. with sign, decimal point and exponent.
Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or down. The mantissa
may comprise up to 255 characters, the exponent must lie inside the value range -32000
to 32000. The exponent is introduced by an "E" or "e". Entry of the exponent alone is not
allowed. In the case of physical quantities, the unit can be entered. Allowed unit prefixes
are G (giga), MA (mega), MOHM and MHZ are also allowed), K (kilo), M (milli), U (micro)
and N (nano). If the unit is missing, the basic unit is used.
Example: SENS:FREQ:STOP 1.5GHz = SENS:FREQ:STOP 1.5E9
Units
For physical quantities, the unit can be entered. Allowed unit prefixes are:
●
G (giga)
●
MA (mega), MOHM, MHZ
●
K (kilo)
●
M (milli)
●
U (micro)
●
N (nano)
If the unit is missing, the basic unit is used.
Example:
SENSe:FREQ:STOP 1.5GHz = SENSe:FREQ:STOP 1.5E9
Some settings allow relative values to be stated in percent. According to SCPI, this unit
is represented by the PCT string.
Example:
HCOP:PAGE:SCAL 90PCT
Special numeric values
The texts listed below are interpreted as special numeric values. In the case of a query,
the numeric value is provided.
●
MIN/MAX
MINimum and MAXimum denote the minimum and maximum value.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
223
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Basics
SCPI Command Structure
●
DEF
DEFault denotes a preset value which has been stored in the EPROM. This value
conforms to the default setting, as it is called by the *RST command.
●
UP/DOWN
UP, DOWN increases or reduces the numeric value by one step. The step width can
be specified via an allocated step command for each parameter which can be set via
UP, DOWN.
●
INF/NINF
INFinity, Negative INFinity (NINF) represent the numeric values 9.9E37 or -9.9E37,
respectively. INF and NINF are only sent as instrument responses.
●
NAN
Not A Number (NAN) represents the value 9.91E37. NAN is only sent as a instrument
response. This value is not defined. Possible causes are the division of zero by zero,
the subtraction of infinite from infinite and the representation of missing values.
Example:
Setting command: SENSe:LIST:FREQ MAXimum
Query: SENS:LIST:FREQ?, Response: 3.5E9
Queries for special numeric values
The numeric values associated to MAXimum/MINimum/DEFault can be queried by
adding the corresponding mnemonics to the command. They must be entered following
the quotation mark.
Example: SENSe:LIST:FREQ? MAXimum
Returns the maximum numeric value as a result.
Boolean Parameters
Boolean parameters represent two states. The "ON" state (logically true) is represented
by "ON" or a numeric value 1. The "OFF" state (logically untrue) is represented by
"OFF" or the numeric value 0. The numeric values are provided as the response for a
query.
Example:
Setting command: HCOPy:DEV:COL ON
Query: HCOPy:DEV:COL?
Response: 1
Text parameters
Text parameters observe the syntactic rules for mnemonics, i.e. they can be entered
using a short or long form. Like any parameter, they have to be separated from the header
by a white space. In the case of a query, the short form of the text is provided.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
224
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Basics
SCPI Command Structure
Example:
Setting command: HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation LANDscape
Query: HCOP:PAGE:ORI?
Response: LAND
Character strings
Strings must always be entered in quotation marks (' or ").
Example:
HCOP:ITEM:LABel "Test1" or HCOP:ITEM:LABel 'Test1'
Block data
Block data is a format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data. A
command using a block data parameter has the following structure:
Example:
FORMat:READings:DATA
#45168xxxxxxxx
The ASCII character # introduces the data block. The next number indicates how many
of the following digits describe the length of the data block. In the example the 4 following
digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes. The data bytes follow. During the transmission
of these data bytes all end or other control signs are ignored until all bytes are transmitted.
#0 specifies a data block of indefinite length. The use of the indefinite format requires a
NL^END message to terminate the data block. This format is useful when the length of
the transmission is not known or if speed or other considerations prevent segmentation
of the data into blocks of definite length.
6.3.4 Overview of Syntax Elements
The following table provides an overview of the syntax elements:
:
The colon separates the mnemonics of a command. In a command line the separating semicolon
marks the uppermost command level.
;
The semicolon separates two commands of a command line. It does not alter the path.
,
The comma separates several parameters of a command.
?
The question mark forms a query.
*
The asterisk marks a common command.
''
Quotation marks introduce a string and terminate it (both single and double quotation marks are
possible).
"
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
225
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Basics
SCPI Command Structure
#
The hash symbol introduces binary, octal, hexadecimal and block data.
Binary: #B10110
●
Octal: #O7612
●
Hexa: #HF3A7
●
Block: #21312
●
A "white space" (ASCII-Code 0 to 9, 11 to 32 decimal, e.g. blank) separates the header from the
parameters.
6.3.5 Structure of a command line
A command line may consist of one or several commands. It is terminated by one of the
following:
●
a <New Line>
●
a <New Line> with EOI
●
an EOI together with the last data byte
Several commands in a command line must be separated by a semicolon ";". If the next
command belongs to a different command system, the semicolon is followed by a colon.
Example:
MMEM:COPY "Test1","MeasurementXY";:HCOP:ITEM ALL
This command line contains two commands. The first command belongs to the MMEM
system, the second command belongs to the HCOP system.
If the successive commands belong to the same system, having one or several levels in
common, the command line can be abbreviated. To this end, the second command after
the semicolon starts with the level that lies below the common levels. The colon following
the semicolon must be omitted in this case.
Example:
HCOP:ITEM ALL;:HCOP:IMM
This command line contains two commands. Both commands are part of the HCOP command system, i.e. they have one level in common.
When abbreviating the command line, the second command begins with the level below
HCOP. The colon after the semicolon is omitted. The abbreviated form of the command
line reads as follows:
HCOP:ITEM ALL;IMM
A new command line always begins with the complete path.
Example:
HCOP:ITEM ALL
HCOP:IMM
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
226
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Basics
Command Sequence and Synchronization
6.3.6 Responses to Queries
A query is defined for each setting command unless explicitly specified otherwise. It is
formed by adding a question mark to the associated setting command. According to
SCPI, the responses to queries are partly subject to stricter rules than in standard IEEE
488.2.
●
The requested parameter is transmitted without a header.
Example: HCOP:PAGE:ORI?, Response: LAND
●
Maximum values, minimum values and all other quantities that are requested via a
special text parameter are returned as numeric values.
Example: SENSe:FREQuency:STOP? MAX, Response: 3.5E9
●
Numeric values are output without a unit. Physical quantities are referred to the basic
units or to the units set using the Unit command. The response 3.5E9 in the previous example stands for 3.5 GHz.
●
Truth values (Boolean values) are returned as 0 (for OFF) and 1 (for ON).
Example:
Setting command: HCOPy:DEV:COL ON
Query: HCOPy:DEV:COL?
Response: 1
●
Text (character data) is returned in a short form.
Example:
Setting command: HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation LANDscape
Query: HCOP:PAGE:ORI?
Response: LAND
6.4 Command Sequence and Synchronization
IEEE 488.2 defines a distinction between overlapped and sequential commands:
●
A sequential command is one which finishes executing before the next command
starts executing. Commands that are processed quickly are usually implemented as
sequential commands. Sequential commands are not implemented in the instrument,
however the execution time of most commands is so short that they act as sequential
commands when sent in different command lines.
●
An overlapping command is one which does not automatically finish executing before
the next command starts executing. Usually, overlapping commands take longer to
process and allow the program to do other tasks while being executed. If overlapping
commands do have to be executed in a defined order, e.g. in order to avoid wrong
measurement results, they must be serviced sequentially. This is called synchronization between the controller and the instrument.
Setting commands within one command line, even though they may be implemented as
sequential commands, are not necessarily serviced in the order in which they have been
received. In order to make sure that commands are actually carried out in a certain order,
each command must be sent in a separate command line.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
227
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Basics
Command Sequence and Synchronization
Example: Commands and queries in one message
The response to a query combined in a program message with commands that affect the
queried value is not predictable.
The following commands always return the specified result:
:FREQ:STAR 1GHZ;SPAN 100 :FREQ:STAR?
Result:
1000000000 (1 GHz)
Whereas the result for the following commands is not specified by SCPI:
:FREQ:STAR 1GHz;STAR?;SPAN 1000000
The result could be the value of STARt before the command was sent since the instrument might defer executing the individual commands until a program message terminator
is received. The result could also be 1 GHz if the instrument executes commands as they
are received.
As a general rule, send commands and queries in different program messages.
Example: Overlapping command with *OPC
The instrument implements INITiate[:IMMediate] as an overlapped command.
Assuming that INITiate[:IMMediate] takes longer to execute than *OPC, sending
the following command sequence results in initiating a sweep and, after some time, setting the OPC bit in the ESR:
INIT; *OPC.
Sending the following commands still initiates a sweep:
INIT; *OPC; *CLS
However, since the operation is still pending when the instrument executes *CLS, forcing
it into the "Operation Complete Command Idle" State (OCIS), *OPC is effectively skipped.
The OPC bit is not set until the instrument executes another *OPC command.
6.4.1 Preventing Overlapping Execution
To prevent an overlapping execution of commands, one of the commands *OPC, *OPC?
or *WAI can be used. All three commands cause a certain action only to be carried out
after the hardware has been set. By suitable programming, the controller can be forced
to wait for the corresponding action to occur.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
228
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Basics
Command Sequence and Synchronization
Table 6-2: Synchronization using *OPC, *OPC? and *WAI
Command
Action
Programming the controller
*OPC
Sets the Operation Complete bit in the ESR
●
after all previous commands have been execu- ●
●
ted.
*OPC?
Stops command processing until 1 is returned. Sending *OPC? directly after the command
This is only the case after the Operation Com- whose processing should be terminated before
plete bit has been set in the ESR. This bit indi- other commands can be executed.
cates that the previous setting has been completed.
*WAI
Stops further command processing until all
commands sent before *WAI have been executed.
Setting bit 0 in the ESE
Setting bit 5 in the SRE
Waiting for service request (SRQ)
Sending *WAI directly after the command
whose processing should be terminated before
other commands are executed.
Command synchronization using *WAI or *OPC? appended to an overlapped command
is a good choice if the overlapped command takes only little time to process. The two
synchronization techniques simply block overlapped execution of the command.
For time consuming overlapped commands it is usually desirable to allow the controller
or the instrument to do other useful work while waiting for command execution. Use one
of the following methods:
*OPC with a service request
1. Set the OPC mask bit (bit no. 0) in the ESE: *ESE 1
2. Set bit no. 5 in the SRE: *SRE 32 to enable ESB service request.
3. Send the overlapped command with *OPC
4. Wait for a service request
The service request indicates that the overlapped command has finished.
*OPC? with a service request
1. Set bit no. 4 in the SRE: *SRE 16 to enable MAV service request.
2. Send the overlapped command with *OPC?
3. Wait for a service request
The service request indicates that the overlapped command has finished.
Event Status Register (ESE)
1. Set the OPC mask bit (bit no. 0) in the ESE: *ESE 1
2. Send the overlapped command without *OPC, *OPC? or *WAI
3. Poll the operation complete state periodically (by means of a timer) using the
sequence: *OPC; *ESR?
A return value (LSB) of 1 indicates that the overlapped command has finished.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
229
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Basics
Status Reporting System
*OPC? with short timeout
1. Send the overlapped command without *OPC, *OPC? or *WAI
2. Poll the operation complete state periodically (by means of a timer) using the
sequence: <short timeout>; *OPC?
3. A return value (LSB) of 1 indicates that the overlapped command has finished. In
case of a timeout, the operation is ongoing.
4. Reset timeout to former value
5. Clear the error queue with SYStem:ERRor? to remove the "-410, Query interrupted"
entries.
Using several threads in the controller application
As an alternative, provided the programming environment of the controller application
supports threads, separate threads can be used for the application GUI and for controlling
the instrument(s) via SCPI.
A thread waiting for a *OPC? thus will not block the GUI or the communication with other
instruments.
6.5 Status Reporting System
The status reporting system stores all information on the current operating state of the
instrument, and on errors which have occurred. This information is stored in the status
registers and in the error queue. Both can be queried with the commands STATus....
6.5.1 Hierarchy of status registers
As shown in the following figure, the status information is of hierarchical structure.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
230
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Basics
Status Reporting System
Fig. 6-1: Graphical overview of the status registers hierarchy
●
STB, SRE
The STatus Byte (STB) register and its associated mask register Service Request
Enable (SRE) form the highest level of the status reporting system. The STB provides
a rough overview of the instrument status, collecting the information of the lower-level
registers.
●
ESR, SCPI registers
The STB receives its information from the following registers:
– The Event Status Register (ESR) with the associated mask register standard
Event Status Enable (ESE).
–
The STATus:OPERation and STATus:QUEStionable registers which are
defined by SCPI and contain detailed information on the instrument.
●
IST, PPE
The IST flag ("Individual STatus"), like the SRQ, combines the entire instrument status
in a single bit. The PPE fulfills the same function for the IST flag as the SRE for the
service request.
●
Output buffer
The output buffer contains the messages the instrument returns to the controller. It
is not part of the status reporting system but determines the value of the MAV bit in
the STB and thus is represented in the overview.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
231
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Basics
Status Reporting System
All status registers have the same internal structure.
SRE, ESE
The service request enable register SRE can be used as ENABle part of the STB if the
STB is structured according to SCPI. By analogy, the ESE can be used as the ENABle
part of the ESR.
6.5.2 Structure of a SCPI Status Register
Each standard SCPI register consists of 5 parts. Each part has a width of 16 bits and has
different functions. The individual bits are independent of each other, i.e. each hardware
status is assigned a bit number which is valid for all five parts. Bit 15 (the most significant
bit) is set to zero for all parts. Thus the contents of the register parts can be processed
by the controller as positive integers.
Fig. 6-2: The status-register model
Description of the five status register parts
The five parts of a SCPI register have different properties and functions:
●
CONDition
The CONDition part is written into directly by the hardware or the sum bit of the next
lower register. Its contents reflect the current instrument status. This register part can
only be read, but not written into or cleared. Its contents are not affected by reading.
●
PTRansition
The two transition register parts define which state transition of the CONDition part
(none, 0 to 1, 1 to 0 or both) is stored in the EVENt part.
The Positive-TRansition part acts as a transition filter. When a bit of the
CONDition part is changed from 0 to 1, the associated PTR bit decides whether the
EVENt bit is set to 1.
– PTR bit =1: the EVENt bit is set.
–
PTR bit =0: the EVENt bit is not set.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
232
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Basics
Status Reporting System
This part can be written into and read as required. Its contents are not affected by
reading.
●
NTRansition
The Negative-TRansition part also acts as a transition filter. When a bit of the
CONDition part is changed from 1 to 0, the associated NTR bit decides whether the
EVENt bit is set to 1.
– NTR bit =1: the EVENt bit is set.
–
NTR bit =0: the EVENt bit is not set.
This part can be written into and read as required. Its contents are not affected by
reading.
●
EVENt
The EVENt part indicates whether an event has occurred since the last reading, it is
the "memory" of the condition part. It only indicates events passed on by the transition
filters. It is permanently updated by the instrument. This part can only be read by the
user. Reading the register clears it. This part is often equated with the entire register.
●
ENABle
The ENABle part determines whether the associated EVENt bit contributes to the
sum bit (see below). Each bit of the EVENt part is "ANDed" with the associated
ENABle bit (symbol '&'). The results of all logical operations of this part are passed
on to the sum bit via an "OR" function (symbol '+').
ENABle bit = 0: the associated EVENt bit does not contribute to the sum bit
ENABle bit = 1: if the associated EVENt bit is "1", the sum bit is set to "1" as well.
This part can be written into and read by the user as required. Its contents are not
affected by reading.
Sum bit
The sum bit is obtained from the EVENt and ENABle part for each register. The result is
then entered into a bit of the CONDition part of the higher-order register.
The instrument automatically generates the sum bit for each register. Thus an event can
lead to a service request throughout all levels of the hierarchy.
6.5.3 Contents of the Status Registers
In the following sections, the contents of the status registers are described in more detail.
6.5.3.1
Status Byte (STB) and Service Request Enable Register (SRE)
The STatus Byte (STB) is already defined in IEEE 488.2. It provides a rough overview
of the instrument status by collecting the pieces of information of the lower registers. A
special feature is that bit 6 acts as the sum bit of the remaining bits of the status byte.
The STB is read using the command ​*STB?​ or a serial poll.
The STatus Byte (STB) is linked to the Service Request Enable (SRE) register.
Each bit of the STB is assigned a bit in the SRE. Bit 6 of the SRE is ignored. If a bit is set
in the SRE and the associated bit in the STB changes from 0 to 1, a service request
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
233
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Basics
Status Reporting System
(SRQ) is generated. The SRE can be set using the command ​*SRE​ and read using the
command *SRE?.
Table 6-3: Meaning of the bits used in the status byte
Bit No.
Meaning
0...1
Not used
2
Error Queue not empty
The bit is set when an entry is made in the error queue. If this bit is enabled by the SRE, each
entry of the error queue generates a service request. Thus an error can be recognized and specified in greater detail by polling the error queue. The poll provides an informative error message.
This procedure is to be recommended since it considerably reduces the problems involved with
remote control.
3
Not used.
4
MAV bit (message available)
The bit is set if a message is available in the output buffer which can be read. This bit can be used
to enable data to be automatically read from the instrument to the controller.
5
ESB bit
Sum bit of the event status register. It is set if one of the bits in the event status register is set and
enabled in the event status enable register. Setting of this bit indicates a serious error which can
be specified in greater detail by polling the event status register.
6
MSS bit (master status summary bit)
The bit is set if the instrument triggers a service request. This is the case if one of the other bits of
this registers is set together with its mask bit in the service request enable register SRE.
7
6.5.3.2
Not used.
IST Flag and Parallel Poll Enable Register (PPE)
As with the SRQ, the IST flag combines the entire status information in a single bit. It can
be read by means of a parallel poll (see ​chapter 6.5.5.3, "Parallel Poll", on page 236) or
using the command ​*IST?​.
The parallel poll enable register (PPE) determines which bits of the STB contribute to the
IST flag. The bits of the STB are "ANDed" with the corresponding bits of the PPE, with
bit 6 being used as well in contrast to the SRE. The IST flag results from the "ORing" of
all results. The PPE can be set using commands ​*PRE​ and read using command *PRE?.
6.5.4 Event Status Register (ESR) and Event Status Enable Register (ESE)
The ESR is defined in IEEE 488.2. The event status register can be read out using command ​*ESR?​ on page 241. The ESE is the associated enable part. It can be set using
the command ​*ESE​ on page 241 and read using the command *ESE?.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
234
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Basics
Status Reporting System
Table 6-4: Meaning of the bits used in the event status register
Bit No.
Meaning
0
Operation Complete
This bit is set on receipt of the command *OPC exactly when all previous commands have been
executed.
1
not used
2
Query Error
This bit is set if either the controller wants to read data from the instrument without having sent a
query, or if it does not fetch requested data and sends new instructions to the instrument instead.
The cause is often a query which is faulty and hence cannot be executed.
3
Device-dependent Error
This bit is set if a device dependent error occurs. An error message with a number between 300
and 399 or a positive error number, which denotes the error in greater detail, is entered into the
error queue.
4
Execution Error
This bit is set if a received command is syntactically correct but cannot be performed for other
reasons. An error message with a number between 200 and 300, which denotes the error in greater
detail, is entered into the error queue.
5
Command Error
This bit is set if a command which is undefined or syntactically incorrect is received. An error
message with a number between 100 and 200, which denotes the error in greater detail, is entered
into the error queue.
6
User Request
This bit is set on pressing the LOCAL key, i.e. when the instrument is switched over to manual
operation.
7
Power On (supply voltage on)
This bit is set on switching on the instrument.
6.5.5 Application of the Status Reporting System
The purpose of the status reporting system is to monitor the status of one or several
devices in a measuring system. To do this and react appropriately, the controller must
receive and evaluate the information of all devices. The following standard methods are
used:
●
Service request (SRQ) initiated by the instrument
●
Serial poll of all devices in the bus system, initiated by the controller in order to find
out who sent a SRQ and why
●
Parallel poll of all devices
●
Query of a specific instrument status by means of commands
●
Query of the error queue
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
235
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Basics
Status Reporting System
6.5.5.1
Service Request
Under certain circumstances, the instrument can send a service request (SRQ) to the
controller. Usually this service request initiates an interrupt at the controller, to which the
control program can react appropriately. An SRQ is always initiated if one or several of
bits 2, 4 or 5 of the status byte are set and enabled in the SRE. Each of these bits combines the information of the error queue or the output buffer. In order to use the possibilities of the service request effectively, all bits should be set to "1" in the enable registers
SRE and ESE.
Example:
Use command *OPC to generate an SRQ .
*ESE 1 - set bit 0 of ESE (Operation Complete)
*SRE 32 - set bit 5 of SRE (ESB).
After its settings have been completed, the instrument generates an SRQ.
The SRQ is the only possibility for the instrument to become active on its own. Each
controller program should set the instrument such that a service request is initiated in the
case of malfunction. The program should react appropriately to the service request.
6.5.5.2
Serial Poll
In a serial poll, just as with command *STB, the status byte of an instrument is queried.
However, the query is realized via interface messages and is thus clearly faster.
The serial poll method is defined in IEEE 488.1 and used to be the only standard possibility for different instruments to poll the status byte. The method also works for instruments which do not adhere to SCPI or IEEE 488.2.
The serial poll is mainly used to obtain a fast overview of the state of several instruments
connected to the controller.
6.5.5.3
Parallel Poll
In a parallel poll, up to eight instruments are simultaneously requested by the controller
using a single command to transmit 1 bit of information each on the data lines, i.e., to set
the data line allocated to each instrument to a logical "0" or "1".
In addition to the SRE register, which determines the conditions under which an SRQ is
generated, there is a Parallel Poll Enable register (PPE) which is ANDed with the STB
bit by bit, considering bit 6 as well. This register is ANDed with the STB bit by bit, considering bit 6 as well. The results are ORed, the result is possibly inverted and then sent
as a response to the parallel poll of the controller. The result can also be queried without
parallel poll using the command ​*IST?​.
The instrument first has to be set for the parallel poll using the command PPC. This command allocates a data line to the instrument and determines whether the response is to
be inverted. The parallel poll itself is executed using PPE.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
236
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Basics
Status Reporting System
The parallel poll method is mainly used to find out quickly which one of the instruments
connected to the controller has sent a service request. To this effect, SRE and PPE must
be set to the same value.
6.5.5.4
Query of an instrument status
Each part of any status register can be read using queries. There are two types of commands:
●
The common commands *ESR?, *IDN?, *IST?, *STB? query the higher-level registers.
●
The commands of the STATus system query the SCPI registers
(STATus:QUEStionable...)
The returned value is always a decimal number that represents the bit pattern of the
queried register. This number is evaluated by the controller program.
Queries are usually used after an SRQ in order to obtain more detailed information on
the cause of the SRQ.
6.5.5.5
Error Queue
Each error state in the instrument leads to an entry in the error queue. The entries of the
error queue are detailed plain text error messages that can be looked up in the Error Log
or queried via remote control using SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]? or
SYSTem:ERRor:ALL?. Each call of SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]? provides one entry from
the error queue. If no error messages are stored there any more, the instrument responds
with 0, "No error".
The error queue should be queried after every SRQ in the controller program as the
entries describe the cause of an error more precisely than the status registers. Especially
in the test phase of a controller program the error queue should be queried regularly since
faulty commands from the controller to the instrument are recorded there as well.
6.5.6 Reset Values of the Status Reporting System
The following table contains the different commands and events causing the status
reporting system to be reset. None of the commands, except *RST and
SYSTem:PRESet, influence the functional instrument settings. In particular, DCL does
not change the instrument settings.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
237
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Basics
General Programming Recommendations
Table 6-5: Resetting the status reporting system
Event
Switching on supply
voltage
Power-On-StatusClear
DCL, SDC *RST or
STASYSTus:PRE(Device
Tem:PRESet
Clear,
Selected Set
*CLS
Effect
0
1
Device
Clear)
Clear STB, ESR
-
yes
-
-
-
yes
Clear SRE, ESE
-
yes
-
-
-
-
Clear PPE
-
yes
-
-
-
-
Clear error queue
yes
yes
-
-
-
yes
Clear output buffer
yes
yes
yes
1)
1)
1)
Clear command processing and yes
input buffer
yes
yes
-
-
-
1) The first command in a command line that immediately follows a <PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINATOR>
clears the output buffer.
6.6 General Programming Recommendations
Initial instrument status before changing settings
Manual operation is designed for maximum possible operating convenience. In contrast,
the priority of remote control is the "predictability" of the instrument status. Thus, when a
command attempts to define incompatible settings, the command is ignored and the
instrument status remains unchanged, i.e. other settings are not automatically adapted.
Therefore, control programs should always define an initial instrument status (e.g. using
the *RST command) and then implement the required settings.
Command sequence
As a general rule, send commands and queries in different program messages. Otherwise, the result of the query may vary depending on which operation is performed first
(see also Preventing Overlapping Execution).
Reacting to malfunctions
The service request is the only possibility for the instrument to become active on its own.
Each controller program should instruct the instrument to initiate a service request in case
of malfunction. The program should react appropriately to the service request.
Error queues
The error queue should be queried after every service request in the controller program
as the entries describe the cause of an error more precisely than the status registers.
Especially in the test phase of a controller program the error queue should be queried
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
238
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Basics
General Programming Recommendations
regularly since faulty commands from the controller to the instrument are recorded there
as well.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
239
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
Common Commands
7 Remote Control Commands
In the following, all remote-control commands will be presented in detail with their parameters and the ranges of numerical values.
For an introduction to remote control and the status registers, refer to ​chapter 6, "Remote
Control Basics", on page 199.
7.1 Common Commands
Common commands are described in the IEEE 488.2 (IEC 625-2) standard. These commands have the same effect and are employed in the same way on different devices.
The headers of these commands consist of "*" followed by three letters. Many common
commands are related to the Status Reporting System.
Available common commands:
*CAL?​...........................................................................................................................240
*CLS​.............................................................................................................................240
*ESE​.............................................................................................................................241
*ESR?​...........................................................................................................................241
*IDN?​............................................................................................................................241
*IST?​............................................................................................................................241
*OPC​............................................................................................................................242
*OPT?​...........................................................................................................................242
*PCB​............................................................................................................................242
*PRE​............................................................................................................................242
*PSC​............................................................................................................................242
*RCL​.............................................................................................................................243
*RST​.............................................................................................................................243
*SAV​.............................................................................................................................243
*SRE​............................................................................................................................244
*STB?​...........................................................................................................................244
*TRG​............................................................................................................................244
*TST?​...........................................................................................................................244
*WAI​.............................................................................................................................244
*CAL?
Calibration Query
Initiates a calibration of the instrument and subsequently queries the calibration status.
Responses > 0 indicate errors.
Usage:
Query only
*CLS
CLear Status
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
240
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
Common Commands
Sets the status byte (STB), the standard event register (ESR) and the EVENt part of the
QUEStionable and the OPERation registers to zero. The command does not alter the
mask and transition parts of the registers. It clears the output buffer.
Usage:
Setting only
*ESE <Value>
Event Status Enable
Sets the event status enable register to the specified value. The query returns the contents of the event status enable register in decimal form.
Parameters:
<Value>
Range:
0 to 255
*ESR?
Event Status Read
Returns the contents of the event status register in decimal form and subsequently sets
the register to zero.
Return values:
<Contents>
Range:
Usage:
Query only
0 to 255
*IDN?
IDeNtification: returns the instrument identification.
Return values:
<ID>
"Rohde&Schwarz,<device type>,<serial number>,<firmware version>"
Example:
Rohde&Schwarz,ZVA8-4Port,12345,0.10.1.23
Usage:
Query only
Manual control:
See "Hardware Options / Software Options" on page 85
*IST?
Individual STatus query
Returns the contents of the IST flag in decimal form. The IST flag is the status bit which
is sent during a parallel poll.
Return values:
<ISTflag>
0|1
Usage:
Query only
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
241
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
Common Commands
*OPC
OPeration Complete
Sets bit 0 in the event status register when all preceding commands have been executed.
This bit can be used to initiate a service request. The query form writes a "1" into the
output buffer as soon as all preceding commands have been executed. This is used for
command synchronization.
*OPT?
OPTion identification query
Queries the options included in the instrument. For a list of all available options and their
description refer to the CD-ROM.
Return values:
<Options>
The query returns a list of options. The options are returned at
fixed positions in a comma-separated string. A zero is returned for
options that are not installed.
Usage:
Query only
Manual control:
See "Hardware Options / Software Options" on page 85
*PCB <Address>
Pass Control Back
Indicates the controller address to which remote control is returned after termination of
the triggered action.
Setting parameters:
<Address>
Range:
Usage:
0 to 30
Setting only
*PRE <Value>
Parallel poll Register Enable
Sets parallel poll enable register to the indicated value. The query returns the contents
of the parallel poll enable register in decimal form.
Parameters:
<Value>
Range:
0 to 255
*PSC <Action>
Power on Status Clear
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
242
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
Common Commands
Determines whether the contents of the ENABle registers are preserved or reset when
the instrument is switched on. Thus a service request can be triggered when the instrument is switched on, if the status registers ESE and SRE are suitably configured. The
query reads out the contents of the "power-on-status-clear" flag.
Parameters:
<Action>
0|1
0
The contents of the status registers are preserved.
1
Resets the status registers.
*RCL <Number>
ReCaLl calls up the instrument settings from an intermediate memory identified by the
specified number. The instrument settings can be stored to this memory using the command ​*SAV​ with the associated number.
It also activates the instrument settings which are stored in a file and loaded using the
MMEMory:LOAD <number>, <file_name.extension> command.
Manual control:
See "Recall" on page 109
See "Recall Immediate x" on page 110
*RST
ReSeT
Sets the instrument to a defined default status. The default settings are indicated in the
description of commands.
The command is equivalent to SYSTem:PRESet.
Usage:
Setting only
Manual control:
See "Preset" on page 80
*SAV <Number>
SAVe stores the current instrument settings under the specified number in an intermediate memory. The settings can be recalled using the command ​*RCL​ with the associated
number.
To transfer the stored instrument settings in a file, use the command ​:​MMEMory:​
STORe:​STATe​.
Manual control:
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
See "Save" on page 108
See "Save Immediate x" on page 108
243
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
Common Commands
*SRE <Contents>
Service Request Enable
Sets the service request enable register to the indicated value. This command determines
under which conditions a service request is triggered.
Parameters:
<Contents>
Contents of the service request enable register in decimal form.
Bit 6 (MSS mask bit) is always 0.
Range:
0 to 255
*STB?
STatus Byte query
Reads the contents of the status byte in decimal form.
Usage:
Query only
*TRG
TRiGger
Triggers all actions waiting for a trigger event. In particular, *TRG generates a manual
trigger signal (Manual Trigger). This common command complements the commands of
the TRIGger subsystem.
Usage:
Event
*TST?
self TeST query
Triggers selftests of the instrument and returns an error code in decimal form (see Service
Manual supplied with the instrument). "0" indicates no errors occured.
Usage:
Query only
*WAI
WAIt to continue
Prevents servicing of the subsequent commands until all preceding commands have
been executed and all signals have settled (see also command synchronization and ​
*OPC​).
Usage:
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
Event
244
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
Preset Commands
7.2 Preset Commands
The preset commands are not bundled in one subsystem. Therefore, they are listed separately in this section. In addition, a specific preset command is provided for each digital
standard and for the fader. These specific commands are described in the associated
subsystems.
Four presetting actions are available:
●
Activating the default state of all internal instrument functions (​*RST​ on page 243).
Functions that concern the integration of the instrument into a measurement setup
are not changed, e.g. GPIB address or reference oscillator source settings.
●
Activating the preset state of the parameters related to the selected signal path (​:​
SOURce<hw>:​PRESet​ on page 245)
●
Activating the preset state of all parameters that are not related to the signal path (​
:​DEVice:​PRESet​ on page 245)
●
Activating the original state of delivery (factory reset, ​:​SYSTem:​FPReset​
on page 246). Only functions that are protected by a password remain unchanged
as well as the passwords themselves.
:DEVice:PRESet
The command presets all parameters which are not related to the signal path. This
includes presetting the LF generator and bit/block error measurement.
Example:
DEV:PRES
presets all instruments settings that are not related to the signal
path
Usage:
Event
:SOURce<hw>:PRESet
The command presets all parameters which are related to the selected signal path.
Fading (if available) and transient recorder are only preset by command *RST.
Example:
SOUR:PRES
presets all settings that are related to signal path
SYSTem:PRESet
The command triggers an instrument reset. It has the same effect as:
●
the PRESET key on the front panel
●
the *RST command
For an overview of the settings affected by the preset function, see ​chapter 5.2.2, "Default
Instrument Settings - Preset Key", on page 80.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
245
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
CALibration Subsystem
Example:
SYST:PRES
All instrument settings (also those that are not currently active) are
reset to their default values.
Usage:
Setting only
:SYSTem:FPReset
The command triggers an instrument reset to the original state of delivery.
Note: Since Factory Preset resets the Remote Channel and network settings to the
default values, executing Factory Preset via remote control terminates the connection to
the instrument, if these settings had been configured to values different to the default
ones!
The factory preset function resets nearly all instrument settings. In addition to the regular
preset by means of the PRESET key, a "Factory Preset" resets also the following values:
●
Reference frequency settings ("Ref Oscillator" menu)
●
Power on settings ("Level/EMF" menu)
●
Network settings including hostname ("Setup" menu)
●
Remote Channel settings including GPIB address ("Setup" menu)
●
Start/Stop Gui Update ("Setup" menu)
●
Display and keyboard settings ("Setup" menu).
To maintain security, password settings and all settings protected by these passwords
like disabled USB and LAN connections are not changed.
Not affected by the "Factory Preset" are also user data, lists or instrument settings files,
created for example by means of the Save/Recall function.
Example:
SYST:FPR
all instrument settings (also those that are not currently active) are
reset to the factory values.
Usage:
Event
Manual control:
See "Factory Preset" on page 100
7.3 CALibration Subsystem
The CALibration system contains the commands for adjustment. Adjustment is triggered
by the query commands. The response "0" indicates error-free adjustment, and the
response "1" means that an error occurred during adjustment.
:​CALibration:​ALL[:​MEASure]?​.........................................................................................247
:​CALibration<hw>:​FMOFfset[:​MEASure]?​.........................................................................247
:​CALibration<hw>:​FREQuency[:​MEASure]?​......................................................................247
:​CALibration<hw>:​LEVel[:​MEASure]?​...............................................................................247
:​CALibration<hw>:​LEVel:​EXTern:​DATA​............................................................................248
[:​SOURce]:​CALibration:​STEReo:​ANALog[:​MEAS]?​...........................................................248
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
246
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
CALibration Subsystem
:CALibration:ALL[:MEASure]?
The command starts all internal adjustments for which no external measuring equipment
is needed.
Return values:
<Measure>
0|1
Example:
CAL:ALL:MEAS?
starts the adjustment of all functions for the entire instrument.
Response: "0"
adjustment has been performed successfully.
Usage:
Query only
SCPI confirmed
Manual control:
See "Adjust All" on page 82
:CALibration<hw>:FMOFfset[:MEASure]?
The command starts all adjustment for the FM/PhiM modulator.
Return values:
<Measure>
0|1
Example:
CAL:FMOF?
starts the adjustments for the FM/Phim modulator.
Response: "0"
the adjustments have been performed successfully
Usage:
Query only
Manual control:
See "Adjust FM Offset" on page 172
:CALibration<hw>:FREQuency[:MEASure]?
The command starts all adjustments which affect the frequency.
Return values:
<Measure>
0|1
Example:
CAL:FREQ:MEAS?
starts the adjustments for maximum frequency accuracy.
Response: "0"
the adjustments have been performed successfully.
Usage:
Query only
Manual control:
See "Adjust Synthesis" on page 82
:CALibration<hw>:LEVel[:MEASure]?
The command starts all adjustments which affect the level.
The acquired correction values improve the settling time and the signal quality.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
247
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
CALibration Subsystem
Return values:
<Measure>
0|1
Example:
CAL:LEV:MEAS?
starts adjustments for maximum level accuracy.
Response: "0"
adjustment has been performed successfully.
Usage:
Query only
Manual control:
See "Adjust Level" on page 82
:CALibration<hw>:LEVel:EXTern:DATA <Data>
Selects the data used for of external level correction.
By default the instrument uses correction data obtained in the factory before delivery. In
addition, customer data can be used for external level correction. The customer data is
obtained using a R&S NRP power sensor. External level correction is a protected function
(see service manual, chapter 2, "Adjustment").
Parameters:
<Data>
FACT | CUST
*RST:
FACTory
Example:
CAL:LEV:EXT:DATA FACT
selects the use of the data aquired at the factory for external level
correction.
Manual control:
See "Adjustment Data" on page 82
[:SOURce]:CALibration:STEReo:ANALog[:MEAS]?
The command starts all adjustments which affect the analog channels of the stereo coder
option.
Return values:
<Meas>
0|1
Example:
CAL:STER:ANAL?
starts the adjustments for analog channels of the stereo coder.
Response: 0
the adjustments have been performed successfully.
Usage:
Query only
Options:
R&S SMB-B5
Manual control:
See "Adjust Stereo Coder" on page 83
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
248
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
DIAGnostic Subsystem
7.4 DIAGnostic Subsystem
The DIAGnostic system contains the commands used for instrument diagnosis and
servicing. SCPI does not define any DIAGnostic commands; the commands listed here
are all Device-specific. All DIAGnostic commands are query commands which are not
influenced by ​*RST​.
:​DIAGnostic<hw>:​BGINfo?​..............................................................................................249
:​DIAGnostic<hw>:​BGINfo:​CATalog?​................................................................................249
:​DIAGnostic:​INFO:​OTIMe?​..............................................................................................250
:​DIAGnostic:​INFO:​POCount?​..........................................................................................250
:DIAGnostic<hw>:BGINfo?
The command checks the modules available in the instrument using the variant and revision state.
If the command is sent without parameters being specified, a complete list of all modules
is returned (the various entries are separated by commas). The length of the list is variable
and depends on the instrument equipment configuration.
If the command is sent with parameters, a list of the specified modules is returned (the
various entries are separated by commas). A list of modules names can be called up
using the command ​:​DIAGnostic<hw>:​BGINfo:​CATalog?​ on page 249.
Return values:
<Bginfo>
< Module name> <Module stock number incl. variant> <Module
revision> <Module serial number>
Each entry for one module consists of four parts which are separated by space characters.
Example:
DIAG:BGIN
Queries the instrument configuration.
returns the data of all available modules.
DIAG:BGIN? 'MBRD'
Queries the configuration of the motherboard.
Response:
MBRD 1141.3501.02 1.5.3 100023
Module motherboard with stock number 1141.3501.01 has revision 1.5.3 and serial number 100023.
Usage:
Query only
Manual control:
See "Assembly" on page 84
:DIAGnostic<hw>:BGINfo:CATalog?
The command queries the names of the assemblies available in the instrument.
A complete list of all assemblies is returned (the various entries are separated by commas). The length of the list is variable and depends on the instrument equipment configuration.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
249
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
DISPlay Subsystem
Return values:
<Catalog>
string
Example:
DIAG:BGIN:CAT
queries the names of the assemblies.
Usage:
Query only
:DIAGnostic:INFO:OTIMe?
The command queries the number of operation hours.
Return values:
<OTIMe>
float
Example:
DIAG:INFO:OTIM
queries the operation hours.
Response:
100023
The instrument was operated for 100023 hours up to now.
Usage:
Query only
Manual control:
See "Operation Time / h" on page 83
:DIAGnostic:INFO:POCount?
The command queries the number of power-on events.
Return values:
<Pocount>
float
Example:
DIAG:INFO:POC
queries the number of power on events.
Response:
123
The instrument was switched on for 123 times up to now.
Usage:
Query only
Manual control:
See "Power On Count" on page 84
7.5 DISPlay Subsystem
The DISPlay subsystem contains the commands to set the power-save mode of the
instrument.
:​DISPlay:​ANNotation:​AMPLitude​.....................................................................................251
:​DISPlay:​ANNotation:​FREQuency​....................................................................................251
:​DISPlay:​ANNotation[:​ALL]​..............................................................................................251
:​DISPlay:​DIALog:​CLOSe​................................................................................................251
:​DISPlay:​DIALog:​ID​........................................................................................................252
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
250
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
DISPlay Subsystem
:​DISPlay:​DIALog:​OPEN​..................................................................................................252
:​DISPlay:​PSAVe:​HOLDoff​...............................................................................................252
:​DISPlay:​PSAVe[:​STATe]​................................................................................................252
:DISPlay:ANNotation:AMPLitude <State>
Fades out level display in the header of the instrument and displays asterisks instead.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
1
Example:
DISP:ANN:AMPL ON
shows asterisks instead of level values.
Manual control:
See "Annotation Amplitude" on page 99
:DISPlay:ANNotation:FREQuency <State>
Fades out frequency display in the header of the instrument and displays asterisks
instead.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
1
Example:
DISP:ANN:FREQ ON
shows asterisks instead of the frequency.
Manual control:
See "Annotation Frequency" on page 99
:DISPlay:ANNotation[:ALL] <State>
Fades out level and frequency display in the header of the instrument and displays asterisks instead. These settings are particularly useful when you remotely control the instrument.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
Example:
1
DISP:ANN:AMPL ON
shows asterisks instead of frequency and level values.
:DISPlay:DIALog:CLOSe <DialogId>
Closes the specified dialog. To determine the dialog identifier, use command ​:​
DISPlay:​DIALog:​ID​.
Setting parameters:
<DialogId>
string
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
251
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
DISPlay Subsystem
Example:
DISP:DIAL:CLOS "<dialog ID>"
closes the dialog, determined with the "<dialog ID>".
Usage:
Setting only
:DISPlay:DIALog:ID
Returns the dialog identifiers of the open dialogs in a string separated by blanks.
Parameters:
<DialogIdList>
Example:
string
DISP:DIAL:ID?
Response: "<dialog ID(1)> <dialog ID(2)> ...
<dialog ID(n)>"
returns the Ids of all opened dialogs.
:DISPlay:DIALog:OPEN <DialogId>
Opens the specified dialog. To determine the dialog identifier, use command ​:​
DISPlay:​DIALog:​ID​.
Setting parameters:
<DialogId>
string
Example:
DISP:DIAL:OPEN "<dialog ID>"
opens the dialog, determined with the "<dialog ID>".
Usage:
Setting only
:DISPlay:PSAVe:HOLDoff <Holdoff>
Sets the waiting time for the screen-save mode of the display. The entry is dimensionless.
Parameters:
<Holdoff>
integer
Range:
1 to 60
*RST:
10
Default unit: minute
Example:
DISP:PSAV:HOLD 8
sets the timeout of the screen saver to 8 minutes.
Manual control:
See "Wait Time" on page 92
:DISPlay:PSAVe[:STATe] <State>
Activates the screen-save mode of the display. If activated, the display including backlight
is completely switched off after the elapse of the wait time, provided no entries via front
panel, external mouse or external keyboard are made. To determine the wait time, use
command ​:​DISPlay:​PSAVe:​HOLDoff​.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
252
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
FORMat Subsystem
This mode is recommended for protecting the display, especially if the instrument is
operated via remote control.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
OFF
Example:
DISP:PSAV ON
activates screen saver mode.
Manual control:
See "Screen Saver Active" on page 91
7.6 FORMat Subsystem
The FORMat subsystem contains the commands which determine the format of the data
that the R&S SMB returns to the controller. This affects all query commands which return
a list of numerical data or block data. Reference is made to this in the descriptions of the
commands.
:​FORMat:​BORDer​..........................................................................................................253
:​FORMat[:​DATA]​............................................................................................................253
:​FORMat:​SREGister​.......................................................................................................254
:FORMat:BORDer <Border>
The command determines the sequence of bytes within a binary block. This only affects
blocks which use the IEEE754 format internally.
Parameters:
<Border>
NORMal | SWAPped
NORMal
The instrument expects (with setting commands) and sends (with
queries) the least significant byte of each IEEE754 floating-point
number first and the most significant byte last.
SWAPped
The instrumenet expects (with setting commands) and sends (with
queries) the most significant byte of each IEEE754 floating-point
number first and the least significant byte last.
*RST:
Example:
NORMal
FORM:BORD SWAP
the data is transferred with the most significant bit first.
:FORMat[:DATA] <Data>
The command determines the data format which the R&S Signal Generator uses to return
data. When data is transferred from the control computer to the instrument, the instrument
detects the data format automatically. In this case, the value set here is irrelevant.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
253
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
HCOPy Subsystem
Parameters:
<Data>
ASCii | PACKed
ASCii
Numerical data is transferred as plain text separated by commas.
PACKed
Numerical data is transferred as binary block data. The format
within the binary data depends on the command. The various
binary data formats are explained in the description of the parameter types.
*RST:
Example:
ASCii
FORM ASC
The data is transferred as ASCII data.
:FORMat:SREGister <Sregister>
The command determines the numerical format which is returned when the status registers are queried.
Parameters:
<Sregister>
ASCii | BINary | HEXadecimal | OCTal
ASCii
The register content is returned as a decimal number.
BINary
The register content is returned as a binary number. #B is placed
in front of the number.
HEXadecimal
The register content is returned as a hexadecimal number. #H is
placed in front of the number.
OCTal
The register content is returned as an octal number. #Q is placed
in front of the number.
*RST:
Example:
ASCii
FORM:SREG HEX
The register content is returned as a hexadecimal number.
7.7 HCOPy Subsystem
The HCOPy subsystem contains the commands to generate a hardcopy of the display.
:​HCOPy:​DATA?​.............................................................................................................255
:​HCOPy:​DEVice​.............................................................................................................255
:​HCOPy:​DEVice:​LANGuage​............................................................................................255
:​HCOPy[:​EXECute]​........................................................................................................256
:​HCOPy:​FILE[:​NAME]​.....................................................................................................256
:​HCOPy:​FILE[:​NAME]:​AUTO?​.........................................................................................256
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
254
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
HCOPy Subsystem
:​HCOPy:​FILE[:​NAME]:​AUTO:​DIRectory​...........................................................................257
:​HCOPy:​FILE[:​NAME]:​AUTO:​DIRectory:​CLEar​.................................................................257
:​HCOPy:​FILE[:​NAME]:​AUTO:​FILE?​.................................................................................257
:​HCOPy:​FILE[:​NAME]:​AUTO[:​FILE]:​DAY?​........................................................................258
:​HCOPy:​FILE[:​NAME]:​AUTO[:​FILE]:​DAY:​STATe​...............................................................258
:​HCOPy:​FILE[:​NAME]:​AUTO[:​FILE]:​MONTh?​...................................................................259
:​HCOPy:​FILE[:​NAME]:​AUTO[:​FILE]:​MONTh:​STATe​..........................................................259
:​HCOPy:​FILE[:​NAME]:​AUTO[:​FILE]:​NUMBer?​..................................................................259
:​HCOPy:​FILE[:​NAME]:​AUTO[:​FILE]:​PREFix​.....................................................................259
:​HCOPy:​FILE[:​NAME]:​AUTO[:​FILE]:​PREFix:​STATe​..........................................................260
:​HCOPy:​FILE[:​NAME]:​AUTO[:​FILE]:​YEAR?​......................................................................260
:​HCOPy:​FILE[:​NAME]:​AUTO[:​FILE]:​YEAR:​STATe​............................................................260
:​HCOPy:​FILE[:​NAME]:​AUTO:​STATe​................................................................................260
:​HCOPy:​IMAGe:​FORMat​................................................................................................261
:​HCOPy:​IMAGe:​SIZE​.....................................................................................................261
:HCOPy:DATA?
The commands transfers the hardcopy data directly as a NByte stream to the remote
client.
Return values:
<Data>
string
Example:
HCOP:DEV:LANG JPG
HCOP:DATA?
transfers the hardcopy to the remote client.
Usage:
Query only
:HCOPy:DEVice <Device>
The command defines the output device. The hardcopy can be output in a file. The
HCOPy:FILE:… commands are used for configuration. The file is accessible using the
MMEM:.. commands. In addition, the hardcopy data can be directly transferred to the
remote client using command ​:​HCOPy:​DATA?​.
Parameters:
<Device>
FILE
*RST:
FILE
Example:
HCOP:DEV FILE
the hardcopy will be stored in a file.
Manual control:
See "Destination" on page 102
:HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage <Language>
The command selects the bitmap graphic format for the screenshot. It is also possible to
directly retrieve the data using command HCOP:DATA?. This command is an alias to
command HCOPy:IMAGe:FORMat.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
255
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
HCOPy Subsystem
Parameters:
<Language>
BMP | JPG | XPM | PNG
*RST:
BMP
Example:
HCOP:DEV:LANG BMP
selects bitmap as image format.
HCOP:FILE '/usb/HCopy'
defines the directory, path and file name for storing the hardcopy.
HCOP
triggers the hardcopy generation.
Manual control:
See "File Options" on page 103
:HCOPy[:EXECute]
The command triggers the generation of a hardcopy.
Example:
HCOP
triggers the generation of a hardcopy of the current display.
Usage:
Event
Manual control:
See "Save" on page 105
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME] <Name>
This command creates/selects a file into which the hardcopy will be stored. The path is
specified together with the file name. Access to the file via remote control is possible
using the commands of the MMEM-Subsystem. In contrast, command HCOPy:DATA?
transfers the hardcopy contents directly to the remote client where they can be further
processed.
If automatic file naming is activated, the hardcopy is stored into a file with an automatically
generated name (commands HCOPY:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:…).
Parameters:
<Name>
string
Example:
HCOP:FILE:NAME '/usb/HCopy'
defines the hardcopy file name.
Manual control:
See "File Info" on page 103
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO?
This command queries the path including the file name of the file with automatically generated name.
Return values:
<Auto>
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
string
256
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
HCOPy Subsystem
Example:
HCOP:DEV:LANG BMP
selects output format *,bmp.
HCOP:FILE:AUTO:DIR '/usb/HCopy'
defines the destination directory '/usb/HCopy'.
HCOP:FILE:AUTO:PREF 'gen'
the file name starts with the prefix 'gen'. The usage of automatic
naming with prefix and date in the file name is preset (…:STAT
ON).
HCOP
triggers the generation of a hardcopy of the current trace.
HCOP:FILE:AUTO?
queries the path including the file name
Response:
/usb/HCopy/gen101012008001.bmp'
Usage:
Query only
Manual control:
See "File Options" on page 103
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:DIRectory <Directory>
This command defines the directory into which the hardcopy files will be stored if auto
naming is activated (HCOP:FILE:AUTO:STAT ON).The directory will be created if it does
not exist yet.
Parameters:
<Directory>
string
*RST:
.\HCopy
Example:
HCOP:FILE:AUTO:DIR '/usb/HCopy'
defines the destination directory '/usb/HCopy'
Manual control:
See "File Options" on page 103
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:DIRectory:CLEar
This command deletes all files with extensions "bmp", "img", "png" and "xpm" in the
directory set for automatic naming.
Example:
HCOP:FILE:AUTO:DIR:CLE
deletes all image files with extensions "bmp", "img", "png" and
"xpm".
Usage:
Event
Manual control:
See "File Options" on page 103
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:FILE?
This command queries the file name that what generated using the automatic naming
settings. By default the automatically generated file name is composed of:
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
257
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
HCOPy Subsystem
<Prefix><YYYY><MM><DD><Number>.<Format>.
Each component can be deactivated/activated separately to individually design the file
name.
Return values:
<File>
string
Example:
HCOP:DEV:LANG BMP
selects output format *.bmp.
HCOP:FILE:AUTO:DIR '/usb/HCopy'
defines the destination directory '/usb/HCopy'
HCOP:FILE:AUTO:PREF 'gen'
the file name starts with the prefix 'gen'. The usage of automatic
naming with prefix and date in the file name is preset (…:STAT
ON).
HCOP
triggers the generation of a hardcopy of the current trace.
HCOP:FILE:AUTO:FILE?
queries the file name
Response: 'gen101012008001.bmp'
Usage:
Query only
Manual control:
See "File Info" on page 103
See "File Options" on page 103
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:DAY?
The command returns the day of the current system date which will be used in the file
name if automatic naming is activated.
Return values:
<Day>
float
Example:
HCOP:FILE:AUTO:DAY?
returns the day in the date part of the automatic file name.
Usage:
Query only
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:DAY:STATe <State>
This command activates the usage of the day in the automatic file name.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
ON
Example:
HCOP:FILE:AUTO:DAY:STAT OFF
deactivates the use of the day in the automatically generated file
name.
Manual control:
See "File Options" on page 103
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
258
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
HCOPy Subsystem
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:MONTh?
This command queries the month in the date part in the automatic file name.
Return values:
<Month>
float
Example:
HCOP:FILE:AUTO:MONT?
queries the month in the date part in the automatic file name.
Usage:
Query only
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:MONTh:STATe <State>
This command activates the usage of the month in the automatic file name.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
ON
Example:
HCOP:FILE:AUTO:MONT:STAT OFF
deactivates the usage of the month in the automatic file name.
Manual control:
See "File Options" on page 103
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:NUMBer?
This command queries the number in the automatic file name. The number is assigned
in such a way that always the lowest possible value for an unique file name within the
selected path is used.
On initially switching on the device the number will be reset to the lowest possible value.
Starting with number 0 the output directory will be scanned for already existing files. As
long as files with the same name are existing the number will be incremented by 1. The
number will be automatically set to a number so that the resulting file name will be unique
within the selected path. The current number will not be saved in the save recall file but
will be temporarily stored within the database. On subsequent saves the number will be
incremented.
Return values:
<Number>
float
Example:
HCOP:FILE:AUTO:NUMB?
queries the number in the automatic file name.
Usage:
Query only
Manual control:
See "File Options" on page 103
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:PREFix <Prefix>
This command defines the prefix part in the automatic file name. The usage of the prefix
is activated with command HCOP:FILE:AUTO:PREF:STAT ON.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
259
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
HCOPy Subsystem
Parameters:
<Prefix>
string
*RST:
HCopy
Example:
HCOP:FILE:AUTO:PREF 'Snapshot'
appends "Snapshot" as prefix to the generated file name.
Manual control:
See "File Options" on page 103
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:PREFix:STATe <State>
This command activates the usage of the prefix in the automatic file name. The prefix is
entered with command HCOP:FILE:AUTO:PREF.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
ON
Example:
HCOP:FILE:AUTO:PREF:STAT OFF
deactivates the usage of the prefix in the automatic file name.
Manual control:
See "File Options" on page 103
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:YEAR?
This command queries the year in the date part in the automatic file name.
Return values:
<Year>
float
Example:
HCOPy:FILE:AUTO:YEAR?
queries the year in the date part in the automatic file name.
Usage:
Query only
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO[:FILE]:YEAR:STATe <State>
This command activates the usage of the year in the automatic file name.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
ON
Example:
HCOP:FILE:AUTO:YEAR:STAT OFF
deactivates the usage of the year in the automatic file name.
Manual control:
See "File Options" on page 103
:HCOPy:FILE[:NAME]:AUTO:STATe <State>
This command activates/deactivates automatic naming of the hardcopy files.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
260
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
KBOard Subsystem
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
ON
Example:
HCOP:FILE:AUTO:STAT OFF
deactivates automatic naming.
Manual control:
See "Automatic Naming" on page 102
:HCOPy:IMAGe:FORMat <Format>
This command selects the bitmap graphic format for the screenshot. It is also possible
to directly retrieve the data using command HCOP:DATA?.
This command is an alias to command HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage.
Parameters:
<Format>
BMP | JPG | XPM | PNG
*RST:
Example:
BMP
HCOP:IMAG:FORM XPM
selects the image format XPM.
:HCOPy:IMAGe:SIZE <Size>
The command selects the image size of the hardcopy. The first value of the size setting
defines the width, the second value the height of the image.
Parameters:
<Size>
320,640 | 640,480 | 800,600 | 1024,768
*RST:
depends on device
Example:
HCOP:IMAG:SIZE 640,480
sets width and height of the image.
Manual control:
See "File Options" on page 103
7.8 KBOard Subsystem
The KBOard system contains the commands to set the external keyboard.
:​KBOard:​LANGuage​.......................................................................................................261
:​KBOard:​LAYout?​...........................................................................................................262
:KBOard:LANGuage <Language>
This command selects the keyboard language. The assignment of some keys depends
on the selected language.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
261
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
MMEMory Subsystem
Parameters:
<Language>
US | DE
*RST:
US
Example:
KBO:LANG US
selects keyboard language American English.
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
Manual control:
See "Layout (Keyboard)" on page 92
:KBOard:LAYout?
This command selects the keyboard language. The assignment of some keys depends
on the selected language.
Return values:
<Layout>
CHINese | DANish | DUTCh | ENGUK | ENGUS | FINNish |
FRENch | FREBe | FRECa | GERMan | ITALian | JAPanese |
KORean | NORWegian | PORTuguese | RUSSian | SPANish |
SWEDish
*RST:
US
Example:
KBO:LAY US
activates American keyboard layout.
Usage:
Query only
SCPI confirmed
Manual control:
See "Layout (Keyboard)" on page 92
7.9 MMEMory Subsystem
The MMEMory subsystem (Mass Memory) contains the commands for managing files
and directories as well as for loading and storing complete instrument settings in files.
The files are stored on the internal flash memory of the instrument or on external USB
memory devices.
The /var directory can be used to save user-defined data; any subdirectory structure
can be created on /var. Some default subdirectories are predefined, but can be changed
at any time.
The default directory is determined using the command MMEMory:CDIR.
The /opt directory is a protected and therefore unaccessible system directory. The files
on this directory contain data that must not be changed. Therefore, this directory should
not be accessed, since reconstruction of the system partition will lead to data loss.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
262
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
MMEMory Subsystem
7.9.1 File Naming Conventions
To enable files in different file systems to be used, the following file naming conventions
should be observed.
The file name can be of any length and is case-sensitive, i.e it is distinguished between
uppercase and lowercase letters.
The file and the optional file extension are separated by a dot. All letters and numbers
are permitted (numbers are, however, not permitted at the beginning of the file name).
Where possible, special characters should not be used. Use of the slashes "\" and "/"
should be avoided since they are used in file paths. A number of names are reserved by
the operating system, e.g. CLOCK$, CON, AUX, COM1...COM4, LPT1...LPT3, NUL and
PRN.
In the R&S Signal Generator all files in which lists and settings are stored are given a
characteristic extension. The extension is separated from the actual file name by a dot
(see ​chapter 4.7.2.1, "Extensions for User Files", on page 74 for an overview the file
types).
The two characters "*" and "?" function as "wildcards", i.e. they are used for selecting
several files. The "?" character represents exactly one character, while the "*" character
represents all characters up to the end of the file name. "*.*" therefore stands for all the
files in a directory.
When used in conjunction with the commands, the parameter <file_name> is specified
as a string parameter with quotation marks. It can contain either the complete path
including the drive, only the path and file name, or only the file name. The file name must
include the file extension. The same applies for the parameters <directory_name>
and <path>.
Depending on how much information is provided, either the values specified in the
parameter or the values specified with the command MMEM:CDIR (default directory) are
used for the path and drive setting in the commands.
Before the instrument settings can be stored in a file, they have to be stored in an intermediate memory using common command *SAV <number>. The specified number is
subsequently used in the ​:​MMEMory:​STORe:​STATe​ command. Also, subsequently to
loading a file with instrument settings with command ​:​MMEMory:​LOAD:​STATe​, these
settings have to be activated with the common command *RCL <number>.
7.9.2 Extensions for User Files
The following table list all available file extensions for user files. The currently available
files on the instrument depends on the installed options.
Table 7-1: List of the automatically assigned file extensions in the instrument
Function
List type
Contents
File suffix
Instrument State
Settings
Instrument settings
*.savrcltxt
"User Correction"
List
User-defined level correction values
*.uco
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
263
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
MMEMory Subsystem
Function
"List Mode"
List type
List
"Pulse Train List"
NRP Settings
Settings
Contents
File suffix
Export Data
*.txt or *.csv
User-defined frequency/level value pairs
*.lsw
Export Data
*.txt or *.csv
User-defined offtime/ontime/repetition values
*.pulstrn
NRP Settings
*.nrp
7.9.3 Examples
In these examples, the current instrument setting is stored in the file
test1.savrcltxt in the directory user.
Storing and Loading Current Settings
1. Store the current setting in an intermediate memory with number 4. This setting can
be called using command *RCL and the associated number of the memory, e.g. *RCL
4.
*SAV 4
2. To store the settings in a file in a specific directory, specify the complete path.
MMEM:STOR:STAT 4,"var/user/test.savrcltxt"
3. To store the settings in a file in the default drive, set the default drive and specify only
the file name.
MMEM:CDIR 'var/user'*SAV 4
MMEM:STOR:STAT 4,"test.savrcltxt"
4. Load the file test.savrcltxt in the user directory.
MMEM:LOAD:STAT 4,'/var/user/test.savrcltxt'
5. Activate the instrument setting of the file test.savrcltxt.
*RCL 4
Working with Files and Directories
1. Read out all files in the specified directory.
MMEM:CAT? '/usb/user'
Response: 127145265,175325184,"test,DIR,0","temp,DIR,
0","readme.txt,ASC,1324","state.savrcltxt,STAT,
5327","waveform.wv,BIN,2342"
the directory /usb/user contains the subdirectories test and temp as well as the
files readme.txt, state.savrcltxt and waveform.wv which have different file
types.
Tip: To query only the subdirectories of the current or specified directory, perform:
MMEM:DCAT? '/usb/user'
Response: 'test', 'temp'
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
264
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
MMEMory Subsystem
To query only the number of subdirectories in the current or specified directory, perform:
MMEM:DCAT:LENG? '/usb/user'
Response: 2
2. To query the number of files in the current or specified directory, perform:
MMEM:CAT:LENG? '/usb/user'
Response: 3
3. Create a new subdirectory for mass memory storage in the specified directory.
MMEM:MDIR '/usb/user/new'
4. Copy the file state to a new file.
MMEM:COPY '/var/user/state.savrcltxt','/usb/user/new'
5. Rename the file state.
MMEM:MOVE 'state.savrcltxt','state_new.savrcltxt'
6. Remove the test directory.
MMEM:RDIR '/usb/user/test'
7.9.4 Remote Control Commands
:​MMEMory:​CATalog?​.....................................................................................................265
:​MMEMory:​CATalog:​LENGth?​.........................................................................................266
:​MMEMory:​CDIRectory​...................................................................................................266
:​MMEMory:​COPY​...........................................................................................................267
:​MMEMory:​DATA​...........................................................................................................267
:​MMEMory:​DCATalog?​...................................................................................................268
:​MMEMory:​DCATalog:​LENGth?​.......................................................................................268
:​MMEMory:​DELete​.........................................................................................................268
:​MMEMory:​LOAD:​STATe​................................................................................................269
:​MMEMory:​MDIRectory​...................................................................................................269
:​MMEMory:​MOVE​..........................................................................................................269
:​MMEMory:​MSIS​............................................................................................................270
:​MMEMory:​RDIRectory​...................................................................................................270
:​MMEMory:​STORe:​STATe​..............................................................................................270
:MMEMory:CATalog? <path>
Returns the content of the current or a specified directory.
Query parameters:
<path>
string
String parameter to specify the directory. If the direcory is omitted,
the command queries the content of the current directory, queried
with MMEM:CDIR command.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
265
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
MMEMory Subsystem
Return values:
<path>
<used_memory>,<free_memory>,<file_name>,<file_entry>,...
<used_memory>
Total amount of storage currently used in the directory, in bytes.
<free_memory>
Total amount of storage available in the directory, in bytes.
<file_entry>
All files of the directory are listed with their file name, format and
size in bytes.
Example:
See ​"Working with Files and Directories" on page 264.
Usage:
Query only
Manual control:
See "File List" on page 108
See "File List " on page 109
:MMEMory:CATalog:LENGth?
Returns the number of files in the current or in the specified directory.
Return values:
<Length>
<path>
String parameter to specify the directory. If the direcory is omitted,
the command queries the content of the current directory, queried
with MMEM:CDIR command.
<count>
Number of files
Example:
See ​"Working with Files and Directories" on page 264.
Usage:
Query only
:MMEMory:CDIRectory <Cdirectory>
Changes the default directory for mass memory storage. The directory is used for all
subsequent MMEM commands if no path is specified with them. It is also possible to change
to a higher directory using two dots '..' .
Setting parameters:
<Cdirectory>
<directory_name>
Example:
See ​"Working with Files and Directories" on page 264.
Usage:
Setting only
SCPI confirmed
Manual control:
See "Directory" on page 108
See "Directory" on page 109
See "Directory and File Name" on page 111
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
266
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
MMEMory Subsystem
:MMEMory:COPY <file_source>[,<file_destination>]
Copies an existing to a new file. Instead of just a file, this command can also be used to
copy a complete directory together with all its files.
It is also possible to specify the path using another parameter. The command is:
MMEMory:COPY
<file_source><msus_source>[,<file_destination>,
<msus_destination>]
Setting parameters:
<file_source>
string
String parameter to specify the name of the file to be copied.
If <destination> is not specified, <source> is copied to the
MMEM:CDIR directory. Files which already exist with the same
name in the destination directory are overwritten without an error
message.
It is also possible to specify the path using another parameter. The
command is: MMEMory:COPY
<file_source><msus_source>[,<file_destination>,
<msus_destination>]
file_destination
string
String parameter to specify the name of the new file. If no file destination is specified, the source file is copied to the current direcotry, queried with the MMEM:CDIR command. Files which already
exist with the same name in the destination directory are overwritten without an error message.
Example:
See ​"Working with Files and Directories" on page 264.
Usage:
Event
SCPI confirmed
Manual control:
See "Copy " on page 111
:MMEMory:DATA <file_name>[,<binary block data>]
:MMEMory:DATA? <file_name>
Writes the block data <binary block data> to the file identified by <file_name>. The IEC/
IEEE-bus terminator should be set to EOI in order to ensure correct data transfer.
The associated query command transfers the specified file from the instrument to the
IEC/IEEE bus and then on to the control computer. It is important to ensure that the
intermediate memory on the control computer is large enough to take the file. In this case,
the setting for the IEC/IEEE-bus terminator is irrelevant. This command can be used to
read/transfer stored instrument settings or waveforms directly from/to the instrument.
Parameters:
<file_name>
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
String parameter to specify the name of the file.
267
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
MMEMory Subsystem
Setting parameters:
<binary block data> #<number><length entry><block data>
# always comes first in the binary block
<number> the first digit indicates how many digits the subsequent
length entry has
<length entry> indicates the number of subsequent bytes
<binary block data> binary block data for the specified length.
Example:
MMEM:DATA 'TEST1.WV',#3767<binary data>
writes the block data to the file test1.wv.
The digit "3" indicates a length entry of 3 digits; the digits "767"
indicate a length of the binary data in bytes.
MMEM:DATA? 'TEST1.WV'
sends the data of the file Test1.wv from the instrumenet to the
controller in the form of a binary block.
:MMEMory:DCATalog?
Returns the subdirectories of the current or specified directory.
Query parameters:
<path_name>
Return values:
<Dcatalog>
String parameter to specify the directory. If the direcory is omitted,
the command queries the content of the current directory, queried
with MMEM:CDIR command.
<file_entry>
Names of the subdirectories separated by colons. The first two
strings are related to the parent directory.
Example:
See ​"Working with Files and Directories" on page 264.
Usage:
Query only
:MMEMory:DCATalog:LENGth? [<path_name>]
Returns the number of subdirectories in the current or specified directory.
Query parameters:
<path_name>
String parameter to specify the directory. If the directory is omitted,
the command queries the contents of the current directory, to be
queried with MMEM:CDIR command.
Return values:
<file_entry_count>
Number of parent and subdirectories.
Example:
See ​"Working with Files and Directories" on page 264.
:MMEMory:DELete <Delete>
Removes a file from the specified directory.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
268
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
MMEMory Subsystem
Setting parameters:
<Delete>
<file_name>
String parameter to specify the name and directry of the file to be
removed.
Example:
See ​"Working with Files and Directories" on page 264.
Usage:
Event
SCPI confirmed
Manual control:
See "Cut" on page 111
See "Delete" on page 111
:MMEMory:LOAD:STATe <sav_rcl_state_number>, <file_name>
This command loads the specified file stored under the specified name in an internal
memory.
After the file has been loaded, the instrument setting must be activated using an *RCL
command.
Setting parameters:
<sav_rcl_state_number>
Determines to the specific <number> to be used with the *RCL
command, e.g. *RCL 4.
<file_name>
String parameter to specify the file name with extension
*.savrcltxt.
Example:
See ​"Storing and Loading Current Settings" on page 264.
Usage:
Setting only
Manual control:
See "Recall" on page 109
:MMEMory:MDIRectory <directory_name>
Creates a new subdirectory for mass memory storage in the specified directory. If no
directory is specified, a subdirectory is created in the default directory. This command
can also be used to create a directory tree.
Setting parameters:
<directory_name>
string
String parameter to specify the new directory.
Example:
See ​"Working with Files and Directories" on page 264.
Usage:
Setting only
Manual control:
See "Create New Directory" on page 111
:MMEMory:MOVE <file_source>, <file_destination>
Moves an existing file to a new location or, if no path is specified, renames an existing
file.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
269
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
MMEMory Subsystem
It is also possible to specify the path using another parameter. The command is:
MMEMory:MOVE
file_source,msus_source[, file_destination, msus_destination]
Setting parameters:
<file_source>
String parameter to specify the name of the file to be moved.
<file_destination>
String parameters to specify the name of the new file.
Example:
See ​"Working with Files and Directories" on page 264.
Usage:
Setting only
SCPI confirmed
Manual control:
See "Rename " on page 111
:MMEMory:MSIS <Msis>
The command is without effect for the Linux operating system.
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
:MMEMory:RDIRectory <Rdirectory>
Removes an existing directory from the mass memory storage system. If no directory is
specified, the subdirectory with the specified name is deleted in the default directory.
Setting parameters:
<Rdirectory>
string
String parameter to specify the directory to be deleted.
Example:
See ​"Working with Files and Directories" on page 264.
Usage:
Setting only
:MMEMory:STORe:STATe <savrcl_state_nr>, <file_name>
Stores the current instrument setting in the specified file.
The instrument setting must first be stored in an internal memory with the same number
using the common command *SAV.
Setting parameters:
<savrcl_state_nr>
Corresponds to the specific <number> defined with the *SAV
command, e.g. *SAV 4.
<file_name>
String parameter to specify the file name with extension
*.savrcltxt.
Example:
See ​"Storing and Loading Current Settings" on page 264.
Usage:
Event
Manual control:
See "Save" on page 108
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
270
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
OUTPut Subsystem
7.10 OUTPut Subsystem
The OUTPut system contains the commands which set the properties of the RF output
connector.
The properties of the LF output connector are set in the ​chapter 7.12.6, "SOURce:LFOutput Subsystem", on page 306 system.
:​OUTPut<hw>:​AFIXed:​RANGe:​LOWer?​...........................................................................271
:​OUTPut<hw>:​AFIXed:​RANGe:​UPPer?​............................................................................271
:​OUTPut<hw>:​ALC:​SEARch:​MODE​.................................................................................272
:​OUTPut<hw>:​AMODe​...................................................................................................272
:​OUTPut<hw>:​FILTer:​AUTO​...........................................................................................272
:​OUTPut<hw>:​FILTer[:​LPASs]:​STATe​..............................................................................273
:​OUTPut<hw>:​IMPedance?​.............................................................................................273
:​OUTPut<hw>:​PROTection:​CLEar​...................................................................................273
:​OUTPut<hw>:​PROTection:​TRIPped?​..............................................................................273
:​OUTPut<hw>[:​STATe]​...................................................................................................274
:​OUTPut<hw>[:​STATe]:​PON​...........................................................................................274
:OUTPut<hw>:AFIXed:RANGe:LOWer?
The command queries the minimum level which can be set without the attenuator being
adjusted (Attenuator FIXed).
Return values:
<Lower>
float
Default unit: dBm
Example:
OUTP:AFIX:RANG:LOW
queries the minimum level for the FIXed setting.
Example:
Response: -50
The minimum level is -50 dBm.
Usage:
Query only
Manual control:
See "Fixed Range (PEP) In" on page 124
:OUTPut<hw>:AFIXed:RANGe:UPPer?
The command queries the maximum level which can be set without the attenuator being
adjusted (Attenuator FIXed).
Return values:
<Upper>
float
Default unit: dBm
Example:
OUTP:AFIX:RANG:UPP
queries the maximum level for the FIXed setting for the RF output.
Example:
Response: -27
The maximum level is -27 dBm.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
271
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
OUTPut Subsystem
Usage:
Query only
Manual control:
See "Fixed Range (PEP) In" on page 124
:OUTPut<hw>:ALC:SEARch:MODE <Mode>
The command activates/deactivates the RF output during the power search.
Parameters:
<Mode>
NORMal | MINimum
*RST:
OFF
Example:
POW:ALC:SEAR:MODE NORM
during the power search, the RF output is active.
Manual control:
See "RF During Power Search - ALC" on page 128
:OUTPut<hw>:AMODe <Amode>
The command switches the mode of the attenuator at the RF output (Attenuator MODe).
Parameters:
<Amode>
AUTO | FIXed
AUTO
The attenuator is switched automatically. The level settings are
made in the full range.
FIXed
The level settings are made without switching the attenuator.
When this operating mode is switched on, the attenuator is fixed
in its current position and the resulting variation range is defined.
*RST:
AUTO
Example:
POW:ALC ON
activates automatic level control for RF output.
OUTP:AMOD FIX
sets the fixed mode with uninterrupted level for RF output.
Manual control:
See "Attenuator Mode" on page 123
:OUTPut<hw>:FILTer:AUTO <Auto>
Activates automatic switching of the low harmonic filter.
Parameters:
<Auto>
0 | 1 | ON | OFF
*RST:
0
Example:
OUTP:FILT:AUTO 1
Activates the auto mode.
Manual control:
See "Mode" on page 123
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
272
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
OUTPut Subsystem
:OUTPut<hw>:FILTer[:LPASs]:STATe <State>
Switches the filter state in manual mode and disables the automatic mode, if activated.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
OUTP:FILT:AUTO 0
OUTP:FILT:LPAS:STAT 1
Selects manual mode and activates the low harmonic filter.
OUTP:FILT:STAT?
Queries the current filter activity.
Manual control:
See "State" on page 123
:OUTPut<hw>:IMPedance?
The command queries the impedance of the RF outputs. This permits converting the
output level between units V and W. The impedances cannot be changed.
Return values:
<Impedance>
G50 | G1K | G10K
Default unit: Ohm
Example:
OUTP:IMP
queries the impedance of RF output.
Response:
50
the impedance is 50 ohms
Usage:
Query only
SCPI confirmed
:OUTPut<hw>:PROTection:CLEar
The command resets the protective circuit after it has been tripped. The state of the output
is again determined by OUTPut:STATe.
Example:
OUTP:PROT:CLE
resets the protective circuit for RF output.
Usage:
Event
SCPI confirmed
Manual control:
See "Overload" on page 125
:OUTPut<hw>:PROTection:TRIPped?
The command queries the state of the protective circuit.
Return values:
<Tripped>
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
273
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SENSe, READ and INITiate Subsystems
Example:
OUTP:PROT:TRIP
Queries the state of the protective circuit for RF output A.
Response: 0
The protective circuit has not tripped.
Response: 1
The protective circuit has tripped.
Usage:
Query only
Manual control:
See "Overload" on page 125
:OUTPut<hw>[:STATe] <State>
This command activates and deactivates the RF output.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
Example:
OUTP OFF
deactivates the RF output.
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
Manual control:
See "State RF" on page 112
See "RF Output State" on page 113
See "Overload" on page 125
:OUTPut<hw>[:STATe]:PON <Pon>
This command selects the state which the RF output assumes when the instrument is
switched on.
Parameters:
<Pon>
OFF | UNCHanged
OFF
The output is deactivated when the instrument is switched on.
UNCHanged
When the instrument is switched on, the output remains in the
same state as it was when the instrument was switched off.
Example:
OUTP:PON OFF
RF output A is deactivated when the instrument is switched on.
Manual control:
See "Power-On State - RF Signal" on page 125
7.11 SENSe, READ and INITiate Subsystems
The SENSe subsystem contains the commands for configuring the power measurements
with R&S NRP-Zxx power sensor(s) connected to the generator. The measurement is
started and the measurement result retrieved with the READ command. The description
of this commands is included in the following.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
274
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SENSe, READ and INITiate Subsystems
Up to four sensors can be connected to the signal generator. They are distinguished by
means of the suffix under SENSe, i.e. SENSe [1] ... SENSe 4.
:​INITiate<ch>[:​POWer]:​CONTinuous​................................................................................275
:​READ<ch>[:​POWer]?​....................................................................................................275
SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​CORRection:​SPDevice:​STATe​........................................................276
SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​DISPlay:​PERManent:​STATe​...........................................................276
SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​DISPlay:​PERManent:​PRIority​..........................................................277
SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​FILTer:​LENGth:​AUTO?​...................................................................277
SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​FILTer:​LENGth[:​USER]​...................................................................277
SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​FILTer:​NSRatio​..............................................................................278
SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​FILTer:​NSRatio:​MTIMe​...................................................................278
SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​FILTer:​SONCe​...............................................................................279
SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​FILTer:​TYPE​.................................................................................279
SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​FREQuency​...................................................................................280
SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​OFFSet​.........................................................................................280
SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​OFFSet:​STATe​..............................................................................280
SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​SNUMber?​....................................................................................280
SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​SOURce​.......................................................................................281
SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​STATus[:​DEVice]?​.........................................................................281
SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​SVERsion?​....................................................................................281
SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​TYPE?​..........................................................................................282
SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​ZERO​...........................................................................................282
SENSe<ch>:​UNIT[:​POWer]​.............................................................................................282
:INITiate<ch>[:POWer]:CONTinuous <Continuous>
The command switches the local state of the continuous power measurement by the R&S
NRP-Zxx power sensors on and off. Switching the local state off enhances the measurement performance during remote control
The remote measurement is triggered by the READ query (command ​:​READ<ch>[:​
POWer]?​ on page 275) which also provides the measurement results. The local state is
not influenced by this command, measurements results can be retrieved with local state
on or off.
Parameters:
<Continuous>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
OFF
Example:
INIT:CONT ON
switches local state of continuous power measurement on.
Manual control:
See "State - Power Sensors" on page 141
:READ<ch>[:POWer]?
The command triggers the measurement with power sensors and provides the power
measurement result of the selected power sensor. The value is provided with the unit set
with command SENSe:UNIT[:POWer].
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
275
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SENSe, READ and INITiate Subsystems
For certain power sensors, e.g. R&S NRP-Z81, two values are returned, first the value
for the average level and - separated by a comma - the peak level
Note: The local state is not influenced by this command, measurements results can be
retrieved with local state on or off. For long measurement times it is recommended to use
a SRQ (MAV bit) for command synchronization.
Suffix:
<ch>
.
1..3
Return values:
<Power>
string
Example:
SENS:UNIT DBM
selects unit dBm for presentation of measurement result.
READ1?
queries the measurement result of the sensor connected to the
SENSOR interface.
Response: -45.6246576745440230
-45.6 dBm were measured at the given frequency.
or e.g. for R&S NRP-Z81
Response:
-55.62403263352178,-22.419472478812476
-55,6 dbm is the measured average level, -22. 4 dBm is the measured peak level at the given frequency
Usage:
Query only
Manual control:
See "Level (Peak) - Power Sensors" on page 141
See "Level (Avg.) - Power Sensors" on page 141
SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:CORRection:SPDevice:STATe <State>
The command activates the use of the s-parameters correction data of the selected power
sensor.
Note: For power sensor with attenuator this command is automatically set to ON.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
OFF
Example:
SENS:POW:CORR:SPD:STAT ON
activates the use of the s-parameters correction data of power
sensor 1.
Manual control:
See "Use SParameter - Power Sensors" on page 131
See "Filter Length - Power Sensors" on page 143
SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:DISPlay:PERManent:STATe <State>
The command switches on and off the permanent indication of the power measurement
result in the upper right corner of the block diagram. For each sensor, the type of sensor,
the connector, the measurement source and - if set - the offset is indicated.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
276
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SENSe, READ and INITiate Subsystems
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
OFF
Example:
SENS1:POW:DISP:PERM:STAT ON
the permanent viewer is switched on.
Manual control:
See "Permanent Display State - Power Sensors" on page 141
SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:DISPlay:PERManent:PRIority <Priority>
The command selects which power measurement result (average or peak power) is indicated when permanent display is active.
Parameters:
<Priority>
AVERage | PEAK
*RST:
AVERage
Example:
SENS1:DISP:PERM:STAT ON
the permanent viewer is switched on.
SENS1:DISP:PERM:PRI AVER
the measured average power is indicated.
Manual control:
See "Display Priority - Power Sensors" on page 142
SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:LENGth:AUTO?
The command queries the current filter length for auto filter mode
(:SENSe<[1]...3>:POWer:FILTer:TYPE AUTO)
Return values:
<Auto>
float
Example:
SENS1:FILT:TYPE AUTO
selects auto filter mode for the power sensor connected to the
SENSOR connector.
SENS1:FILT:LENG:AUTO?
queries the automatically set filter length.
Response: 1024
Usage:
Query only
Manual control:
See "Filter Length - Power Sensors" on page 143
SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:LENGth[:USER] <User>
The command selects the filter length for user filter mode
(SENSe:POWer:FILTer:TYPE USER). As the filter length works as a multiplier for the
time window, a constant filter length results in a constant measurement time. Values 1
and 2^n are settable.
The time window is fixed to 20 ms.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
277
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SENSe, READ and INITiate Subsystems
Parameters:
<User>
float
Range:
*RST:
1 to 65536
1
Example:
SENS:FILT:TYPE USER
selects user filter mode.
SENS:FILT:LENG 16
sets a filter length of 16. The resulting measurement time is 640
ms (2x16x20 ms).
Manual control:
See "Filter Length - Power Sensors" on page 143
SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:NSRatio <Nsratio>
The command defines the noise content for fixed noise filter mode
(:SENSe<[1]...3>:POWer:FILTer:TYPE NSRatio). This value determines the
proportion of intrinsic noise in the measured result.
Parameters:
<Nsratio>
float
Range:
*RST:
0.0001 to 1.0
0.01
Example:
SENS1:FILT:TYPE NSR
selects fixed noise filter mode for the power sensor connected to
the SENSOR connector.
SENS1:FILT:NSR 0.2
sets a noise content of 0.2.
Manual control:
See "Filter Length - Power Sensors" on page 143
SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:NSRatio:MTIMe <Mtime>
The command defines the timeout for fixed noise filter mode
(:SENSe<[1]...3>:POWer:FILTer:TYPE NSRatio). This value ensures limited
settling times.
Parameters:
<Mtime>
float
Range:
1.0 to 999.99
*RST:
4
Default unit: s
Example:
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
SENS1:FILT:TYPE NSR
selects fixed noise filter mode for the power sensor connected to
the SENSOR connector.
SENS1:FILT:NSR .2
sets a noise content of 0.2.
SENS1:FILT:NSR:MTIM 5
limits the settling time to 5 seconds
278
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SENSe, READ and INITiate Subsystems
Manual control:
See "Filter Length - Power Sensors" on page 143
SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:SONCe
The command activates the search for the optimum filter length for the current measurement conditions. The found filter length can be retrieved with command :SENSe:POWer:FILTer:LENGth:USER?. This command is only available for
user filter mode (:SENSe:POWer:FILTer:TYPE USER).
Example:
SENS:FILT:TYPE USER
selects user filter mode.
SENS:FILT:SONC
activates the search for the optimum filter length.
SENS:FILT:LENG?
returns the found optimum filter length.
Response: 128
Usage:
Event
Manual control:
See "Auto Once" on page 143
SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FILTer:TYPE <Type>
The command selects the filter mode. The filter length is the multiplier for the time window
and thus directly influences the measurement time.
Parameters:
<Type>
AUTO | USER | NSRatio
AUTO
The filter length is automatically selected depending on the measured value. For high values, a short filter length is selected and
for low values a long filter length is selected.
USER
The filter length is set manually. As the filter length works as a
multiplier for the measurement time, this results in a constant
measurement time.
NSRatio
The filter lenghth (averaging factor) is selected so that the sensor's
intrinsic noise (2 standard deviations) does not exceed the specified noise content. The desired noise content is entered with command SENSe:FILTer:NSRatio.
To avoid very long settling times when the power is low, the averaging factor can be limited with the Timeout parameter (command
SENSe:FILTer:NSRatio:MTIMe).
*RST:
AUTO
Example:
SENS:FILT:TYPE AUTO
selects automatic filter selection.
Manual control:
See "Filter Length - Power Sensors" on page 143
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
279
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SENSe, READ and INITiate Subsystems
SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:FREQuency <Frequency>
The command sets the RF frequency of the source if the user source is selected
(SENSe[:POWer]:SOURce USER).
Parameters:
<Frequency>
float
*RST:
1 GHz
Example:
SENS:SOUR USER
selects user-defined source.
SENS:FREQ 2.44 GHz
enters the RF frequency of the source which is 2.44 GHz.
Manual control:
See "Frequency - Power Sensors" on page 143
SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:OFFSet <Offset>
The command enters a level offset which is added to the measured level value after
activation with command SENSe[:POWer]:OFFSet:STATe ON. This allows e.g. an
attenuator in the signal path to be taken into account.
Parameters:
<Offset>
float
Range:
-100.0 to 100.0
*RST:
0
Default unit: dB
Example:
SENS:POW:OFFS 10.0
sets a level offset of 10 dB
Manual control:
See "Level Offset - Power Sensors" on page 143
SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:OFFSet:STATe <State>
The command activates the addition of the level offset to the measured value. The level
offset value is set with command SENSe[:POWer]:OFFSet.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
OFF
Example:
SENS1:POW:OFFS 0.4dB
sets a level offset of 0.4 dB
SENS1:POW:OFFS:STAT ON
a level offset of 0.4 dB is added to the measured value.
Manual control:
See "Level Offset - Power Sensors" on page 143
SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SNUMber?
The command queries the serial number of the sensor.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
280
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SENSe, READ and INITiate Subsystems
Return values:
<Snumber>
string
Example:
SENS:SNUM?
queries the serial number.
Usage:
Query only
Manual control:
See "Current Sensors" on page 87
See "Type - Power Sensors" on page 140
SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SOURce <Source>
The command selects the signal source for the measurement.
Parameters:
<Source>
A | B | USER
*RST:
A
Example:
SENS:SOUR A
selects the RF signal as measurement source. The RF frequency
is used as the measurement frequency of the sensor and the corresponding correction factor is used. The level setting of the instrument serves as reference level of the measurement.
Manual control:
See "Source - Power Sensors" on page 142
SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:STATus[:DEVice]?
The command queries if a sensor is connected to the signal generator.
The sensor is selected by suffix in the keyword SENSe or READ of the command header.
Suffix 1 denotes the sensor connected to the SENSOR connector, suffix 2 the sensor
connected first to one of the USB interfaces and suffix 3 the sensor connected second
to one of the USB interfaces.
Return values:
<DEVice>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
Example:
SENS:STAT?
queries if a sensor is connected to the instrument.
Response: 1
a sensor is connected to the POWER SENSOR interface.
Usage:
Query only
Manual control:
See "Sensor - Power Viewer" on page 140
See "State - Power Sensors" on page 141
SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:SVERsion?
The command queries the software version of the connected R&S NRP power sensor.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
281
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SENSe, READ and INITiate Subsystems
Return values:
<Sversion>
string
Example:
SENS:POW:SVER?
queries the software version of the R&S NRP power sensor.
Usage:
Query only
Manual control:
See "Current Sensors" on page 87
SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:TYPE?
The command queries the type of sensor. The type is automatically detected.
Return values:
<Type>
string
Example:
SENS:TYPE?
queries the type of sensor connected to the POWER SENSOR
connector.
Response: NRP-Z21
the R&S NRP-Z21 sensor is used.
Usage:
Query only
Manual control:
See "Current Sensors" on page 87
See "Type - Power Sensors" on page 140
SENSe<ch>[:POWer]:ZERO
The command activates the autozero function. Zeroing is required in regular interval (at
least once a day) and if the temperature has varied more than about 5 °C, if the sensor
has been replaced or if measurements of signals with very low power are to be performed.
The RF power source must be switched off or disconnected from the sensor before starting the autozero function.
Example:
SENS:ZERO
activates autozero function.
Usage:
Event
Manual control:
See "Zero - Power Sensors" on page 130
SENSe<ch>:UNIT[:POWer] <Power>
The command selects the unit used for result query with command READ. The power
sensor provides the measured value in Watt. In which unit the measured value is returned
is selected here and might be either Watt, dBm or dBuV.
Parameters:
<Power>
DBM | DBUV | WATT
*RST:
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
DBM
282
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Example:
SENS2:UNIT DBM
selects unit dBm for the measured value returned by command
READ.
READ2?
Response: 7.34
7.34 dBm are measured by sensor 2.
Manual control:
See "Unit - Power Sensors" on page 141
7.12 SOURce Subsystem
The SOURce subsystem contains the commands for configuring the digital and analog
signals.
SOURce<hw>
For one-path instruments, the keyword SOURce is optional and can be omitted.
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
SOURce:AM Subsystem.......................................................................................283
SOURce:CORRection Subsystem........................................................................286
SOURce:FM Subsystem.......................................................................................295
SOURce:FREQuency Subsystem.........................................................................298
SOURce:INPut Subsystem...................................................................................305
SOURce:LFOutput Subsystem.............................................................................306
SOURce:LIST Subsystem.....................................................................................315
SOURce:MODulation Subsystem.........................................................................328
SOURce:PGEN Subsystem..................................................................................328
SOURce:PHASe Subsystem................................................................................329
SOURce:PM Subsystem.......................................................................................330
SOURce:POWer Subsystem................................................................................333
SOURce:PULM Subsystem..................................................................................344
SOURce:ROSCillator Subsystem.........................................................................359
SOURce:STEReo Subsystem...............................................................................362
SOURce:SWEep Subsystem................................................................................371
7.12.1 SOURce:AM Subsystem
The AM subsystem contains the commands for checking the amplitude modulation.
The external signal is input at the MOD EXT connector.
The settings for the internal modulation source (LF generator) are made in the
SOURce:LFOutput subsystem.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​AM:​DEPTh:​EXPonential​.........................................................................284
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​AM:​DEPTh:​LINear​.................................................................................284
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​AM:​EXTernal:​COUPling​.........................................................................284
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​AM:​SENSitivity?​....................................................................................285
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
283
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​AM:​SOURce​.........................................................................................285
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​AM:​STATe​............................................................................................286
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​AM:​TYPE​..............................................................................................286
[:SOURce<hw>]:AM:DEPTh:EXPonential <DepthExp>
Sets the overall modulation depth of the amplitude modulation in dB.
Note: The exponential AM mode applies to instruments with frequency option 12 GHz or
higher. You can select this mode with command ​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​AM:​TYPE​. For more
details, see also the GUI reference, ​chapter 5.4.2, "Amplitude Modulation (AM)",
on page 167.
Parameters:
<DepthExp>
float
Range:
-40 to 40
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
10
Example:
AM:DEPT:LIN 15PCT
sets the AM modulation depth to 15 percent.
Options:
(exponential): R&S SMB-B112/112L/120/120L/140/140L
Manual control:
See "AM Depth" on page 168
[:SOURce<hw>]:AM:DEPTh:LINear <DepthLin>
Sets the overall modulation depth of the amplitude modulation in percent.
Note: For high frequency instruments, you can alternatively select exponential amplitude
modulation with command ​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​AM:​TYPE​. In this case, the generator sets
modulation depth in dB (logarithmic).
For more details, see also the GUI reference, ​chapter 5.4.2, "Amplitude Modulation
(AM)", on page 167.
Parameters:
<DepthLin>
float
Range:
0 to 100
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
30
Example:
AM:DEPT:LIN 15
sets the AM modulation depth to 15 dB.
Manual control:
See "AM Depth" on page 168
[:SOURce<hw>]:AM:EXTernal:COUPling <Coupling>
The command selects the coupling mode for the external modulation input in the case of
amplitude modulation.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
284
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Parameters:
<Coupling>
AC | DC
AC
The DC voltage component is disconnected from the modulation
signal.
DC
The modulation signal is not changed.
*RST:
AC
Example:
AM:EXT:COUP AC
Selects the coupling mode AC for external amplitude modulation.
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
Manual control:
See "AM External Coupling" on page 169
[:SOURce<hw>]:AM:SENSitivity?
The command queries the input sensitivity of the external modulation input in %/V. The
command is only effective if the external modulation source is selected (SOUR:AM:SOUR
EXT). The returned value depends on the modulation depth setting (SOUR:AM:DEPTh).
This value is assigned to the voltage value for full modulation of the input.
Return values:
<Sensitivity>
float
Example:
AM:DEPT 50
sets a modulation depth of 50 %.
AM:SENS?
queries the input sensitivity at the external modulation input.
Response: 50
since the voltage value for full modulation is 1V, the resulting sensitivity is precisely 50%/V.
Usage:
Query only
SCPI confirmed
Manual control:
See "AM Sensitivity" on page 169
[:SOURce<hw>]:AM:SOURce <Source>
The command selects the modulation source for amplitude modulation.
With linear AM (see ​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​AM:​TYPE​ on page 286), you can also operate
with the Internal and the External modulation source simultaneously, e.g. to perform twotone AM.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
285
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Parameters:
<Source>
INTernal | EXTernal
INT
INT is the internal modulation source which is selected with command AM:SOURce:INTernal and configured in the
SOURce:LFOutput subsystem.
EXT
The external signal is input at the MOD EXT connector.
*RST:
INTernal
Example:
AM:SOUR INT
selects the internal modulation source.
Manual control:
See "AM Source" on page 168
[:SOURce<hw>]:AM:STATe <State>
The command activates/deactivates amplitude modulation.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
Example:
AM:STAT ON
activates AM modulation.
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
Manual control:
See "State" on page 168
[:SOURce<hw>]:AM:TYPE <AmType>
Selects exponential or linear amplitude modulation.
Exponential amplitude modulation is available for instruments, equipped with 12 GHz or
higher frequency options. For more details, see also the GUI reference ​chapter 5.4.2,
"Amplitude Modulation (AM)", on page 167.
Parameters:
<AmType>
LINear | EXPonential
*RST:
LINear
Example:
AM:TYPE EXP
activates the exponential amplitude modulation.
Options:
(exponential): R&S SMB-B112/112L/120/120L/140/140L
Manual control:
See "AM Type" on page 168
7.12.2 SOURce:CORRection Subsystem
The output level is corrected in the CORRection subsystem. Correction is performed by
user-defined table values being added to the output level for the respective RF frequency.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
286
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
In the R&S SMB, this subsystem is used to select, transfer and activate user correction
tables.
Each list is stored as a file. The name of the user correction file can be freely selected.
The file extension *.uco is assigned automatically and cannot be changed.
The files can be stored in a freely selectable directory and opened from there. The default
directory is set using command ​:​MMEMory:​CDIRectory​ on page 266. In the case of
files which are stored in the default directory, only the file name has to be specified in
commands. Otherwise, the complete absolute path has to be specified with every command. The extension can be omitted in any case.
In the following command examples, the files are stored in the default directory.
The amplitude can also be linearized automatically by means of a R&S NRP power sensor connected to the generator output signal. With the aid of the command ​[:​
SOURce<hw>]:​CORRection:​CSET:​DATA[:​SENSor<ch>][:​POWer]:​SONCe​, a list
with correction values for external test assemblies can be automatically determined, e.g.
for compensating the frequency response of cables. The correction values can be
acquired any time irrespective of the modulation settings of the generator.
[:​SOURce]:​CORRection:​CSET:​CATalog?​.........................................................................287
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​CORRection:​CSET:​DATA:​FREQuency​....................................................288
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​CORRection:​CSET:​DATA:​FREQuency:​POINts?​.......................................288
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​CORRection:​CSET:​DATA:​POWer​...........................................................288
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​CORRection:​CSET:​DATA:​POWer:​POINts?​..............................................289
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​CORRection:​CSET:​DATA[:​SENSor<ch>][:​POWer]:​SONCe​........................289
[:​SOURce]:​CORRection:​CSET:​DELete​............................................................................290
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​CORRection:​DEXChange:​AFILe:​CATalog?​..............................................290
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​CORRection:​DEXChange:​AFILe:​EXTension​.............................................290
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​CORRection:​DEXChange:​AFILe:​SELect​..................................................291
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​CORRection:​DEXChange:​AFILe:​SEParator:​COLumn​................................291
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​CORRection:​DEXChange:​AFILe:​SEParator:​DECimal​................................292
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​CORRection:​DEXChange:​EXECute​.........................................................292
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​CORRection:​DEXChange:​MODE​............................................................293
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​CORRection:​DEXChange:​SELect​............................................................293
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​CORRection:​CSET[:​SELect]​...................................................................294
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​CORRection[:​STATe]​.............................................................................294
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​CORRection:​VALue?​.............................................................................295
[:SOURce]:CORRection:CSET:CATalog?
The command requests a list of user correction tables. The individual lists are separated
by commas.
The lists are stored with the fixed file extensions *.uco in a directory of the user's choice.
The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command
MMEMory:CDIR.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
287
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Return values:
<Catalog>
string
Example:
MMEM:CDIR '/var//Lists/ucor'
selects the directory for the user correction files.
CORR:CSET:CAT?
queries which correction tables are available.
Response:UCOR1,UCOR2,UCOR3
the correction tables UCOR1, UCOR2 and UCOR3 are available.
Usage:
Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET:DATA:FREQuency <Frequency>
The command transfers the frequency data to the table selected
with :CORRection:CSET:SELect.
The numerical suffix at SOURce must not be used for this command.
Parameters:
<Frequency>
Frequency#1[, Frequency#2, ...]
Range:
300 kHz to RFmax (depending on model)
Default unit: Hz
Example:
CORR:CSET '/var//Lists/ucor/ucor1'
selects the table ucor1.
CORR:CSET:DATA:FREQ 100MHz,102MHz,103MHz,...
enters the frequency value in the table ucor1.
Manual control:
See "Edit User Cor. Data - User Correction" on page 133
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET:DATA:FREQuency:POINts?
The command queries the number of frequency values in the selected table.
The numerical suffix at SOURce must not be used for this command.
Return values:
<Points>
float
Example:
CORR:CSET '/var//Lists/ucor/ucor1'
selects the table ucor1.
CORR:CSET:DATA:FREQ:POIN?
queries the number of frequency values in the table ucor1.
Response: 440
the table ucor1 contains 440 frequency values.
Usage:
Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET:DATA:POWer <Power>
The command transfers the level data to the table selected
with :CORRection:CSET:SELect.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
288
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
*RST does not affect data lists. The numerical suffix at SOURce must not be used for this
command.
Parameters:
<Power>
Power#1[, Power#2, ...]
Range:
-40 dB to 6 dB
Default unit: dB
Example:
CORR:CSET '/var//Lists/ucor/ucor1'
selects the table ucor1.
CORR:CSET:DATA:POW 1dB, 0.8dB, 0.75dB,...
enters the level values in the table ucor1.
Manual control:
See "Edit User Cor. Data - User Correction" on page 133
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET:DATA:POWer:POINts?
The command queries the number of level values in the selected table.
The numerical suffix at SOURce must not be used for this command.
Return values:
<Points>
float
Example:
CORR:CSET '/var//Lists/ucor/ucor1'
selects the table ucor1.
CORR:CSET:DATA:POW:POIN?
queries the number of level values in the table ucor1.
Response: 440
the table ucor1 contains 440 level values.
Usage:
Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET:DATA[:SENSor<ch>][:POWer]:SONCe
The command fills the selected user correction list with the level values measured by the
power sensor for the given frequencies.
The power sensor used is selected by the suffix in key word SENSe of the command
header.
Suffix:
<ch>
.
1 .. 3
Suffix 1 denotes the sensor connected to the SENSOR connector,
suffix 2 the sensor connected first to one of the USB interfaces
and suffix 3 the sensor connected second to one of the USB interfaces.
Example:
CORR:CSET:DATA:SENS:POW:SONC
fills the user correction list with level values acquired by the power
sensor connector to the SENSOR connector.
Usage:
Event
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
289
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Manual control:
See "Fill User Correction Data with Sensor" on page 138
[:SOURce]:CORRection:CSET:DELete <Delete>
The command deletes the specified table.
The lists are stored with the fixed file extensions *.uco in a directory of the user's choice.
The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command
MMEMory:CDIR. A path can also be specified in command :SOUR:CORR:CSET:CAT?,
in which case the file in the specified directory is deleted.
The numerical suffix under SOURce is irrelevant.
Setting parameters:
<Delete>
<table name>
Example:
MMEM:CDIR '/var//Lists/ucor'
selects the directory for the user correction files.
CORR:CSET:DEL 'UCOR1'
deletes the table ucor1.
Usage:
Event
Manual control:
See "User Cor. Data - User Correction" on page 133
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:CATalog?
The command requests a list of available ASCII files for export/import of user correction
data. The individual files are separated by commas.
The ASCII files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.txt or *.csv in a directory of
the user's choice. The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command
MMEMory:CDIR.
Return values:
<Catalog>
string
Example:
MMEM:CDIR '/var//lists/ucor/import'
selects the directory for the ASCII files with frequency and level
value pairs.
CORR:DEXC:AFIL:EXT TXT
selects that ASCII files with extension *.txt are listed.
CORR:DEXC:AFIL:CAT?
queries the available files with extension *.txt.
Response: 'ucor1,ucor2'
the ASCII files ucor1.txt and ucor2.txt are available.
Usage:
Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:EXTension <Extension>
The command selects the file extension of the ASCII file to be imported or exported.
Selection TXT (text file) or CSV (Excel file) is available.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
290
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Parameters:
<Extension>
TXT | CSV
*RST:
TXT
Example:
MMEM:CDIR '/var//lists/ucor/import'
selects the directory for the ASCII files with frequency and level
value pairs.
CORR:DEXC:AFIL:EXT TXT
selects that ASCII files with extension *.txt are listed.
CORR:DEXC:AFIL:CAT?
queries the available files with extension *.txt.
Response: 'list1,list2'
the ASCII files ucor1.txt and ucor2.txt are available.
Manual control:
See "Extension - User Correction" on page 135
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:SELect <Select>
The command selects the ASCII file to be imported or exported.
The ASCII files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.txt or *.csv in a directory of
the user's choice. The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command
MMEMory:CDIR. A path can also be specified in command
SOUR:CORR:DEXC:AFIL:SEL, in which case the files are stored or loaded in the specified directory.
Parameters:
<Select>
<ascii file name>
Example:
CORR:DEXC:MODE IMP
selects that ASCII files with frequency and level value pairs are
imported and transferred into user correction lists.
CORR:DEXC:AFIL:SEL
'/var//user/ucor/import/ucor.csv'
selects that ASCII file ucor.csv is imported.
CORR:DEXC:SEL '/var//user/ucor/import/ucor_imp'
selects that the ASCII file ucor.csv is imported into user correction
list ucor_imp.
Manual control:
See "Select ASCII Source / Destination - User Correction"
on page 136
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:COLumn <Column>
The command selects the separator between the frequency and level column of the ASCII
table.
Parameters:
<Column>
TABulator | SEMicolon | COMMa | SPACe
*RST:
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
SEMicolon|
291
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Example:
CORR:DEXC:MODE EXP
selects that the user correction list is exported into an ASCII file.
CORR:DEXC:AFIL:SEL
'/var//user/ucor/import/ucor.csv'
selects ASCII file ucor.csv as destination for the user correction
list data.
CORR:DEXC:AFIL:SEP:COL TAB
the pairs of frequency and level values are separated by a tabulator.
CORR:DEXC:AFIL:SEP:DEC DOT
selects the decimal separator dot.
CORR:DEXC:SEL '/var//user/ucor/import/ucor_imp'
selects that the user correction list ucor_imp is imported into ASCII
file ucor.csv.
Manual control:
See "Column Separator- User Correction" on page 136
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:DECimal <Decimal>
The command the decimal separator used in the ASCII data between '.' (decimal point)
and ',' (comma) with floating-point numerals.
Parameters:
<Decimal>
DOT | COMMa
*RST:
DOT
Example:
CORR:DEXC:MODE EXP
selects that the user correction list is exported into an ASCII file.
CORR:DEXC:AFIL:SEL
'/var//user/ucor/import/ucor.csv'
selects ASCII file ucor.csv as destination for the user correction
list data.
CORR:DEXC:AFIL:SEP:COL TAB
the pairs of frequency and level values are separated by a tabulator.
CORR:DEXC:AFIL:SEP:DEC DOT
selects the decimal separator dot.
CORR:DEXC:SEL '/var//user/ucor/import/ucor_imp'
selects that the user correction list ucor_imp is imported into ASCII
file ucor.csv.
Manual control:
See "Decimal Point - User Correction" on page 136
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:EXECute
The command starts the export or import of the selected file. When import is selected,
the ASCII file is imported as user correction list. When export is selected, the user correction list is exported into the selected ASCII file.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
292
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Example:
CORR:DEXC:MODE IMP
selects that ASCII files with frequency and level value pairs are
imported and transferred into user correction lists.
CORR:DEXC:AFIL:SEL
'/var//user/ucor/import/ucor.csv'
selects that ASCII file ucor.csv is imported.
CORR:DEXC:SEL '/var//user/ucor/import/ucor_imp'
selects that the ASCII file ucor.csv is imported into user correction
list ucor_imp.
CORR:DEXC:EXEC
starts the import of the ASCII file data into the user correction file.
Usage:
Event
Manual control:
See "Import / Export - User Correction" on page 136
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:MODE <Mode>
The command selects if user correction lists should be imported or exported. Depending
on the selection her, the file select command define either the source or the destination
for user correction lists and ASCII files.
Parameters:
<Mode>
IMPort | EXPort
*RST:
IMPort
Example:
CORR:DEXC:MODE IMP
selects that ASCII files with frequency and level value pairs are
imported and transferred into user correction lists.
CORR:DEXC:AFIL:SEL
'/var//user/ucor/import/ucor.csv'
selects that ASCII file ucor.csv is imported.
CORR:DEXC:SEL '/var//user/ucor/import/ucor_imp'
selects that the ASCII file ucor.csv is imported into user correction
list ucor_imp.
Manual control:
See "Mode - User Correction" on page 135
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:DEXChange:SELect <Select>
The command selects the user correction list to be imported or exported.
The user correction files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.uco in a directory of
the user's choice. The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command
MMEMory:CDIR. A path can also be specified in command SOUR:CORR:DEXC:SEL, in
which case the files are stored or loaded in the specified directory.
Parameters:
<Select>
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
<list name>
293
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Example:
CORR:DEXC:MODE IMP
selects that ASCII files with frequency and level value pairs are
imported and transferred into user correction lists.
CORR:DEXC:AFIL:SEL
'/var//user/ucor/import/ucor.csv'
selects that ASCII file ucor.csv is imported.
CORR:DEXC:SEL '/var//user/ucor/import/ucor_imp'
selects that the ASCII file ucor.csv is imported into user correction list ucor_imp.
Manual control:
See "Destination / Source - User Correction" on page 136
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:CSET[:SELect] <Select>
The command selects the table for user correction. Level correction must also be activated with the command SOURce<hw>:CORRection:CSET:STATe ON.
The lists are stored with the fixed file extensions *.uco in a directory of the user's choice.
The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command
MMEMory:CDIR. A path can also be specified in command :SOUR:CORR:CSET:SEL, in
which case the files in the specified directory are selected.
Parameters:
<Select>
<table name>
Example:
CORR:CSET '/var//Lists/ucor/ucor1'
selects the table ucor1.
CORR ON
activates level correction. Correction is performed using the table
ucor1.
Usage:
Event
Manual control:
See "User Cor. Data - User Correction" on page 133
See "Edit User Cor. Data - User Correction" on page 133
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection[:STATe] <State>
The command activates/deactivates level correction. Level correction is performed using
the table which has been selected with the command CORRection:CSET:SELect.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
OFF
Example:
SOUR:CORR:CSET '/var//lists/ucor/ucor1'
selects the table ucor1.
SOUR:CORR ON
activates user correction.
Manual control:
See "State - User Correction" on page 133
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
294
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:CORRection:VALue?
The command requests the current value for user correction.
Return values:
<Value>
float
Example:
CORR:VAL?
queries the value currently used for level correction.
Response: -3
the correction value is - 3 dB.
Usage:
Query only
Manual control:
See "User Correction Value - User Correction" on page 133
7.12.3 SOURce:FM Subsystem
The FM subsystem contains the commands for checking the frequency modulation.
Characteristics which are valid for all modulations and the LF Output are configured in
the SOURce:LFOutput subsystem (e.g. frequency). The external signal is input at the
MOD EXT connector.
For information about the required options, see ​chapter 5.4.3, "Frequency Modulation
(FM)", on page 170.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FM[:​DEViation]​......................................................................................295
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FM:​EXTernal:​COUPling​..........................................................................296
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FM:​EXTernal:​DEViation​..........................................................................296
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FM:​MODE​.............................................................................................296
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FM:​SENSitivity?​.....................................................................................297
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FM:​SOURce​..........................................................................................297
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FM:​STATe​............................................................................................297
[:SOURce<hw>]:FM[:DEViation] <Deviation>
The command sets the modulation deviation of the frequency modulation in Hz. The
maximal deviation depends on the RF frequency set and the selected modulation mode
(see data sheet).
Parameters:
<Deviation>
float
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
0 Hz to 10 MHz
See data sheet
10 kHz
Hz
Example:
FM 5E3
sets the FM modulation deviation to 5 kHz.
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
Manual control:
See "FM Deviation" on page 172
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
295
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:FM:EXTernal:COUPling <Coupling>
The command selects the coupling mode for the external modulation input in the case of
frequency modulation.
Parameters:
<Coupling>
AC | DC
AC
The DC voltage component is disconnected from the modulation
signal.
DC
The modulation signal is not changed.
*RST:
AC
Example:
FM:EXT:COUP AC
selects the coupling mode AC for external frequency modulation.
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
Manual control:
See "FM External Coupling" on page 172
[:SOURce<hw>]:FM:EXTernal:DEViation <Deviation>
The command enters the deviation of the external FM signal The deviation of the internal
source must not exceed the deviation of the external source in case of modulation source
Int+Ext.
Parameters:
<Deviation>
float
Range:
0 to 40 MHz
*RST:
1kHz
Default unit: Hz
Example:
FM:EXT:DEV 3kHz
sets an external modulation depth of 3 kHz
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
[:SOURce<hw>]:FM:MODE <Mode>
The command selects the mode for the frequency modulation.
Parameters:
<Mode>
NORMal
NORMal
The maximum range for modulation bandwidth and FM deviation
is available.
*RST:
Example:
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
NORMal
FM:MODE NORM
selects normal mode for external frequency modulation.
296
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
Manual control:
See "FM Mode" on page 171
[:SOURce<hw>]:FM:SENSitivity?
The command is only effective if the external modulation source is selected
(SOUR:FM:SOUR EXT). The returned value depends on the modulation deviation setting (SOUR:FM:DEViation). This value is assigned to the voltage value for full modulation of the input signal.
Return values:
<Sensitivity>
float
Example:
FM:DEV 5E3
sets a modulation deviation of 5 kHz.
FM:SENS
queries the input sensitivity at the external modulation input.
Response: 5E3
since the voltage value for full modulation is 1V, the resulting sensitivity is precisely 5000Hz/V.
Usage:
Query only
SCPI confirmed
Manual control:
See "FM Sensitivity" on page 172
[:SOURce<hw>]:FM:SOURce <Source>
The command selects the modulation source for frequency modulation. Internal and
external modulation source can be selected at the same time.
Parameters:
<Source>
INT | EXT | INT,EXT
INT
INT is the internal modulation source which is defined with command FM:SOURce:INTernal and configured in the
SOURce:LFOutput subsystem.
EXT
The external signal is input at the MOD EXT connector.
*RST:
INTernal
Example:
FM:SOUR INT
selects the internal modulation source.
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
Manual control:
See "FM Source" on page 171
[:SOURce<hw>]:FM:STATe <State>
The command activates/deactivates frequency modulation.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
297
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Activation of FM (FM:STAT ON) deactivates phase modulation.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
OFF
Example:
FM:STAT ON
Activates FM modulation.
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
Manual control:
See "State" on page 171
7.12.4 SOURce:FREQuency Subsystem
This subsystem contains the commands used to define the frequency settings for the RF
sources and sweeps.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FREQuency:​CENTer​..............................................................................298
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FREQuency[:​CW|:​FIXed]​........................................................................299
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FREQuency[:​CW|:​FIXed]:​RCL​................................................................300
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FREQuency:​MANual​..............................................................................300
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FREQuency:​MODE​................................................................................301
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FREQuency:​MULTiplier​..........................................................................302
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FREQuency:​OFFSet​..............................................................................302
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FREQuency:​SPAN​.................................................................................302
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FREQuency:​STARt​................................................................................303
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FREQuency:​STOP​.................................................................................303
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FREQuency:​STEP[:​INCRement]​.............................................................304
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FREQuency:​STEP:​MODE​......................................................................305
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:CENTer <Center>
The command sets the center frequency of the sweep. This setting in combination with
the span setting ([SOURce:]FREQuency:SPAN) defines the sweep range.
This command is linked to the commands [SOURce:]FREQuency:STARt and
[SOURce:]FREQuency:STOP, i.e. changing these values causes the CENTer value to
change, and vice versa:
CENTer = (STARt + STOP)/2
As with the "Frequency" value entered in the header, the OFFSet value is also taken into
consideration with this command. The specified value range is therefore only effective if
OFFSet is set to 0. The value range for other OFFset values can be calculated using
the following formula:
300 kHz + OFFSet ... RFmax +OFFSet
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
298
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Parameters:
<Center>
float
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
300kHz to RFmax (RFmax depending on model)
0.01Hz
300MHz
Hz
Example:
FREQ:CENT 400 MHz
sets the center frequency for the frequency sweep to 400 MHz.
FREQ:SPAN 200 MHz
sets a span of 200 MHz. This sets the sweep range to 300 MHz
to 500 MHz.
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
Manual control:
See "Center Freq - Frequency Sweep" on page 150
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency[:CW|:FIXed] <Fixed>
The command sets the frequency of the RF output signal for CW mode
(SOURce:FREQuency:MODE CW). In Sweep mode (SOURce:FREQuency:MODE
SWEep), this value is linked to the current sweep frequency.
In addition to a numerical value, it is also possible to specify UP and DOWN. The frequency
is then increased or decreased by the value which is set under
[SOURce<[1]|2>:]FREQuency:STEP.
As with the "FREQ" value entered in the display, the OFFSet value is also taken into
consideration with this command. The specified value range is therefore only effective if
OFFSet is set to 0. The value range for other OFFset values can be calculated using
the following formula:
300 kHz + OFFSet ... RFmax +OFFSet
Correlation: FREQ for FREQ:MODE SWE is linked to sweep frequency.
Parameters:
<Fixed>
float
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
300kHz to RFmax
0.01Hz
1GHz
Hz
Example:
FREQ 500kHz
sets the frequency of RF output signal A to 500 kHz.
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
Manual control:
See "RF Freq" on page 114
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
299
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency[:CW|:FIXed]:RCL <Rcl>
The command determines whether the current frequency setting is retained or whether
the stored frequency setting is adopted when an instrument configuration is loaded.
*RST does not affect this setting.
Parameters:
<Rcl>
INCLude | EXCLude
INCLude
The stored frequency is also loaded when a stored instrument
configuration is loaded.
EXCLude
The RF frequency is not loaded when a stored instrument configuration is loaded. The current frequency is retained.
*RST:
no default
Example:
FREQ:RCL INCL
The stored frequency is set if the Recall command is called.
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
Manual control:
See "Exclude Frequency" on page 109
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:MANual <Manual>
In Sweep mode (:SOUR:FREQ:MODE SWE) the command sets the frequency for the next
sweep step in the "Step" sweep mode (SOUR:SWE:MODE MAN).
The parameter <Manual> must be a frequency value between the settings
[SOUR]:FREQ:STAR and ...:STOP. Each sweep step is triggered by a separate
SOUR:FREQ:MAN command. UP or DOWN trigger the next sweep step in direction of higher
or lower frequencies.
As with the "Frequency" value entered in the header, the OFFSet value is also taken into
consideration with this command. The specified value range is therefore only effective if
OFFSet is set to 0. The value range for other OFFset values can be calculated using
the following formula:
STARt + OFFSet ... STOP +OFFSet
Parameters:
<Manual>
float
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
Example:
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
STARt to STOP
0.01Hz
100MHz
Hz
SWE:MODE MAN
sets the Step sweep mode.
300
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Example:
FREQ:MODE SWE
sets the Frequency Sweep mode. The sweep start frequency is
output.
FREQ:MAN UP
triggers the next higher sweep step.
FREQ:MAN 500MHz
outputs 500 MHz RF frequency (must e within the sweep frequency range).
FREQ:MAN DOWN
triggers the next lower sweep step relative to 500 MHz.
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
Manual control:
See "Current Freq - Frequency Sweep" on page 150
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:MODE <Mode>
The command sets the instrument operating mode and therefore also the commands
used to set the output frequency.
Parameters:
<Mode>
CW | FIXed | SWEep | LIST
CW|FIXed
The instrument operates in fixed-frequency mode; CW and
FIXed are synonyms. The output frequency is set
with :SOURce:FREQuency:CW|FIXed.
SWEep
The instrument operates in SWEep mode. The frequency is set
using the commands SOURce:FREQuency:STARt; STOP;
CENTer; SPAN; MANual.
LIST
The instrument processes a list of frequency and level settings for
the selected path.
The List mode settings are made in the ​SOURce:LIST Subsystem subsystem. The setting SOURce:FREQuency:MODE LIST
also sets the command SOURce:POWer:MODE automatically to
LIST.
Correlation: FREQ:MODE LIST sets POW:MODE LIST
*RST:
CW
Example:
FREQ:MODE SWE
sets the SWEep mode. The settings under
SOURce:FREQuency:STARt; STOP; CENTer; SPAN; MANual
become effective.
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
Manual control:
See "State - Frequency Sweep" on page 146
See "Mode - Frequency Sweep" on page 146
See "State - List Mode" on page 158
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
301
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:MULTiplier <Multiplier>
The command sets the value for the multiplication factor of a subsequent downstream
instrument.
Parameters:
<Multiplier>
float
Range:
*RST:
1 to 10000
1
Example:
FREQ:MULT 1
sets the multiplication factor to 1.
Manual control:
See "Multiplier - RF Signal" on page 116
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:OFFSet <Offset>
The command sets the frequency offset of a downstream instrument, e.g. a mixer. If a
frequency offset is entered, the frequency entered with SOURce:FREQuency:... no
longer corresponds to the RF output frequency. The following correlation applies:
SOURce:FREQuency:... = RF output frequency + SOURce:FREQuency:OFFSet.
Entering an offset does not change the RF output frequency, but rather the query value
of SOURce:FREQuency:....
Parameters:
<Offset>
float
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
-67GHz to 67GHz
0.01Hz
0Hz
Hz
Example:
FREQ:OFFS 500kHz
sets the frequency offset to 500 kHz.
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
Manual control:
See "Offset - RF Signal" on page 115
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:SPAN <Span>
This command specifies the span for the sweep. This setting in combination with the
center frequency setting ([SOUR]:FREQ:CENT) defines the sweep range.
This command is linked to the commands [SOUR]:FREQ:STAR and
[:SOUR]:FREQ:STOP, i.e. changing these values causes the SPAN value to change,
and vice versa:
SPAN = (STOP - STARt)
Negative values for SPAN are permitted; STARt > STOP then applies.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
302
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Parameters:
<Span>
float
Range:
0 to RFmax
Increment: 0.01Hz
*RST:
400MHz
Example:
FREQ:CENT 400 MHz
sets the center frequency of the frequency sweep to 400 MHz.
FREQ:SPAN 200 MHz
sets a span of 200 MHz. This sets the sweep range to 300 MHz
to 500 MHz.
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
Manual control:
See "Span - Frequency Sweep" on page 150
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:STARt <Start>
This command sets the start frequency for the sweep mode. STARt can be greater than
STOP.
This command is linked to the commands [SOUR]:FREQ:CENT and
[SOUR]:FREQ:SPAN, i.e. changing these values causes the STARt value to change,
and vice versa:
STARt = (CENTer - SPAN/2).
As with the "Frequency" value entered in the header, the OFFSet value is also taken into
consideration with this command. The specified value range is therefore only effective if
OFFSet is set to 0. The value range for other OFFset values can be calculated using
the following formula:
300 kHz + OFFSet ... RFmax +OFFSet
Parameters:
<Start>
float
Range:
300kHz to RFmax
Increment: 0.01Hz
*RST:
100MHz
Example:
FREQ:STARt 1 MHz
sets the start frequency for the frequency sweep to 1 MHz.
FREQ:STOP 2 GHz
sets the stop frequency for the frequency sweep to 2 GHz.
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
Manual control:
See "Start Freq - Frequency Sweep" on page 149
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:STOP <Stop>
This command sets the stop frequency for the sweep mode. STOP can be less than
STARt.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
303
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
This command is linked to the commands [:SOUR]:FREQ:CENt and
[:SOUR]:FREQ:SPAN, i.e. changing these values causes the STARt value to change,
and vice versa:
STOP = (CENTer + SPAN/2)
As with the "Frequency" value entered in the header, the OFFSet value is also taken into
consideration with this command. The specified value range is therefore only effective if
OFFSet is set to 0. The value range for other OFFset values can be calculated using
the following formula:
300 kHz + OFFSet ... RFmax +OFFSet
Parameters:
<Stop>
float
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
300kHz to RFmax
0.01Hz
500 MHz
Hz
Example:
FREQ:STOP 2 GHz
sets the stop frequency for the frequency sweep to 2 GHz.
FREQ:STAR 1 MHz
sets the start frequency for the frequency sweep to 1 MHz.
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
Manual control:
See "Stop Freq - Frequency Sweep" on page 149
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:STEP[:INCRement] <Increment>
The command sets the step width for the frequency setting if the frequency values
UP/DOWN are used and variation mode SOUR:FREQ:STEP:MODE USER is selected. The
command is linked to "Variation Step" for manual control, i.e. the command also sets the
step width of the rotary knob for "Variation Active" on.
Parameters:
<Increment>
float
Range:
0Hz to RFmax - 100kHz
Increment: 0.01Hz
*RST:
1MHz
Example:
FREQ:STEP 50 kHz
sets the step width for the frequency setting to 50 kHz.
Manual control:
See "Variation Step - RF Signal" on page 116
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
304
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:FREQuency:STEP:MODE <Mode>
This command activates (USER) or deactivates (DECimal) the user-defined step width
used when varying the frequency value with the frequency values UP/DOWN. The command is linked to the command "Variation Active" for manual control, i.e. the command
also activates/deactivates the user-defined step width used when varying the frequency
value with the rotary knob.
Parameters:
<Mode>
DECimal | USER
*RST:
DECimal
Example:
FREQ:STEP 50 kHz
sets the step width for the frequency setting to 50 kHz.
FREQ:STEP:MODE USER
actives this step width for frequency variation with the rotary knob
(manual control) and with frequency values UP/DOWN (remote
control).
Manual control:
See "Variation Active - RF Signal" on page 116
7.12.5 SOURce:INPut Subsystem
The SOURce:INPut subsystem contains the commands for configuring the inputs for
external modulation signals. The instrument trigger setting influences all sweeps and is
effective in the List mode (Instrument Trigger).
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​INPut:​MODext:​IMPedance​......................................................................305
[:​SOURce]:​INPut:​TRIGger:​SLOPe​...................................................................................305
[:SOURce<hw>]:INPut:MODext:IMPedance <Impedance>
This command sets the impedance for external feed via the MOD EXT input.
Parameters:
<Impedance>
HIGH | G600
HIGH
> 100 k0hm to ground
*RST:
HIGH
Example:
INP:MOD:IMP HIGH
the EXT MOD input is set to > 100 kOhm to ground.
Manual control:
See "External Input Impendance" on page 170
[:SOURce]:INPut:TRIGger:SLOPe <Slope>
Sets the polarity of the active slope of an externally applied trigger signal at the trigger
input (BNC connector at the rear of the instrument).
The setting is effective for both inputs at the same time.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
305
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Parameters:
<Slope>
NEGative | POSitive
*RST:
POSitive
Example:
INP:TRIG:SLOP NEG
activates the falling slope of the external trigger signal at the trigger
input.
Manual control:
See "Trigger Input Slope" on page 152
7.12.6 SOURce:LFOutput Subsystem
This subsystem contains the commands for setting the LF signal source in CW and
Sweep mode as well as for analog modulation.
Example
The following example shows how to set an LF sweep.
1. Set the sweep range.
LFOutput:FREQuency:STARt 4 kHz
LFOutput:FREQuency:STOP 10 kHz
2. Select linear or logarithmic sweep spacing.
LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:SPACing LIN
3. Set the step width and dwell time.
LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP[:LINear]
LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:DWELl 20 ms
100 Hz
4. Determine the sweep mode.
LFOutput:SWEep:MODE AUTO
5. Determine the trigger.
TRIGger0:SOURce SINGle
6. Activate the sweep.
LFOutput:FREQuency:MODE SWEep
7. Trigger the sweep (depending on the mode).
LFOutput:SWEep:EXECute
[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput<ch>:​FREQuency​.............................................................................307
[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput:​FREQuency:​MANual​.......................................................................307
[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput:​FREQuency:​MODE​.........................................................................308
[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput:​FREQuency:​STARt​.........................................................................308
[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput:​FREQuency:​STOP​..........................................................................309
[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput[:​STATe]​..........................................................................................309
[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​DWELl​...........................................................310
[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​EXECute​........................................................310
[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​MODE​............................................................310
[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​POINts​...........................................................311
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
306
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​SHAPe​...........................................................312
[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​SPACing​........................................................312
[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​STEP[:​LINear]​................................................312
[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​STEP:​LOGarithmic​..........................................313
[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput<ch>:​SHAPe​....................................................................................314
[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput:​SIMPedance​...................................................................................314
[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput:​VOLTage​........................................................................................314
[:SOURce]:LFOutput<ch>:FREQuency <Frequency>
The command sets the frequency of the LF signal for CW mode (:SOUR:MODE CW). The
setting is valid for all analog modulations (AM/FM/PhiM) with internal modulation source
and for the LF Output.
In sweep mode (SOUR:LFO:FREQ:MODE SWE), the frequency is linked to the sweep
frequency.
Correlation: LFO:FREQ for LFO:FREQ:MODE SWE linked to sweep frequency.
Parameters:
<Frequency>
float
Increment: 0.1 Hz
*RST:
1KHz
Example:
LFO2:FREQ 5kHz
sets the frequency of the LF generator 2 signal to 5 kHz.
Manual control:
See "LF Gen Frequency" on page 169
See "LF Gen Freq - Stereo Modulation" on page 180
[:SOURce]:LFOutput:FREQuency:MANual <Manual>
In Sweep mode (SOUR:LFO:FREQ:MODE SWE) the command sets the frequency for the
next sweep step in the "Step" sweep mode (SOUR:LFO:SWE:MODE MAN). Here only
frequency values between the settings SOUR:LFO:FREQ:STAR and ...:STOP are permitted. Each sweep step is triggered by a separate SOUR:LFO:FREQ:MAN command.
Parameters:
<Manual>
float
Range:
STARt to STOP
Increment: 0.1 Hz
*RST:
1 kHz
Example:
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
LFO:SWE:MODE MAN
sets the "Step" sweep mode.
LFO:FREQ:MAN 5 kHz
sets an LF frequency of 5 kHz for the next step in the "Step" sweep
mode.
LFO:FREQ:MODE SWE
sets the LF Sweep mode. An LF frequency of 5 kHz is output.
LFO:FREQ:MAN 5.1 kHz
triggers the next sweep step with a frequency of 5.1 kHz.
307
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Manual control:
See "Current Freq - LF Sweep" on page 189
[:SOURce]:LFOutput:FREQuency:MODE <Mode>
The command sets the instrument operating mode and therefore also the commands
used to set the output frequency.
Parameters:
<Mode>
CW | FIXed | SWEep
CW|FIXed
The instrument operates in fixed-frequency mode. CW and
FIXed are synonyms.
The output frequency is set with ​[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput<ch>:​
FREQuency​.
SWEep
The instrument operates in SWEep mode. The frequency is set
using the commands ​[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput:​FREQuency:​
STARt​, ​[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput:​FREQuency:​STOP​ or ​[:​
SOURce]:​LFOutput:​FREQuency:​MANual​.
*RST:
CW
Example:
LFO:FREQ:MODE SWE
sets the SWEep mode. The settings under
SOURce:LFOutput:FREQuency:STARt; STOP; MANual
become effective.
Manual control:
See "State - LF Sweep" on page 187
See "Mode - LF Sweep" on page 187
[:SOURce]:LFOutput:FREQuency:STARt <Start>
This command sets the start frequency for the LF Sweep mode.
Parameters:
<Start>
float
Range:
0.1 Hz to 1 MHz
Increment: 0.1 Hz
*RST:
1 kHz
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
308
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Example:
RST*
activates all presettings.
LFO:SWE:MODE AUTO
sets the AUTO sweep mode, i.e. each trigger triggers a complete
sweep.
TRIG0:SOUR SING
sets the SINGle trigger mode, i.e. the sweep is triggered by the
command :LFOutput:SWEep:EXECute or *TRG.
LFO:FREQ:STAR 100 kHz
sets the start frequency for the LF sweep to 100 kHz.
LFO:FREQ:STOP 200 kHz
sets the stop frequency of the LF sweep to 200 kHz.
LFO:FREQ:MODE SWE
sets the LF sweep mode.
LFO:SWE:EXEC
a one-off LF sweep from 100 kHz to 200 kHz is performed. The
linear step width is 1 kHz with a dwell time of 15 ms (preset values).
Manual control:
See "Start Freq - LF Sweep" on page 189
[:SOURce]:LFOutput:FREQuency:STOP <Stop>
This command sets the stop frequency for the LF sweep.
Parameters:
<Stop>
float
Range:
0.1 Hz to 1 MHz
Increment: 0.1 Hz
*RST:
50 kHz
Example:
LFO:FREQ:STOP 200 kHz
sets the stop frequency for the LF sweep to 200 kHz.
LFO:FREQ:STAR 100 kHz
sets the start frequency for the LF sweep to 100 kHz.
Manual control:
See "Stop Freq - LF Sweep" on page 189
[:SOURce]:LFOutput[:STATe] <State>
The command activates/deactivates the LF output.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
OFF
Example:
LFO ON
activates the LF output. The settings under LFO:FREQ and
LFO:SWE become effective.
Manual control:
See "State - LF Output" on page 185
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
309
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:DWELl <Dwell>
The command sets the dwell time for each frequency step of the sweep.
Tip: It is recommended to switch off the "GUI Update" for optimum sweep performance
especially with short dwell times (​SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate OFF).
Parameters:
<Dwell>
float
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
10.0E-3 to 100
100.0E-6
10.0E-3
s
Example:
LFO:SWE:DWEL 20 ms
sets a dwell time of 20 ms.
Manual control:
See "Dwell Time - LF Sweep" on page 191
[:SOURce]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:EXECute
The command immediately starts an LF sweep.
The command is only valid for sweep mode Single
(SOURce:LFOutput:SWEep:FREQuency:MODE SINGle).
The command corresponds to the manual-control ​Execute Single Sweep - LF Sweep.
Example:
LFO:SWE:MODE SING
sets the single cycle mode of the LF sweep.
LFO:SWE:EXEC
starts one cycle of the LF sweep.
Usage:
Event
Manual control:
See "Execute Single Sweep - LF Sweep" on page 189
[:SOURce]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:MODE <Mode>
The command sets the cycle mode of the LF sweep.
The assignment of the GPIB commands to the sweep modes is given in the description
of the sweep menus.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
310
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Parameters:
<Mode>
AUTO | MANual | STEP
AUTO
Each trigger triggers exactly one complete sweep.
MANual
The trigger system is not active. Each frequency step of the sweep
is triggered individually, either by varying the "Current Frequency" value using the rotary knob under manual control or by
means of a :LFOutput:FREQ:MAN command under remote control.
With manual control, the frequency increases or decreases
(depending on the direction of the rotary encoder) by the value
specified under SOUR:LFO:SWE:FREQ:STEP:LIN (linear spacing) or ...:STEP:LOG (logarithmic spacing).
With remote control, the frequency increases by the value specified under LFO:SWE:FREQ:STEP:LIN|LOG which each sent ​
[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput:​FREQuency:​MANual​ command, irrespective the value entered there.
STEP
Each trigger triggers one sweep step only. The frequency increases by the value entered under
[SOURce:]LFOutput:SWEep:STEP.
*RST:
AUTO
Example:
LFO:SWE:MODE AUTO
selects Mode Auto.
Manual control:
See "Mode - LF Sweep" on page 187
[:SOURce]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:POINts <Points>
The command sets the number of steps in an LF sweep.
The command is linked to the command :LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP as
follows:
●
for linear sweeps and STARt < STOP
POINts = ((STOP-STARt) / STEP:LIN) + 1
●
for logarithmic sweeps and STARt < STOP
POINts = ((log STOP - log STARt) / log STEP:LOG) + 1
If POINTs changes, the value of STEP is adjusted. The STARt and STOP value is retained.
Two separate POINts values are used for linear or logarithmic sweep spacing
(LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:SPACing LIN | LOG). The command is always
effective for the currently set sweep spacing.
Parameters:
<Points>
float
Increment: 1
*RST:
100
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
311
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Example:
LFO:FREQ:STAR
sets the start frequency to 2 kHz.
LFO:FREQ:STOP
sets the stop frequency to 20 kHz
LFO:SWE:SPAC LIN
sets linear sweep spacing.
LFO:SWE:POIN 11
sets 11 sweep steps for linear sweep spacing. The sweep step
width (STEP) is automatically set to 2 kHz.
[:SOURce]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:SHAPe <Shape>
The command sets the cycle mode for a sweep sequence (shape).
Parameters:
<Shape>
SAWTooth | TRIangle
SAWTooth
One sweep runs from start to stop frequency. Each subsequent
sweep starts at the start frequency, i.e. the shape of the sweep
sequence resembles a sawtooth.
TRIangle
One sweep runs from start to stop frequency and back, i.e. the
shape of the sweep resembles a triangle. Each subsequent sweep
starts at the start frequency.
*RST:
SAWTooth
Example:
SOUR:LFO:SWE:SHAP TRI
selects the sweep cycle with alternating ascending and descending sweep directions.
Manual control:
See "Shape - LF Frequency Sweep" on page 190
[:SOURce]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:SPACing <Spacing>
The command selects linear or logarithmic sweep spacing.
Parameters:
<Spacing>
LINear | LOGarithmic
*RST:
LINear
Example:
LFO:SWE:SPAC LIN
selects linear sweep spacing.
Manual control:
See "Spacing - LF Sweep" on page 190
[:SOURce]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP[:LINear] <Linear>
The command sets the step width for the linear sweep.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
312
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
This command is linked to the command :LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:POINts as follow.
●
for STARt < STOP:
POINts = (((STOP-STARt) / STEP:LIN) + 1
If STEP:LIN changes, the value of POINTs is adjusted. The STARt and STOP value is
retained.
Parameters:
<Linear>
float
Range:
0 to STOP-STARt
Increment: 0.1 Hz
Example:
LFO:FREQ:STAR
sets the start frequency to 2 kHz.
LFO:FREQ:STOP
sets the stop frequency to 20 kHz.
LFO:SWE:SPAC LIN
sets linear sweep spacing.
LFO:SWE:STEP 2 kHz
sets the sweep step width to 2 kHz. The number of sweep steps
for linear sweep spacing (POINts) is automatically set to 11.
Manual control:
See "Step Lin/Log - LF Sweep" on page 190
[:SOURce]:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP:LOGarithmic <Logarithmic>
The command specifies the step width factor for logarithmic sweeps. The next frequency
value of a sweep is calculated (for STARt < STOP) using the following formula:
New frequency = Old frequency + STEP:LOG x Old frequency
STEP:LOG therefore gives the fraction of the old frequency. The frequency is increased
by this fraction for the next sweep step. Usually STEP:LOG is given in percent, whereby
the suffix PCT must always be used.
The command is linked to the command :LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]:POINts
as follows:
●
for logarithmic sweeps and STARt < STOP:
POINts = ((log STOP - log STARt) / log STEP:LOG) + 1
If STEP:LOG changes, the value of POINTs is adjusted. The STARt and STOP value is
retained.
Parameters:
<Logarithmic>
float
Range:
0.01PCT to 100PCT
Increment: 0.01PCT
*RST:
1
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
313
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Example:
LFO:FREQ:STAR
sets the start frequency to 1 kHz.
LFO:FREQ:STOP
sets the stop frequency to 100 kHz.
LFO:SWE:SPAC LOG
sets logarithmic sweep spacing.
LFO:SWE:STEP:LOG 10PCT
sets the step width for logarithmic sweep spacing to 10% of the
previous frequency in each instance.
Manual control:
See "Step Lin/Log - LF Sweep" on page 190
[:SOURce]:LFOutput<ch>:SHAPe <Shape>
Selects the shape of the LF generator.
Note: The setting "Sawtooth" requires the RF board version 1406.7207.02 or later.
Parameters:
<Shape>
SINE | SQUare | SAWTooth
*RST:
SINE
Example:
LFO:SHAP SQU
selects a rectangular shape for the signal of the LF generator.
Manual control:
See "LF Gen Shape" on page 169
See "LF Gen Shape - Stereo Modulation" on page 180
[:SOURce]:LFOutput:SIMPedance <Simpedance>
The command selects the output impedance of the LF generator. Selection "LOW" and
"600 Ohm" are available.
Note: The setting 600 Ohm requires the RF board version 1406.7207.02 or later.
Parameters:
<Simpedance>
LOW | G600
*RST:
LOW|
Example:
SOUR:LFO:SIMP G600
'sets the output impedance of the LF generator to 600 Ohms
Manual control:
See "LF Source Impedance" on page 186
[:SOURce]:LFOutput:VOLTage <Voltage>
The command sets the output voltage of the LF output.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
314
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Parameters:
<Voltage>
float
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
0 to 4
0.001
1
V
Example:
LFO:VOLT 3 V
sets the voltage of the LF output to 3 V.
Manual control:
See "Output Voltage - LF Output" on page 186
7.12.7 SOURce:LIST Subsystem
This subsystem contains the commands for the List mode of the instrument.
The following settings are required to operate the instrument in List mode:
1. Create a list.
If a list which does not exist is selected with the :LIST:SEL command, an empty list
with the name of the selected list is created.
SOURce1:LIST:SEL "New_list"
2. Fill the list with values.
All list components must be of the same length. This does not apply to components
of length 1. This is interpreted as if the component has the same length as the other
components and as if all values are the same as the first value.
SOURce1:LIST:FREQ 100 MHz, 110 MHz, 120 MHz...
SOURce1:LIST:POW 2dBm, -1dBm, 0dBm...
3. Select a list.
If a new empty file has been created with the :LIST:SEL command, this file is
selected, otherwise an existing list must be selected before the List mode is activated.
SOURce1:LIST:SEL "Old_list"
4. Set the dwell time.
The dwell time determines the duration of the individual list steps.
SOURce1:LIST:DWELl 3ms
5. Set the List mode.
The List mode determines the way in which the list is processed. In the example the
list is processed once only or repeatedly depending on the trigger setting.
SOURce1:LIST:MODE AUTO
6. Determine the trigger.
In the example each trigger causes the list to be processed once from beginning to
end.
SOURce:LIST:TRIGger:SOURce SINGle
7. Activate the List mode.
SOURce1:FREQuency:MODE LIST
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
315
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
8. Trigger the list (depending on the mode).
SOURce1:LIST:TRIGger:EXECute
9. Deactivate the List mode.
SOURce1:FREQuency:MODE CW
SCPI refers to the individual lists as segments.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​CATalog?​......................................................................................316
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​DELete​.........................................................................................317
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​DELete:​ALL​...................................................................................317
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​DEXChange:​AFILe:​CATalog?​.........................................................318
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​DEXChange:​AFILe:​EXTension​........................................................318
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​DEXChange:​AFILe:​SELect​.............................................................319
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​DEXChange:​AFILe:​SEParator:​COLumn​...........................................319
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​DEXChange:​AFILe:​SEParator:​DECimal​...........................................320
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​DEXChange:​EXECute​....................................................................320
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​DEXChange:​MODE​........................................................................321
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​DEXChange:​SELect​.......................................................................321
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​DWELl​..........................................................................................322
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​FREE?​..........................................................................................322
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​FREQuency​...................................................................................322
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​FREQuency:​POINts?​.....................................................................323
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​INDex​...........................................................................................323
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​INDex:​STARt​.................................................................................324
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​INDex:​STOP​.................................................................................324
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​LEARn​..........................................................................................325
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​MODE​..........................................................................................325
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​POWer​..........................................................................................326
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​POWer:​POINts?​............................................................................326
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​RESet​...........................................................................................326
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​SELect​..........................................................................................327
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​TRIGger:​EXECute​..........................................................................327
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​TRIGger:​SOURce​..........................................................................327
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:CATalog?
The command requests a list of available lists. The individual lists are separated by commas.
The lists are stored with the fixed file extensions *.lsw in a directory of the user's choice.
The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command
MMEMory:CDIR.
Return values:
<Catalog>
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
string
316
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Example:
MMEM:CDIR '/var//Lists/Listmode'
selects the directory for the list mode files.
LIST:CAT?
queries the available lists.
Response: 'list1,list2'
the lists list1 and list2 are available.
Usage:
Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DELete <Delete>
The command deletes the specified list.
The files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.lsw in a directory of the user's choice.
The directory applicable to the command is defined with the command MMEMory:CDIR.
To access the files in this directory, only the file name has to be given, without the path
and the file extension. A path can also be specified in command :SOUR:LIST:CAT?, in
which case the file in the specified directory is deleted.
*RST does not affect data lists.
Setting parameters:
<Delete>
<list file name>
Example:
MMEM:CDIR '/var//Lists/Listmode'
selects the directory for the list mode files.
LIST:DEL 'LIST1'
deletes the list list1.
Usage:
Setting only
Manual control:
See "List Mode Data... - List Mode" on page 161
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DELete:ALL
The command deletes all lists in the set directory. The List mode must be deactivated
beforehand to ensure that no lists are selected when this command is called
(SOUR:FREQ:MODE CW or SWE).
The files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.lsw in a directory of the user's choice.
The directory applicable to the command is defined with the command MMEMory:CDIR.
A path can also be specified in command SOUR:LIST:CAT?, in which case all list mode
files in the specified directory are deleted.
*RST does not affect data lists.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
317
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Example:
MMEM:CDIR '/var//Lists/Listmode'
selects the directory for the list mode files.
FREQ:MODE SWE
deactivates the List mode for RF output and activates the Sweep
mode.
SOUR2:FREQ:MODE SWE
deactivates the List mode for RF output and activates Sweep
mode.
LIST:DEL:ALL
deletes all list mode files available in the set directory.
Usage:
Event
Manual control:
See "List Mode Data... - List Mode" on page 161
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:CATalog?
The command requests a list of available ASCII files for export/import of list mode data.
The individual files are separated by commas.
The ASCII files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.txt or *.csv in a directory of
the user's choice. The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command
MMEMory:CDIR.
Return values:
<Catalog>
string
Example:
MMEM:CDIR '/var//lists/listmode/import'
selects the directory for the ASCII files with frequency and level
value pairs.
LIST:DEXC:AFIL:EXT TXT
selects that ASCII files with extension *.txt are listed.
LIST:DEXC:AFIL:CAT?
queries the available files with extension *.txt.
Response:'list1,list2'
the ASCII files list1.txt and list2.txt are available.
Usage:
Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:EXTension <Extension>
The command selects the file extension of the ASCII file to be imported or exported.
Selection TXT (text file) or CSV (Excel file) is available.
Parameters:
<Extension>
TXT | CSV
*RST:
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
TXT
318
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Example:
MMEM:CDIR '/var//lists/listmode/import'
selects the directory for the ASCII files with frequency and level
value pairs.
LIST:DEXC:AFIL:EXT TXT
selects that ASCII files with extension *.txt are listed.
LIST:DEXC:AFIL:CAT?
queries the available files with extension *.txt.
Response: 'list1,list2'
the ASCII files list1.txt and list2.txt are available.
Manual control:
See "Extension - List Mode" on page 163
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:SELect <Select>
The command selects the ASCII file to be imported or exported.
The ASCII files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.txt or *.csv in a directory of
the user's choice. The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command
MMEMory:CDIR. A path can also be specified in command
SOUR:LIST:DEXC:AFIL:SEL, in which case the files are stored or loaded in the specified directory.
Parameters:
<Select>
<ascii_file_name>
Example:
LIST:DEXC:MODE IMP
selects that ASCII files with frequency and level value pairs are
imported and transferred into list mode lists.
LIST:DEXC:AFIL:SEL
'/var//user/listmode/import/list.csv'
selects that ASCII file list.csv is imported.
LIST:DEXC:SEL
'/var//user/listmode/import/list_imp'
selects that the ASCII file list.csv is imported into list mode list
list_imp.
Manual control:
See "Select ASCII Source / Destination - List Mode"
on page 163
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:COLumn <Column>
The command selects the separator between the frequency and level column of the ASCII
table.
Parameters:
<Column>
TABulator | SEMicolon | COMMa | SPACe
*RST:
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
COMMa
319
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Example:
LIST:DEXC:MODE EXP
selects that the list mode list is exported into an ASCII file.
LIST:DEXC:AFIL:SEL
'/var//user/listmode/import/list.csv'
selects ASCII file list.csv as destination for the list mode list
data.
LIST:DEXC:AFIL:SEP:COL TAB
the pairs of frequency and level values are separated by a tabulator.
LIST:DEXC:AFIL:SEP:DEC DOT
selects the decimal separator dot.
LIST:DEXC:SEL
'/var//user/listmode/import/list_imp'
selects that the list mode list list_imp is imported into ASCII file
list.csv.
Manual control:
See "Column Separator- List Mode" on page 163
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:DECimal <Decimal>
The command the decimal separator used in the ASCII data between '.' (decimal point)
and ',' (comma) with floating-point numerals.
Parameters:
<Decimal>
DOT | COMMa
*RST:
DOT
Example:
LIST:DEXC:MODE EXP
selects that the list mode list is exported into an ASCII file.
LIST:DEXC:AFIL:SEL
'/var//user/listmode/import/list.csv'
selects ASCII file list.csv as destination for the list mode list
data.
LIST:DEXC:AFIL:SEP:COL TAB
the pairs of frequency and level values are separated by a tabulator.
LIST:DEXC:AFIL:SEP:DEC DOT
selects the decimal separator dot.
LIST:DEXC:SEL
'root/var//user/listmode/import/list_imp'
selects that the list mode list list_imp is imported into ASCII file
list.csv.
Manual control:
See "Decimal Point - List Mode" on page 163
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:EXECute
The command starts the export or import of the selected file. When import is selected,
the ASCII file is imported as list mode list. When export is selected, the list mode list is
exported into the selected ASCII file.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
320
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Example:
LIST:DEXC:MODE IMP
selects that ASCII files with frequency and level value pairs are
imported and transferred into list mode lists.
LIST:DEXC:AFIL:SEL
'/var//user/listmode/import/list.csv'
selects that ASCII file list.csv is imported.
LIST:DEXC:SEL
'/var//user/listmode/import/list_imp'
selects that the ASCII file list.csv is imported into list mode list
list_imp.
LIST:DEXC:EXEC
starts the import of the ASCII file data into the list mode file.
Usage:
Event
Manual control:
See "Import / Export - List Mode" on page 164
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:MODE <Mode>
The command selects if list mode lists should be imported or exported. Depending on
the selection her, the file select command define either the source or the destination for
list mode lists and ASCII files.
Parameters:
<Mode>
IMPort | EXPort
*RST:
IMPort
Example:
LIST:DEXC:MODE IMP
selects that ASCII files with frequency and level value pairs are
imported and transferred into list mode lists.
LIST:DEXC:AFIL:SEL
'/var//user/listmode/import/list.csv'
selects that ASCII file list.csv is imported.
LIST:DEXC:SEL
'root/var//user/listmode/import/list_imp'
selects that the ASCII file list.csv is imported into list mode list
list_imp.
Manual control:
See "Mode - List Mode" on page 163
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DEXChange:SELect <Select>
The command selects the list mode list to be imported or exported.
The list mode files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.lsw in a directory of the
user's choice. The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command
MMEMory:CDIR. A path can also be specified in command SOUR:LIST:DEXC:SEL, in
which case the files are stored or loaded in the specified directory.
Parameters:
<Select>
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
<list_name>
321
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Example:
LIST:DEXC:MODE IMP
selects that ASCII files with frequency and level value pairs are
imported and transferred into list mode lists.
LIST:DEXC:AFIL:SEL
‘/var//user/listmode/import/list.csv'
selects that ASCII file list.csv is imported.
LIST:DEXC:SEL
‘/var//user/listmode/import/list_imp'
selects that the ASCII file list.csv is imported into list mode list
list_imp.
Manual control:
See "Select Destination / Source - List Mode" on page 164
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:DWELl <Dwell>
The command sets the time for which the instrument retains a setting.
Parameters:
<Dwell>
float
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
0.5 ms to 100 s
1E-4
10.0 ms
s
Example:
LIST:DWEL 15
each setting in the list is retained for 15 ms.
Manual control:
See "Dwell Time - List Mode" on page 160
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:FREE?
This command queries on the free storage space for list mode lists.
Return values:
<Free>
integer
Range:
0 to INT_MAX
Increment: 1
*RST:
0
Example:
LIST:FREE?
Usage:
Query only
Response: 2147483647;1
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:FREQuency <Frequency>
The command fills the FREQuency part of the selected list with data.
*RST does not affect data lists.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
322
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Parameters:
<Frequency>
<Frequency#1>{, <Frequency#2>, ...} | block data
The data can be given either as a list of numbers (list can be of
any length and list entries must be separated by commas) or as
binary block data. When block data is transferred, 8 (4) bytes are
always interpreted as a floating-point number with double accuracy (see ​:​FORMat[:​DATA]​ on page 253).
Range:
300 kHz to RFmax (RFmax depending on model)
Example:
LIST:SEL '/var//Lists/Listmode/list3'
selects list3 for editing. List3 is created if it does not yet exist.
SOUR:LIST:FREQ 1.4GHz, 1.3GHz, 1.2GHz,...
specifies the frequency values in list3. If the list already contains
data, it is overwritten.
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
Manual control:
See "Edit List Mode Data... - List Mode" on page 161
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:FREQuency:POINts?
The command queries the length (in points) of the FREQuency component of the selected
list.
Return values:
<Points>
float
Example:
LIST:SEL '/var//Lists/Listmode/list3'
selects list3 for editing. List3 is created if it does not yet exist.
LIST:FREQ:POIN?
queries the number of frequency values in list3.
Response: 327
list3 has 327 frequency entries.
Usage:
Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:INDex <Index>
The command sets the list index in step mode (LIST:MODE STEP).
After the trigger signal the frequency and level settings of the selected index are processed in List mode.
Parameters:
<Index>
float
*RST:
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
0
323
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Example:
LIST:SEL '/var//Lists/Listmode/list3'
selects list3 for use in List mode.
FREQ:MODE LIST
activates List mode. List3 is processed.
LIST:MODE STEP
selects manual, step-by-step processing of the list.
LIST:IND 5
the frequency/level value pair with index 5 is executed.
TRIG:LIST:SOUR SING
selects triggering by means of the single trigger. The list is executed once.
SOUR:LIST:TRIG:EXEC
triggers the processing of the selected list.
Manual control:
See "Current Index - List Mode" on page 160
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:INDex:STARt <Start>
The command sets the start index of the index range which defines a subgroup of frequency/level value pairs in the current list. Only the values in the set index range
(:LIST:INDex:STARt ... :LIST:INDex:STOP) are processed in List mode.
Parameters:
<Start>
float
Range:
*RST:
0 to list length
0
Example:
LIST:SEL '/var//Lists/Listmode/list3'
selects list3 for use in List mode.
LIST:IND:STAR 25
sets 25 as start index of the index range.
LIST:IND:STOP 49
sets 49 as stop index of the index range.
FREQ:MODE LIST
activates List mode. The frequency/level value pairs from index 25
to index 49 in list3 are processed. All other entries of the list are
ignored.
Manual control:
See "List Range In - List Mode" on page 162
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:INDex:STOP <Stop>
The command sets the stop index of the index range which defines a subgroup of frequency/level value pairs in the current list. Only the values in the set index range
(:LIST:INDex:STARt ... :LIST:INDex:STOP) are processed in List mode.
Parameters:
<Stop>
float
Range:
*RST:
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
0 to list length
0
324
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Example:
LIST:SEL '/var//Lists/Listmode/list3'
selects list3 for use in List mode.
LIST:IND:STAR 25
sets 25 as start index of the index range.
LIST:IND:STOP 49
sets 49 as stop index of the index range.
FREQ:MODE LIST
activates List mode. The frequency/level value pairs from index 25
to index 49 in list3 are processed. All other entries of the list are
ignored.
Manual control:
See "List Range In - List Mode" on page 162
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:LEARn
The command learns the selected list, i.e. it determines the hardware setting for the entire
list. The data determined in this way is stored together with the list. When the list is activated for the first time, these settings are calculated automatically.
Example:
LIST:SEL '/var//Lists/Listmode/list3'
selects list3. List3 is created if it does not yet exist.
LIST:LEAR
starts learning of the hardware setting for list3 and stores the setting.
Usage:
Event
Manual control:
See "Learn List Mode Data... - List Mode" on page 160
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:MODE <Mode>
The command specifies how the list is to be processed (similar to
SOURce:SWEep:MODE).
Parameters:
<Mode>
AUTO | STEP
AUTO
Each trigger event triggers a complete list cycle. Possible trigger
settings for :LIST:TRIGger:SOURce are AUTO, SINGle and
EXT.
STEP
Each trigger event triggers only one step in the list processing
cycle. The list is processed in ascending order.
*RST:
AUTO
Example:
LIST:MODE STEP
selects step-by-step processing of the list.
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
Manual control:
See "Mode - List Mode" on page 159
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
325
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:POWer <Power>
The command fills the Level part of the selected list with data.
*RST does not affect data lists.
Parameters:
<Power>
<Power#1>{, <Power#2>, ...} | block data
The data can be given either as a list of numbers (list can be of
any length and list entries must be separated by commas) or as
binary block data. When block data is transferred, 8 (4) bytes are
always interpreted as a floating-point number with double accuracy (see ​:​FORMat[:​DATA]​ on page 253).
Range:
Minimum level to Maximum level
Default unit: dBm
Example:
LIST:SEL '/var//Lists/Listmode/list3'
selects list3 for editing. List3 is created if it does not yet exist.
LIST:POW 0dBm, 2dBm, 2dBm, 3dBm,..
specifies the level values in list3. The number of level values
must correspond to the number of frequency values. The previous
data is overwritten.
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
Manual control:
See "Edit List Mode Data... - List Mode" on page 161
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:POWer:POINts?
The command queries the length (in points) of the LEVel part of the selected list.
Return values:
<points>
float
Example:
LIST:SEL '/var//Lists/Listmode/list3'
selects list3 for editing. List3 is created if it does not yet exist.
LIST:POW:POIN?
queries the number of levels in list3.
Response: 327
LIST2 has 327 level entries.
Usage:
Query only
SCPI confirmed
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:RESet
The command resets the list to the starting point.
Example:
LIST:RES
resets the list to the starting point.
Usage:
Event
Manual control:
See "Reset - List Mode" on page 160
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
326
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:SELect <Select>
The command selects the specified list. If a new list is to be created, the name can be
entered here. The list is created if it does not yet exist. The list selected here is available
for the further processing steps (editing) and is used in the instrument when the List mode
is activated.
The files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.lsw in a directory of the user's choice.
The directory applicable to the command is defined with the command MMEMory:CDIR.
A path can also be specified in command :SOUR:LIST:SEL in which case the list mode
file in the specified directory is selected.
*RST does not affect data lists.
Parameters:
<Select>
'<list name>'
Example:
LIST:SEL '/var//Lists/Listmode/list3'
selects list3 for editing. List3 is created if it does not yet exist.
Manual control:
See "List Mode Data... - List Mode" on page 161
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:TRIGger:EXECute
The command immediately starts the processing of a list in list mode. It corresponds to
the manual-control command "Execute Single."
Example:
SOUR:LIST:TRIG:EXEC
triggers the processing of the selected list.
Usage:
Event
Manual control:
See "Execute Single - List Mode" on page 159
[:SOURce<hw>]:LIST:TRIGger:SOURce <Source>
The command sets the trigger source for the LIST mode.
The names of the parameters correspond to those under sweep mode. SCPI uses other
names for the parameters; these names are also accepted by the instrument. The SCPI
names should be used if compatibility is an important consideration. An overview of the
various names is given in the following table:
R&S name
SCPI name
Command under manual control
AUTO
IMMediate
MODE AUTO
SINGle
BUS
MODE SINGLE or STEP
EXTernal
EXTernal
MODE EXT TRIG SINGLE or EXT
TRIG STEP
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
327
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Parameters:
<Source>
AUTO | IMMediate | SINGle | BUS | EXTernal
AUTO|IMMediate
The trigger is free-running, i.e. the trigger condition is fulfilled continuously. The selected list in List mode is restarted as soon as it
is finished.
SINGle|BUS
The list is triggered by the GPIB commands ​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​
LIST:​TRIGger:​EXECute​. The list is executed once.
EXTernal
The list is triggered externally via the INST TRIG connector. The
list is executed once.
*RST:
SINGle
Example:
LIST:TRIG:SOUR EXT
selects triggering by means of the external trigger.
Manual control:
See "Mode - List Mode" on page 159
7.12.8 SOURce:MODulation Subsystem
This subsystem contains the command for switching on/off all modulations.
[:SOURce<hw>]:MODulation[:ALL]:STATe <State>
The command switches the modulations on and off.
The command SOUR:MOD:ALL:STAT OFF switches all modulations off. A subsequent
command SOUR:MOD:ALL:STAT ON restores the status that was active before the last
switch-off. "MOD OFF" is displayed in the info line of the header next to the "Level" field.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
Example:
MOD:STAT OFF
switches off all modulations.
Manual control:
See "MOD ON/OFF" on page 166
7.12.9 SOURce:PGEN Subsystem
This subsystem contains the commands for setting the pulse generator.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PGEN:​STATe​........................................................................................328
[:SOURce<hw>]:PGEN:STATe <State>
The command activates/deactivates the output of the video/sync signal at the PULSE
VIDEO connector at the rear of the instrument.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
328
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
The signal output and the pulse generator are automatically switched on with activation
of pulse modulation if pulse generator is selected as modulation source. The signal output
can be switched off subsequently.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
OFF
Example:
PULM:SOUR INT
selects the internal pulse generator as source for pulse modulation
PULM:STAT ON
activates pulse modulation. The pulse generator and the output of
the signals at the PULSE VIDEO connector are automatically activated in addition.
PGEN:STAT OFF
deactivates the output of the pulse signal by the pulse generator
at the PULSE VIDEO connector. The pulse modulation of the RF
carrier must be activated with command SOURce:PULM:STATe.
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
Manual control:
See "Video Sync Signal State - Pulse Generator" on page 192
7.12.10 SOURce:PHASe Subsystem
This subsystem contains the commands for adjusting the phase of the RF output signal
relative to a reference signal of the same frequency.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PHASe​.................................................................................................329
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PHASe:​REFerence​................................................................................329
[:SOURce<hw>]:PHASe <Phase>
The command specifies the phase variation relative to the current phase. The variation
can be specified in RADians.
Parameters:
<Phase>
float
Range:
-359.9 to 359.9
Increment: 0.1 deg
*RST:
0.0 deg
Example:
PHAS 2DEG
changes the phase by 2 degrees relative to the current phase.
PHAS:REF
adopts the set phase as the current phase.
Manual control:
See "Delta Phase - RF Signal" on page 117
[:SOURce<hw>]:PHASe:REFerence
The command adopts the phase set with SOURce:PHASe:ADJust as the current phase.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
329
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Example:
PHAS 0.1RAD
changes the phase by 0.1 RAD relative to the current phase.
PHAS:REF
adopts the set phase as the current phase.
Usage:
Event
Manual control:
See "Reset Delta Phase Display - RF Signal" on page 117
7.12.11 SOURce:PM Subsystem
The PM subsystem contains the commands for checking the phase modulation. The
settings for the internal modulation source (LF generator) are made in the ​
SOURce:LFOutput subsystem.
For information about the required options, see ​chapter 5.4.4, "Phase Modulation
(PhiM)", on page 173.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PM[:​DEViation]​......................................................................................330
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PM:​EXTernal:​COUPling​.........................................................................330
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PM:​EXTernal:​DEViation​.........................................................................331
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PM:​MODE​............................................................................................331
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PM:​SENSitivity?​....................................................................................332
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PM:​SOURce​.........................................................................................333
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PM:​STATe​............................................................................................333
[:SOURce<hw>]:PM[:DEViation] <Deviation>
The command sets the modulation deviation of the phase modulation in RAD. The maximal deviation depends on the RF frequency set and the selected modulation mode (see
data sheet).
The deviation of the internal source must not exceed the deviation of the external source
in case of modulation source "Int+Ext" (PM:SOURce INT,EXT).
Parameters:
<Deviation>
float
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
0 to 20
See data sheet
1
RAD
Example:
PM 5
sets the PM modulation deviation to 5 RAD
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
Manual control:
See "PhiM Deviation" on page 175
[:SOURce<hw>]:PM:EXTernal:COUPling <Coupling>
The command selects the coupling mode for the external modulation input in the case of
phase modulation.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
330
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Note: Coupling for external feed via input MOD EXT can be set independently for modulations FM and PhiM.
Parameters:
<Coupling>
AC | DC
AC
The DC voltage component is disconnected from the modulation
signal.
DC
The modulation signal is not changed.
*RST:
AC
Example:
PM:EXT:COUP AC
selects the coupling mode AC for external phase modulation.
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
Manual control:
See "Mod External Coupling" on page 176
[:SOURce<hw>]:PM:EXTernal:DEViation <Deviation>
The command sets the modulation deviation in case of external phase modulation in
RAD. The maximal deviation depends on the RF frequency set and the selected modulation mode (see data sheet).
Parameters:
<Deviation>
float
Range:
0 to 20
Increment: See data sheet
Default unit: RAD
Example:
PM 5
sets the PM modulation deviation for external phase modulation
of 5 RAD.
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
[:SOURce<hw>]:PM:MODE <Mode>
The command selects the mode for the phase modulation.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
331
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Parameters:
<Mode>
HBANdwidth | HDEViation | LNOise
HBANdwidth
The maximum range for modulation bandwidth is available. However, phase noise is increased for low frequencies. The range for
PhiM deviation is limited. This mode is recommended for high
modulation frequencies.
HDEViation
The maximum range for PhiM deviation is available. Phase noise
is improved for low frequencies. The range for modulation frequency is limited (see data sheet). This mode is recommended for
low modulation frequencies and/or high PhiM deviation.
LNOise
Phase modulation with phase noise and spurious characteristics
close to CW mode. The range for modulation bandwidth and PM
deviation is limited (see data sheet)
*RST:
HBANdwidth
Example:
PM:MODE LNO
selects Low Noise mode for external phase modulation.
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
Manual control:
See "PhiM Mode" on page 174
[:SOURce<hw>]:PM:SENSitivity?
The command queries the input sensitivity of the EXT MOD input in RAD/V. The command is only effective if the external modulation source is selected (SOUR:PM:SOUR
EXT). The returned value depends on the modulation deviation setting
(SOUR:PM:DEViation). This value is assigned to the voltage value for full modulation
of the input.
Return values:
<Sensitivity>
float
Example:
PM:DEV 1
sets a modulation deviation of 1RAD.
PM:SENS?
queries the input sensitivity at the EXT MOD input.
Response: 1
since the voltage value for full modulation is 1V, the resulting sensitivity is precisely 1RAD/V.
Usage:
Query only
SCPI confirmed
Manual control:
See "PhiM Sensitivity" on page 175
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
332
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:PM:SOURce <Source>
The command selects the modulation source for phase modulation.
Parameters:
<Source>
INTernal | EXTernal | INT,EXT
INTernal
INT is the LF generator. The frequency of the internal modulation
signal can be set in the SOURce:LFOutput subsystem.
EXTernal
The external signal is input at the MOD EXT connector.
INT,EXT
Internal and external modulation source can be selected at the
same time.
*RST:
INTernal
Example:
PM:SOUR INT
selects the internal modulation source.
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
Manual control:
See "PhiM Source" on page 174
[:SOURce<hw>]:PM:STATe <State>
The command activates/deactivates phase modulation. Activation of phase modulation
deactivates frequency modulation.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
OFF
Example:
PM:STAT ON
activates PM modulation.
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
Manual control:
See "State" on page 174
7.12.12 SOURce:POWer Subsystem
This subsystem contains the commands for setting the output level, level control and level
correction of the RF signal.
Other units can also be used instead of dBm:
●
by entering the unit directly after the numerical value (example :POW 0.5V)
●
by changing the DEFault unit in the UNIT system (see the command ​:​UNIT:​
POWer​).
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
333
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​ALC:​OMODe​.............................................................................334
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​ALC:​SONCe​..............................................................................334
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​ALC[:​STATe]​.............................................................................335
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​ATTenuation:​RFOFf:​MODE​.........................................................335
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer[:​LEVel][:​IMMediate][:​AMPLitude]​..................................................336
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer[:​LEVel][:​IMMediate]:​OFFSet​........................................................336
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer[:​LEVel][:​IMMediate]:​RCL​.............................................................337
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​LIMit[:​AMPLitude]​.......................................................................337
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​LMODe​.....................................................................................338
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​MANual​.....................................................................................338
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​MODE​.......................................................................................339
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​POWer​......................................................................................340
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​SPC:​CRANge​............................................................................340
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​SPC:​DELay​...............................................................................341
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​SPC:​PEAK​................................................................................341
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​SPC:​SELect​..............................................................................341
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​SPC:​STATe​...............................................................................341
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​SPC:​TARGet​.............................................................................342
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​STARt​.......................................................................................342
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​STEP[:​INCRement]​....................................................................343
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​STEP:​MODE​.............................................................................343
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​STOP​........................................................................................343
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:ALC:OMODe <OffMode>
The command sets the level control mode which becomes active when automatic level
control is deactivated (ALC Off).
Parameters:
<OffMode>
SHOLd
SHOLd
Level control is activated briefly if the level or frequency changes
("ALC Off Sample & Hold").
*RST:
Example:
SHOLd
POW:ALC OFF
deactivates automatic level control for RF output A.
POW:ALC:OMOD SHOL
level control is briefly activated if the frequency or level changes.
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:ALC:SONCe
The command briefly activates level control for correction purposes.
Example:
POW:ALC OFF
deactivates automatic level control for RF output A.
POW:ALC:SONC
level control is performed once only.
Usage:
Event
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
334
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Manual control:
See "Search Once - ALC" on page 128
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:ALC[:STATe] <State>
The command activates/deactivates automatic level control.
Parameters:
<State>
ON | OFF | AUTO
ON
Internal level control is permanently activated.
OFF
Internal level control is deactivated; Sample & Hold mode is activated.
AUTO
Internal level control is activated/deactivated automatically
depending on the operating state.
*RST:
AUTO
Example:
POW:ALC ON
activates automatic level control for RF output A.
Manual control:
See "State - ALC" on page 127
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:ATTenuation:RFOFf:MODE <Mode>
Selects the attenuator mode, when the RF signal is switched off.
The setting of the RF OFF mode is not affected by an instrument preset (PRESET key),
*RST and the "Save/Recall" function. This parameter is influenced only by the ​Factory
Preset.
Parameters:
<Mode>
UNCHanged | FATTenuation
UNCHanged
Freezes the setting of the attenuator when RF is switched off. The
attenuator is only activated when RF is switched on.
This setting recommended if a constant VSWR (Voltage Standing
Wave Ratio) is required.
Furthermore, on instruments equipped with a mechanical attenuator, it provides fast and wear-free operation.
FATTenuation
Sets attenuation to maximum when the RF signal is switched off.
This setting is recommended for applications that require a high
level of noise suppression.
*RST:
FATTenuation
Example:
SOUR:POW:ATT:RFOF:MODE FATT
sets the RF OFF attenuator to maximum.
Manual control:
See "RF OFF Mode" on page 124
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
335
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude] <Amplitude>
The command sets the RF output level in CW mode. In addition to numerical values, it
is also possible to specify UP and DOWN. The level is then increased or decreased by the
value specified under [SOURce<hw>:]POWer:STEP.
As with the Level value entered in the header, the OFFSet value is also taken into consideration with this command.
The specified value range is therefore only effective if :SOURce:POWer:OFFSet is set
to 0. The value range for other OFFSet values can be calculated using the following
formula:
Minimum level + OFFSet ... Maximum level + OFFSet
The keywords of this command are largely optional. Therefore, both the long and short
form of the command are shown in the example.
Parameters:
<Amplitude>
Minimum level ... Maximum level
The value range for the level setting varies according to the instrument model.
The values are given in the data sheet.
Increment: 0.01 dB
*RST:
-30 dBm
Default unit: dBm
Example:
SOUR:POW:LEV:IMM:AMPL 15
or
:POW 15
sets the RF level at output A to 15 dBm.
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
Manual control:
See "RF Level" on page 120
See "Amplitude" on page 122
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet <Offset>
Note: The level offset is also effective for level sweeps!
The command specifies the constant level offset of a downstream attenuator/amplifier. If
a level offset is entered, the level entered with :POWer no longer corresponds to the RF
output level.
The following correlation applies:
:POWer = RF output level + POWer:OFFSet.
Entering a level offset does not change the RF output level, but rather the query value
of :POWer.
For more information, see ​"RF level vs. RF output level" on page 119.
Only dB is permitted as the unit here. The linear units (V, W, etc.) are not permitted.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
336
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
The keywords of this command are largely optional. Therefore, both the long and short
form of the command are shown in the example.
Parameters:
<Offset>
float
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
-100 dB to 100 dB
0.01 dB
0 dB
dB
Example:
SOURce:POWer:LEVel:IMMediate:OFFSet -10
or
POW:OFFS 10
sets the RF level offset to 10 dB
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
Manual control:
See "Offset (Level)" on page 122
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:RCL <Rcl>
The command determines whether the current level is retained or whether the stored
level setting is adopted when an instrument configuration is loaded.
*RST does not affect this setting.
Parameters:
<Rcl>
INCLude | EXCLude
INCLude
The stored level is also loaded when a stored instrument configuration is loaded.
EXCLude
The RF level is not loaded when a stored instrument configuration
is loaded. The current level is retained.
*RST:
no default
Example:
POW:RCL INCL
the stored level is set if the Recall command is called.
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
Manual control:
See "Exclude Level" on page 109
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:LIMit[:AMPLitude] <Amplitude>
The command limits the maximum RF output level in CW and SWEEP mode. It does not
influence the "Level" display or the response to the POW? query command.
The value is not affected by an instrument preset (PRESET key), *RST and the Save/
Recall function. This parameter is influenced only by the factory preset (SYST:FPR) and
its factory value is equal to the upper limit.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
337
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Parameters:
<Amplitude>
float
Minimum level ... Maximum level
The value range for the level setting varies according to the instrument model.
The values are given in the data sheet.
Increment: 0.01 dB
*RST:
30 dBm
Default unit: dBm
Example:
SOURce:POWer:LIMit:AMPLitude 10
or
:POW:LIM 10
limits the RF level to maximum +10 dBm.
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
Manual control:
See "Limit - RF Level" on page 122
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:LMODe <LevMode>
The command sets the RF level mode.
Parameters:
<LevMode>
NORMal | LOWNoise | LOWDistortion
NORMal
The RF signal is output in the standard values of the instrument.
LOWNoise
A very low noise sinewave signal is output.
LOWDistortion
A very pure sinewave signal is output.
Example:
POW:LMODE LOWD
sets the LOWDistortion mode. The instrument reduces distortions
of the RF signal to a minimum.
Manual control:
See "RF Mode" on page 121
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:MANual <Manual>
In Sweep mode (:SOUR:POW:MODE SWE) the command sets the level for the next
sweep step in the Step sweep mode (:SOUR:SWE:POW:MODE MAN). Here only level
values between the settings [:SOUR]:POW:STAR and [:SOUR]:POW:STOP are permitted. Each sweep step is triggered by a separate :SOUR:POW:MAN command.
As with the "Level" value entered in the "RF Level" menu, the OFFSet value is also taken
into consideration with this command.
The specified value range is therefore only effective if :SOURce:POWer:OFFSet is set
to 0. The value range for other OFFset values can be calculated using the following
formula:
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
338
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Minimum level + OFFSet ... Maximum level + OFFSet
Parameters:
<Manual>
float
Minimum level ... Maximum level
The value range for the level setting varies according to the instrument model
The values are given in the data sheet.
Increment: 0.01 dBm
*RST:
-30 dBm
Default unit: dBm
Example:
POW:SWE:MODE MAN
sets the Step sweep mode for RF output A.
POW:MAN -5 dBm
sets an RF level of -5 dBm for the next setting in the Step sweep
mode for RF output A.
POW:MODE SWE
sets the Level Sweep mode for RF output A.
POW:MAN -5.5 dBm
triggers the next sweep step with a level of -5.5 dBm.
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
Manual control:
See "Current Level - Level Sweep" on page 156
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:MODE <Mode>
The command sets the instrument operating mode and therefore also the commands
used to set the output level.
Parameters:
<Mode>
CW | FIXed | SWEep
CW|FIXed
The instrument operates at a constant level. CW and FIXed are
synonyms. The output level is set with :SOURce:POWer.
SWEep
The instrument operates in SWEep mode.
The level is set using the commands SOURce:POWer:STARt;
STOP; MANual.
LIST
The instrument processes a list of frequency and level settings.
The List mode settings are made in the ​SOURce:LIST Subsystem subsystem.
The setting SOURce:POWer:MODE LIST also sets the command
SOURce:FREQuency:MODE automatically to LIST.
*RST:
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
CW
339
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Example:
POW:MODE SWEep
sets the SWEep mode. The settings under SOURce:POW:STARt;
STOP; MANual become effective.
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
Manual control:
See "State - Level Sweep" on page 153
See "Mode - Level Sweep" on page 153
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:POWer <Power>
Sets the RF level of the RF output connector.
The level entered with this command corresponds to the level at the RF output, i.e. any
offset entry is not taken into consideration.
Note: The SCPI command ​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer[:​LEVel][:​IMMediate][:​
AMPLitude]​ sets the level of the "Level" display, i.e. the level containing offset.
Parameters:
<Power>
Minimum level ... Maximum level
The value range for the level setting varies according to the instrument model.
The values are given in the data sheet.
Increment: 0.01 dB
*RST:
-30 dBm
Default unit: dBm
Example:
SOUR:POW:POW 15
sets the RF level at output to 15 dBm.
Manual control:
See "Amplitude" on page 122
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:SPC:CRANge <PowCntrlCRange>
Defines the capture range of the power control system.
Within the range:
Target Level +/- Catch Range
the power control locks and tries to achieve the target level. Readings outside the range
are not considered.
Parameters:
<PowCntrlCRange>
float
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
Example:
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
0 to 50
0.01
30
dB
POW:SPC:CRAN 15
sets the capture range to +/- 15 dB.
340
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Manual control:
See "Catch Range +/-" on page 131
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:SPC:DELay <PowCntrlDelay>
Defines a waiting period between the level adjustment of the generator and the next
measurement of the power sensor.
Parameters:
<PowCntrlDelay>
integer
Range:
0 to 1000
Increment: 1
*RST:
0
Example:
:POW:SPC:DEL 2 ms
the sensor starts the next reading 2 ms after the level adjustment.
Manual control:
See "Delay Time" on page 131
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:SPC:PEAK <PowCntrlPeak>
Activates power control by means of the peak power values, provided the power sensor
supports this function.
Parameters:
<PowCntrlPeak>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
POW:SPC:PEAK ON
uses the measured peak power for power control.
Manual control:
See "Use Peak Power" on page 131
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:SPC:SELect <PowCntrlSelect>
Defines the currently selected sensor to be used for power control.
Parameters:
<PowCntrlSelect>
SENS1 | SENS2 | SENS3 | SENS4
*RST:
SENS1
Example:
POW:SPC:SEL SENS2
selects the sensor connected to a second USB interface for power
control.
Manual control:
See "Sensor" on page 129
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:SPC:STATe <PowCntrlState>
Activates power control using the selected sensor. The control loop periodically adjusts
the generator output. After switching off, the running loop is completed.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
341
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Parameters:
<PowCntrlState>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
POW:SPC:STAT ON
activates power control.
Manual control:
See "State" on page 130
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:SPC:TARGet <PowCntrlTarget>
Sets the nominal level expected at the input of the sensor. To define the unit of the power
value, use command ​SENSe<ch>:​UNIT[:​POWer]​ on page 282.
Parameters:
<PowCntrlTarget>
float
Range:
-50 to 30
Increment: 0.01
*RST:
-10
Example:
SENS:UNIT dBm
selects unit dBm for setting the target level value.
POW:SPC:TARG -10
sets -10 dBm target level.
Manual control:
See "Target Level" on page 131
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STARt <Start>
The command sets the RF start level in Sweep mode.
As with the "Level" value entered in the "RF Level" menu, the OFFSet value is also taken
into consideration with this command.
The specified value range is therefore only effective if :SOURce:POWer:OFFSet is set
to 0. The value range for other OFFset values can be calculated using the following
formula:
Minimum level + OFFSet ... Maximum level + OFFSet
Parameters:
<Start>
float
Minimum level ... Maximum level
The value range for the level setting varies according to the instrument model. The values are given in the data sheet.
Increment: 0.01 dB
*RST:
-30 dBm
Default unit: dBm
Example:
POW:STAR -20 dBm
sets the start level for the level sweep to -15 dBm for RF output A.
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
342
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Manual control:
See "Start Level - Level Sweep" on page 156
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STEP[:INCRement] <Increment>
The command sets the step width for the level setting if UP and DOWN are used as the
level values and variation mode :SOUR:POW:STEP:MODE USER is selected. The command is linked to setting "Variation Step" for manual control, i.e. the command also sets
the step width of the rotary knob for "Variation Active On".
Parameters:
<Increment>
float
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
0 dB to 100 dB
0.01 dB
1 dB
dB
Example:
SOURce:POWer:STEP:INCRement 2
or
POW:STEP 2
sets the step width for entering the RF level to 2 dB.
Manual control:
See "Variation Step" on page 124
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STEP:MODE <Mode>
This command activates (USER) or deactivates (DECimal) the user-defined step width
used when varying the level value with the level values UP/DOWN. The command is linked
to setting "Variation Active" for manual control, i.e. the command also activates/deactivates the user-defined step width used when varying the level value with the rotary knob.
Parameters:
<Mode>
DECimal | USER
*RST:
DECimal
Example:
POW:STEP 2
sets the step width for the level setting to 2 dB.
POW:STEP:MODE USER
actives this step width for level variation with the rotary knob (manual control) and with level values UP/DOWN (remote control).
Manual control:
See "Variation Active" on page 124
[:SOURce<hw>]:POWer:STOP <Stop>
The command sets the stop level in Sweep mode.
As with the Level value entered in the RF Level menu, the OFFSet value is also taken
into consideration with this command.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
343
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
The specified value range is therefore only effective if :SOURce:POWer:OFFSet is set
to 0. The value range for other OFFset values can be calculated using the following
formula:
Minimum level + OFFSet ... Maximum level + OFFSet
Parameters:
<Stop>
float
Minimum level ... Maximum level
The value range for the level setting varies according to the instrument model.
The values are given in the data sheet.
Increment: 0.01 dB
*RST:
-10 dBm
Default unit: dBm
Example:
POW:STOP 3
sets the stop level for the level sweep to 3 dBm for RF output A.
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
Manual control:
See "Stop Level - Level Sweep" on page 156
7.12.13 SOURce:PULM Subsystem
This subsystem contains the commands for setting the pulse modulation.
The LF generator is used as the internal modulation source. The pulse frequency of the
internal rectangular signal is therefore set in the SOURce:LFOutput subsystem.
The external signal is input at the PULSE EXT connector. The connector can be used as
trigger input for internal pulse modulation. The polarity and input impedance of the connector can be selected. The pulse modulation signal is output at the PULSE VIDEO connector.
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​DELay​........................................................................................345
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​DOUBle:​DELay​............................................................................345
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​DOUBle:​STATe​...........................................................................346
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​DOUBle:​WIDTh​...........................................................................346
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​MODE​........................................................................................346
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​OUTPut:​SYNC[:​STATe]​................................................................347
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​PERiod​.......................................................................................347
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​POLarity​.....................................................................................348
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​SOURce​.....................................................................................348
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​STATe​........................................................................................349
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRAin:​CATalog?​..........................................................................349
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRAin:​DELete​.............................................................................350
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRAin:​OFFTime​..........................................................................350
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRAin:​OFFTime:​POINts?​.............................................................351
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRAin:​ONTime​............................................................................351
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRAin:​ONTime:​POINts?​...............................................................351
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRAin:​REPetition​.........................................................................352
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
344
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRAin:​REPetition:​POINts?​............................................................352
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRAin:​SELect​..............................................................................353
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRIGger:​EXTernal:​GATE:​POLarity​................................................353
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRIGger:​EXTernal:​IMPedance​......................................................354
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRIGger:​EXTernal:​SLOPe​............................................................354
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRIGger:​MODE​...........................................................................354
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRAin:​DEXChange:​AFILe:​CATalog?​.............................................355
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRAin:​DEXChange:​AFILe:​EXTension​............................................356
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRAin:​DEXChange:​AFILe:​SELect​.................................................356
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRAin:​DEXChange:​AFILe:​SEParator:​COLumn​...............................357
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRAin:​DEXChange:​AFILe:​SEParator:​DECimal​...............................357
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRAin:​DEXChange:​EXECute​........................................................358
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRAin:​DEXChange:​MODE​............................................................358
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRAin:​DEXChange:​SELect​...........................................................359
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​WIDTh​........................................................................................359
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:DELay <Delay>
The command sets the pulse delay. The pulse delay determines the time that elapses
after a trigger event before pulse modulation starts. The pulse delay is not effective for
double pulse generation.
Parameters:
<Delay>
float
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
0 to 100 s
10 ns
10 ns
ns
Example:
PULM:DEL 13 us
13 us elapse after a trigger before the first pulse is generated.
Options:
R&S SMB-K23 (Pulse Generator)
Manual control:
See "Pulse Delay - Pulse Generator" on page 193
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:DOUBle:DELay <Delay>
The command sets the delay from the start of the first pulse to the start of the second
pulse.
Parameters:
<Delay>
float
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
Example:
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
20 ns to 100 s
10 ns
3 us
ns
PULM:DOUB:DEL 22 us
22 us elapse between the beginning of the first pulse and the
beginning of the second pulse in double-pulse mode.
345
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Options:
R&S SMB-K23 (Pulse Generator)
Manual control:
See "Double Pulse Delay - Pulse Generator" on page 193
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:DOUBle:STATe <State>
The command enables/disables double pulse generation. The two pulses are generated
in one pulse period.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
OFF
Example:
PULM:DOUB:STAT ON
double-pulse mode is enabled.
Options:
R&S SMB-K23 (Pulse Generator)
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:DOUBle:WIDTh <Width>
The command sets the width of the second pulse in case of double pulse generation.
Parameters:
<Width>
float
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
10 ns to 100 s
10 ns
3 us
ns
Example:
PULM:DOUB:WIDT 33 us
sets a width of 33 us for the second pulse.
Options:
R&S SMB-K23 (Pulse Generator)
Manual control:
See "Double Pulse Width - Pulse Generator" on page 193
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:MODE <Mode>
Sets the mode of the pulse generator.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
346
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Parameters:
<Mode>
SINGle | DOUBle | PTRain
SINGle
Enables single pulse generation.
DOUBle
Enables double pulse generation. The two pulses are generated
in one pulse period.
PTRain
A user-defined pulse train is generated The pulse train is defined
by value pairs of on and off times that can be entered in a pulse
train list.
*RST:
SINGle
Example:
PULM:MODE DOUB
enables double pulse generation.
Options:
R&S SMB-K23 (Pulse Generator), R&S SMB-K27 (Pulse Train)
Manual control:
See "Pulse Mode - Pulse Generator" on page 192
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:OUTPut:SYNC[:STATe] <Sync>
Configures the signal at the SIGNAL VALID connector.
Parameters:
<Sync>
OFF | ON | 1 | 0
ON
Generates a single pulse at the beginning of a pulse sequence,
e.g. to synchronize pulse modulation.
OFF
Returns the validity of the RF signal at the output:
1 (high), while the signal settles.
0 (low), when it is stable (valid).
*RST:
OFF
Example:
PULM:OUTP:SYNC ON
uses the signal for synchronizing the pulse modulation.
Options:
R&S SMB-K23 (Pulse Generator)
Manual control:
See "Use SIGNAL VALID as Pulse Sync" on page 194
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:PERiod <Period>
The command sets the period of the generated pulse. The period determines the repetition frequency of the internal signal.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
347
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Parameters:
<Period>
float
Range:
40 ns to 100 s
Increment: 10 ns
*RST:
10 us
Example:
PULM:PER 220 us
the pulse period is 220 us.
Options:
R&S SMB-K23 (Pulse Generator)
Manual control:
See "Pulse Period - Pulse Generator" on page 193
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:POLarity <Polarity>
The command sets the polarity between modulating and modulated signal. This command is only effective for an external modulation signal.
Parameters:
<Polarity>
NORMal | INVerted
NORMal
The RF signal is suppressed during the pulse pause.
INVerted
The RF signal is suppressed during the pulse.
*RST:
NORMal
Example:
PULM:SOUR EXT
selects the external modulation source.
Example:
PULM:POL INV
selects inverted polarity.
Options:
R&S SMB-K22 (Pulse Modulator)
Manual control:
See "Polarity" on page 178
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:SOURce <Source>
The command selects the source for pulse modulation.
Parameters:
<Source>
INTernal | EXTernal
INTernal
The internally generated rectangular signal is used for the pulse
modulation. The frequency of the internal signal can be set in the
SOURce:LFOutput subsystem.
EXTernal
The signal applied externally via the EXT MOD connector is used
for the pulse modulation.
*RST:
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
INTernal
348
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Example:
PULM:SOUR INT
selects the internal modulation source.
Example:
PULM:STAT ON
activates the pulse modulation.
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
Options:
R&S SMB-K21 or R&S SMB-K22 (Pulse Modulator)
Manual control:
See "Source" on page 177
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:STATe <State>
The command activates/deactivates the pulse modulation.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
OFF
Example:
PULM:STAT ON
activates pulse modulation with the modulation source selected
under SOURce:PULM:SOURce.
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
Options:
R&S SMB-K21 or R&S SMB-K22 (Pulse Modulator)
Manual control:
See "State" on page 177
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:CATalog?
The command requests a list of available pulse train files. The individual pulse train files
are separated by commas.
The files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.pulstrn in a directory of the user's
choice. The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command
MMEMory:CDIR.
Return values:
<Catalog>
string
Example:
MMEM:CDIR 'var/lists/pulsetrain'
selects the directory for the pulse train files.
PULM:TRA:CAT?
queries the available files.
Response: 'P_CONS','P_INCR','P_DECR'
the lists P_CONS, P_INCR and P_DECR are available.
Usage:
Query only
Options:
R&S SMB-K27 (Pulse Train)
Manual control:
See "Pulse Train Data – Pulse Generator" on page 195
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
349
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DELete <Delete>
The command deletes the specified pulse train file.
The files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.pulstrn in a directory of the user's
choice. The directory applicable to the command is defined with the command
MMEMory:CDIR. To access the files in this directory, only the file name has to be given
without the path and the file extension.
Setting parameters:
<Delete>
<list file name>
Example:
MMEM:CDIR 'var/lists/pulsetrain'
selects the directory for the pulse train files.
PULM:TRA:DEL 'P_FIVE'
deletes the list P_FIVE
Usage:
Setting only
Options:
R&S SMB-K27 (Pulse Train)
Manual control:
See "Pulse Train Data – Pulse Generator" on page 195
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:OFFTime <Offtime>
The command fills the Offtime part of the selected file with data.
*RST does not affect data lists.
Parameters:
<Offtime>
Offtime#1{, Offtime#2, ...} | binary block data
The data can be given either as a list of numbers (list can be of
any length and list entries must be separated by commas) or as
binary block data.
When block data is transferred, 8 (4) bytes are always interpreted
as a floating-point number with double accuracy (see the command FORMat:DATA).
The maximum length is 1023 values.
Range:
5ns to 5ms
Example:
MMEM:CDIR 'var/lists/pulsetrain'
selects the directory for the pulse train files.
PULM:TRA:SEL ‘P_INCR'
selects P_INCR for editing. P_INCR is created if it does not yet
exist.
PULM:TRA:OFFT 10ns,15ns,40ns,...
specifies the offtime values in P_INCR. If the list already contains
data, it is overwritten.
Options:
R&S SMB-K27 (Pulse Train)
Manual control:
See "Edit Pulse Train Data" on page 195
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
350
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:OFFTime:POINts?
The command queries the length (in points) of the offtime component of the selected list.
Return values:
<Points>
float
Example:
MMEM:CDIR 'var/lists/pulsetrain'
selects the directory for the pulse train files.
PULM:TRA:SEL ‘P_INCR'
selects P_INCR for editing. P_INCR is created if it does not yet
exist.
PULM:TRA:OFFT:POIN?
queries the number of frequency values in P_INCR
Response: 7
P_INCR has 7 offtime entries.
Usage:
Query only
Options:
R&S SMB-K27 (Pulse Train)
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:ONTime <Ontime>
The command fills the Ontime part of the selected file with data.
Parameters:
<Ontime>
Onime#1{, Ontime#2, ...} | binary block data
The data can be given either as a list of numbers (list can be of
any length and list entries must be separated by commas) or as
binary block data.
When block data is transferred, 8 (4) bytes are always interpreted
as a floating-point number with double accuracy (see the command FORMat:DATA).
The maximum length is 1023 values.
Range:
5ns to 5ms
Example:
MMEM:CDIR 'var/lists/pulsetrain'
selects the directory for the pulse train files.
PULM:TRA:SEL ‘P_INCR'
selects P_INCR for editing. P_INCR is created if it does not yet
exist.
PULM:TRA:ONT 10ns,15ns,40ns,...
specifies the ontime values in P_INCR. If the list already contains
data, it is overwritten.
Options:
R&S SMB-K27 (Pulse Train)
Manual control:
See "Edit Pulse Train Data" on page 195
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:ONTime:POINts?
The command queries the length (in points) of the ontime component of the selected list.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
351
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Return values:
<Points>
float
Example:
MMEM:CDIR 'var/lists/pulsetrain'
selects the directory for the pulse train files.
PULM:TRA:SEL ‘P_INCR'
selects P_INCR for editing. P_INCR is created if it does not yet
exist.
PULM:TRA:ONT:POIN?
queries the number of frequency values in P_INCR
Response: 7
P_INCR has 7 ontime entries.
Usage:
Query only
Options:
R&S SMB-K27 (Pulse Train)
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:REPetition <Repetition>
The command sets the number of repetitions for each ontime/offtime value pair. The
maximum number of repetitions for all value pairs is 1023 values.
*RST does not affect data lists.
Parameters:
<Repetition>
Repetition#1{, Repetition#2, ...}
Range:
1 to max
Example:
MMEM:CDIR 'var/lists/pulsetrain'
selects the directory for the pulse train files.
PULM:TRA:SEL ‘P_INCR'
selects P_INCR for editing. P_INCR is created if it does not yet
exist.
PULM:TRA:ONT 10ns,15ns,40ns,...
specifies the ontime values in P_INCR. If the list already contains
data, it is overwritten.
PULM:TRA:OFFT 10ns,15ns,40ns,...
specifies the offtime values in P_INCR. If the list already contains
data, it is overwritten.
PULM:TRA:REP 10,15,40,...
specifies the number of repetitions for each value pair.
Options:
R&S SMB-K27 (Pulse Train)
Manual control:
See "Edit Pulse Train Data" on page 195
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:REPetition:POINts?
The command queries the length (in points) of the repetition component of the selected
list.
Return values:
<Points>
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
float
352
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Example:
MMEM:CDIR 'var/lists/pulsetrain'
selects the directory for the pulse train files.
PULM:TRA:SEL ‘P_INCR'
selects P_INCR for editing. P_INCR is created if it does not yet
exist.
PULM:TRA:REP:POIN?
queries the number of repetition values in P_INCR
Response: 7
P_INCR has 7 repetition entries.
Usage:
Query only
Options:
R&S SMB-K27 (Pulse Train)
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:SELect <Select>
The command selects the specified pulse train file. If a new file is to be created, the name
can be entered here. The file is created if it does not yet exist. The file selected here is
available for the further processing steps (editing) and is used in the instrument when the
pulse train mode is activated.
The files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.pulstrn in a directory of the user's
choice. The directory applicable to the command is defined with the command
MMEMory:CDIR.
*RST does not affect data lists.
Parameters:
<Select>
string
Example:
MMEM:CDIR 'var/lists/pulsetrain'
selects the directory for the pulse train files.
PULM:TRA:SEL ‘P_INCR'
selects P_INCR for editing. P_INCR is created if it does not yet
exist.
Options:
R&S SMB-K27 (Pulse Train)
Manual control:
See "Pulse Train Data – Pulse Generator" on page 195
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRIGger:EXTernal:GATE:POLarity <Polarity>
Selects the polarity of the Gate signal.
The signal is supplied via the PULSE EXT connector.
Parameters:
<Polarity>
NORMal | INVerted
*RST:
NORMal
Example:
PULM:TRIG:EXT:GATE:POL NORM
The pulse signal is generated while the gate signal is high.
Options:
R&S SMB-K23 (Pulse Generator)
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
353
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Manual control:
See "Gate Input Polarity - Pulse Generator" on page 194
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRIGger:EXTernal:IMPedance <Impedance>
The command selects the impedance for external pulse trigger. The trigger is fed via the
PULSE EXT input.
Parameters:
<Impedance>
G50 | G10K
*RST:
G10K
Example:
SOUR:PULM:TRIG:EXT:IMP G50
selects 50 Ohm as the trigger impedance for the external pulse
trigger.
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
Options:
R&S SMB-K21 or R&S SMB-K22 (Pulse Modulator)
Manual control:
See "Pulse External Input Impedance" on page 194
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRIGger:EXTernal:SLOPe <Slope>
The command sets the polarity of the active slope of an applied trigger at the PULSE
EXT connector.
Parameters:
<Slope>
POS | NEG
*RST:
POSitive
Example:
PULM:TRIG:EXT:SLOP NEG
The pulse generator is triggered on the negative slope of the
external trigger signal.
Options:
R&S SMB-K23 (Pulse Generator)
Manual control:
See "External Trigger Input Slope - Pulse Generator"
on page 193
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRIGger:MODE <Mode>
The command selects the trigger mode for pulse modulation.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
354
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Parameters:
<Mode>
AUTO | EXTernal | EGATe
AUTO
The pulse modulation is generated continuously.
EXTernal
The pulse modulation is triggered by an external trigger event. The
trigger signal is supplied via the PULSE EXT connector.
EGATe
The pulse modulation is gated by an external gate signal. The signal is supplied via the PULSE EXT connector.
*RST:
AUTO
Example:
PULM:TRIG:MODE EXT
selects triggering by an external trigger event.
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
Options:
R&S SMB-K23 (Pulse Generator)
Manual control:
See "Trigger Mode - Pulse Generator" on page 193
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:CATalog?
The command requests a list of available ASCII files for export/import of pulse train data.
The individual files are separated by commas.
The ASCII files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.txt or *.csv in a directory of
the user's choice. The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command
MMEMory:CDIR.
Return values:
<Catalog>
string
Example:
MMEM:CDIR ‘var/lists/pulsetrain/import’
selects the directory for the ASCII files with ontime/offtime/repetition values.
PULM:TRA:DEXC:AFIL:EXT TXT
selects that ASCII files with extension *.txt are listed.
PULM:TRA:DEXC:AFIL:CAT?
queries the available files with extension *.txt.
Response: 'train1','train2'
the ASCII files train1.txt and train2.txt are available.
Usage:
Query only
Options:
R&S SMB-K27 (Pulse Train)
Manual control:
See "Select ASCII Source / Destination - Import/Export Pulse
Train Files" on page 198
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
355
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:EXTension <Extension>
The command selects the file extension of the ASCII file to be imported or exported.
Selection TXT (text file) or CSV (Excel file) is available.
Parameters:
<Extension>
TXT | CSV
*RST:
TXT
Example:
MMEM:CDIR 'var/lists/pulsetrain/import'
selects the directory for the ASCII files with ontime/offtime/repetition values.
PULM:TRA:DEXC:AFIL:EXT TXT
selects that ASCII files with extension *.txt are listed.
PULM:TRA:DEXC:AFIL:CAT?
queries the available files with extension *.txt.
Response: 'train1','train2
the ASCII files train1.txt and train2.txt are available.
Options:
R&S SMB-K27 (Pulse Train)
Manual control:
See "Extension – ASCII File Settings" on page 197
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:SELect <Select>
The command selects the ASCII file to be imported or exported.
The ASCII files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.txt or *.csv in a directory of
the user's choice. The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command
MMEMory:CDIR.
Parameters:
<Select>
string
Example:
MMEM:CDIR 'var/lists/pulsetrain/import'
selects the directory for the ASCII files with ontime/offtime/repetition values.
PULM:TRA:DEXC:MODE IMP
selects that ASCII files with ontime/offtime/repetition values are
imported and transferred into pulse train lists.
PULM:TRA:DEXC:AFIL:SEL 'train.csv'
selects that ASCII file train.csv is imported.
PULM:TRA:DEXC:SEL 'train_imp'
selects that the ASCII file train.csv is imported into pulse train
list train_imp.
Options:
R&S SMB-K27 (Pulse Train)
Manual control:
See "Select ASCII Source / Destination - Import/Export Pulse
Train Files" on page 198
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
356
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:COLumn <Column>
Parameters:
<Column>
TABulator | SEMicolon | COMMa | SPACe
*RST:
SEMicolon
Example:
PULM:TRA:DEXC:MODE EXP
selects that the pulse train list is exported into an ASCII file.
MMEM:CDIR 'var/lists/pulsetrain/import'
selects the directory for the ASCII files with ontime/offtime/repetition values.
PULM:TRA:DEXC:AFIL:SEL 'train.csv'
selects ASCII file train.csv as destination for the pulse train list
data.
PULM:TRA:DEXC:AFIL:SEP:COL TAB
the ontime/offtime/repetition values are separated by a tabulator.
PULM:TRA:DEXC:AFIL:SEP:DEC DOT
selects the decimal separator dot.
PULM:TRA:DEXC:SEL 'train_imp'
selects that the pulse train list train_imp is imported into ASCII
file train.csv.
Options:
R&S SMB-K27 (Pulse Train)
Manual control:
See "Column Separator- ASCII File Settings" on page 198
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:AFILe:SEParator:DECimal <Decimal>
The command selects the decimal separator used in the ASCII data between '.' (decimal
point) and ',' (comma) with floating-point numerals.
Parameters:
<Decimal>
DOT | COMMa
*RST:
DOT
Example:
PULM:TRA:DEXC:MODE EXP
selects that the pulse train list is exported into an ASCII file.
MMEM:CDIR 'var/lists/pulsetrain/import'
selects the directory for the ASCII files with fontime/offtime/repetition values.
PULM:TRA:DEXC:AFIL:SEL ‘train.csv'
selects ASCII file train.csv as destination for the pulse train list
data.
PULM:TRA:DEXC:AFIL:SEP:COL TAB
the ontime/offtime/repetition values are separated by a tabulator.
PULM:TRA:DEXC:AFIL:SEP:DEC DOT
selects the decimal separator dot.
PULM:TRA:DEXC:SEL ‘train_imp'
selects that the pulse train list train_imp is imported into ASCII
file train.csv.
Options:
R&S SMB-K27 (Pulse Train)
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
357
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Manual control:
See "Decimal Point - ASCII File Settings" on page 197
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:EXECute
The command starts the export or import of the selected file. When import is selected,
the ASCII file is imported as pulse train list. When export is selected, the pulse train list
is exported into the selected ASCII file.
Example:
PULM:TRA:DEXC:MODE IMP
selects that ASCII files with ontime/offtime/repetition values are
imported and transferred into pulse train lists.
MMEM:CDIR 'var/lists/pulsetrain/import'
selects the directory for the ASCII files withontime/offtime/repetition values.
PULM:TRA:DEXC:AFIL:SEL 'train.csv'
selects that ASCII file train.csv is imported.
PULM:TRA:DEXC:SEL 'train_imp'
selects that the ASCII file train.csv is imported into pulse train
list train_imp.
PULM:TRA:DEXC:EXEC
starts the import of the ASCII file data into the pulse train file.
Usage:
Event
Options:
R&S SMB-K27 (Pulse Train)
Manual control:
See "Import / Export - Import/Export Pulse Train Files"
on page 198
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:MODE <Mode>
The command selects if pulse train lists should be imported or exported. Depending on
the selection, the file select command define either the source or the destination for pulse
train lists and ASCII files.
Parameters:
<Mode>
IMPort | EXPort
*RST:
IMPort
Example:
PULM:TRA:DEXC:MODE IMP
selects that ASCII files with ontime/offtime/repetition values are
imported and transferred into pulse train lists.
MMEM:CDIR 'var/lists/pulsetrain/import'
selects the directory for the ASCII files with ontime/offtime/repetition values.
PULM:TRA:DEXC:AFIL:SEL 'train.csv'
selects that ASCII file train.csv is imported.
PULM:TRA:DEXC:SEL 'train_imp'
selects that the ASCII file train.csv is imported into pulse train
list train_imp.
Options:
R&S SMB-K27 (Pulse Train)
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
358
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Manual control:
See "Mode – Import/Export Pulse Train Files" on page 197
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:TRAin:DEXChange:SELect <Select>
The command selects the pulse train list to be imported or exported.
The pulse train files are stored with the fixed file extensions *.pulstrn in a directory of
the user's choice. The directory applicable to the commands is defined with the command
MMEMory:CDIR.
Parameters:
<Select>
string
Example:
PULM:TRA:DEXC:MODE IMP
selects that ASCII files with ontime/offtime/repetition values are
imported and transferred into pulse train lists.
MMEM:CDIR 'var/lists/pulsetrain/import'
selects the directory for the ASCII files with ontime/offtime/repetition values.
PULM:TRA:DEXC:AFIL:SEL 'train.csv'
selects that ASCII file train.csv is imported.
PULM:TRA:DEXC:SEL 'train_imp'
selects that the ASCII file train.csv is imported into pulse train
list train_imp.
Options:
R&S SMB-K27 (Pulse Train)
Manual control:
See "Select Destination / Source - Import/Export Pulse Train
Files" on page 198
[:SOURce<hw>]:PULM:WIDTh <Width>
The command sets the width of the generated pulse. The width determines the pulse
length. The pulse width must be at least 20ns less than the set pulse period.
Parameters:
<Width>
float
Range:
10 ns to 100 s
Increment: 10 ns
*RST:
2 us
Example:
PULM:WIDT 33 us
sets a width of 33 us for the pulse.
Options:
R&S SMB-K23 (Pulse Generator)
Manual control:
See "Pulse Width - Pulse Generator" on page 193
7.12.14 SOURce:ROSCillator Subsystem
This subsystem contains the commands for setting the external and internal reference
frequency.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
359
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
The commands of this subsystem are not affected by an instrument reset (​*RST​
on page 243).
[:​SOURce]:​ROSCillator:​EXTernal:​FREQuency​..................................................................360
[:​SOURce]:​ROSCillator:​EXTernal:​RFOFf[:​STATe]​.............................................................360
[:​SOURce]:​ROSCillator:​EXTernal:​SBANdwidth​.................................................................361
[:​SOURce]:​ROSCillator[:​INTernal]:​ADJust:​VALue​..............................................................361
[:​SOURce]:​ROSCillator[:​INTernal]:​ADJust[:​STATe]​............................................................361
[:​SOURce]:​ROSCillator:​SOURce​.....................................................................................362
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:FREQuency <Frequency>
Selects the external reference frequency.
5 MHz can be only operated, if the instrument has an RF board starting from version
1406.7220.
Parameters:
<Frequency>
5MHZ | 10MHZ
*RST:
10MHZ
Example:
ROSC:SOUR EXT
selects the external source. The reference must be input at the
REF IN input.
ROSC:EXT:FREQ 10MHz
slects 10 MHz external reference frequency.
Manual control:
See "External Reference Frequency" on page 118
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:RFOFf[:STATe] <State>
Activates that RF output is automatically switched off, when in external source mode no
reference signal is supplied.
This setting ensures that no improper RF signal due to the missing external reference
signal is output and used for measurements.
In addition to the error message "Ext Ref missing", the instrument generates the message
"RF output deactivated'.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
ROSC:SOUR EXT
selects the external source. The reference must be input at the
REF IN input.
Example:
ROSC:EXT:RFOF:STAT ON
In case of a missing external signal, no RF signal is output.
Manual control:
See "Deactivate RF Output - Reference Oscillator" on page 118
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
360
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator:EXTernal:SBANdwidth <SBandwidth>
The command selects the synchronization bandwidth for an external reference signal.
Parameters:
<SBandwidth>
WIDE | NARRow
NARRow
Synchronization bandwidth is approx. 1 Hz.
WIDE
Synchronization bandwidth is approx. 750 Hz.
Example:
ROSC:SOUR EXT
selects the external source.
ROSC:EXT:FREQ 5 MHz
informs the instrument that the external reference has a frequency
of 5 MHz.
ROSC:EXT:SBAN WID
selects wideband setting for synchronization bandwidth.
Manual control:
See "Synchronization Bandwidth - RF Signal" on page 118
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator[:INTernal]:ADJust:VALue <Value>
The command specifies the frequency correction value (adjustment value).
Parameters:
<Value>
float
Range:
0 to 4095
Increment: 1
Example:
ROSC:ADJ:VAL 1400
sets the adjustment value to 1400.
Manual control:
See "Adjustment DAC Value" on page 119
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator[:INTernal]:ADJust[:STATe] <State>
The command determines whether the calibrated (OFF) or a user-defined (ON) adjustment value is used for fine adjustment of the frequency. With STATe ON, the instrument
is no longer in the calibrated state. However, the calibration value is not changed and the
instrument resumes the calibrated state after switching the Adjustment State to Off.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
Example:
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
0
ROSC:SOUR INT
selects the internal source.
ROSC:ADJ ON
activates use of a user-defined adjustment value.
ROSC:ADJ:VAL 1400
sets the adjustment value to 1400.
361
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Manual control:
See "Adjustment Active - Reference Oscillator" on page 118
[:SOURce]:ROSCillator:SOURce <Source>
Selects the reference frequency source.
Parameters:
<Source>
INTernal | EXTernal
INTernal
The internal reference oscillator is used.
EXTernal
An external reference signal is used. It must be input at the REF
IN connector at the rear of the instrument.
The instrument is informed of the frequency of the external reference signal by means of the command ​[:​SOURce]:​
ROSCillator:​EXTernal:​FREQuency​.
*RST:
INTernal
Example:
ROSC:SOUR EXT
selects the external source.
ROSC:EXT:FREQ 5 MHz
informs the instrument that the external reference has a frequency
of 5 MHz.
Manual control:
See "Source - Reference Oscillator" on page 117
7.12.15 SOURce:STEReo Subsystem
This subsystem contains the SCPI commands for generating FM stereo multiplex signals,
the radio traffic service ARI (Automotive Radio Information) and Radio Data System
(RDS). Additional functions are available using the SOURce:STEReo:DIRect commands (see ​chapter 7.18, "Direct Commands for the Stereo/RDS Coder Option R&S
SMB-B5", on page 405).
[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​ARI:​BK[:​CODE]​................................................................................363
[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​ARI:​STATe​......................................................................................363
[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​ARI:​TYPE​........................................................................................363
[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​ARI:​TYPE:​STATe​.............................................................................364
[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​ARI[:​DEViation]​................................................................................364
[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​AUDio:​MODE​...................................................................................365
[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​AUDio:​PREemphasis​........................................................................365
[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​AUDio:​PREemphasis:​STATe​.............................................................366
[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​AUDio[:​FREQuency]​.........................................................................366
[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​DIRect​.............................................................................................366
[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​EXTernal:​IMPedance​........................................................................367
[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​MMF​...............................................................................................367
[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​PILot:​PHASe​....................................................................................367
[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​PILot:​STATe​....................................................................................368
[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​PILot[:​DEViation]​..............................................................................368
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
362
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​RDS:​DATaset​..................................................................................368
[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​RDS:​STATe​.....................................................................................369
[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​RDS:​TRAFfic:​ANNouncement[:​STATe]​...............................................369
[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​RDS:​TRAFfic:​PROGram[:​STATe]​......................................................369
[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​RDS[:​DEViation]​...............................................................................370
[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​SOURce​..........................................................................................370
[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​STATe​.............................................................................................370
[:​SOURce]:​STEReo[:​DEViation]​.......................................................................................371
[:SOURce]:STEReo:ARI:BK[:CODE] <Code>
Selects the area identification (BK) code of the ARI signal. The six letters (six different
frequencies) identify a specific region in each country. The code is generated if the BK
or DK+BK identifier of the ARI signal is activated.
Parameters:
<Code>
A|B|C|D|E|F
*RST:
A
Example:
STER:ARI:TYPE BK
selects generation of area identification.
STER:ARI:BK A
selects the specific area identification code A to be generated.
Options:
R&S SMB-B5
Manual control:
See "ARI BK - Stereo Modulation" on page 182
[:SOURce]:STEReo:ARI:STATe <State>
Activates/deactivates the ARI signal generation. ARI signals can be generated simultaneously with MPX and RDS signals.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
OFF
Example:
STER:ARI:STAT ON
activates generation of an ARI signal.
Options:
R&S SMB-B5
Manual control:
See "ARI State - Stereo Modulation" on page 182
[:SOURce]:STEReo:ARI:TYPE <Type>
Selects the generated identifiers of the ARI signal.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
363
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Parameters:
<Type>
OFF | DK | BK | BKDK
OFF
Only the 57 kHz subcarrier is generated (Senderkennung). It
marks the stations which broadcast traffic programs and enables
the receiver to recognize the frequency as being ARI-capable.
DK
The message identification (Durchsagekennung) is generated in
addition (low-frequency 30% AM). It signalizes that a traffic message is currently broadcasted.
BK
The area identification (Bereichskennung) is generated in addition
(60% AM). This code is used to identify the geographical region
covered by the radio station. The specific code is selected below.
BKDK
The area and message identification are generated in addition.
*RST:
DK
Example:
STER:ARI:TYPE BKDK
A complete ARI signal with all identifiers is generated.
Options:
R&S SMB-B5
Manual control:
See "ARI Identification - Stereo Modulation" on page 182
[:SOURce]:STEReo:ARI:TYPE:STATe <State>
Activates/deactivates the Stereo ARI Identifier.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
STER:ARI:TYPE:STAT ON
Options:
R&S SMB-B5
[:SOURce]:STEReo:ARI[:DEViation] <Deviation>
Sets the frequency deviation of the ARI subcarrier signal.
Parameters:
<Deviation>
float
Range:
*RST:
0 to 10kHz
3.5kHz
Example:
STER:ARI:DEV 3.5kHz
sets the frequency deviation of the 57 kHz subcarrier to 3.5kHz.
Options:
R&S SMB-B5
Manual control:
See "ARI Deviation - Stereo Modulation " on page 182
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
364
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
[:SOURce]:STEReo:AUDio:MODE <Mode>
Selects the generated identifiers of the AUDio signal.
Parameters:
<Mode>
LEFT | RIGHt | RELeft | REMLeft | RNELeft
LEFT
A mono signal containing the left channel is generated/fed in.
RIGHt
A mono signal containing the right channel is generated/fed in.
RELeft
A stereo signal with right and left channel is generated/fed in. The
channels have the same frequency and phase.
REMLeft
The signal on the left external audio input is used for both channels, left and right. The right channel is inverted.
RNELeft
(External source only)
A stereo signal containing different, independent right and left
channels is feed in. It is possible, for example, to feed a fixed audio
frequency to the first channel while a frequency sweep is being
performed in the second channel.
*RST:
RIGHt
Example:
STER:SOUR LFG
The internal LF generator is used as modulation source for the
audio signal.
STER:AUD:MODE RIGH
A mono signal containing the left channel is generated.
Options:
R&S SMB-B5
Manual control:
See "Mode - Stereo Modulation" on page 180
[:SOURce]:STEReo:AUDio:PREemphasis <Preemphasis>
Sets the preemphasis used for signal generation.
Parameters:
<Preemphasis>
float
Range:
*RST:
Example:
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
50µs to 75µs
50µs
STER:SOUR LFG
The internal LF generator is used as modulation source for the
audio signal.
STER:AUD:PRE 50µs
sets preemphasis to 50µs.
STER:AUD:PRE:STAT ON
activates preemphasis.
365
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Options:
R&S SMB-B5
Manual control:
See "Preemphasis - Stereo Modulation" on page 181
[:SOURce]:STEReo:AUDio:PREemphasis:STATe <State>
Activates the use of preemphasis for signal generation.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
OFF
Example:
STER:SOUR LFG
The internal LF generator is used as modulation source for the
audio signal.
STER:AUD:PRE 50µs
sets preemphasis to 50µs.
STER:AUD:PRE:STAT ON
activates preemphasis.
Options:
R&S SMB-B5
Manual control:
See "Preemphasis - Stereo Modulation" on page 181
[:SOURce]:STEReo:AUDio[:FREQuency] <Freqency>
Sets the frequency of the LF generator signal. The command is an alias to command
SOURce:LFOutput:FREQuency.
Parameters:
<Freqency>
float
Range:
0.1Hz to 1.0MHz
Increment: 0.01Hz
*RST:
1kHz
Example:
STER:SOUR LFG
The internal LF generator is used as modulation source for the
audio signal.
STER:AUD:FREQ 1100
sets the frequency of the audio signal to 1.1 kHz
Options:
R&S SMB-B5
Manual control:
See "LF Gen Freq - Stereo Modulation" on page 180
[:SOURce]:STEReo:DIRect <Direct>
Sends a R&S SMB command string to the stereo coder. The direct commands offer
extended settings possibilities for the stereo coder (see ​chapter 7.18, "Direct Commands
for the Stereo/RDS Coder Option R&S SMB-B5", on page 405).
Parameters:
<Direct>
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
string
366
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Example:
STER:DIR 'ARI-ID=0'
deactivates the ARI identification.
Options:
R&S SMB-B5
Manual control:
See "RDS Program Service Name - Stereo Modulation"
on page 183
See "RDS Program Identification - Stereo Modulation"
on page 184
[:SOURce]:STEReo:EXTernal:IMPedance <Impedance>
Selects the input impedance for the external analog audio signal inputs L and R.
Parameters:
<Impedance>
600 | 100000
Range:
*RST:
100kOhm to 600Ohm
100kOhm
Example:
SOUR:STER:EXT:IMP 600Ohm
selects 600 OHM as the impedance for the external analog audio
signals.
Options:
Option R&S SMB-B5
Manual control:
See "External R/L Impedance - Stereo Modulation" on page 181
[:SOURce]:STEReo:MMF <Mmf>
Sets the maximum possibly used modulation frequency. This setting is only effective for
external modulation source and activated preemphasis. It prevents over modulation but
result in a decreased s/n ratio.
Parameters:
<Mmf>
float
Range:
0.00 to 18.0kHz
Increment: 0.01Hz
*RST:
1kHz
Example:
SOUR:STER:MMF 2000
sets a maximum modulation frequency of 2 kHz.
Options:
Option R&S SMB-B5
Manual control:
See "Max Modulation Freq- Stereo Modulation" on page 181
[:SOURce]:STEReo:PILot:PHASe <Phase>
Sets the phase of the pilot tone in relation to the 38 kHz carrier signal of the receiver. For
a correct demodulation, the pilot tone must be in phase with the 38 kHz carrier.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
367
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Parameters:
<Phase>
float
Range:
-4.0DEG to +5.0DEG
Increment: 0.1DEG
*RST:
0DEG
Example:
SOUR:STER:PIL:PHAS .2DEG
decreases pilot tone quality by adding a phase difference of 0.2
degrees between pilot signal and receiver carrier signal.
Options:
Option R&S SMB-B5
Manual control:
See "Pilot Phase - Stereo Modulation" on page 182
[:SOURce]:STEReo:PILot:STATe <State>
Activates/deactivates the pilot tone generation.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
OFF
Example:
STER:PIL:STAT ON
activates generation of the pilot tone.
Options:
R&S SMB-B5
Manual control:
See "Pilot State - Stereo Modulation" on page 181
[:SOURce]:STEReo:PILot[:DEViation] <Deviation>
Sets the deviation of the pilot tone.
Parameters:
<Deviation>
float
Range:
0.00 to 10kHz
Increment: 0.01Hz
*RST:
6.75kHz
Example:
SOUR:STER:PIL:DEV 6.75kHz
sets the pilot tone deviation according to standard.
Options:
Option R&S SMB-B5
Manual control:
See "Pilot Deviation - Stereo Modulation" on page 181
[:SOURce]:STEReo:RDS:DATaset <Dataset>
Selects one of the five data sets provided on the instrument for use in the RDS signal.
Parameters:
<Dataset>
DS1 | DS2 | DS3 | DS4 | DS5
*RST:
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
DS1
368
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Example:
STER:RDS:DAT DS5
activates use of data set 5 for generation of the RDS signal.
Options:
R&S SMB-B5
Manual control:
See "RDS Data Set - Stereo Modulation" on page 183
[:SOURce]:STEReo:RDS:STATe <State>
Activates/deactivates the RDS signal generation. RDS signals can be generated simultaneously with MPX and ARI signals.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
OFF
Example:
STER:RDS:STAT ON
activates generation of RDS signal.
Options:
R&S SMB-B5
Manual control:
See "RDS State - Stereo Modulation" on page 183
[:SOURce]:STEReo:RDS:TRAFfic:ANNouncement[:STATe] <State>
Activates the RDS traffic announcement. If activated, the receiver switches from the current status, e.g. playing a CD, to the receive mode and enables the broadcast of a traffic
announcement. The TP state has to be on.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
OFF
Example:
STER:RDS:TRAF:PROG:STAT ON
activates RDS traffic program.
STER:RDS:TRAF:ANN:STAT ON
activates RDS traffic announcement.
Options:
R&S SMB-B5
Manual control:
See "RDS Traffic Announcement State - Stereo Modulation"
on page 184
[:SOURce]:STEReo:RDS:TRAFfic:PROGram[:STATe] <State>
Activates the RDS traffic program. The receiver can recognize a frequency as being
capable of traffic information only if the TP function is active.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
Example:
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
OFF
STER:RDS:TRAF:PROG:STAT ON
activates the RDS traffic program.
369
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Options:
R&S SMB-B5
Manual control:
See "RDS Traffic Program State - Stereo Modulation "
on page 184
[:SOURce]:STEReo:RDS[:DEViation] <Deviation>
Sets the deviation of the RDS subcarrier.
Parameters:
<Deviation>
float
Range:
0.00 to 10kHz
Example:
SOUR:STER:RDS:DEV 2kHz
sets the RDS signal deviation according to standard.
Manual control:
See "RDS Deviation - Stereo Modulation" on page 183
[:SOURce]:STEReo:SOURce <Source>
Selects the source for the audio signal.
Parameters:
<Source>
OFF | LREXt | SPEXt | LFGen
OFF
No audio signal is provided, ARI and RDS signal can be generated
separately.
LREX
The external audio signal is feed in via the analog L and R inputs.
SPEX
The external audio signal is feed in via the digital S/P DIF interface
LFG
The audio stereo signal is internally generated by the LF generator.
*RST:
LREXt
Example:
STER:SOUR LFG
The internal LF generator is used as modulation source for the
audio signal.
Options:
R&S SMB-B5
Manual control:
See "Audio Source - Stereo Modulation" on page 180
[:SOURce]:STEReo:STATe <State>
Activates/deactivates stereo modulation.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
OFF
370
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Example:
STER:STAT ON
activates generation of stereo signal.
Options:
R&S SMB-B5
Manual control:
See "State - Stereo Modulation " on page 179
[:SOURce]:STEReo[:DEViation] <Deviation>
Sets the MPX (Multiplex stereo signal) deviation.
Parameters:
<Deviation>
float
Range:
0.00 to 80.00kHz
Increment: 0.01Hz
*RST:
40kHz
Example:
STER 40kHz
sets the stereo deviation according to standard.
Options:
R&S SMB-B5
Manual control:
See "FM Deviation - Stereo Modulation" on page 179
7.12.16 SOURce:SWEep Subsystem
This subsystem contains the commands for checking the RF sweeps, i.e. the sweeps of
the RF generators. Sweeps are always triggered, except for the MANual sweep mode.
The frequency sweep is activated by the command SOURce:FREQuency:MODE
SWEep, and the level sweep by the command SOURce:POWer:MODE SWEep. All
sweeps, including the LF sweep, can be set independently of each other.
This example shows how to set up a frequency sweep.
1. Set the sweep range.
[SOURce:]FREQuency:CENTer 200 MHz
[SOURce:]FREQuency:SPAN 300 MHz
2. Select linear or logarithmic spacing.
[SOURce:]SWEep[:FREQuency]:SPACing LIN
3. Set the step width and dwell time.
[SOURce:]SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP:LINear 20 MHz
[SOURce:]SWEep[:FREQuency]:DWELl 12 ms
4. Select the trigger mode.
TRIGger:]FSWeep:SOURce SINGle
5. Select the sweep mode and activate the sweep.
[SOURce:]SWEep[:FREQuency]:MODE AUTO
[SOURce:]FREQuency:MODE SWEep
6. Trigger the sweep.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
371
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
[SOURce:]SWEep[:FREQuency]:EXECute
It is recommended to switch off the "GUI Update" for optimum sweep performance especially with short dwell times (SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate OFF).
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​DWELl​..................................................................372
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​EXECute​..............................................................372
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​LFConnector​.........................................................373
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​MODE​..................................................................373
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​OVOLtage:​STARt​..................................................374
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​OVOLtage:​STOP​...................................................374
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​POINts​.................................................................375
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​SHAPe​.................................................................375
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​SPACing​...............................................................376
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​STEP[:​LINear]​.......................................................376
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​STEP:​LOGarithmic​................................................377
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep:​POWer:​DWELl​..........................................................................378
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep:​POWer:​EXECute​.......................................................................378
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep:​POWer:​MODE​...........................................................................378
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep:​POWer:​POINts​..........................................................................379
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep:​POWer:​SHAPe​..........................................................................379
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep:​POWer:​SPACing:​MODE?​...........................................................380
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep:​POWer:​STEP[:​LOGarithmic]​.......................................................380
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep:​RESet[:​ALL]​..............................................................................381
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:DWELl <Dwell>
The command sets the time taken for each frequency step of the sweep.
The keyword [:FREQuency] can be omitted (see example). The command is then SCPIcompliant.
Tip: It is recommended to switch off the "GUI Update" for optimum sweep performance
especially with short dwell times (​SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate OFF).
Parameters:
<Dwell>
float
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
10.0E-3 to 100
100.0E-6
10.0E-3
s
Example:
SWE:DWEL 12 ms
sets a dwell time of 12 ms for a frequency sweep at the RF output.
Manual control:
See "Dwell Time - Frequency Sweep" on page 151
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:EXECute
The command triggers a sweep.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
372
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
The command is only valid for sweep mode Single (SOURce:SWEep:FREQuency:MODE
SINGle). The command corresponds to the manual-control command "Execute Single
Sweep".
Example:
SWE:FREQ:EXEC
triggers a frequency sweep at the RF output.
Usage:
Event
Manual control:
See "Execute Single Sweep - Frequency Sweep" on page 149
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:LFConnector <Lfconnector>
The command activates the output of a sweep voltage ramp at the LF connector.
The voltage range is set with commands
SOURce:SWEep:FREQuency:OVOLtage:STARt and …:STOP
Parameters:
<Lfconnector>
OFF | ON
*RST:
OFF
Example:
SWE:LFC ON
activates the output of a linear voltage ramp from sweep start to
sweep stop at the LF connector.
SWE:OVOL:STAR 0V
SWE:OVOL:STOP 3V
'the voltage at sweep start is 0 Volt and at sweep stop 3 V.
Manual control:
See "Use LF connector to output sweep voltage - RF Frequency
Sweep" on page 152
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:MODE <Mode>
Sets the sweep mode.
The keyword [:FREQuency] can be omitted (see example). The command is then
SCPI-compliant.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
373
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Parameters:
<Mode>
AUTO | MANual | STEP
AUTO
Each trigger triggers exactly one complete sweep.
MANual
The trigger system is not active. Each frequency step of the sweep
is triggered individually, either by varying the "Current Frequency" value using the rotary knob under manual control or by
means of a FREQ:MAN command under remote control. With manual control, the frequency increases or decreases (depending on
the direction of the rotary encoder) by the value specified under
FREQ:STEP:INCRement. With remote control, the frequency is
set directly with the command :FREQ:MAN.
STEP
Each trigger triggers one sweep step only (Mode Single Step). The
frequency increases by the value entered under
SOUR:SWE:FREQ:STEP:LIN (linear spacing)
or ...:STEP:LOG (logarithmic spacing).
*RST:
AUTO
Example:
SWE:MODE AUTO
selects Mode Auto for a frequency sweep at the RF output.
Manual control:
See "Mode - Frequency Sweep" on page 146
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:OVOLtage:STARt <Start>
The command sets the voltage at the sweep stop frequency. The linear voltage ramp
from sweep start to stop is output at the LF connector.
Parameters:
<Start>
float
Range:
-3.0 to 3.0
Example:
SWE:LFC ON
activates the output of a linear voltage ramp from sweep start to
sweep stop at the LF connector.
SWE:OVOL:STAR 0V
SWE:OVOL:STOP 3V
the voltage at the sweep start frequency is 0 V and at the stop
frequency 3 V.
Manual control:
See "Output Voltage Start Freq - RF Frequency Sweep"
on page 152
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:OVOLtage:STOP <Stop>
The command sets the voltage at the sweep stop frequency. The linear voltage ramp
from sweep start to stop is output at the LF connector.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
374
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Parameters:
<Stop>
float
Range:
-3.0 to 3.0
Example:
SWE:LFC ON
activates the output of a linear voltage ramp from sweep start to
sweep stop at the LF connector.
SWE:OVOL:STAR 0V
SWE:OVOL:STOP 3V
the voltage at the sweep start frequency is 0 V and at the stop
frequency 3 V.
Manual control:
See "Output Voltage Stop - RF Frequency Sweep" on page 152
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:POINts <Points>
The command sets the number of steps in an RF sweep.
The command is linked to the command :SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP as follows:
●
for linear sweeps
POINts = (SPAN / STEP:LIN) + 1
●
logarithmic sweeps and STARt < STOP:
POINts = ((log STOP - log STARt) / log STEP:LOG) + 1
If POINTs changes, the value of STEP is adjusted. The STARt and STOP value is retained.
Two separate POINts values are used for linear or logarithmic sweep spacing
(:SWEep[:FREQuency]:SPACing LIN | LOG). The command is always effective for
the currently set sweep spacing.
Parameters:
<Points>
Example:
float
FREQ:STAR
sets the start frequency to 100 MHz.
FREQ:STOP
sets the stop frequency to 500 MHz.
SWE:SPAC LIN
sets linear sweep spacing.
SWE:POIN 401
sets 401 sweep steps for linear sweep spacing. The sweep step
width (STEP) is automatically set to 1 MHz.
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:SHAPe <Shape>
The command sets the cycle mode for a sweep sequence (shape).
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
375
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Parameters:
<Shape>
SAWTooth | TRIangle
SAWTooth
One sweep runs from start to stop frequency. Each subsequent
sweep starts at the start frequency, i.e. the shape of the sweep
sequence resembles a sawtooth.
TRIangle
One sweep runs from start to stop frequency and back, i.e. the
shape of the sweep resembles a triangle. Each subsequent sweep
starts at the start frequency.
*RST:
SAWTooth
Example:
SOUR:SWE:SHAP TRI
selects the sweep cycle with alternating ascending and descending sweep directions.
Manual control:
See "Shape - RF Frequency Sweep" on page 150
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:SPACing <Spacing>
The command selects the sweep spacing.
The keyword [:FREQuency] can be omitted (see example). The command is then
SCPI-compliant.
Parameters:
<Spacing>
LINear | LOGarithmic
LINear
With the linear sweep, the step width is a fixed frequency value
which is added to the current frequency. The step width for linear
sweep is entered in Hz (see ​[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep[:​
FREQuency]:​STEP[:​LINear]​ on page 376).
LOGarithmic
With the logarithmic sweep, the step width is a constant fraction
of the current frequency. This fraction is added to the current frequency. The logarithmic step width is entered in % (see ​[:​
SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​STEP:​LOGarithmic​
on page 377).
*RST:
LIN
Example:
SWE:SPAC LIN
selects linear sweep spacing for a frequency sweep at the RF output.
Manual control:
See "Spacing - Frequency Sweep" on page 150
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP[:LINear] <Linear>
The command sets the step width for linear sweeps.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
376
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
This command is linked to the command :SWEep[:FREQuency]:POINts as follows:
POINts = (SPAN / STEP:LIN) + 1
If STEP:LIN changes, the value of POINTs is adjusted. The STARt and STOP value is
retained.
The keywords [:FREQuency] and [:LINear] can be omitted (see example). The
command is then SCPI-compliant.
Parameters:
<Linear>
float
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
0.001 Hz to (STOP - STARt)
0.001 Hz
1 MHz
MHz
Example:
FREQ:STAR 1GHz
sets the start frequency to 1 GHz.
FREQ:STOP 5GHz
sets the stop frequency to 5 GHz.
SWE:SPAC LIN
sets linear sweep spacing.
SWE:STEP 2 MHz
sets the step width for linear sweep spacing to 2 MHz (RF sweep)
at the RF output. The number of sweep steps for linear sweep
spacing (POINts) is automatically set to 2001.
Manual control:
See "Step Lin/Log - Frequency Sweep" on page 151
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep[:FREQuency]:STEP:LOGarithmic <Logarithmic>
The comman specifies the step width factor for logarithmic sweeps. The next frequency
value of a sweep is calculated (for STARt < STOP) using the following formula:
New frequency = Old frequency + STEP:LOG x Old frequency
STEP:LOG therefore gives the fraction of the old frequency. The frequency is increased
by this fraction for the next sweep step. Usually STEP:LOG is given in percent, whereby
the suffix PCT must always be used.
The command is linked to the command :SWEep[:FREQuency]:POINts for STARt <
STOP as follows:
POINts = ((log STOP - log STARt) / log STEP:LOG) + 1
If STEP:LOG changes, the value of POINTs is adjusted. The STARt and STOP value is
retained.
Parameters:
<Logarithmic>
float
Range:
0.01 to 9999
Increment: 0.01 PCT
*RST:
1 PCT
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
377
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Example:
FREQ:STAR 1GHz
sets the start frequency to 1 GHz.
FREQ:STOP 5GHz
sets the stop frequency to 5 GHz.
SWE:SPAC LOG
sets logarithmic sweep spacing.
SWE:STEP:LOG 10PCT
sets the step width for logarithmic sweep spacing to 10% of the
previous frequency in each instance (for a frequency sweep).
Manual control:
See "Step Lin/Log - Frequency Sweep" on page 151
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:DWELl <Dwell>
The command sets the time taken for each level step of the sweep.
Tip: It is recommended to switch off the "GUI Update" for optimum sweep performance
especially with short dwell times (​SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate OFF).
Parameters:
<Dwell>
float
Range:
Increment:
*RST:
Default unit:
1.0E-3 to 100
100.0E-6
15.0E-3
s
Example:
SWE:POW:DWEL 12 ms
sets a dwell time of 12 ms for a level sweep at the RF output.
Manual control:
See "Dwell Time - Level Sweep" on page 157
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:EXECute
The command triggers a sweep.
The command is only valid for sweep mode Single (SOURce:SWEep:POWer:MODE
SINGle). The command corresponds to the manual-control command "Execute Single
Sweep".
Example:
SOURce:SWEep:POWer:MODE SINGle
sets the single cycle mode of the level sweep.
SWE:POW:EXEC
triggers a level sweep at the RF output.
Usage:
Event
Manual control:
See "Execute Single Sweep - Level Sweep" on page 155
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:MODE <Mode>
The command sets the cycle mode of the level sweep.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
378
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Parameters:
<Mode>
AUTO | MANual | STEP
AUTO
Each trigger triggers exactly one complete sweep.
MANual
The trigger system is not active. Each level step of the sweep is
triggered individually, either by varying the "Current Level" value
using the rotary knob under manual control or by means of a
POW:MAN command under remote control.
With manual control, the level increases or decreases (depending
on the direction of the rotary encoder) by the value specified under
SOUR:SWE:POW:STEP. With remote control, the level increases
by the value specified under SWEep:POW:STEP which each
sent :POW:MAN command, irrespective the value entered there.
STEP
Each trigger triggers one sweep step only. The level increases by
the value entered under :SWEep:POWer:STEP.
*RST:
AUTO
Example:
SWE:POW:MODE AUTO
selects Mode Auto for a level sweep at RF output.
Manual control:
See "Mode - Level Sweep" on page 153
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:POINts <Points>
The command sets the number of steps in a level sweep. The command is linked to the
command :SWEep:POWer:STEP as follows:
POINts = ((STOP - STARt) / STEP:LOG) + 1
If POINTs changes, the value of STEP is adjusted. The STARt and STOP value is retained.
Parameters:
<Points>
float
*RST:
Example:
20dB
POW:STAR - 30 dBm
sets the start frequency to -30 dBm.
POW:STOP - 10 dBm
sets the stop frequency to -10 dBm.
SWE:POW:POIN 20
sets 20 sweep steps. The sweep step width (STEP) is automatically set to 1 dB.
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:SHAPe <Shape>
The command sets the cycle mode for a sweep sequence (shape).
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
379
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SOURce Subsystem
Parameters:
<Shape>
SAWTooth | TRIangle
SAWTooth
One sweep runs from the start level to the stop level. The subsequent sweep starts at the start level again, i.e. the shape of sweep
sequence resembles a sawtooth.
TRIangle
One sweep runs from start to stop level and back, i.e. the shape
of the sweep resembles a triangle.Each subsequent sweep starts
at the start level again.
*RST:
SAWTooth
Example:
SOUR:SWE:POW:SHAP TRI
selects the sweep cycle with alternating ascending and descending sweep directions.
Manual control:
See "Shape - RF Level Sweep" on page 156
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:SPACing:MODE?
The command queries the sweep spacing. The sweep spacing for level sweeps is always
linear.
Example:
SWE:POW:SPAC:MODE?
queries the sweep spacing for a level sweep at RF output.
Result: LIN
linear spacing
Usage:
Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:POWer:STEP[:LOGarithmic] <Logarithmic>
The command sets the step width factor for logarithmic sweeps. The next level value of
a sweep is calculated (for STARt < STOP) using the following formula:
New level = Old level + STEP:LOG x Old level
STEP:LOG therefore gives the fraction of the old level. The level is increased by this
fraction for the next sweep step. Usually STEP:LOG is given in decibels, whereby the
suffix dB must always be used.
The command is linked to the command :SWEep:POWer:POINts for STARt < STOP
as follows:
POINts = ((STOP - STARt) / STEP:LOG) + 1
If STEP:LOG changes, the value of POINTs is adjusted. The STARt and STOP value is
retained.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
380
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
STATus Subsystem
Parameters:
<Logarithmic>
float
Range:
0.01 to 139 dB
Increment: 0.01 dB
*RST:
1
Example:
SWE:POW:STEP 10dB
sets the step width for logarithmic sweep spacing to 10 dB of the
previous level in each instance (for a level sweep).
Manual control:
See "Step - Level Sweep" on page 156
[:SOURce<hw>]:SWEep:RESet[:ALL]
The command resets all active sweeps to the starting point.
Example:
SWE:RES
resets all active sweeps to the starting point.
Manual control:
See "Reset Sweep - Frequency Sweep" on page 149
See "Reset Sweep - Level Sweep" on page 155
See "Reset Sweep - LF Sweep" on page 189
7.13 STATus Subsystem
This system contains the commands for the status reporting system. ​*RST​
on page 243 has no effect on the status registers.
Queries return the current value of the respective register, which permits a check of the
device status. A decimal value between 0 and 32767 (=215-1) is returned.
The configuration commands set the respective register thus determining which status
changes of the R&S SMB causes the status registers to be changed. A decimal value
between 0 and 32767 (= 215-1) is set.
STATus:​OPERation:​CONDition?​.....................................................................................382
STATus:​OPERation:​ENABle​...........................................................................................382
STATus:​OPERation[:​EVENt]?​.........................................................................................382
STATus:​OPERation:​NTRansition​.....................................................................................382
STATus:​OPERation:​PTRansition​.....................................................................................383
STATus:​PRESet​............................................................................................................383
STATus:​QUEStionable:​CONDition?​.................................................................................383
STATus:​QUEStionable:​ENABle​.......................................................................................384
STATus:​QUEStionable[:​EVENt]?​.....................................................................................384
STATus:​QUEStionable:​NTRansition​................................................................................384
STATus:​QUEStionable:​PTRansition​.................................................................................385
STATus:​QUEue[:​NEXT]?​................................................................................................385
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
381
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
STATus Subsystem
STATus:OPERation:CONDition? <Condition >
The command queries the content of the CONDition part of the STATus:OPERation register. This part contains information on the action currently being performed in the instrument. The content is not deleted after being read out since it indicates the current hardware status.
Parameters:
<Condition >
string
Example:
STAT:OPER:COND
queries the Status:Operation:Condition register.
Usage:
Query only
SCPI confirmed
STATus:OPERation:ENABle <Enable>
The command sets the bits of the ENABle part of the STATus:OPERation register. This
setting determines which events of the Status-Event part are forwarded to the sum bit in
the status byte. These events can be used for a service request.
Parameters:
<Enable>
string
Example:
STAT:OPER:ENAB 32767
all events are forwarded to the sum bit of the status byte.
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]? <EVENt>
The command queries the content of the EVENt part of the STATus:OPERation register.
This part contains information on the actions performed in the instrument since the last
readout. The content of the EVENt part is deleted after being read out.
Parameters:
<EVENt>
string
Example:
STAT:OPER:EVEN
queries the STATus:OPERation:EVENt register.
Usage:
Query only
SCPI confirmed
STATus:OPERation:NTRansition <Ntransition>
The command sets the bits of the NTRansition part of the STATus:OPERation register.
If a bit is set, a transition from 1 to 0 in the condition part causes an entry to be made in
the EVENt part of the register. The disappearance of an event in the hardware is thus
registered, e.g. the end of an adjustment.
Parameters:
<Ntransition>
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
string
382
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
STATus Subsystem
Example:
STAT:OPER:NTR 0
a transition from 1 to 0 in the condition part of the Status:Operation
register does not cause an entry to be made in the EVENt part.
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
STATus:OPERation:PTRansition <Ptransition>
The command sets the bits of the PTRansition part of the STATus:OPERation register.
If a bit is set, a transition from 0 to 1 in the condition part causes an entry to be made in
the EVENt part of the register. A new event in the hardware is thus registered, e.g. the
start of an adjustment.
Parameters:
<Ptransition>
string
Example:
STAT:OPER:PTR 32767
all transitions from 0 to 1 in the condition part of the Status:Operation register cause an entry to be made in the EVENt part.
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
STATus:PRESet <Preset>
The command resets the status registers. All PTRansition parts are set to FFFFh (32767),
i.e. all transitions from 0 to 1 are detected. All NTRansition parts are set to 0, i.e. a transition from 1 to 0 in a CONDition bit is not detected. The ENABle parts of STATus:OPERation and STATus:QUEStionable are set to 0, i.e. all events in these registers are not
passed on.
Parameters:
<Preset>
string
Example:
STAT:PRES
resets the status registers.
Usage:
Event
SCPI confirmed
STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition? <Condition >
The command queries the content of the CONDition part of the STATus:QUEStionable
register. This part contains information on the action currently being performed in the
instrument. The content is not deleted after being read out since it indicates the current
hardware status.
Parameters:
<Condition >
Example:
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
string
STAT:OPER:COND
queries the Status:Questionable:Condition register.
383
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
STATus Subsystem
Usage:
Query only
SCPI confirmed
STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle <Enable>
The command sets the bits of the ENABle part of the STATus:QUEStionable register.
This setting determines which events of the Status-Event part are enabled for the sum
bit in the status byte. These events can be used for a service request.
Parameters:
<Enable>
string
Example:
STAT:OPER:ENAB 1
problems when performing an adjustment cause an entry to be
made in the sum bit.
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]? <EVENt>
The command queries the content of the EVENt part of the STATus:QUEStionable
register. This part contains information on the actions performed in the instrument since
the last readout. The content of the EVENt part is deleted after being read out.
Parameters:
<EVENt>
string
Example:
STAT:QUES:EVEN?
queries the Status:Questionable:Event register.
Usage:
Query only
SCPI confirmed
STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition <Ntransition>
The command sets the bits of the NTRansition part of the STATus:QUEStionable register.
If a bit is set, a transition from 1 to 0 in the condition part causes an entry to be made in
the EVENt part of the register.
Parameters:
<Ntransition>
string
Example:
STAT:OPER:NTR 0
A transition from 1 to 0 in the condition part of the Status:Questionable register does not cause an entry to be made in the EVENt
part.
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
384
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SYSTem Subsystem
STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition <Ptransition>
The command sets the bits of the NTRansition part of the STATus:QUEStionable register.
If a bit is set, a transition from 1 to 0 in the condition part causes an entry to be made in
the EVENt part of the register.
Parameters:
<Ptransition>
string
Example:
STAT:OPER:PTR 32767
All transitions from 0 to 1 in the condition part of the Status:Questionable register cause an entry to be made in the EVENt part.
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
STATus:QUEue[:NEXT]?
The command queries the oldest entry in the error queue and then deletes it. Positive
error numbers denote device-specific errors, and negative error numbers denote error
messages defined by SCPI. If the error queue is empty, 0 ("No error") is returned. The
command is identical to SYSTem:ERRor?
Return values:
<NEXT>
string
Example:
STAT:QUE
queries the oldest entry in the error queue.
Response: 0, 'no error'
No errors have occurred since the error queue was last read out.
Usage:
Query only
SCPI confirmed
Manual control:
See "History" on page 59
7.14 SYSTem Subsystem
The SYSTem subsystem contains a series of commands for general functions which do
not directly affect signal generation.
:​SYSTem:​BEEPer:​STATe​...............................................................................................386
:​SYSTem:​COMMunicate:​GPIB:​LTERminator​....................................................................386
:​SYSTem:​COMMunicate:​GPIB[:​SELF]:​ADDRess​..............................................................387
:​SYSTem:​COMMunicate:​HISLip:​RESource​.......................................................................387
:​SYSTem:​COMMunicate:​NETWork[:​COMMon]:​DOMain​.....................................................387
:​SYSTem:​COMMunicate:​NETWork[:​COMMon]:​HOSTname​...............................................388
:​SYSTem:​COMMunicate:​NETWork[:​COMMon]:​WORKgroup​..............................................388
:​SYSTem:​COMMunicate:​NETWork:​IPADdress:​MODE​.......................................................388
:​SYSTem:​COMMunicate:​NETWork:​IPADdress​.................................................................389
:​SYSTem:​COMMunicate:​NETWork[:​IPADdress]:​GATeway​.................................................389
:​SYSTem:​COMMunicate:​NETWork[:​IPADdress]:​SUBNet:​MASK​.........................................389
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
385
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SYSTem Subsystem
:​SYSTem:​COMMunicate:​NETWork:​RESource​..................................................................390
:​SYSTem:​COMMunicate:​USB:​RESource?​........................................................................390
:​SYSTem:​COMMunicate:​GPIB:​RESource?​.......................................................................390
:​SYSTem:​COMMunicate:​SERial:​RESource?​.....................................................................390
:​SYSTem:​COMMunicate:​SERial:​BAUD​............................................................................391
:​SYSTem:​COMMunicate:​SERial:​PARity​...........................................................................391
:​SYSTem:​COMMunicate:​SERial:​SBITs​............................................................................391
:​SYSTem:​COMMunicate:​SOCKet:​RESource?​...................................................................391
:​SYSTem:​DATE​.............................................................................................................392
:​SYSTem:​DISPlay:​UPDate​..............................................................................................392
:​SYSTem:​DLOCk​...........................................................................................................392
SYSTem:​ERRor:​ALL?​....................................................................................................393
SYSTem:​ERRor:​CODE:​ALL?​..........................................................................................393
SYSTem:​ERRor:​CODE[:​NEXT]?​.....................................................................................393
SYSTem:​ERRor:​COUNt?​................................................................................................394
SYSTem:​ERRor[:​NEXT]?​................................................................................................394
:​SYSTem:​IDENtification​..................................................................................................395
:​SYSTem:​IRESponse​.....................................................................................................395
:​SYSTem:​KLOCk​...........................................................................................................395
:​SYSTem:​LANGuage​.....................................................................................................396
:​SYSTem:​ORESponse​...................................................................................................396
:​SYSTem:​PROTect<ch>[:​STATe]​....................................................................................397
SYSTem:​SERRor?​.........................................................................................................397
:​SYSTem:​STARtup:​COMPlete?​.......................................................................................398
:​SYSTem:​TIME​..............................................................................................................398
SYSTem:​VERSion?​.......................................................................................................398
:SYSTem:BEEPer:STATe <State>
This command switches the key beep on or off.
Parameters:
<State>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
OFF
Example:
SYST:BEEP:STAT OFF
No acoustic signal is output when a key on the front panel is
pressed.
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:LTERminator <Lterminator>
The command sets the terminator recognition for remote control via GPIB bus.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
386
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SYSTem Subsystem
Parameters:
<Lterminator>
STANdard | EOI
EOI
The terminator must be sent together with the line message EOI
(End of Line). This setting is recommended for binary block transmissions where a character could coincidentally have the value LF
(Line Feed) but is not intended as the terminator. This setting must
be selected for block data with undefined length.
STANdard
An LF (Line Feed) is recognized as the terminator regardless of
whether it is sent with or without EOI.
*RST:
Example:
STANdard
SYST:COMM:GPIB:LTER EOI
only a character which is sent simultaneously with the line message EOI is accepted as the terminator.
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess <Address>
Sets the GPIB address.
Parameters:
<Address>
integer
Range:
*RST:
1 to 30
28
Example:
SYST:COMM:GPIB:ADDR 14
sets GPIB address.
Manual control:
See "GPIB channel address" on page 94
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:HISLip:RESource
Queries the VISA resource string . This string is used for remote control of the instrument
with HiSLIP protocol.
Parameters:
<Resource>
string
Example:
SYST:COMM:HISL:RES
queries the VISA resource string.
Response: TCPIP::192.1.2.3::hislip0::INSTR
Manual control:
See "Visa Resource Strings" on page 95
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork[:COMMon]:DOMain <Domain>
The command enters the domain of the network.
Parameters:
<Domain>
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
string
387
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SYSTem Subsystem
Example:
SYST:COMM:NETW:COMM:DOM ABC.DE
enters the domain of the network.
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork[:COMMon]:HOSTname <Hostname>
The command enters the individual computer name of the R&S Signal Generator. The
entry is only activated after sending command SYST:COMM:NETW:COMM:SET.
Note: The hostname can only be changed after deactivating protection level 1 (command
SYSTem:PROTect<n>:STATe OFF, password)
Parameters:
<Hostname>
string
Example:
SYST:COMM:NETW:HOST ‘SIGGEN’
enters the individual computer name of the R&S Signal Generator.
Example:
SYST:COMM:NETW:COMM:SET ON
activates the change of the hostname.
Manual control:
See "Hostname" on page 90
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork[:COMMon]:WORKgroup <Workgroup>
The command enters the individual workgroup name of the instrument.
Parameters:
<Workgroup>
string
Example:
SYST:COMM:NETW:COMM:WORK 'TEST_09'
enters the workgroup name 'TEST_09'.
Manual control:
See "Workgroup" on page 90
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:IPADdress:MODE <Mode>
The command selects if the IP address is assigned automatically or manually. The entry
is only activated after sending command SYST:COMM:NETW:IPAD:SET.
Parameters:
<Mode>
AUTO | STATic
AUTO
The IP address is assigned automatically. The network used must
support automatic assignment of address (DHCP) in order to use
this function.
STATic
The IP address is assigned manually.
*RST:
Example:
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
AUTO
SYST:COMM:NETW:IPAD:MODE AUTO
the IP address is assigned automatically (DHCP).
SYST:COMM:NETW:IPAD:SET ON
activates DHCP.
388
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SYSTem Subsystem
Manual control:
See "Address Mode" on page 90
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:IPADdress <Ipaddress>
The command enters the IP address. The entry is only activated after sending command
SYST:COMM:NETW:IPAD:SET.
Parameters:
<Ipaddress>
string
Range:
0.0.0.0. to ff.ff.ff.ff
Example:
SYST:COMM:NETW:IPAD 7.8.9.10
enters the IP address of the instrument.
Example:
SYST:COMM:NETW:IPAD:SET
activates all changes of the IP address settings.
Manual control:
See "IP Address" on page 91
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork[:IPADdress]:GATeway <Gateway>
The command enters the IP address of the default gateway. The entry is only activated
after sending command SYST:COMM:NETW:IPAD:SET.
Parameters:
<Gateway>
string
Range:
0.0.0.0 to ff.ff.ff.ff
Example:
SYST:COMM:NETW:GAT 1.2.3.4
enters the IP address of the default gateway.
SYST:COMM:NETW:IPAD:SET
activates all changes of the IP address settings.
Manual control:
See "Default Gateway" on page 91
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork[:IPADdress]:SUBNet:MASK <Mask>
The command enters the Subnet mask. The entry is only activated after sending command SYST:COMM:NETW:IPAD:SET.
Parameters:
<Mask>
string
Example:
SYST:COMM:NETW:SUBN:MASK 255.255.0.0
enters the Subnet mask.
SYST:COMM:NETW:IPAD:SET
activates all changes of the IP address settings.
Manual control:
See "Subnet Mask" on page 91
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
389
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SYSTem Subsystem
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:NETWork:RESource <Resource>
The command queries the VISA resource string. This string is used for remote control of
the instrument with VXI-11 protocol.
Parameters:
<Resource>
string
Example:
SYST:COMM:NETW:RES
queries the VISA resource string.
Response: TCPIP::192.1.2.3::INSTR
Manual control:
See "Visa Resource Strings" on page 95
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:USB:RESource?
The command queries the visa resource string for remote control via the USB interface.
Return values:
<Resource>
string
Example:
SYST:COMM:USB:RES?
queries the VISA resource string for remote control via the USB
interface.
Response: USB::72::000000::INSTR
Usage:
Query only
Manual control:
See "Visa Resource Strings" on page 95
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:RESource?
The command queries the visa resource string for remote control via the GPIB interface.
This string is used for remote control of the instrument.
To change the GPIB address, use the command SYST:COMM:GPIB:ADDR.
Return values:
<Resource>
string
Example:
SYST:COMM:GPIB:RES
queries the VISA resource string.
Response: GPIB::28::INSTR
Usage:
Query only
Manual control:
See "Visa Resource Strings" on page 95
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:RESource?
The command queries the visa resource string for the serial remote control interface. This
string is used for remote control of the instrument.
Return values:
<Resource>
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
string
390
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SYSTem Subsystem
Example:
SYST:COMM:SER:RES
queries the VISA resource string.
Response: ASRL1::INSTR
Usage:
Query only
Manual control:
See "Visa Resource Strings" on page 95
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:BAUD <Baud>
The command enters the baudrate for the serial remote control interface.
Parameters:
<Baud>
2400 | 4800 | 9600 | 19200 | 38400 | 57600 | 115200
*RST:
115200
Example:
SYST:COMM:SER:BAUD 115200
enters the baudrate 115200.
Manual control:
See "RS232 using USB adapter" on page 94
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:PARity <Parity>
The command enters the parity for the serial remote control interface.
Parameters:
<Parity>
NONE | ODD | EVEN
*RST:
NONE
Example:
SYST:COMM:SER:PAR NONE
selects parity NONE.
Manual control:
See "RS232 using USB adapter" on page 94
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SERial:SBITs <Sbits>
The command enters the number of stop bits for the serial remote control interface.
Parameters:
<Sbits>
1|2
*RST:
1
Example:
SYST:COMM:SER:SBIT 2
selects 2 stop bits.
Manual control:
See "RS232 using USB adapter" on page 94
:SYSTem:COMMunicate:SOCKet:RESource?
The command queries the visa resource string for remote control via the Socket interface.
Return values:
<Resource>
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
string
391
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SYSTem Subsystem
Example:
SYST:COMM:SOCK:RES?
Usage:
Query only
Manual control:
See "Visa Resource Strings" on page 95
:SYSTem:DATE <Date>
The command queries / sets the date for the instrument-internal calendar.
This parameter is protected, in order to prevent accidental changes. It can be accessed
with protection level 1, see ​:​SYSTem:​PROTect<ch>[:​STATe]​ on page 397.
Parameters:
<Date>
<year>,<month>,<day>
Example:
SYST:DATE?
Response: 2011,05,01 - it is the 1st of May in 2011.
Manual control:
See "Date" on page 89
:SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate <Update>
The command switches the update of the display on/off. A switchover from remote control
to manual control always sets the status of the update of the display to ON.
Parameters:
<Update>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
ON
Example:
SYST:DISP:UPD OFF
switches update of displayed parameter values off.
Manual control:
See "On/Off GUI Update" on page 87
:SYSTem:DLOCk <Dlock>
This command (Display LOCk) disables the manual operation via the display, or enables
it again (OFF).
The command disables also the front panel keyboard of the instrument including the
LOCAL key.
Parameters:
<Dlock>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
SYST:DLOC ON
activates the display lock. The instrument cannot be operated via
the display until it has been enabled with SYST:DLOC OFF.
Manual control:
See "Display" on page 99
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
392
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SYSTem Subsystem
SYSTem:ERRor:ALL?
The command queries all entries in the error queue and then deletes them.
Parameters:
<All>
string
0
"No error", i.e the error queue is empty.
positive value
Positive error numbers denote device-specific errors.
negative value
Negative error numbers denote error messages defined by SCPI
Example:
SYST:ERR:ALL?
queries all entries in the error queue.
Response: 0, 'no error'
No errors have occurred since the error queue was last read out.
Usage:
Query only
SYSTem:ERRor:CODE:ALL?
The command queries all entries in the error queue and then deletes them. Only the error
numbers are returned and not the entire error text.
Return values:
<All>
string
0
"No error", i.e. the error queue is empty
positive value
Positive error numbers denote device-specific errors
negative value
Negative error numbers denote error messages defined by SCPI.
Example:
SYST:ERR:CODE:ALL
queries all entries in the error queue.
Response: 0
no errors have occurred since the error queue was last read out.
Usage:
Query only
SYSTem:ERRor:CODE[:NEXT]?
The command queries the oldest entry in the error queue and then deletes it. Only the
error number is returned and not the entire error text.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
393
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SYSTem Subsystem
Return values:
<Next>
string
0
"No error", i.e. the error queue is empty
positive value
Positive error numbers denote device-specific errors
negative value
Negative error numbers denote error messages defined by SCPI.
Example:
SYST:ERR:CODE
queries the oldest entry in the error queue.
Response: 0
No errors have occurred since the error queue was last read out.
Usage:
Query only
SYSTem:ERRor:COUNt?
The command queries the number of entries in the error queue. If the error queue is
empty, '0' is returned.
Return values:
<Count>
string
Example:
SYST:ERR:COUN
queries the number of entries in the error queue.
Response: 1
One error has occurred since the error queue was last read out.
Usage:
Query only
SYSTem:ERRor[:NEXT]?
The command queries the oldest entry in the error queue and then deletes it.
The command is identical to the command STATus:QUEue:NEXT.
Return values:
<Next>
string
0
"No error", i.e. the error queue is empty
positive value
Positive error numbers denote device-specific errors
negative value
Negative error numbers denote error messages defined by SCPI.
Example:
SYST:ERR?
queries the oldest entry in the error queue.
Response: 0, 'no error'
No errors have occurred since the error queue was last read out.
Usage:
Query only
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
394
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SYSTem Subsystem
Manual control:
See "History" on page 59
:SYSTem:IDENtification <Identification>
Enables/disables selection of user defined "IDN String" and "OPT String" for the selected
instrument (:SYST:LANG).
Note: While working in a emulation mode, the R&S SMB specific command set is disabled, i.e. the SCPI command SYST:IDEN will be discarded.
Parameters:
<Identification>
AUTO | USER
*RST:
AUTO
Example:
SYST:IDEN USER
selects the user defined identification string.
SYST:IRES "Test Device"
defines the identification string 'test device'
*IDN?
Response: 'test device'
SYST:LANG 'HP8657'
selects command set of the HP generator. The R&S SMB's command set is disabled.
To return to the SCPI command set of the R&S SMB, use the HP
command EX.
Manual control:
See "Identification Mode" on page 94
:SYSTem:IRESponse <Iresponse>
The command defines the identification string for selection user defined (SYST:IDEN
USER).
Note: While working in a emulation mode, the instrument's specific command set is disabled, i.e. the SCPI command SYST:IRES will be discarded.
Parameters:
<Iresponse>
Example:
string
SYST:IDEN USER
selects an user-defined identification
SYST:IRES "Test Device"
defines the identification string 'test device'
*IDN?
Response: 'test device'
:SYSTem:KLOCk <Klock>
This command (Keyboard LOCk) disables the front panel keyboard of the instrument
including the LOCAL key, or enables it again (OFF).
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
395
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SYSTem Subsystem
Parameters:
<Klock>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
OFF
Example:
SYST:KLOC ON
activates the keyboard lock. The keyboard cannot be operated
again until it has been enabled with SYST:KLOC OFF.
Manual control:
See "Keyboard" on page 99
:SYSTem:LANGuage <Language>
Sets the remote control command set.
The instrument can also be remote controlled via the command set of several other generators, e.g. HP generator.
Please check for the corresponding Application Note at the download area of the product
site on the Internet. The Application Note is also provided on the user documentation CDROM (included in delivery).
Note: While working in a emulation mode, the instrument's specific command set is disabled, i.e. the SCPI command SYST:LANG will be discarded.
The return to the SCPI command set of the R&S SMB can only be performed by using
the appropriate command of the selected command set. For example, the HP command
EX returns to the instrument-specific GPIB command set (selection SYST:LANG
HPxxxx).
Setting parameters:
<Language>
string
Example:
SYST:LANG?
Response: SCPI
The SCPI command set is used.
Usage:
Setting only
Manual control:
See "Language" on page 93
:SYSTem:ORESponse <Oresponse>
The command defines the OPT string for selection user defined (SYST:IDEN USER).
Note: While working in a emulation mode, the instrument's specific command set is disabled, i.e. the SCPI command SYST:ORES will be discarded.
Parameters:
<Oresponse>
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
string
396
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
SYSTem Subsystem
Example:
SYST:IDEN USER
selects an user-defined identification
SYST:ORES "Test Option"
defines the OPT string 'test option'
*OPT?
Response: 'test option'
:SYSTem:PROTect<ch>[:STATe] <State>,<password>
The command activates and deactivates the specified protection level.
Suffix:
<ch>
Parameters:
<State>
.
Indicates the protection level.
There are several protection levels which disable specific service
functions (authorized personnel of R&S Service Departments
only).
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
<password>
The respective functions are disabled when the protection level is
activated. No password is required for activation. A password must
be entered to deactivate the protection level. The password for the
first level is 123456. This protection level can be used to lock-out
internal adjustments.
Example:
SYST:PROT1 ON
activates protection level 1. Internal adjustments are only possible
after deactivating the lock-out.
SYST:PROT1 OFF, 123456
deactivates protection level 1. Internal adjustments are enabled
again.
Usage:
SCPI confirmed
Manual control:
See "Protection Level/Password" on page 96
SYSTem:SERRor?
This command returns a list of all errors existing at the time when the query is started.
This list corresponds to the display on the info page under manual control.
Return values:
<Serror>
string
Example:
SYST:SERR
queries all errors existing in the error queue.
Example:
Response: -221, 'Settings conflict', 153, 'Input
voltage out of range'
The two returned errors have occurred since the error queue was
last queried.
Usage:
Query only
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
397
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
TEST Subsystem
:SYSTem:STARtup:COMPlete?
The command queries if the startup of the instrument is completed.
Return values:
<Complete>
0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST:
0
Example:
SYST:STAR:COMP
Response: 1
The startup of the instrument is completed.
Usage:
Query only
:SYSTem:TIME <Time>
The command queries / sets the time for the instrument-internal clock.
The parameter is protected, in order to prevent accidental changes. It can be accessed
with protection level 1, see ​:​SYSTem:​PROTect<ch>[:​STATe]​ on page 397.
Parameters:
<Time>
0...23,0...59,0...59
Example:
SYST:TIME?
Response: 12,0,0 it is precisely 12 pm.
Manual control:
See "Time" on page 89
SYSTem:VERSion?
The command queries the SCPI version with which the instrument complies.
Return values:
<Version>
string
Example:
SYST:VERS
queries the SCPI version.
Response: 1996
The instrument complies with the version from 1996.
Usage:
Query only
7.15 TEST Subsystem
The TEST system contains the commands for performing the routines as well as for direct
manipulation of the hardware assemblies (:TEST:DIRect).
The self tests return a "0" if the test is performed successfully, otherwise a value other
than "0" is returned. None of the commands of this system have an *RST value.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
398
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
TEST Subsystem
Improper use may destroy the assembly!
The respective hardware assembly responds directly to the :TEST:DIRect command;
any safety mechanisms are bypassed. The command is used for servicing purposes and
should not be applied by the user.
:​TEST<hw>:​ALL:​STARt​..................................................................................................399
:​TEST<hw>:​ALL:​RESult?​................................................................................................399
:​TEST<hw>:​DIRect​........................................................................................................399
:TEST<hw>:ALL:STARt
This command performs a selftest on all installed hardware options. The selftest result
is queried with the command ​:​TEST<hw>:​ALL:​RESult?​ on page 399.
Example:
TEST:ALL:STAR
Starts the selftest
Usage:
Event
Manual control:
See "Selftest" on page 88
:TEST<hw>:ALL:RESult?
Queries the result of the performed selftest (command ​:​TEST<hw>:​ALL:​STARt​
on page 399).
Return values:
<All>
0|1
Example:
TEST:ALL
Starts the selftest
:TEST:ALL:RES?
Response: "0" on success, "1" on fail
Usage:
Query only
Manual control:
See "Selftest" on page 88
:TEST<hw>:DIRect <HW_assembly>,<subadress>,<hex data string>
:TEST<hw>:DIRect? <HW_assembly>,<subadress>
The respective hardware assembly responds directly to the command; any safety mechanisms are bypassed. This function is only available via remote control.
Example:
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
TEST:DIR 'SSYN',0,#H12345678
TEST:DIR? 'SSYN',0
Response: #H12345678
399
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
TRIGger Subsystem
7.16 TRIGger Subsystem
The TRIGger system contains the commands for selecting the trigger source for the RF
and LF sweep. The trigger input connectors are configured in the SOURce:INPut subsystem.
The trigger system of the R&S SMB is a simplified implementation of the SCPI trigger
system. The TRIGger system differs from the SCPI system as follows:
●
No INITiate command; the instrument behaves as if INITiate:CONTinuous
ON were set.
●
Under TRIGger several sweep subsystems exist.
Other commands associated with the trigger system of the R&S SMB can be found in the
modulation and RF signal subsystems.
TRIGger<hw>
●
Suffix TRIGger<1|2> is not permitted
●
TRIGger0 activates the LF output.
Table 7-2: Cross-reference between the manual and remote control
R&S name
SCPI name
Command under manual control
AUTO
IMMediate
"Auto" mode
SINGle
BUS
"Single" mode.
EXTernal
EXTernal
"Ext Single" and "Ext Step" mode.
Use command LFO:SWEep:MODE
to select between the two sweep
modes.
EAUTo
-
"Ext Start/Stop" mode.
TRIGger0[:​SWEep]:​SOURce​...........................................................................................400
:​TRIGger<hw>:​LFFSweep:​SOURce​.................................................................................400
:​TRIGger<hw>:​FSWeep[:​IMMediate]​................................................................................401
:​TRIGger<hw>:​FSWeep:​SOURce​....................................................................................401
:​TRIGger<hw>:​PSWeep[:​IMMediate]​................................................................................402
:​TRIGger<hw>:​PSWeep:​SOURce​....................................................................................403
:​TRIGger<hw>[:​SWEep][:​IMMediate]​................................................................................403
:​TRIGger<hw>[:​SWEep]:​SOURce​....................................................................................404
TRIGger0[:SWEep]:SOURce <Source>
:TRIGger<hw>:LFFSweep:SOURce <Source>
The command sets the trigger source for the LF sweep. The trigger is triggered by the
command :SOURce:LFOutput:SWEep[:FREQuency]EXECute.
The names of the parameters correspond directly to the various settings under manual
control. SCPI uses other names for the parameters; these names are also accepted by
the instrument. The SCPI names should be used if compatibility is an important consideration.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
400
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
TRIGger Subsystem
An overview of the various names is given in the ​table 7-2.
Parameters:
<Source>
AUTO | IMMediate | SINGle | BUS | EXTernal | EAUTo
AUTO|IMMediate
The trigger is free-running, i.e. the trigger condition is fulfilled continuously. As soon as one sweep is finished, the next sweep is
started.
SINGle|BUS
One complete sweep cycle is triggered by the GPIB commands ​
[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​EXECute​ or
*TRG.
The mode has to be set to AUTO (​[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput:​
SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​MODE​).
EXTernal
The sweep is triggered externally via the INST TRIG connector.
EAUTo
The sweep is triggered externally via the INST TRIG connector.
As soon as one sweep is finished, the next sweep is started. A
second trigger event stops the sweep at the current frequency, a
third trigger event starts the trigger at the start frequency, and so
on.
*RST:
Example:
SINGle
TRIG:LFFS:SOUR EXT
selects triggering with an external trigger.
:TRIGger<hw>:FSWeep[:IMMediate]
The command immediately starts an RF frequency sweep cycle.
The command is only effective for sweep mode "Single" (SOUR:SWE:FREQ:MODE
AUTO in combination with TRIG:FSW:SOUR SING).
The command corresponds to the manual control "Execute Single Sweep".
Example:
SWE:FREQ:MODE AUTO
sets the triggered sweep mode, i.e. a trigger is required to start the
sweep.
TRIG:FSW:SOUR SING
sets the "Single" trigger mode, i.e. a trigger starts a single sweep.
TRIG:FSW
starts a single RF frequency sweep.
Usage:
Event
:TRIGger<hw>:FSWeep:SOURce <Source>
The command sets the trigger source for the RF frequency sweep.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
401
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
TRIGger Subsystem
The names of the parameters correspond directly to the various settings under manual
control. SCPI uses other names for the parameters; these names are also accepted by
the instrument. The SCPI names should be used if compatibility is an important consideration.
An overview of the various names is given in ​table 7-2.
Parameters:
<Source>
AUTO | IMMediate | SINGle | BUS | EXTernal | EAUTo
AUTO|IMMediate
The trigger is free-running, i.e. the trigger condition is fulfilled continuously. As soon as one sweep is finished, the next sweep is
started.
SINGle|BUS
One complete sweep cycle is triggered by the GPIB commands ​
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​EXECute​, ​:​
TRIGger<hw>:​FSWeep[:​IMMediate]​ or *TRG. The mode has
to be set to AUTO (:SOURce:SWEep:FREQuency:MODE AUTO).
EXTernal
The sweep is triggered externally via the INST TRIG connector.
EAUTo
The sweep is triggered externally via the INST TRIG connector.
As soon as one sweep is finished, the next sweep is started. A
second trigger event stops the sweep at the current frequency, a
third trigger event starts the trigger at the start frequency, and so
on.
*RST:
SINGle
Example:
TRIG:FSW:SOUR EXT
selects triggering with an external trigger.
Manual control:
See "Mode - Frequency Sweep" on page 146
:TRIGger<hw>:PSWeep[:IMMediate]
The command immediately starts an RF level sweep.
The command is only effective for sweep mode "Single" (SOURce:SWEep:POWer:MODE
AUTO in combination with TRIG:PSW:SOUR SING).
The command corresponds to the manual control "Execute Single Sweep".
Example:
SWE:POW:MODE AUTO
selects the triggered sweep mode, i.e. a trigger is required to start
the sweep.
TRIG:PSW:SOUR AUTO
sets the Single trigger mode, i.e. a trigger starts a single sweep.
TRIG:PSW
starts a single RF level sweep.
Usage:
Event
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
402
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
TRIGger Subsystem
:TRIGger<hw>:PSWeep:SOURce <Source>
The command sets the trigger source for the RF level sweep.
The names of the parameters correspond directly to the various settings under manual
control. SCPI uses other names for the parameters; these names are also accepted by
the instrument. The SCPI names should be used if compatibility is an important consideration.
An overview of the various names is given in ​table 7-2.
Parameters:
<Source>
AUTO | IMMediate | SINGle | BUS | EXTernal | EAUTo
AUTO|IMMediate
The trigger is free-running, i.e. the trigger condition is fulfilled continuously. As soon as one sweep is finished, the next sweep is
started.
SINGle|BUS
One complete sweep cycle is triggered by the GPIB commands ​
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep:​POWer:​EXECute​, ​:​TRIGger<hw>:​
PSWeep[:​IMMediate]​ or *TRG. The mode has to be set to
AUTO (:SOURce:SWEep:LEVel:MODE AUTO).
EXTernal
The sweep is triggered externally via the INST TRIG connector.
EAUTo
The sweep is triggered externally via the INST TRIG connector.
As soon as one sweep is finished, the next sweep is started. A
second trigger event stops the sweep at the current frequency, a
third trigger event starts the trigger at the start frequency, and so
on.
*RST:
SINGle
Example:
TRIG:PSW:SOUR EXT
selects triggering with an external trigger.
Manual control:
See "Mode - Level Sweep" on page 153
:TRIGger<hw>[:SWEep][:IMMediate]
The command starts all sweeps which are activated for the respective path. The command starts all sweeps which are activated.
The sweep to be executed depends on the respective MODE setting
(:SOUR:SWEep:POW|FREQ:MODE and :SOUR:LFO:SWEep[:FREQ]:MODE).
The command corresponds to the manual-control command "Execute Trigger".
Example:
TRIG
starts all active sweeps.
Usage:
Event
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
403
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
UNIT Subsystem
:TRIGger<hw>[:SWEep]:SOURce <Source>
The command sets the trigger source for all sweeps.
The names of the parameters correspond directly to the various settings under manual
control. SCPI uses other names for the parameters; these names are also accepted by
the instrument. The SCPI names should be used if compatibility is an important consideration.
An overview of the various names is given in the ​table 7-2.
Parameters:
<Source>
AUTO | IMMediate | SINGle | BUS | EXTernal | EAUTo
AUTO|IMMediate
The trigger is free-running, i.e. the trigger condition is fulfilled continuously. As soon as one sweep is finished, the next sweep is
started.
SINGle|BUS
One complete sweep cycle is triggered by the GPIB commands :SOURce:SWEep:POWer|FREQuency:EXEC,
TRIGger:PSWeep|FSWeep:IMMediate or *TRG.
If :SOURce:SWEep:POWer:MODE is set to STEP, one step is executed.
The mode has to be set to AUTO.
EXTernal
The sweep is triggered externally via the INST TRIG connector.
EAUTo
The sweep is triggered externally via the INST TRIG connector.
As soon as one sweep is finished, the next sweep is started. A
second trigger event stops the sweep at the current frequency, a
third trigger event starts the trigger at the start frequency, and so
on.
*RST:
SINGle
Example:
TRIG0:SOUR EXT
selects triggering with an external trigger. The trigger is input via
the INST TRIG connector.
Usage:
Setting only
Manual control:
See "Mode - LF Sweep" on page 187
7.17 UNIT Subsystem
The UNIT subsystem contains the commands specifying which units are valid if no unit
is indicated in a command. These settings are valid for the entire instrument.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
404
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
Direct Commands for the Stereo/RDS Coder Option R&S SMB-B5
:UNIT:ANGLe <Angle>
The command defines the default unit for the phase modulation angle. It is not valid for
other commands which determine angle values, e.g. RF phase. It does not influence the
manual control parameter unit and the display.
Parameters:
<Angle>
DEGree | DEGRee | RADian
*RST:
Example:
RADian
UNIT:ANGL DEG
sets default unit DEG for all commands which determine angle
values.
:UNIT:POWer <Power>
The command defines the default unit for power. It is valid for all commands which determine power values. It does not influence the manual control parameter unit and the display.
Parameters:
<Power>
V | DBUV | DBM
*RST:
Example:
DBM
UNIT:POW V
sets default unit V for all commands which determine power values.
7.18 Direct Commands for the Stereo/RDS Coder Option
R&S SMB-B5
The direct command allow to access all functions of the stereo coder option.
Some of the functions are also available via SCPI commands. In this case, it is recommended to use the SCPI commands in order to keep the settings of the R&S SMB and
the stereo coder synchronized. Direct command for which a SCPI command is available
are marked with “for documentation reasons only” and the SCPI command is given.
The direct commands are sent to the Stereo/RDS Coder with
[SOURce:]STEReo:DIRect
"command string".
Information is queried with STEReo:DIRect? "command string".
All parameters are string parameters, this is the reason why all of them have to be sent
in qotation marks ( " – characters are part of the full direct command ! ).
Prior to using the stereo coder, the stereo modulation of the R&S SMB has to be switched
on with command SOURce:STEReo:STATe ON. The SCPI command
SOURce:STEReo:AUDio:FREQuency sets the LF-Generator frequency and command
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
405
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
Direct Commands for the Stereo/RDS Coder Option R&S SMB-B5
SOURce:STEReo:MMF limits the modulation frequency. These commands have no counterpart in the direct commands.
7.18.1 Remote-Control Commands
STEReo:DIRect "<FFG>=<RetrNumb>,<DataSeq#1>,<DataSeq#2>,..."
STEReo:DIRect? "<FFG>"
Transmits data via free format groups (FFGs). A free format group can be filled with any
desired data. (5 bits in block B and 16 bits each in blocks C and D of the group).
Note: The command described here only causes a queue to be filled with data for a
specific group. The data will only be sent when the group in question is added to the
group sequence with the command ​"GS", on page 414.
Setting parameters:
<RetrNumb>
Number of retransmissions
<DataSeq>
Max. 20 different data sequences can be defined.
10 characters must be specified each per <DataSeq>. Leading
zeros, if any, must also be specified.
00: erases the data.
Range:
0000000000 to 1FFFFFFFFF (10 ASCII ccoded
hexadecimal characters each)
Parameters for setting and query:
<FFG>
1A | 3A | 5A | 6A | 7A | 8A | 9A | 10A | 11A | 12A | 13A
Determines the free format group.
To transmit the FFGs of the B group, the same commands are
used, only the A groups are replaced by the B groups in the group
sequence. If B groups are transmitted, block C is overwritten with
the PI code.
Example:
STEReo:DIRect "1A=01,0123456789,1FFFFFFFFF"
Fills a queue with the data "0123456789,1FFFFFFFFF". The data
is sent in consecutive order in group 1A after group 1A is added
to the group sequence (see command ​"GS", on page 414).
Example:
STEReo:DIRect? "1A"
Reads the data of group 1A.
Response: "01,0123456789,1FFFFFFFFF"
STEReo:DIRect "AF=<A>,<Freq#1>,<Freq#2>,..."
STEReo:DIRect? "AF<z>"
Defines an alternative frequency list.
Note: A maximum of five AF lists with max. 25 frequencies per list can be created.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
406
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
Direct Commands for the Stereo/RDS Coder Option R&S SMB-B5
Parameters:
<Freq>
xxx.x
Sets the alternative frequencies as ASCII coded decimal numbers.
If list <z> is not available, the response is ().
Range:
87.6 to 107.9
Setting parameters:
<A>
N
new AF list
+
AF list to be added
Query parameters:
<z>
AF list to be read
Range:
1 to 5
Example:
STEReo:DIRect "AF=N,97.4,98.3"
Defines an alternative frequency list, the alternative frequencies
97.4 and 98.3 are inserted.
Example:
STEReo:DIRect? "AF1"
Reads the first alternative frequency list.
Response: "97.4,98.3"
Example:
STEReo:DIRect "AF=N"
Deletes all frequency lists.
STEReo:DIRect "ARI=<State>"
STEReo:DIRect? "ARI"
(for documentation reasons only)
Activates ARI signal transmission.
Use SCPI command ​[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​ARI:​STATe​ instead.
Setting parameters:
<State>
0|1
Example:
STEReo:DIRect "ARI=0"
Deactivates ARI signal transmission.
Example:
STEReo:DIRect? "ARI"
Response: "0"
STEReo:DIRect "ARI-DEV=<Deviation>"
STEReo:DIRect? "ARI-DEV"
(for documentation reasons only)
Sets the frequency deviation of the ARI signal (max. deviation).
Use SCPI command ​[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​ARI[:​DEViation]​ instead.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
407
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
Direct Commands for the Stereo/RDS Coder Option R&S SMB-B5
Setting parameters:
<Deviation>
Sets the frequency deviation.
Note: A four-digit value must always be set. Leading zeros, if any,
must also be specified.
Range:
0000 to 1000 (ASCII coded decimal numbers), corresponding to 0 Hz to 10 kHz
Example:
STEReo:DIRect "ARI-DEV=1000"
Sets the ARI frequency deviation to 10 kHz.
Example:
STEReo:DIRect? "ARI-DEV
Response: "1000"
STEReo:DIRect "ARI-ID=<Id>"
STEReo:DIRect? "ARI-ID"
(for documentation reasons only)
Selects the ARI identification.
Use SCPI command ​[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​ARI:​TYPE​ instead.
Parameters:
<Id>
0|1|2|3
0
Off
1
DK (traffic announcement identification)
2
BK (area identification)
3
DK and BK (traffic announcement identification and area identification)
Example:
STEReo:DIRect "ARI-ID=0"
Deactivates the ARI identification.
Example:
STEReo:DIRect? "ARI-ID"
Response: "0"
STEReo:DIRect "BIN=<x>"
Defines and sends, or queries, binary test patterns.The BIN command causes the Stereo/
RDS Coder to send periodic binary bit patterns instead of RDS data.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
408
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
Direct Commands for the Stereo/RDS Coder Option R&S SMB-B5
Parameters:
<x>
0
binary mode OFF
1
00000000...,
2
11111111...,
3
01010101...,
4
11001100...
Example:
STEReo:DIRect "BIN=2"
The binary test pattern is set to "2" so that only "1s" are transmitted.
STEReo:DIRect "BK=<Code>"
STEReo:DIRect? "BK"
(for documentation reasons only)
Sets the ARI area identification.
Use SCPI command ​[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​ARI:​BK[:​CODE]​ instead.
Parameters:
<Code>
A|B|C|D|E|F
Example:
STEReo:DIRect "BK=E"
The ARI area identification is set to "E".
Example:
STEReo:DIRect? "BK"
Response: "E"
STEReo:DIRect "CT= <Hour>:<Min>:<Sec>,<Day>.<Month>.<Year>"
STEReo:DIRect? "CT"
Sets and activates transmission of the real-time clock.
Note: The CT data is transmitted in group 4A. Setting the real-time clock (CT command)
automatically adds group 4A to the group sequence. Group 4A must not be manually
added to, or removed from, the group sequence. To remove group 4A from the group
sequence, use the command ​"CT=off".
Setting parameters:
<Hour>:<Min>:<Sec> Range:
00:00:00 to 23:59:59
<Day>.<Month>.<Year>
Range:
01.01.00 to 31.12.85
Example:
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
STEReo:DIRect "CT=20:30:59,01.08.03"
The real-time clock is set to 20:30:59 and 1 August 2003.
409
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
Direct Commands for the Stereo/RDS Coder Option R&S SMB-B5
Example:
STEReo:DIRect? "CT"
Response: "20:31:06,01.08.03"
STEReo:DIRect "CT=off"
Deactivates transmission of the real-time clock signal in the RDS signal.
Note: This command is used to remove group 4A from the group sequence. Group 4A
must not be manually removed from the group sequence.
Example:
STEReo:DIRect "CT=off"
The real-time clock signal is no longer transmitted in the RDS signal.
Usage:
Setting only
STEReo:DIRect "DI=<x>"
STEReo:DIRect? "DI"
Sets or reads the decoder information (DI).
With this command, the current decoder operating mode (mono, stereo, etc) can be
detected and, if necessary, changed.
Parameters:
<x>
Range:
0 to F (ASCII coded hexadecimal numbers)
Example:
STEReo:DIRect "DI=4"
The decoder information is set to "4".
Example:
STEReo:DIRect? "DI"
Response: "4"
STEReo:DIRect "DS=<x>"
STEReo:DIRect? "DS"
(for documentation reasons only)
Selects/activates a storage area in the Stereo/RDS Coder.
Upon activation, the settings stored in the selected area can be loaded.
Use SCPI command ​[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​RDS:​DATaset​ instead.
Parameters:
<x>
Range:
1 to 5
Example:
STEReo:DIRect "DS=2"
Storage area 2 is activated.
Example:
STEReo:DIRect? "DS"
Response: "2"
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
410
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
Direct Commands for the Stereo/RDS Coder Option R&S SMB-B5
STEReo:DIRect "EON-AFA= <PI>,<A>,<Freq#1>,<Freq#2>,..."
STEReo:DIRect? "EON-AFA,<PI>,<z>"
Enhanced Other Networks: defines type A alternative frequencies for the EON with the
selected PI.
Parameters:
<PI>
Range:
<Freq>
xxx.x
0000 to FFFF (ASCII coded hexadecimal numbers)
Sets the alternative frequencies as ASCII coded decimal numbers.
If list <z> is not available, the response is ().
Note: For each Enhanced Other Network (EON), a maximum of
five type A alternative frequency lists can be created.
Range:
87.6 to 107.9
Setting parameters:
<A>
N
new AF list
+
AF list to be added
Query parameters:
<z>
AF list to be read
Range:
1 to 5
Example:
STEReo:DIRect "EON-AFA=1000,N,97.4,98.3"
Creates a new type A alternative frequency list for the EON with
PI=1000.
The new list contains the alternative frequencies 97.4 MHz and
98.3 MHz.
Example:
STEReo:DIRect? "EON-AFA,1000,1"
Reads the first type A alternative frequency list of the EON with
PI=1000.
Response: "97.4,98.3"
STEReo:DIRect "EON-AFB= <PI>,<A>,<Freq#1>,<Freq#2>,..."
STEReo:DIRect? "EON-AFB,<PI>,<z>"
Enhanced Other Networks: defines type B alternative frequencies for the EON with the
selected PI.
Parameters:
<PI>
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
Range:
0000 to FFFF (ASCII coded hexadecimal numbers)
411
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
Direct Commands for the Stereo/RDS Coder Option R&S SMB-B5
<Freq>
xxx.x
Sets the alternative frequencies as ASCII coded decimal numbers.
If list <z> is not available, the response is ().
Note: For each Enhanced Other Network (EON), a maximum of
five type B alternative frequency lists can be created, each list
containing max. five frequencies, where <Freq#1> is Tuned Frequency (TF) and <Freq#2..5> are the Mapped Frequencies (MF).
A minimum of two frequencies per EON is required.
Range:
87.6 to 107.9
Setting parameters:
<A>
N
new AF list
+
AF list to be added
Query parameters:
<z>
AF list to be read
Range:
1 to 5
Example:
STEReo:DIRect "EON-AFB=1000,N,97.4,98.3"
Creates a new type B alternative frequency list for the EON with
PI=1000.
The list contains the alternative frequencies 97.4 MHz and 98.3
MHz.
Example:
STEReo:DIRect? "EON-AFB,1000,1"
Reads the first type B alternative frequency list of the EON with
PI=1000.
Response: "97.4,98.3"
STEReo:DIRect "EON-DEL=<PI>"
Enhanced Other Networks: deletes the complete EON with selected <PI>.
Parameters:
<PI>
Range:
0000 to FFFF (ASCII coded hexadecimal numbers)
Example:
STEReo:DIRect "EON-DEL=1000"
Deletes the EON with PI=1000.
Usage:
Setting only
STEReo:DIRect "EON-PI=<PI>"
STEReo:DIRect? "EON-PI"
Enhanced Other Networks: creates a new EON or reads the list of the program identification (PI) codes of all EONs created so far.
Note: A maximum of eight EONs can be created.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
412
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
Direct Commands for the Stereo/RDS Coder Option R&S SMB-B5
Parameters:
<PI>
Note: A four-digit value must always be set. Leading zeros, if any,
must also be specified.
Range:
0000 to FFFF (ASCII coded hexadecimal numbers)
Example:
STEReo:DIRect "EON-PI=1000"
Creates a new EON with PI=1000.
Example:
STEReo:DIRect? "EON-PI"
Response: "1000"
STEReo:DIRect "EON-PS=<PI>,<PS>"
STEReo:DIRect? "EON-PS,<PI>"
Enhanced Other Networks: sets the program service (PS) name for the EON with the
selected <PI>.
Parameters:
<PI>
Range:
0000 to FFFF (ASCII coded hexadecimal numbers)
Setting parameters:
<PS>
8 ASCII characters
Note: An eight-digit value must always be set. Blank spaces, if
any, must also be entered, otherwise the value will not be accepted.
Example:
STEReo:DIRect "EON-PS=1000,Test 123"
Sets the program service name for the EON with PI=1000 to "Test
123".
Example:
STEReo:DIRect? "EON-PS,1000"
Reads the program service name of the EON with PI=1000.
Response: "Test 123"
STEReo:DIRect "EON-PTY=<PI>,<PTY>"
STEReo:DIRect? "EON-PTY,<PI>"
Enhanced Other Networks: sets the program type (PTY) for the EON with the selected
<PI>.
Parameters:
<PI>
Range:
Setting parameters:
<PTY>
Range:
0000 to FFFF (ASCII coded hexadecimal numbers)
00 to 31 (ASCII coded decimal numbers)
Example:
STEReo:DIRect "EON-PTY=1000,10"
Sets the program type for the EON with PI=1000 to "10".
Example:
STEReo:DIRect? "EON-PTY,1000"
Reads the program type of the EON with PI=1000.
Response: "10"
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
413
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
Direct Commands for the Stereo/RDS Coder Option R&S SMB-B5
STEReo:DIRect "EON-TA=<PI>,<TA>"
STEReo:DIRect? "EON-TA,<PI>"
Enhanced Other Networks: sets the TA flag for the EON with the selected <PI>.
Parameters:
<PI>
Range:
0000 to FFFF (ASCII coded hexadecimal numbers)
Setting parameters:
<TA>
0|1
Example:
STEReo:DIRect "EON-TA=1000,1"
Sets the TA flag for the EON with PI=1000 to "1".
Example:
STEReo:DIRect? "EON-TA,1000"
Reads the TA flag of the EON with PI=1000.
Response: "1"
STEReo:DIRect "EON-TP=<PI>,<TP>"
STEReo:DIRect? "EON-TP,<PI>"
Enhanced Other Networks: sets the TP flag for the EON with the selected <PI>.
Parameters:
<PI>
Range:
0000 to FFFF (ASCII coded hexadecimal numbers)
Setting parameters:
<TP>
0|1
Example:
STEReo:DIRect "EON-TP=1000,1"
Sets the TP flag for the EON with PI=1000 to "1".
Example:
STEReo:DIRect? "EON-TP,1000"
Reads the TP flag of the EON with PI=1000.
Response: "1"
STEReo:DIRect "GS=<Group#1>,<Group#2>,...<Grpup#36>"
STEReo:DIRect? "GS"
Sets or reads the group sequence.
Note: Only group A or group B data may be sent at a time. Only groups that contain data
are transmitted. The groups 4A, 14B and 15B are automatically added to the group
sequence and must not be added or removed manually.
Setting parameters:
<Group>
0A,1A,2A, … to 15B
Example:
STEReo:DIRect "GS=0A,1B,10A,15A"
The groups 0A,1B,10A,15A are transmitted.
Example:
STEReo:DIRect? "GS"
Response: "0A,1B,10A,15A"
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
414
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
Direct Commands for the Stereo/RDS Coder Option R&S SMB-B5
STEReo:DIRect "IMP=<x>"
STEReo:DIRect? "IMP"
(for documentation reasons only)
Sets external L, R impedances.
Use the SCPI command ​[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​EXTernal:​IMPedance​ instead.
Setting parameters:
<x>
1|2
1
600 Ohm
2
100 kOhm
Example:
STEReo:DIRect "IMP=1"
The external impedance is set to 600 Ohm
Example:
STEReo:DIRect? "IMP"
Response: "1"
STEReo:DIRect
"MASK=<NumbGroups>,<ErrFreeGroups>,<BitMaskBlcA>,<BitMaskBlcB>,<Bit
MaskBlcC>,<BitMaskBlcD>"
STEReo:DIRect? "MASK"
Sets a bit mask to generate defined bit errors in the RDS data stream.
Setting parameters:
<NumbGroups>
Number of groups to be masked.
If <NumbGroups> is set to zero, the RDS groups are continuously
linked to the error mask.
If <NumbGroups> is set to a value other than zero, this value is
decremented after each errored group transmitted. When zero
count is reached, no further errored groups are transmitted, and ​
MASK_STATE is set to "0".
Range:
<ErrFreeGroups>
Number of error-free groups to be inserted after each errored
group.
Range:
<BitMaskBlc>
00 to FF (hexadecimal values)
00 to FF (hexadecimal values)
<BitMaskBlcA>,<BitMaskBlcB>,<BitMaskBlcC>,<BitMaskBlcD>
Hexadecimal bit mask for blocks A, B, C and D of the RDS groups.
For each block, 26 bits (16 data bits and 10 CRC bits) have to be
entered in hexadecimal code.
Range:
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
0000000 to 3FFFFFFF
415
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
Direct Commands for the Stereo/RDS Coder Option R&S SMB-B5
Example:
STEReo:DIRect
"MASK=09,01,0000001,0000000,0000000,0000000"
In nine RDS groups, the least significant bit of the CRC code of
block A is inverted, i.e. an errored bit is sent. After each errored
group, one error-free group is inserted. After transmission of the
complete sequence, MASK_STATE is set to "0".
With the command MASK_STATE=1, the above sequence (9
errored groups with one error-free group inserted after each
errored group) is retransmitted once.
Then, MASK_STATE is again set to "0".
Example:
STEReo:DIRect? "MASK"
Response: "09,01,0000001,0000000,0000000,0000000"
STEReo:DIRect "MASK_STATE=<State>"
STEReo:DIRect? "MASK_STATE"
Switches on or off the transmission of defined bit errors in the RDS data stream.
Setting parameters:
<State>
0|1
Example:
STEReo:DIRect "MASK_STATE=1"
With the command MASK_STATE=1, a sequence of errored
groups as defined by the MASK command is retransmitted once
if the number of groups to be masked is other than zero. Then,
MASK_STATE is automatically set to "0".
If the number of groups to be masked is equal to zero in the
MASK command (which means continuous error transmission), the
masking function can be switched off with MASK_STATE=0.
Example:
STEReo:DIRect? "MASK_STATE"
Response: "1"
The MASK_STATE query provides information as to whether the
RDS data stream is linked to an error mask.
STEReo:DIRect "MODE=<EMODE>"
STEReo:DIRect? "MODE"
(for documentation reasons only)
Sets one of various transmit modes.
Use the SCPI command ​[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​AUDio:​MODE​ instead.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
416
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
Direct Commands for the Stereo/RDS Coder Option R&S SMB-B5
Setting parameters:
<EMODE>
1|2|3|4|5
1
L: signal in left channel only
2
R: signal in right channel only
3
signal of equal frequency and phase in left and right channel
4
signal of equal frequency and opposite phase in left and right
channel
5
different, independent signals in left and right channel
(5 is not possible if the internal LF generator is selected as source
(SRC = LFGen))
Example:
STEReo:DIRect "MODE=1"
Only the signal of the left channel is transmitted.
Example:
STEReo:DIRect? "MODE"
Response: "1"
STEReo:DIRect "MS=<Flag>"
STEReo:DIRect? "MS"
Sets or reads the music/speech flag.
The flag signals whether music or speech is being transmitted.
Setting parameters:
<Flag>
M|S
Example:
STEReo:DIRect "MS=M"
The music/speech flag is set to "M". This signals that music is currently transmitted.
Example:
STEReo:DIRect? "MS"
Response: "M"
STEReo:DIRect "MPX-DEV=<Deviation>"
STEReo:DIRect? "MPX-DEV"
(for documentation reasons only)
Sets the MPX frequency deviation (max. deviation).
Use the SCPI command ​[:​SOURce]:​STEReo[:​DEViation]​ instead.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
417
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
Direct Commands for the Stereo/RDS Coder Option R&S SMB-B5
Setting parameters:
<Deviation>
A five-digit value must always be set. Leading zeros, if any, must
also be specified.
Range:
00000 to 10000 (ASCII coded decimal numbers),
corresponding to 0 Hz to 100 kHz
Example:
STEReo:DIRect "MPX-DEV=00201"
Sets the MPX frequency deviation to 2.01 kHz.
Example:
STEReo:DIRect? "MPX-DEV"
Response: "00201"
STEReo:DIRect "PI=<PI>"
STEReo:DIRect? "PI"
Sets or reads the RDS program identification (PI) code.
Setting parameters:
<PI>
Note: A four-digit value must always be set. Leading zeros, if any,
must also be specified, otherwise the value will not be accepted.
Range:
0000 to FFFF (ASCII coded hexadecimal numbers)
Example:
STEReo:DIRect "PI=1234"
The program identification code to be transmitted is set to "1234".
Example:
STEReo:DIRect? "PI"
Response: "1234"
STEReo:DIRect "PIL=<State>"
STEReo:DIRect? "PIL"
(for documentation reasons only)
Activates/deactivates the pilot tone.
Use the SCPI command ​[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​PILot:​STATe​ instead.
Setting parameters:
<State>
0|1
Example:
STEReo:DIRect "PIL=1"
The pilot tone is activated.
Example:
STEReo:DIRect? "PIL"
Response: "1"
STEReo:DIRect "PIL-DEV=<Deviation>"
STEReo:DIRect? "PIL-DEV"
(for documentation reasons only)
Sets the pilot tone frequency deviation (max. deviation).
Use the SCPI command ​[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​PILot[:​DEViation]​ instead.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
418
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
Direct Commands for the Stereo/RDS Coder Option R&S SMB-B5
Setting parameters:
<Deviation>
Note: A four-digit value must always be set. Leading zeros, if any,
must also be specified.
Range:
0000 to 1000 (ASCII coded decimal numbers), corresponding to 0 Hz to 10 kHz
Example:
STEReo:DIRect "PIL-DEV=1000"
Sets the frequency deviation of the pilot tone to 10 kHz.
Example:
STEReo:DIRect? "PIL-DEV"
Response: "1000"
STEReo:DIRect "PIL-PH=<Phase>"
STEReo:DIRect? "PIL-PH"
(for documentation reasons only)
Sets the pilot tone phase.
Use the SCPI command ​[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​PILot:​PHASe​ instead.
Setting parameters:
<Phase>
Note: A two-digit value must always be set with a sign ("+" or "-")
in front of it. Leading zeros, if any, must also be specified.
Range:
-5.0 to +5.0 (ASCII coded decimal numbers), corresponding to ±5.0
Example:
STEReo:DIRect "PIL-PH=-33"
The pilot tone phase is set to 3.3
Example:
STEReo:DIRect? "PIL-PH"
Response: "-33"
STEReo:DIRect "PRE=<Preemphasis>"
STEReo:DIRect? "PRE"
(for documentation reasons only)
Sets one of various preemphasis options.
Use the SCPI commands ​[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​AUDio:​PREemphasis:​STATe​ and ​
[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​AUDio:​PREemphasis​ instead.
Setting parameters:
<Preemphasis>
0|1|2
0
Off
1
50 us
2
75 us
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
419
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
Direct Commands for the Stereo/RDS Coder Option R&S SMB-B5
Example:
STEReo:DIRect "PRE=1"
The preemphasis is set to 50 us.
Example:
STEReo:DIRect? "PRE"
Response: "1"
STEReo:DIRect "PRESET"
Sets the default settings in accordance with specifications.
Example:
STEReo:DIRect "PRESET"
Usage:
Event
STEReo:DIRect "PS=<PS>"
STEReo:DIRect? "PS"
Sets or reads the RDS program service (PS) name.
Setting parameters:
<PS>
8 ASCII characters
Note: An eight-digit value must always be set. Blank spaces, if
any, must also be entered, otherwise the value will not be accepted.
Special characters in the program service name are entered with
a leading back slash (\) followed by the decimal code of the spezial
character according to tabe E1 of CENELEC.
Example: STER:DIR "RT=02,0,test text with \217" 217
denotes the German ü.
Example:
STEReo:DIRect "PS=RDS Test"
Sets the program service name to be transmitted to "RDS Test".
Example:
STEReo:DIRect? "PS"
Response: "RDS Test"
STEReo:DIRect "PS-TABLE=<Table>"
STEReo:DIRect? "PS-TABLE"
Selects the character set table tobe used for the display of the RDS program service (PS)
name in the receiver.
The information concerning the character set is transmitted in segment 0 of the PS. Segment 0 is repeatedly transmtted if the value for PS-TABLE > 0. For PS-TABLE=0 no
information concerning the character set is transmitted.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
420
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
Direct Commands for the Stereo/RDS Coder Option R&S SMB-B5
Setting parameters:
<Table>
0|1|2|3
0
no information concerning the character set table in the PS
1
table E.1 is used
2
table E.2 is used
3
table E.3 is used
Example:
STEReo:DIRect "PS-TABLE=2"
The information concerning the character set is transmitted in
segment 0 of the PS in group 0A. To this end, segment 0 is transmitted repeatedly. At the first transmission segment 0 contains the
information about the character set, at the second transmission
segment 0 contains the first two characters of the PS.
STEReo:DIRect "PTY=<PTY>"
STEReo:DIRect? "PTY"
Sets or reads the program type (PTY).
Setting parameters:
<PTY>
Note: A two-digit value must always be set. A leading zero, if any,
must also be specified.
Range:
00 to 31 (ASCII coded decimal numbers)
Example:
STEReo:DIRect "PTY=08"
Sets the program type to be transmitted to "08".
Example:
STEReo:DIRect? "PTY"
Response: "08"
STEReo:DIRect "PTYN=<PTYN>"
STEReo:DIRect? "PTYN"
Sets or reads the RDS program type (PTY) name.
Setting parameters:
<PTYN>
8 ASCII characters
Note: An eight-digit value must always be set. Blank spaces, if
any, must also be entered, otherwise the value will not be accepted.
Example:
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
STEReo:DIRect "PTYN=Football"
Sets the program type name to be transmitted to "Football".
STEReo:DIRect "GS=0A,10A”
Group 10A is activated in addition to group 0A. The program type
name "Football" is now transmitted.
421
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
Direct Commands for the Stereo/RDS Coder Option R&S SMB-B5
Example:
STEReo:DIRect? "PTYN"
Response: "Football"
Example:
STEReo:DIRect "PTYN="
Transmission of PTYN in group 10A is stopped, even if group 10A
is contained in the group sequence.
STEReo:DIRect "RDS=<State>"
STEReo:DIRect? "RDS"
(for documentation reasons only)
Switches RDS on or off.
Use the SCPI command ​[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​RDS:​STATe​ instead.
Setting parameters:
<State>
0|1
Example:
STEReo:DIRect "RDS=1"
RDS is switched on.
Example:
STEReo:DIRect? "RDS"
Response: "1"
STEReo:DIRect "RDS-PH=<Phase>"
STEReo:DIRect? "PDS-PH"
Sets the RDS phase.
Setting parameters:
<Phase>
Range:
000 to 359 (ASCII coded decimal numbers)
Example:
STEReo:DIRect "RDS-PH=100"
The RDS phase is set to 100.
Example:
STEReo:DIRect? "RDS-PH"
Response: "100"
STEReo:DIRect "RDS-DEV=<Deviation>"
STEReo:DIRect? "RDS-DEV"
(for documentation reasons only)
Sets the RDS frequency deviation (max. deviation).
Use the SCPI command ​[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​RDS[:​DEViation]​ instead.
Setting parameters:
<Deviation>
Note: A four-digit value must always be set. Leading zeros, if any,
must also be specified.
Range:
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
0000 to 1000 (ASCII coded decimal numbers), corresponding to 0 Hz to 10.00 kHz)
422
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
Direct Commands for the Stereo/RDS Coder Option R&S SMB-B5
Example:
STEReo:DIRect "RDS-DEV=0201"
The RDS frequency deviation is set to 2.01 kHz.
Example:
STEReo:DIRect? "RDS-DEV"
Response: "0201"
STEReo:DIRect "RDS-PRESET"
All RDS specific parameters are deleted or set to a default values.
Example:
STEReo:DIRect "RDS-PRESET"
Sets all RDS parameter to their preset values
Usage:
Event
STEReo:DIRect "RT=<RetranNumber>,<A/
BFlag>,<RadioTextMsg#1>,<RadioTextMsg#2>"
STEReo:DIRect? "RT"
Radio text
Setting parameters:
<RetranNumber>
Range:
<A/BFlag>
00 to 15 (ASCII coded decimal numbers), number
of retransmissions of radio text message
0|1
If the A/B flag is set, the A/B bit in group 2A is toggled to signal
that a new radio text message will be transmitted.)
<RadioTextMsg>
max. 64 characters
Two texts of 64 characters each can be transmitted in a radio text
message
Note: For group B, the length of a radio text is li ited to 32 characters. Special characters in the radio text are entered with a
leading back slash (\) followed by the decimal code of the spezial
character according to tabe E1 of CENELEC.
Example: STER:DIR "RT=02,0,test text with \217" 217
denotes the German ü.
Example:
STEReo:DIRect "RT=02,1,Test message 123"
The radio text message "Test message 123" is transmitted.
Example:
STEReo:DIRect? "RT"
Response: "02,1,Test message 123"
STEReo:DIRect "SPS=<Time>,<PSN#1>,<PSN#2>,...<PSN#20>"
STEReo:DIRect? "SPS"
Switching program service names (PSN). The program name automatically changed
after the set time interval
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
423
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
Direct Commands for the Stereo/RDS Coder Option R&S SMB-B5
Parameters:
<PSN>
8 ASCII characters
Max. 20 program service names of eight characters each can be
entered.
Note: The program service names have to be entered as 8-digit
texts. Blank spaces, if any, must also be entered, otherwise the
value will not be accepted.
STEReo:DIRect “SPS=0” stopps the transmission of the scrolling PS beendet and starts the transmission of the standard PS.
Setting parameters:
<Time>
Time interval in seconds
Range:
00 to 59 s
Example:
STEReo:DIRect "SPS=05,TEST0123,TEST4567"
The program service names "TEST0123" and "TEST4567" are
alternately transmitted at an interval of 5 seconds.
Example:
STEReo:DIRect? “SPS“
Queries the program service names
Response: "05,TEST0123,TEST4567"
STEReo:DIRect "SRC=<SigSource>"
STEReo:DIRect? "SRC"
(for documentation reasons only)
Selects the signal source.
Use the SCPI command ​[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​SOURce​ instead.
Setting parameters:
<SigSource>
0|1|2|3
0
Off
1
external analog (via L and R inputs)
2
external digital
3
internal with LF generator
Example:
STEReo:DIRect "SRC=1"
The external analog L and R inputs are selected as source.
Example:
STEReo:DIRect? "SRC"
Response: "1"
STEReo:DIRect? "STATUS"
Status request as to whether the encoder or the update loader program is being executed.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
424
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
Direct Commands for the Stereo/RDS Coder Option R&S SMB-B5
Return values:
<Status>
ENC
encoder program is running
UPL
update loader program is running
Example:
STEReo:DIRect? "STATUS"
Response: "ENC"
Usage:
Query only
STEReo:DIRect "STORE=<DataSet#>"
Stores data in the flash memory. All RDS-specific settings are stored in data set <DataSet#> of the flash memory.
Setting parameters:
<DataSet#>
Range:
1 to 5
Example:
STEReo:DIRect "STORE=1"
The current settings are stored in data set "1"
Usage:
Setting only
STEReo:DIRect "TA=<State>"
STEReo:DIRect? "TA"
(for documentation reasons only)
Sets or reads the traffic announcement flag.
This flag signals whether traffic information is currently being broadcast.
Use the SCPI command ​[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​RDS:​TRAFfic:​ANNouncement[:​
STATe]​ instead.
Setting parameters:
<State>
0|1
Example:
STEReo:DIRect "TA=1"
The traffic announcement flag is set to "1".
Example:
STEReo:DIRect? "TA"
Response: "1"
STEReo:DIRect "TP=<State>"
STEReo:DIRect? "TP"
(for documentation reasons only)
Sets or reads the traffic program flag. This flag signals whether traffic information is generally transmitted.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
425
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
Direct Commands for the Stereo/RDS Coder Option R&S SMB-B5
Use the SCPI command ​[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​RDS:​TRAFfic:​ANNouncement[:​
STATe]​ instead.
Setting parameters:
<State>
0|1
Example:
STEReo:DIRect "TP=1"
The traffic program flag is set to "1".
Example:
STEReo:DIRect? "TP"
Response: "1"
STEReo:DIRect "TRANS<DataNumber>=<DataStream>"
STEReo:DIRect? "TRANS<DataNumber>"
Transparent mode.
An RDS data stream of binary data is generated. If transparent data is selected, all other
RDS data is ignored.
Parameters:
<DataNumber>
Max. 20 different data sequences can be defined.
Range:
<DataStream>
0 to 13
16 ASCII coded hexadecimal characters (blocks A to D of the RDS
groups)
TRANS=0 deletes all transparent data and switches back to normal RDS data transmission.
Note: 16 characters must be specified for each data sequence.
Leading zeros, if any, must also be specified. The data will be
transmitted even if it constitutes no meaningful RDS data.
Example:
STEReo:DIRect "TRANS1=0123456789ABCDEF"
The data "0123456789ABCDEF" is sent instead of the RDS data.
Example:
STEReo:DIRect? "TRANS1"
Reads the transparent data.
Response: "0123456789ABCDEF"
7.18.2 Examples
7.18.2.1
Alternative Frequency Lists
Alternative frequency lists can be transmitted in two ways:
●
Method A:
The frequencies of an AF list are entered one after the other; the frequency currently
transmitted has to be specified as the first frequency.
●
Method B:
The frequencies of an AF list are entered in pairs, each pair containing the frequency
currently transmitted and an alternative frequency. The frequency pairs should nor-
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
426
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
Direct Commands for the Stereo/RDS Coder Option R&S SMB-B5
mally be entered in ascending order. Descending order should be chosen only if the
alternative frequencies belong to different regions or are used to broadcast different
programs at different times.
Do not combine methods A and B!
Method A:
1. Generate a new alternative frequency list with
STEReo:DIRect "AF=N,87.6,87.7,87.8".
2. Set the group sequence, e.g.
STEReo:DIRect "GS=0A,14A".
The group sequence must contain group 0A.
The alternative frequencies are now transmitted in group 0A.
3. Add another alternative frequency list with
STEReo:DIRect "AF=+,88.6,88.7,88.8"
Method B:
1. Generate a new alternative frequency list with
STEReo:DIRect "AF=N,87.6,90.2,87.6,90.2".
2. Set the group sequence, e.g.
STEReo:DIRect "GS=0A,14A".
The group sequence must contain group 0A
The alternative frequencies are now transmitted in group 0A.
3. Add another alternative frequency list with
STEReo:DIRect "AF=+,88.6,91.2,88.6,91.2"
The frequency lists are not checked for correctness. For this reason, make sure that the
syntax is correct.
A maximum of five AF lists can be generated. For type A lists, max. 25 frequencies per
list can be specified, for type B lists, max. 12 frequencies per list.
7.18.2.2
Enhanced Other Networks
Creating an EON data set
1. Read the list of existing EON data sets with
STEReo:DIRect? "EON-PI"
The list shows the EON PI codes already used and those remaining for new data
sets.
2. Create an EON data set with
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
427
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
Direct Commands for the Stereo/RDS Coder Option R&S SMB-B5
STEReo:DIRect "EON-PI=1234"
3. Set the program service (PS) name for the EON data set with
STEReo:DIRect "EON-PS=1234,TEST EON"
4. Set the group sequence, e.g.:
STEReo:DIRect "GS=0A,14A"
Group 14A with variants 0 to 3 is now transmitted.
5. Create a new AF list for the EON:
a) Using method A
STEReo:DIRect "EON-AFA=1234,N,87.6,87.7,87.8"
b) Create further AF lists for the EON, using method A:
STEReo:DIRect "EON-AFA=1234,+,88.6,88.7,88.8"
c) Read the first AF list of the EON with
STEReo:DIRect? "EON-AFA,1234,1"
6. Create a new AF list for the EON, using method B:
STEReo:DIRect "EON-AFB=1234,N,87.6,87.7,87.8"
where 87.6 = tuned frequency,
87.7 = mapped frequency 1(variant 5),
87.8 = mapped frequency 2 variant 6)
Note: Do not combine methods A and B for generating EON alternative frequency
lists.
A maximum of five AF lists can be generated. For type A lists, max. 25 frequencies
per list can be specified, for type B lists, max. five frequencies per list.
7.18.2.3
Free Format Groups (FFGs)
In the user-definable groups 1A, 3A, 5A, 6A, 7A, 8A, 9A, 10A, 11A, 12A and 13A, any
desired data can be transmitted. Five bits of this data are transmitted in block B and 16
bits each in blocks C and D of the specified group.
1. Define the data to be transmitted in group 1A:
STEReo:DIRect "1A=05,0000000000,1FFFFFFFFF"
Group 1A is now transmitted first with "0000000000" and then with "1FFFFFFFFF".
Each of the two data sequences is retransmitted five times, which is indicated by the
information "05".
2. Set the group sequence, e.g.:
STEReo:DIRect "GS=0A,1A"
The defined data is now transmitted in group 1A.
Max. 20 different data sequences can be defined.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
428
R&S®SMB100A
Remote Control Commands
Direct Commands for the Stereo/RDS Coder Option R&S SMB-B5
7.18.2.4
Transparent-Mode
The transparent mode allows the user to transmit freely definable binary data instead of
the standard RDS data. Blocks A to D of the RDS groups are used. This means that
standard RDS data will no longer be transmitted when transparent data is set. The binary
data will be sent even if it constitutes no valid or meaningful RDS data. The transmission
of standard RDS data will not be resumed until the transparent data is deleted.
1. Transmit the alternating sequences '0123456789ABCDEF' and 'ABCDEF0123456789' instead of the RDS data:
STEReo:DIRect "TRANS=0123456789ABCDEF,ABCDEF0123456789"
2. Delete the transparent data and switch back to standard RDS data transmission with:
STEReo:DIRect "TRANS=0"
Max. 20 different data sequences can be defined.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
429
R&S®SMB100A
Maintenance
Storing and Packing
8 Maintenance
The instrument does not need periodic maintenance. Only the cleaning of the instrument
is essential. The outside of the instrument is suitably cleaned using a soft, line-free dust
cloth. Make sure that the air vents are not obstructed.
Shock hazard
Before cleaning the instrument, make sure that the instrument is switched off and disconnected from all power supplies.
Instrument damage caused by cleaning agents
Cleaning agents contain substances that may damage the instrument, e.g. cleaning
agents that contain a solvent may damage the front panel labeling or plastic parts.
Never use cleaning agents such as solvents (thinners, acetone, etc), acids, bases, or
other substances.
The outside of the instrument can be cleaned sufficiently using a soft, lint-free dust cloth.
Follow the instructions in the service manual and the safety instructions when exchanging
modules or ordering spares. The order no. for spare parts is included in the service manual. The service manual includes further information particularly on troubleshooting,
repair, exchange of modules and alignment.
The address of our support center and a list of all Rohde & Schwarz service centers can
be found at the beginning of this manual.
8.1 Storing and Packing
The storage temperature range of the instrument is given in the data sheet. If the instrument is to be stored for a longer period of time, it must be protected against dust.
Repack the instrument as it was originally packed when transporting or shipping. The two
protective foam plastic parts prevent the control elements and connectors from being
damaged. The antistatic packing foil avoids any undesired electrostatic charging to occur.
If you do not use the original packaging, use a sturdy cardboard box of suitable size and
provide for sufficient padding to prevent the instrument from slipping inside the package.
Wrap antistatic packing foil around the instrument to protect it from electrostatic charging.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
430
R&S®SMB100A
Error Messages
Status Information
9 Error Messages
This chapter describes the error messages of the R&S SMB. The error messages are
output in the "Info" line on the screen and entered in the error/event queue of the status
reporting system.
A great variety of different messages such as status messages, error messages, warnings or information are displayed in the header field of the screen. Some error messages
require that the error must be eliminated before correct instrument operation can be
ensured. The info window with a list of current messages and a detailed description of
each message can be opened with the INFO key.
In the remote control mode, error messages are entered in the error/event queue of the
status reporting system and can be queried with the command SYSTem:ERRor?. If the
error queue is empty, 0 ("No error") is returned.
9.1 Status Information
The status messages are displayed in the header section of the screen. The status information gives the user an overview of the main operating states and settings of the instrument. The states are indicated for information only and do not necessitate any action by
the user. Status information is displayed between the frequency and level fields, at the
left of the info line or in the info line itself.
9.1.1 Status information displayed between the frequency and level fields
This chapter gives an overview of the status messages displayed between the frequency
and level fields.
RF OFF
The RF output is switched off
MOD OFF
All modulations are switched off
FREQ OFFSET
A frequency offset is set.
The frequency entered and displayed in the "Frequency" field takes any set frequency
offset into consideration, e.g. an offset set for a downstream instrument. This means that
with a frequency offset the frequency displayed in the header does not correspond to the
frequency at the RF output, but rather to the frequency at the output of the downstream
instrument.
This allows the target frequency at the output of a downstream instrument to be entered
in the frequency field. The signal generator changes the RF output frequency according
to the entered offset.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
431
R&S®SMB100A
Error Messages
Status Information
However, the frequency entered and displayed in the "Frequency/Phase" dialog of the
"RF" function block always corresponds to the RF output frequency. Any frequency offset
is not taken into consideration.
The correlation is as follows:
Freq in header = RF output frequency (= Freq in dialog) + Freq offset (= Offset in dialog)
OVERLOAD
The power of the external signal applied to the RF output is too high. The overload protection is tripped and the connection between the RF output and attenuator is interrupted.
The overload protection is reset by pressing the RF ON/OFF key. The RF input is activated when the overload protection is reset.
LEVEL OFFSET
A level offset is set.
The level entered and displayed in the "Level" field takes the offset of any downstream
attenuators/amplifiers into consideration by way of calculation. This means that with a
level offset the level displayed in the header does not correspond to the level at the RF
output, but rather to the level at the output of the downstream instrument.
This allows the target level at the output of downstream instruments to be entered. The
signal generator changes the RF output level according to the set offset.
However, the level entered and displayed in the "Level" dialog of the "RF" function block
always corresponds to the RF output level. Any level offset is not taken into consideration.
The correlation is as follows:
Level in header = RF output level (= Level in dialog) + Level offset
EXT REF
An external reference is used.
The external signal with selectable frequency and defined level must be input at the REF
IN connector. It is output at the REF OUT connector.
BUSY
A setting or calculation is executed.
9.1.2 Status information displayed to the left of the Info line
This chapter gives an overview of the status messages displayed to the left of the Info
line.
REMOTE
The instrument is remote controlled.
The keys on the front panel are usable, but all parameters are in read only mode.
The LOCAL key switches the instrument from remote control to manual operation. The
current command must be fully processed before the mode is switched, otherwise the
instrument switches immediately back to remote control.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
432
R&S®SMB100A
Error Messages
Status Information
REM-LLO
The instrument is remote (REMote) controlled. The LOCAL key is disabled by remote
control with the command LLO (LocalLockOut).
The keys on the front panel are usable, but all parameters are in read only mode.
The instrument can be switched from remote control to manual operation by means of
remote control only (e.g. with the Visual Basic command CALL IBLOC
(generator%) or by &NREN).
LOC-LLO
For operating directly the instrument is placed from remote control to manual operation
(Local State). The LOCAL key was disabled by remote control with the command LLO
(LocalLockOut).
With the next activating of the remote control mode, the instrument cannot be switched
to manual operation by the operator. The status information changes to "REM-LLO".
The instrument can be switched to manual operation by means of remote control only
(e.g. with the Visual Basic command CALL IBLOC (generator%)).
9.1.3 Status information displayed in the Info line
This chapter gives an overview of the status messages displayed in the Info line.
RFSweep / LevelSweep / LFSweep
The indicated sweep is enabled.
ALC On / Auto / S&H
The status of the automatic level control is indicated:
● ON
automatic level control permanently on
● Auto
automatic level control is automatically adapted to the operating states
● S&H
automatic level control off, recalibration of the level whenever the level or frequency
is set (sample and hold mode)
ListMode
List mode is active.
The values of the frequency/level pairs in the selected list are set for the chosen dwell
time.
AttFixed
Attenuator fixed mode is active.
The uninterrupted level settings are made in a fixed range without attenuator switching.
The variation range is set automatically when this mode is activated. The range is displayed under "Attenuator Fixed Range" in the "Level" dialog.
UCorr
User Correction is active.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
433
R&S®SMB100A
Error Messages
Error Messages
The level is corrected by the given values in the selected user correction list. Correction
is performed by the user-defined list values being added to the output level for the
respective RF frequency. With frequencies which are not contained in the list, the level
correction is determined by interpolation of the closest correction values.
OvenCold
The reference oscillator has not yet reached its nominal frequency.
When switching on from the STANDBY mode, the specified frequency accuracy is
reached immediately. If the power switch was switched off, the reference oscillator needs
some warm-up time to reach its nominal frequency. During this period of time, the output
frequency does not yet reach its final value either.
9.2 Error Messages
Messages indicate errors in the instrument. They are displayed in the info line in different
colors depending on their importance and display duration. Errors (e.g. no calibration
data) are displayed in red, information (e.g. file not found) and warnings in black. Warnings indicate less significant errors (e.g. the instrument operates outside specified data).
9.2.1 Volatile messages
Volatile messages report automatic settings in the instrument (e.g. switching off of incompatible types of modulation) or on illegal entries that are not accepted by the instrument
(e.g. range violations). They are displayed in the info line on a yellow background. They
are displayed on top of status information or permanent messages.
Volatile messages do not normally demand user actions and disappear automatically
after a brief period of time. They are stored in the history, however.
SCPI command: ​SYSTem:​ERRor:​ALL?​ or ​SYSTem:​ERRor[:​NEXT]?​
9.2.2 Permanent messages
Permanent messages are displayed if an error occurs that impairs further instrument
operation, e.g. a hardware fault. The error signaled by a permanent message must be
eliminated before correct instrument operation can be ensured.
The message is displayed until the error is eliminated. It covers the status display in the
info line. After error elimination, the message automatically disappears and is also recorded in the history.
SCPI command: ​SYSTem:​SERRor?​
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
434
R&S®SMB100A
Error Messages
SCPI-Error Messages
9.3 SCPI-Error Messages
The SCPI error messages are the same in all SCPI instruments. Detailed information and
an overview of all error messages as defined in SCPI standard can be found in the corresponding documentation.
The errors are assigned negative numbers. The error text being entered into the error/
event queue or being displayed is printed in bold face on the left together with the error
code. Below the error text, there is an explanation as to the respective error.
9.4 Device-Specific Error Messages
The following table contains all error messages specific for the instrument in alphabetical
order, as well as an explanation of the error situation. The positive error codes mark the
errors specific of the instrument.
The device-specific error messages set bit 3 in the ESR register.
The index provides a list of the error messages sorted according to their error codes.
Error
Code
Error
Description
50
Extern reference out of External reference is selected but no
range or disconnected external signal is applied or the signal
is out of range.
Remedy
●
●
140
This modulation forces
other modulations off
Check the selected reference signal source (internal
or external) in the "Setup >
Reference Oscillator" dialog.
Change setting to 'internal' if
no appropriate external
source is available.
A modulation has been switched on
which cannot be used at the same time
as an already active modulation. The
previous modulation has been
switched off.
Example: Enabling FM modulation
switches PM modulation off.
180
Adjustment failed
Adjustment could not be executed
The adjustment data have to be
generated first by an internal or
external adjustment or to be loaded into the device (see ​chapter 5.2.3.1, "Internal Adjustments", on page 81.
182
Adjustment data missing
Adjustment data are missing.
The adjustment data have to be
generated first by an internal or
external adjustment or to be loaded into the instrument.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
435
R&S®SMB100A
Error Messages
Device-Specific Error Messages
Error
Code
Error
Description
Remedy
183
Adjustment data invalid Adjustment data are invalid and must
be restored.
200
Cannot access hardware
The data transmission to a module was The module is not installed, not
unsuccessful.
properly installed or missing.
201
Hardware revision out
of date
A later version of certain parts of the
The driver does not support the
instrument is necessary to execute the installed version of a module.
function selected.
202
Cannot access the
EEPROM
A error occurs when writing or reading The EEPROM might be defect
a EEPROM.
and has to be replaced.
203
Invalid EEPROM data
Reading a EEPROM is possible, however the data are inconsistent.
204
Driver initialization
failed
Initialization of a driver fails when boot- The driver is not compatible with
ing the instrument firmware.
the hardware or software configuration of the instrument.
241
No current list
There is no list selected. To execute
the required operation, a list has to be
selected in the related menu.
242
Unknown list type
specified
The list type selected is not valid for the Check the selected list type.
required operation.
The adjustment data have to be
generated again by an internal or
external adjustment or to be loaded into the instrument.
If no list is available, a new list
must be created.
For instance, the file extension for
waveform list files is *.wv. It is not possible to enter another file extension
when selecting a list.
460
Cannot open file
The selected file can not be opened.
Check the path and file name.
461
Cannot write file
The file can not be written.
Check if the file is read-only.
462
Cannot read file
The file can not be read.
Check if the file contents are compatible with the file type.
463
Filename missing
The required operation cannot be exe- A file name has to be entered
cuted because the file name is not
when creating a new list.
specified.
464
Invalid filename extension
The file extension is not valid for the
required operation.
Check the file extension.
File contains invalid
data
The selected file contains data that is
not valid for the file type.
Check the file extension.
465
For instance, the file extension for
waveform list files is *.wv. It is not
possible to enter another file
extension when storing a list.
The file extension determines the data
that is valid for this file type. If the file
extension is changed the lists are no
longer recognized and the data are
therefore invalid.
Example: the extension of a waveform
file (= *.wv) was changed to *.txt
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
436
R&S®SMB100A
Error Messages
Device-Specific Error Messages
Stereocoder error messages
An error occurred concerning the stereo coder option R&S SMB-B5. Refer to the service
manual, chapter 3, section "Trouble shooting" for error correction (the service manual is
provided on the user documentation CD-ROM which is included in delivery).
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
437
R&S®SMB100A
Hardware Interfaces
GPIB Bus Interface
A Hardware Interfaces
This section covers hardware related topics, like pin assignment of the GPIB bus interface.
The remote control interfaces are described in detailes in ​chapter 6, "Remote Control
Basics", on page 199.
All other interfaces are described in sections "Legend of Front Planel" and "Legend of
Rear Panel" in the Quick Start Guide.
For specifications refer to the data sheet.
A.1 GPIB Bus Interface
Pin assignment
Fig. 1-1: Pin assignment of GPIB bus interface
Bus lines
●
Data bus with 8 lines D0 to D7:
The transmission is bit-parallel and byte-serial in the ASCII/ISO code. D0 is the least
significant bit, D7 the most significant bit.
●
Control bus with five lines:
IFC (Interface Clear): active LOW resets the interfaces of the instruments connected
to the default setting.
ATN (Attention): active LOW signals the transmission of interface messages, inactive
HIGH signals the transmission of device messages.
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
438
R&S®SMB100A
Hardware Interfaces
GPIB Bus Interface
SRQ (Service Request): active LOW enables the connected device to send a service
request to the controller.
REN (Remote Enable): active LOW permits switchover to remote control.
EOI (End or Identify): has two functions in connection with ATN:
– ATN=HIGH active LOW marks the end of data transmission.
–
●
ATN=LOW active LOW triggers a parallel poll.
Handshake bus with three lines:
DAV (Data Valid): active LOW signals a valid data byte on the data bus.
NRFD (Not Ready For Data): active LOW signals that one of the connected devices
is not ready for data transfer.
NDAC (Not Data Accepted): active LOW signals that the instrument connected is
accepting the data on the data bus.
Interface Functions
Instruments which can be controlled via GPIB bus can be equipped with different interface
functions. The interface function for the R&S SMB are listed in the following table.
Table 1-1: GPIB bus interface functions
Control character
Interface function
SH1
Handshake source function (source handshake), full capability
AH1
Handshake sink function (acceptor handshake), full capability
L4
Listener function, full capability, de-addressed by MTA.
T6
Talker function, full capability, ability to respond to serial poll, deaddressed
by MLA
SR1
Service request function (Service Request), full capability
PP1
Parallel poll function, full capability
RL1
Remote/Local switch over function, full capability
DC1
Reset function (Device Clear), full capability
DT1
Trigger function (Device Trigger), full capability
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
439
R&S®SMB100A
List of Commands
List of Commands
*CAL?​.............................................................................................................................................................240
*CLS​...............................................................................................................................................................240
*ESE​..............................................................................................................................................................241
*ESR?​............................................................................................................................................................241
*IDN?​.............................................................................................................................................................241
*IST?​..............................................................................................................................................................241
*OPC​..............................................................................................................................................................242
*OPT?​............................................................................................................................................................242
*PCB​..............................................................................................................................................................242
*PRE​..............................................................................................................................................................242
*PSC​..............................................................................................................................................................242
*RCL​..............................................................................................................................................................243
*RST​..............................................................................................................................................................243
*SAV​..............................................................................................................................................................243
*SRE​..............................................................................................................................................................244
*STB?​.............................................................................................................................................................244
*TRG​..............................................................................................................................................................244
*TST?​.............................................................................................................................................................244
*WAI​...............................................................................................................................................................244
:​CALibration:​ALL[:​MEASure]?​.......................................................................................................................247
:​CALibration<hw>:​FMOFfset[:​MEASure]?​.....................................................................................................247
:​CALibration<hw>:​FREQuency[:​MEASure]?​.................................................................................................247
:​CALibration<hw>:​LEVel:​EXTern:​DATA​........................................................................................................248
:​CALibration<hw>:​LEVel[:​MEASure]?​...........................................................................................................247
:​DEVice:​PRESet​............................................................................................................................................245
:​DIAGnostic:​INFO:​OTIMe?​............................................................................................................................250
:​DIAGnostic:​INFO:​POCount?​........................................................................................................................250
:​DIAGnostic<hw>:​BGINfo:​CATalog?​.............................................................................................................249
:​DIAGnostic<hw>:​BGINfo?​............................................................................................................................249
:​DISPlay:​ANNotation:​AMPLitude​...................................................................................................................251
:​DISPlay:​ANNotation:​FREQuency​.................................................................................................................251
:​DISPlay:​ANNotation[:​ALL]​............................................................................................................................251
:​DISPlay:​DIALog:​CLOSe​...............................................................................................................................251
:​DISPlay:​DIALog:​ID​.......................................................................................................................................252
:​DISPlay:​DIALog:​OPEN​.................................................................................................................................252
:​DISPlay:​PSAVe:​HOLDoff​.............................................................................................................................252
:​DISPlay:​PSAVe[:​STATe]​..............................................................................................................................252
:​FORMat:​BORDer​..........................................................................................................................................253
:​FORMat:​SREGister​......................................................................................................................................254
:​FORMat[:​DATA]​............................................................................................................................................253
:​HCOPy:​DATA?​.............................................................................................................................................255
:​HCOPy:​DEVice​.............................................................................................................................................255
:​HCOPy:​DEVice:​LANGuage​..........................................................................................................................255
:​HCOPy:​FILE[:​NAME]​....................................................................................................................................256
:​HCOPy:​FILE[:​NAME]:​AUTO:​DIRectory​........................................................................................................257
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
440
R&S®SMB100A
List of Commands
:​HCOPy:​FILE[:​NAME]:​AUTO:​DIRectory:​CLEar​.............................................................................................257
:​HCOPy:​FILE[:​NAME]:​AUTO:​FILE?​..............................................................................................................257
:​HCOPy:​FILE[:​NAME]:​AUTO:​STATe​.............................................................................................................260
:​HCOPy:​FILE[:​NAME]:​AUTO?​.......................................................................................................................256
:​HCOPy:​FILE[:​NAME]:​AUTO[:​FILE]:​DAY:​STATe​..........................................................................................258
:​HCOPy:​FILE[:​NAME]:​AUTO[:​FILE]:​DAY?​....................................................................................................258
:​HCOPy:​FILE[:​NAME]:​AUTO[:​FILE]:​MONTh:​STATe​....................................................................................259
:​HCOPy:​FILE[:​NAME]:​AUTO[:​FILE]:​MONTh?​...............................................................................................259
:​HCOPy:​FILE[:​NAME]:​AUTO[:​FILE]:​NUMBer?​.............................................................................................259
:​HCOPy:​FILE[:​NAME]:​AUTO[:​FILE]:​PREFix​.................................................................................................259
:​HCOPy:​FILE[:​NAME]:​AUTO[:​FILE]:​PREFix:​STATe​.....................................................................................260
:​HCOPy:​FILE[:​NAME]:​AUTO[:​FILE]:​YEAR:​STATe​.......................................................................................260
:​HCOPy:​FILE[:​NAME]:​AUTO[:​FILE]:​YEAR?​.................................................................................................260
:​HCOPy:​IMAGe:​FORMat​...............................................................................................................................261
:​HCOPy:​IMAGe:​SIZE​.....................................................................................................................................261
:​HCOPy[:​EXECute]​........................................................................................................................................256
:​INITiate<ch>[:​POWer]:​CONTinuous​.............................................................................................................275
:​KBOard:​LANGuage​......................................................................................................................................261
:​KBOard:​LAYout?​..........................................................................................................................................262
:​MMEMory:​CATalog:​LENGth?​.......................................................................................................................266
:​MMEMory:​CATalog?​.....................................................................................................................................265
:​MMEMory:​CDIRectory​..................................................................................................................................266
:​MMEMory:​COPY​..........................................................................................................................................267
:​MMEMory:​DATA​...........................................................................................................................................267
:​MMEMory:​DCATalog:​LENGth?​....................................................................................................................268
:​MMEMory:​DCATalog?​..................................................................................................................................268
:​MMEMory:​DELete​.........................................................................................................................................268
:​MMEMory:​LOAD:​STATe​...............................................................................................................................269
:​MMEMory:​MDIRectory​..................................................................................................................................269
:​MMEMory:​MOVE​..........................................................................................................................................269
:​MMEMory:​MSIS​............................................................................................................................................270
:​MMEMory:​RDIRectory​..................................................................................................................................270
:​MMEMory:​STORe:​STATe​............................................................................................................................270
:​OUTPut<hw>:​AFIXed:​RANGe:​LOWer?​.......................................................................................................271
:​OUTPut<hw>:​AFIXed:​RANGe:​UPPer?​........................................................................................................271
:​OUTPut<hw>:​ALC:​SEARch:​MODE​..............................................................................................................272
:​OUTPut<hw>:​AMODe​..................................................................................................................................272
:​OUTPut<hw>:​FILTer:​AUTO​..........................................................................................................................272
:​OUTPut<hw>:​FILTer[:​LPASs]:​STATe​..........................................................................................................273
:​OUTPut<hw>:​IMPedance?​...........................................................................................................................273
:​OUTPut<hw>:​PROTection:​CLEar​................................................................................................................273
:​OUTPut<hw>:​PROTection:​TRIPped?​..........................................................................................................273
:​OUTPut<hw>[:​STATe]​..................................................................................................................................274
:​OUTPut<hw>[:​STATe]:​PON​.........................................................................................................................274
:​READ<ch>[:​POWer]?​...................................................................................................................................275
:​SOURce<hw>:​PRESet​.................................................................................................................................245
:​SYSTem:​BEEPer:​STATe​..............................................................................................................................386
:​SYSTem:​COMMunicate:​GPIB:​LTERminator​................................................................................................386
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
441
R&S®SMB100A
List of Commands
:​SYSTem:​COMMunicate:​GPIB:​RESource?​...................................................................................................390
:​SYSTem:​COMMunicate:​GPIB[:​SELF]:​ADDRess​.........................................................................................387
:​SYSTem:​COMMunicate:​HISLip:​RESource​..................................................................................................387
:​SYSTem:​COMMunicate:​NETWork:​IPADdress​.............................................................................................389
:​SYSTem:​COMMunicate:​NETWork:​IPADdress:​MODE​.................................................................................388
:​SYSTem:​COMMunicate:​NETWork:​RESource​..............................................................................................390
:​SYSTem:​COMMunicate:​NETWork[:​COMMon]:​DOMain​..............................................................................387
:​SYSTem:​COMMunicate:​NETWork[:​COMMon]:​HOSTname​.........................................................................388
:​SYSTem:​COMMunicate:​NETWork[:​COMMon]:​WORKgroup​.......................................................................388
:​SYSTem:​COMMunicate:​NETWork[:​IPADdress]:​GATeway​..........................................................................389
:​SYSTem:​COMMunicate:​NETWork[:​IPADdress]:​SUBNet:​MASK​..................................................................389
:​SYSTem:​COMMunicate:​SERial:​BAUD​.........................................................................................................391
:​SYSTem:​COMMunicate:​SERial:​PARity​........................................................................................................391
:​SYSTem:​COMMunicate:​SERial:​RESource?​................................................................................................390
:​SYSTem:​COMMunicate:​SERial:​SBITs​.........................................................................................................391
:​SYSTem:​COMMunicate:​SOCKet:​RESource?​..............................................................................................391
:​SYSTem:​COMMunicate:​USB:​RESource?​....................................................................................................390
:​SYSTem:​DATE​.............................................................................................................................................392
:​SYSTem:​DISPlay:​UPDate​............................................................................................................................392
:​SYSTem:​DLOCk​...........................................................................................................................................392
:​SYSTem:​FPReset​.........................................................................................................................................246
:​SYSTem:​IDENtification​.................................................................................................................................395
:​SYSTem:​IRESponse​....................................................................................................................................395
:​SYSTem:​KLOCk​...........................................................................................................................................395
:​SYSTem:​LANGuage​.....................................................................................................................................396
:​SYSTem:​ORESponse​...................................................................................................................................396
:​SYSTem:​PROTect<ch>[:​STATe]​..................................................................................................................397
:​SYSTem:​STARtup:​COMPlete?​....................................................................................................................398
:​SYSTem:​TIME​..............................................................................................................................................398
:​TEST<hw>:​ALL:​RESult?​..............................................................................................................................399
:​TEST<hw>:​ALL:​STARt​.................................................................................................................................399
:​TEST<hw>:​DIRect​........................................................................................................................................399
:​TRIGger<hw>:​FSWeep:​SOURce​.................................................................................................................401
:​TRIGger<hw>:​FSWeep[:​IMMediate]​.............................................................................................................401
:​TRIGger<hw>:​LFFSweep:​SOURce​..............................................................................................................400
:​TRIGger<hw>:​PSWeep:​SOURce​.................................................................................................................403
:​TRIGger<hw>:​PSWeep[:​IMMediate]​............................................................................................................402
:​TRIGger<hw>[:​SWEep]:​SOURce​.................................................................................................................404
:​TRIGger<hw>[:​SWEep][:​IMMediate]​............................................................................................................403
:​UNIT:​ANGLe​.................................................................................................................................................405
:​UNIT:​POWer​.................................................................................................................................................405
SENSe<ch>:​UNIT[:​POWer]​...........................................................................................................................282
SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​CORRection:​SPDevice:​STATe​..................................................................................276
SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​DISPlay:​PERManent:​PRIority​....................................................................................277
SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​DISPlay:​PERManent:​STATe​......................................................................................276
SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​FILTer:​LENGth:​AUTO?​..............................................................................................277
SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​FILTer:​LENGth[:​USER]​..............................................................................................277
SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​FILTer:​NSRatio​..........................................................................................................278
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
442
R&S®SMB100A
List of Commands
SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​FILTer:​NSRatio:​MTIMe​..............................................................................................278
SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​FILTer:​SONCe​...........................................................................................................279
SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​FILTer:​TYPE​..............................................................................................................279
SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​FREQuency​................................................................................................................280
SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​OFFSet​.......................................................................................................................280
SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​OFFSet:​STATe​...........................................................................................................280
SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​SNUMber?​..................................................................................................................280
SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​SOURce​.....................................................................................................................281
SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​STATus[:​DEVice]?​.....................................................................................................281
SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​SVERsion?​.................................................................................................................281
SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​TYPE?​........................................................................................................................282
SENSe<ch>[:​POWer]:​ZERO​.........................................................................................................................282
STATus:​OPERation:​CONDition?​...................................................................................................................382
STATus:​OPERation:​ENABle​.........................................................................................................................382
STATus:​OPERation:​NTRansition​..................................................................................................................382
STATus:​OPERation:​PTRansition​..................................................................................................................383
STATus:​OPERation[:​EVENt]?​.......................................................................................................................382
STATus:​PRESet​............................................................................................................................................383
STATus:​QUEStionable:​CONDition?​..............................................................................................................383
STATus:​QUEStionable:​ENABle​.....................................................................................................................384
STATus:​QUEStionable:​NTRansition​.............................................................................................................384
STATus:​QUEStionable:​PTRansition​..............................................................................................................385
STATus:​QUEStionable[:​EVENt]?​..................................................................................................................384
STATus:​QUEue[:​NEXT]?​...............................................................................................................................385
STEReo:​DIRect​.............................................................................................................................................406
STEReo:​DIRect​.............................................................................................................................................406
STEReo:​DIRect​.............................................................................................................................................407
STEReo:​DIRect​.............................................................................................................................................407
STEReo:​DIRect​.............................................................................................................................................408
STEReo:​DIRect​.............................................................................................................................................408
STEReo:​DIRect​.............................................................................................................................................409
STEReo:​DIRect​.............................................................................................................................................409
STEReo:​DIRect​.............................................................................................................................................410
STEReo:​DIRect​.............................................................................................................................................410
STEReo:​DIRect​.............................................................................................................................................410
STEReo:​DIRect​.............................................................................................................................................411
STEReo:​DIRect​.............................................................................................................................................411
STEReo:​DIRect​.............................................................................................................................................412
STEReo:​DIRect​.............................................................................................................................................412
STEReo:​DIRect​.............................................................................................................................................413
STEReo:​DIRect​.............................................................................................................................................413
STEReo:​DIRect​.............................................................................................................................................414
STEReo:​DIRect​.............................................................................................................................................414
STEReo:​DIRect​.............................................................................................................................................414
STEReo:​DIRect​.............................................................................................................................................415
STEReo:​DIRect​.............................................................................................................................................415
STEReo:​DIRect​.............................................................................................................................................416
STEReo:​DIRect​.............................................................................................................................................416
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
443
R&S®SMB100A
List of Commands
STEReo:​DIRect​.............................................................................................................................................417
STEReo:​DIRect​.............................................................................................................................................417
STEReo:​DIRect​.............................................................................................................................................418
STEReo:​DIRect​.............................................................................................................................................418
STEReo:​DIRect​.............................................................................................................................................418
STEReo:​DIRect​.............................................................................................................................................419
STEReo:​DIRect​.............................................................................................................................................419
STEReo:​DIRect​.............................................................................................................................................420
STEReo:​DIRect​.............................................................................................................................................420
STEReo:​DIRect​.............................................................................................................................................420
STEReo:​DIRect​.............................................................................................................................................421
STEReo:​DIRect​.............................................................................................................................................421
STEReo:​DIRect​.............................................................................................................................................422
STEReo:​DIRect​.............................................................................................................................................422
STEReo:​DIRect​.............................................................................................................................................422
STEReo:​DIRect​.............................................................................................................................................423
STEReo:​DIRect​.............................................................................................................................................423
STEReo:​DIRect​.............................................................................................................................................423
STEReo:​DIRect​.............................................................................................................................................424
STEReo:​DIRect​.............................................................................................................................................425
STEReo:​DIRect​.............................................................................................................................................425
STEReo:​DIRect​.............................................................................................................................................425
STEReo:​DIRect​.............................................................................................................................................426
STEReo:​DIRect?​...........................................................................................................................................424
SYSTem:​ERRor:​ALL?​...................................................................................................................................393
SYSTem:​ERRor:​CODE:​ALL?​........................................................................................................................393
SYSTem:​ERRor:​CODE[:​NEXT]?​...................................................................................................................393
SYSTem:​ERRor:​COUNt?​..............................................................................................................................394
SYSTem:​ERRor[:​NEXT]?​..............................................................................................................................394
SYSTem:​PRESet​...........................................................................................................................................245
SYSTem:​SERRor?​........................................................................................................................................397
SYSTem:​VERSion?​.......................................................................................................................................398
TRIGger0[:​SWEep]:​SOURce​.........................................................................................................................400
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​AM:​DEPTh:​EXPonential​.....................................................................................................284
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​AM:​DEPTh:​LINear​..............................................................................................................284
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​AM:​EXTernal:​COUPling​......................................................................................................284
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​AM:​SENSitivity?​..................................................................................................................285
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​AM:​SOURce​.......................................................................................................................285
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​AM:​STATe​..........................................................................................................................286
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​AM:​TYPE​............................................................................................................................286
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​CORRection:​CSET:​DATA:​FREQuency​..............................................................................288
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​CORRection:​CSET:​DATA:​FREQuency:​POINts?​...............................................................288
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​CORRection:​CSET:​DATA:​POWer​......................................................................................288
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​CORRection:​CSET:​DATA:​POWer:​POINts?​.......................................................................289
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​CORRection:​CSET:​DATA[:​SENSor<ch>][:​POWer]:​SONCe​..............................................289
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​CORRection:​CSET[:​SELect]​...............................................................................................294
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​CORRection:​DEXChange:​AFILe:​CATalog?​.......................................................................290
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​CORRection:​DEXChange:​AFILe:​EXTension​......................................................................290
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
444
R&S®SMB100A
List of Commands
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​CORRection:​DEXChange:​AFILe:​SELect​............................................................................291
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​CORRection:​DEXChange:​AFILe:​SEParator:​COLumn​.......................................................291
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​CORRection:​DEXChange:​AFILe:​SEParator:​DECimal​.......................................................292
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​CORRection:​DEXChange:​EXECute​...................................................................................292
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​CORRection:​DEXChange:​MODE​.......................................................................................293
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​CORRection:​DEXChange:​SELect​......................................................................................293
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​CORRection:​VALue?​..........................................................................................................295
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​CORRection[:​STATe]​..........................................................................................................294
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FM:​EXTernal:​COUPling​......................................................................................................296
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FM:​EXTernal:​DEViation​......................................................................................................296
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FM:​MODE​...........................................................................................................................296
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FM:​SENSitivity?​..................................................................................................................297
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FM:​SOURce​........................................................................................................................297
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FM:​STATe​...........................................................................................................................297
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FM[:​DEViation]​....................................................................................................................295
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FREQuency:​CENTer​..........................................................................................................298
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FREQuency:​MANual​...........................................................................................................300
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FREQuency:​MODE​.............................................................................................................301
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FREQuency:​MULTiplier​......................................................................................................302
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FREQuency:​OFFSet​...........................................................................................................302
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FREQuency:​SPAN​..............................................................................................................302
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FREQuency:​STARt​.............................................................................................................303
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FREQuency:​STEP:​MODE​..................................................................................................305
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FREQuency:​STEP[:​INCRement]​........................................................................................304
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FREQuency:​STOP​..............................................................................................................303
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FREQuency[:​CW|:​FIXed]​....................................................................................................299
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​FREQuency[:​CW|:​FIXed]:​RCL​............................................................................................300
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​INPut:​MODext:​IMPedance​..................................................................................................305
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​CATalog?​...................................................................................................................316
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​DELete​.......................................................................................................................317
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​DELete:​ALL​................................................................................................................317
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​DEXChange:​AFILe:​CATalog?​....................................................................................318
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​DEXChange:​AFILe:​EXTension​..................................................................................318
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​DEXChange:​AFILe:​SELect​........................................................................................319
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​DEXChange:​AFILe:​SEParator:​COLumn​....................................................................319
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​DEXChange:​AFILe:​SEParator:​DECimal​....................................................................320
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​DEXChange:​EXECute​................................................................................................320
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​DEXChange:​MODE​....................................................................................................321
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​DEXChange:​SELect​...................................................................................................321
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​DWELl​........................................................................................................................322
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​FREE?​........................................................................................................................322
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​FREQuency​................................................................................................................322
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​FREQuency:​POINts?​.................................................................................................323
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​INDex​.........................................................................................................................323
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​INDex:​STARt​..............................................................................................................324
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​INDex:​STOP​...............................................................................................................324
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​LEARn​........................................................................................................................325
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​MODE​.........................................................................................................................325
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
445
R&S®SMB100A
List of Commands
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​POWer​........................................................................................................................326
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​POWer:​POINts?​.........................................................................................................326
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​RESet​.........................................................................................................................326
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​SELect​........................................................................................................................327
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​TRIGger:​EXECute​......................................................................................................327
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​LIST:​TRIGger:​SOURce​......................................................................................................327
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​MODulation[:​ALL]:​STATe​...................................................................................................328
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PGEN:​STATe​......................................................................................................................328
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PHASe​................................................................................................................................329
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PHASe:​REFerence​.............................................................................................................329
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PM:​EXTernal:​COUPling​......................................................................................................330
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PM:​EXTernal:​DEViation​......................................................................................................331
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PM:​MODE​...........................................................................................................................331
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PM:​SENSitivity?​..................................................................................................................332
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PM:​SOURce​.......................................................................................................................333
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PM:​STATe​..........................................................................................................................333
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PM[:​DEViation]​....................................................................................................................330
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​ALC:​OMODe​..........................................................................................................334
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​ALC:​SONCe​...........................................................................................................334
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​ALC[:​STATe]​..........................................................................................................335
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​ATTenuation:​RFOFf:​MODE​...................................................................................335
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​LIMit[:​AMPLitude]​...................................................................................................337
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​LMODe​...................................................................................................................338
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​MANual​..................................................................................................................338
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​MODE​....................................................................................................................339
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​POWer​...................................................................................................................340
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​SPC:​CRANge​.........................................................................................................340
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​SPC:​DELay​............................................................................................................341
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​SPC:​PEAK​.............................................................................................................341
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​SPC:​SELect​...........................................................................................................341
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​SPC:​STATe​............................................................................................................341
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​SPC:​TARGet​..........................................................................................................342
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​STARt​.....................................................................................................................342
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​STEP:​MODE​..........................................................................................................343
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​STEP[:​INCRement]​................................................................................................343
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer:​STOP​.....................................................................................................................343
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer[:​LEVel][:​IMMediate]:​OFFSet​..................................................................................336
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer[:​LEVel][:​IMMediate]:​RCL​........................................................................................337
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​POWer[:​LEVel][:​IMMediate][:​AMPLitude]​...........................................................................336
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​DELay​......................................................................................................................345
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​DOUBle:​DELay​........................................................................................................345
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​DOUBle:​STATe​........................................................................................................346
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​DOUBle:​WIDTh​........................................................................................................346
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​MODE​......................................................................................................................346
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​OUTPut:​SYNC[:​STATe]​...........................................................................................347
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​PERiod​.....................................................................................................................347
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​POLarity​...................................................................................................................348
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​SOURce​...................................................................................................................348
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
446
R&S®SMB100A
List of Commands
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​STATe​......................................................................................................................349
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRAin:​CATalog?​......................................................................................................349
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRAin:​DELete​..........................................................................................................350
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRAin:​DEXChange:​AFILe:​CATalog?​......................................................................355
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRAin:​DEXChange:​AFILe:​EXTension​.....................................................................356
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRAin:​DEXChange:​AFILe:​SELect​...........................................................................356
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRAin:​DEXChange:​AFILe:​SEParator:​COLumn​......................................................357
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRAin:​DEXChange:​AFILe:​SEParator:​DECimal​.......................................................357
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRAin:​DEXChange:​EXECute​..................................................................................358
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRAin:​DEXChange:​MODE​......................................................................................358
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRAin:​DEXChange:​SELect​.....................................................................................359
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRAin:​OFFTime​.......................................................................................................350
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRAin:​OFFTime:​POINts?​........................................................................................351
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRAin:​ONTime​.........................................................................................................351
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRAin:​ONTime:​POINts?​..........................................................................................351
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRAin:​REPetition​.....................................................................................................352
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRAin:​REPetition:​POINts?​......................................................................................352
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRAin:​SELect​..........................................................................................................353
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRIGger:​EXTernal:​GATE:​POLarity​.........................................................................353
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRIGger:​EXTernal:​IMPedance​................................................................................354
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRIGger:​EXTernal:​SLOPe​.......................................................................................354
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​TRIGger:​MODE​.......................................................................................................354
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​PULM:​WIDTh​......................................................................................................................359
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep:​POWer:​DWELl​.......................................................................................................378
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep:​POWer:​EXECute​...................................................................................................378
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep:​POWer:​MODE​.......................................................................................................378
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep:​POWer:​POINts​......................................................................................................379
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep:​POWer:​SHAPe​......................................................................................................379
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep:​POWer:​SPACing:​MODE?​......................................................................................380
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep:​POWer:​STEP[:​LOGarithmic]​.................................................................................380
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep:​RESet[:​ALL]​...........................................................................................................381
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​DWELl​.............................................................................................372
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​EXECute​.........................................................................................372
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​LFConnector​...................................................................................373
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​MODE​.............................................................................................373
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​OVOLtage:​STARt​............................................................................374
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​OVOLtage:​STOP​............................................................................374
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​POINts​.............................................................................................375
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​SHAPe​............................................................................................375
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​SPACing​..........................................................................................376
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​STEP:​LOGarithmic​..........................................................................377
[:​SOURce<hw>]:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​STEP[:​LINear]​.................................................................................376
[:​SOURce]:​CALibration:​STEReo:​ANALog[:​MEAS]?​......................................................................................248
[:​SOURce]:​CORRection:​CSET:​CATalog?​.....................................................................................................287
[:​SOURce]:​CORRection:​CSET:​DELete​.........................................................................................................290
[:​SOURce]:​INPut:​TRIGger:​SLOPe​................................................................................................................305
[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput:​FREQuency:​MANual​...................................................................................................307
[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput:​FREQuency:​MODE​.....................................................................................................308
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
447
R&S®SMB100A
List of Commands
[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput:​FREQuency:​STARt​......................................................................................................308
[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput:​FREQuency:​STOP​......................................................................................................309
[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput:​SIMPedance​................................................................................................................314
[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​DWELl​......................................................................................310
[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​EXECute​..................................................................................310
[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​MODE​......................................................................................310
[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​POINts​.....................................................................................311
[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​SHAPe​.....................................................................................312
[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​SPACing​..................................................................................312
[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​STEP:​LOGarithmic​..................................................................313
[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput:​SWEep[:​FREQuency]:​STEP[:​LINear]​..........................................................................312
[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput:​VOLTage​.....................................................................................................................314
[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput<ch>:​FREQuency​.........................................................................................................307
[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput<ch>:​SHAPe​.................................................................................................................314
[:​SOURce]:​LFOutput[:​STATe]​........................................................................................................................309
[:​SOURce]:​ROSCillator:​EXTernal:​FREQuency​.............................................................................................360
[:​SOURce]:​ROSCillator:​EXTernal:​RFOFf[:​STATe]​........................................................................................360
[:​SOURce]:​ROSCillator:​EXTernal:​SBANdwidth​.............................................................................................361
[:​SOURce]:​ROSCillator:​SOURce​...................................................................................................................362
[:​SOURce]:​ROSCillator[:​INTernal]:​ADJust:​VALue​.........................................................................................361
[:​SOURce]:​ROSCillator[:​INTernal]:​ADJust[:​STATe]​......................................................................................361
[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​ARI:​BK[:​CODE]​.............................................................................................................363
[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​ARI:​STATe​....................................................................................................................363
[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​ARI:​TYPE​......................................................................................................................363
[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​ARI:​TYPE:​STATe​..........................................................................................................364
[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​ARI[:​DEViation]​.............................................................................................................364
[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​AUDio:​MODE​................................................................................................................365
[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​AUDio:​PREemphasis​....................................................................................................365
[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​AUDio:​PREemphasis:​STATe​........................................................................................366
[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​AUDio[:​FREQuency]​.....................................................................................................366
[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​DIRect​...........................................................................................................................366
[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​EXTernal:​IMPedance​....................................................................................................367
[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​MMF​..............................................................................................................................367
[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​PILot:​PHASe​.................................................................................................................367
[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​PILot:​STATe​..................................................................................................................368
[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​PILot[:​DEViation]​...........................................................................................................368
[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​RDS:​DATaset​................................................................................................................368
[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​RDS:​STATe​..................................................................................................................369
[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​RDS:​TRAFfic:​ANNouncement[:​STATe]​........................................................................369
[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​RDS:​TRAFfic:​PROGram[:​STATe]​.................................................................................369
[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​RDS[:​DEViation]​............................................................................................................370
[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​SOURce​........................................................................................................................370
[:​SOURce]:​STEReo:​STATe​...........................................................................................................................370
[:​SOURce]:​STEReo[:​DEViation]​....................................................................................................................371
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
448
R&S®SMB100A
Index
Index
10 - Hardware failure .................................................... 437
11 - DSP failure .............................................................. 437
12 - IIC bus error ............................................................ 437
13 - Real time clock error .............................................. 437
50 - Extern reference out of range or disconnected ............
435
100 - Software failure .................................................... 437
101 - DSP mailbox timeout ............................................ 437
102 - DSP overflow ........................................................ 437
120 - RDS error .............................................................. 437
121 - PI error .................................................................. 437
122 - PSN error .............................................................. 437
123 - Buffer overflow ...................................................... 437
124 - Dataset empty ...................................................... 437
140 - This modulation forces other modulations off ............
435
180 - Adjustment failed .................................................. 435
182 - Adjustment data missing ...................................... 435
183 - Adjustment data invalid ........................................ 436
200 - Cannot access hardware ...................................... 436
201 - Hardware revision out of date .............................. 436
202 - Cannot access the EEPROM .............................. 436
203 - Invalid EEPROM data .......................................... 436
204 - river initialization failed .......................................... 436
241 - No current list ........................................................ 436
242 - Unknown list type specified .................................. 436
460 - Cannot open file .................................................... 436
461 - Cannot write file .................................................... 436
462 - Cannot read file .................................................... 436
463 - Filename missing .................................................. 436
464 - Invalid filename extension .................................... 436
465 - File contains invalid data ...................................... 436
&GTL .............................................................................. 208
&LLO .............................................................................. 208
&NREN .......................................................................... 208
*IDN? ............................................................................ 395
*OPC .............................................................................. 229
*OPC? ............................................................................ 229
*RST .............................................................................. 238
*WAI .............................................................................. 229
/var directory .................................................................. 262
A
Abort button .................................................................... 68
Abort calculation .............................................................. 68
Accept
Security Settings ...................................................... 100
Access denied .................................................................. 60
AC supply ........................................................................ 22
Adjust All .................................................................. 82, 247
Adjust Analog Channels .......................................... 83, 248
Adjust FM Offset ............................................................ 247
Adjust Level ............................................................ 82, 247
Adjustment Active .................................................. 118, 361
Adjustment Data ...................................................... 82, 248
Adjustment Frequency .......................................... 119, 361
Adjustment value - Reference frequency .............. 119, 361
Adjust Synthesis ...................................................... 82, 247
Adjust Synthesis Extension .............................................. 82
ALC (automatic level control) ................................ 126, 334
ALC Auto ........................................................................ 433
ALC On .................................................................. 126, 433
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
ALC S&H ........................................................................ 433
ALC Table ...................................................................... 433
AM
modulation depth exponential .................................. 284
modulation depth linear .......................................... 284
AM Depth ...................................................................... 168
AM External Coupling ............................................ 169, 284
AM Frequency ................................................................ 307
Amplitude modulation
AM type .......................................................... 168, 286
AM Sensitivity ........................................................ 169, 285
AM Source ............................................................ 168, 285
AM State ................................................................ 168, 286
AM Type
amplitude modulation ...................................... 168, 286
Annotate all
display .................................................................... 251
Annotate amplitude
display .................................................................... 251
Annotate frequency
display .................................................................... 251
Annotation Amplitude ...................................................... 99
Annotation Frequency ...................................................... 99
Applications of the R&S SMB .......................................... 46
Architecture of the instrument .......................................... 44
ARI BK Code .......................................................... 182, 363
ARI Deviation ........................................................ 182, 364
ARI Identification .................................................... 182, 363
ARI State ................................................................ 182, 363
Arrow keys ...................................................................... 19
ASCII file import/export
List Mode ................................................................ 157
Assemblies display .................................................. 83, 249
ATN ................................................................................ 438
Attention ........................................................................ 438
Attenuator ...................................................................... 272
Attenuator Mode .................................................... 123, 272
Attenuator settings
RF OFF mode .......................................................... 335
Attenuator Settings
Fixed Range (PEP) in .............................................. 124
mode ........................................................................ 123
RF OFF Mode .......................................................... 124
AttFixed .......................................................................... 433
AUDio Identification ...................................................... 365
Audio Source ................................................................ 370
Stereo modulation .................................................. 180
Automatic Naming Hardcopy ........................................ 260
Auto Once
Power Sensors ........................................................ 143
Auto Once - Power Sensors .......................................... 279
Avahi
LAN Services ............................................................ 98
B
Baudrate ........................................................................ 391
Baudrate - RS232 Interface ............................................ 94
Bluetooth Pin .................................................................. 100
Bluetooth Setup .............................................................. 94
Boolean parameters ...................................................... 224
Buffer overflow (123) ...................................................... 437
BUSY ............................................................................ 432
449
R&S®SMB100A
C
Calibration
remote .................................................................... 240
Case-sensitivity
SCPI ........................................................................ 221
Catch range
NRP-Z level control ................................................ 131
NRP-Z power control .............................................. 340
Center Freq ............................................................ 150, 298
Change Password - Setup ........................................ 97, 98
Check Front Panel .......................................................... 88
Clear status
remote .................................................................... 240
Colon .............................................................................. 225
Column Separator Import/Export
List Mode data ........................................................ 319
Pulse Train data ...................................................... 198
Column Separator Import/Export - List Mode data ..............
357
Column Separator Import/Export - User Correction data ......
................................................................................. 136, 291
Comma .......................................................................... 225
Commands .................................................................... 200
Colon ...................................................................... 225
Comma .................................................................... 225
Command line structure .......................................... 226
common .................................................................. 200
Double dagger ........................................................ 225
GBIP, addressed .................................................... 206
GBIP, universal ........................................................ 205
instrument control .................................................... 200
Overlapping ............................................................ 227
Question mark ........................................................ 225
Quotation mark ........................................................ 225
SCPI compliant ........................................................ 200
Sequential ................................................................ 227
Syntax elements ...................................................... 225
White space ............................................................ 225
Command sequence
recommendation ...................................................... 238
remote .................................................................... 244
Common commands
Syntax ...................................................................... 219
Computer name
Changing .................................................................. 36
Computer name - Setup .................................................. 90
CONDition ...................................................................... 232
Confirm Password - Setup .............................................. 97
Connection to an external controller ................................ 36
Connector
GPIB .......................................................................... 22
IEC/IEEE .................................................................. 22
INSTR TRIG .............................................................. 23
LAN ............................................................................ 22
LF .............................................................................. 20
MOD EXT .................................................................. 20
PULSE EXT .............................................................. 23
PULSE VIDEO .......................................................... 23
REF IN ...................................................................... 23
REF OUT .................................................................. 23
RF .............................................................................. 21
S/P DIF ...................................................................... 23
SIGNAL VALID .......................................................... 23
Stereo R/L ................................................................ 23
USB type A ................................................................ 22
USB type B ................................................................ 22
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
Index
Control bus .................................................................... 438
Controller, external .......................................................... 36
Copy instrument settings ...................................... 111, 267
Counter .................................................................... 83, 250
Count – LF Frequency Sweep ...................................... 311
Coupling mode .............................................................. 172
external modulation input ........................................ 284
FM .......................................................................... 296
Coupling mode - EXT MOD (AM) .................................. 169
Create New Directory .................................................... 111
Current Freq
LF Sweep ................................................................ 307
Current Freq (LF Sweep) .............................................. 189
Current Freq (RF Sweep) ...................................... 150, 300
Current Index ................................................................ 323
List Mode ................................................................ 160
Current Level ........................................................ 156, 338
Current Sensors .............................................................. 87
Cursor keys ...................................................................... 19
Cut ................................................................................ 111
D
Dataset empty (124) ...................................................... 437
Data Valid ...................................................................... 438
Date - Setup .................................................................... 89
DAV ................................................................................ 438
Day Hardcopy File Name .............................................. 258
DCL ................................................................................ 206
Deactivate RF output ............................................ 118, 360
Decimal Point Import/Export
List Mode data ........................................................ 320
Pulse Train data ...................................................... 197
Decimal Point Import/Export - List Mode data .............. 163,
357
Decimal Point Import/Export - User Correction data ............
136, 292
DEF ................................................................................ 223
Default instrument settings ................................ 29, 80, 245
Default values
remote .................................................................... 243
Delay time
NRP-Z level control ................................................ 131
NRP-Z power control .............................................. 341
Delete Hardcopy Files .................................................... 257
Delete instrument settings .................................... 111, 268
Delta Phase .......................................................... 117, 329
Destination - Hardcopy .................................................. 102
Destination Import/Export
List Mode data ........................................................ 321
Pulse Train data ...................................................... 198
User Correction data .............................................. 136
Destination Import/Export - List Mode data .................... 164
Destination Import/Export - Pulse Train data ................ 359
Destination Import/Export - User Correction data ................
293
Deviation
Stereo modulation .......................................... 179, 371
Device ID ........................................................................ 86
Device reset .................................................................. 245
Device-specific commands ............................................ 200
Device-specific error messages .................................... 435
DHCP .............................................................................. 34
Dialog
close ........................................................................ 251
ID ............................................................................ 252
open ........................................................................ 252
450
R&S®SMB100A
Directory ................................................................ 109, 266
Directory Hardcopy ........................................................ 257
Direct programming ...................................................... 366
Display ...................................................................... 56, 99
annotate all .............................................................. 251
annotate amplitude .................................................. 251
annotate frequency .................................................. 251
close dialog .............................................................. 251
dialog ID .................................................................. 252
open dialog .............................................................. 252
state (screen saver) ................................................ 252
wait time (screen saver) .......................................... 252
Display permanent priority - Power Sensors .................. 142
Documentation Overview ................................................ 13
Double dagger .............................................................. 225
Double Pulse .................................................................. 192
Double Pulse Delay .............................................. 193, 345
Double Pulse State ........................................................ 346
Double Pulse width ................................................ 193, 346
DOWN ............................................................................ 223
DSP failure (11) ............................................................ 437
DSP mailbox timeout (101) ............................................ 437
DSP overflow (102) ........................................................ 437
Dwell time
List Mode ................................................................ 322
Dwell Time ............................................ 151, 157, 160, 191
Level Sweep ............................................................ 378
LF Sweep ................................................................ 310
List Mode ................................................................ 160
RF Sweep ................................................................ 372
E
Edit
Pulse Train .............................................................. 195
Edit Pulse Train Data .................................................... 195
Edit User Correction Data .............................................. 133
EFC (Electronic Frequency Control) .............................. 117
EFC mode (Electronic Frequency Control) .................... 117
EMF - Level display ...................................................... 126
Enable
LAN interface ............................................................ 98
ENABle .......................................................................... 232
Enable/disable beep ...................................................... 386
Enable registers
remote .................................................................... 242
Enter License Key ............................................................ 86
EOI ................................................................................ 438
Error messages ................................................................ 58
Adjustment data invalid (183) .................................. 436
Adjustment data missing (182) ................................ 435
Adjustment failed (180) ............................................ 435
Cannot access hardware (200) .............................. 436
Cannot access the EEPROM (202) ........................ 436
Cannot open file (460) ............................................ 436
Cannot read file (462) .............................................. 436
Cannot write file (461) ............................................ 436
Driver initialization failed (204) ................................ 436
Extern reference out of range or disconnected (50) .......
.................................................................................. 435
File contains invalid data (465) ................................ 436
Filename missing (463) .......................................... 436
Hardware revision out of date (201) ........................ 436
Invalid EEPROM data (203) .................................... 436
Invalid filename extension (464) .............................. 436
No current list (241) ................................................ 436
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
Index
This modulation forces other modulations off (140) ........
.................................................................................. 435
Unknown list type specified (242) ............................ 436
Error Messages .............................................................. 434
device-specific ........................................................ 435
SCPI ........................................................................ 435
Error messages - display list .......................................... 397
Error queue query .......................................... 385, 393, 394
Error queues
recommendations .................................................... 238
ESR ................................................................................ 231
EVENt ............................................................................ 232
Event status enable register
remote .................................................................... 241
Event status register
remote .................................................................... 241
Exclude Frequency ................................................ 109, 300
Exclude Level ........................................................ 109, 337
Execute Single
List Mode ................................................................ 159
Execute Single - List Mode ............................................ 327
Execute Single Sweep
Frequency Sweep ............................................ 149, 372
Level Sweep .................................................... 155, 378
LF Sweep ................................................................ 310
Execute Single Sweep - LF Sweep ................................ 189
Expiration date of option .................................................. 85
Export Deactivation Response ........................................ 86
Extension Import/Export
List Mode data ................................................ 318, 319
Pulse Train data ...................................................... 197
Extension Import/Export - List Mode data .............. 163, 356
Extension Import/Export - User Correction data ..... ..... 135,
290, 291
External impedance ...................................................... 305
External Impedance
Stereo modulation .......................................... 181, 367
External Input Impedance .............................................. 194
Pulse Trigger .......................................................... 354
External modulation signal ............................................ 167
FM .................................................................. 170, 297
External modulation signal - PhiM ................................ 173
External modulation signal - voltage .............................. 166
External Reference Frequency .............................. 118, 360
EXT REF ........................................................................ 432
F
Factory Preset ........................................................ 100, 246
Features of R&S SMB ...................................................... 46
File - Hardcopy dialog .................................................... 102
File list .................................................................... 109, 265
File menu ...................................................................... 107
File Name - Hardcopy ............................................ 102, 103
File setup - Hardcopy .................................................... 103
File type selection .......................................................... 110
Fill Table
List Mode ................................................................ 161
Fill Table From .............................................................. 164
Fill Table - List mode ...................................................... 164
Fill Table Range .................................................... 137, 165
Filter
Low harmonic .......................................................... 122
mode (low harmonic) .............................................. 123
Power Sensors ........................................................ 143
State (low harmonic) ........................................ 123, 273
451
R&S®SMB100A
Filter Length
Power Sensors ........................................................ 143
Filter Length - Power Sensors ...................... 277, 278, 279
Fine adjustment - Reference frequency ................ 118, 361
Firmware version ............................................................ 85
Floating licences .............................................................. 85
FM-DC mode ................................................................ 117
FM Deviation .................................................. 172, 295, 296
Stereo modulation .......................................... 179, 371
FM External Coupling ............................................ 172, 296
FM Mode ................................................................ 171, 296
FM Sensibility ................................................................ 297
FM Sensitivity ................................................................ 172
FM Source ............................................................ 171, 297
FM State ................................................................ 171, 297
FREQ OFFSET .............................................................. 431
Frequency ...................................................................... 120
AM .......................................................................... 307
LF generator ............................................ 180, 307, 366
List mode ................................................................ 322
List Mode ................................................................ 161
PM .................................................................. 193, 307
Power Sensors ........................................................ 143
Pulse Modualtion .................................................... 347
RF output signal ...................................................... 299
RF Sweep ................................................................ 303
Stereo modulation .......................................... 180, 366
Frequency display ............................................................ 56
Frequency - Multiplier .................................................... 116
Frequency Offset .................................................. 115, 302
Multiplier .................................................................. 302
Frequency - RF output signal ........................................ 114
Frequency - RF Signal .................................................. 115
Frequency - RF Sweep .................................................. 149
Front panel key emulation ................................................ 76
FTP
LAN Services ............................................................ 98
Fuses .............................................................................. 27
G
Gated
pulse trigger input .................................................... 194
Gated Signal
Pulse Modulation ............................................ 193, 354
Gate Input Polarity ........................................................ 194
Pulse Modulation .................................................... 353
Gateway - Setup .............................................. 91, 387, 389
GET ................................................................................ 206
Getting started ................................................................ 44
GPIB ................................................................................ 92
Characteristics ........................................................ 205
interface messages ................................................ 205
Remote control interface ........................................ 199
GPIB address ........................................................ 206, 387
GPIB bus address ............................................................ 94
GPIB bus control
remote .................................................................... 242
GPIB - Visa Resource String .......................................... 95
GTL ................................................................................ 206
H
Hardcopy - Destination .......................................... 102, 255
Hardcopy Device Size .................................................... 261
Hardcopy dialog - File .................................................... 102
Hardcopy File Name .............................................. 256, 257
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
Index
Hardcopy - File setup .................................................... 103
Hardcopy Format .................................................. 255, 261
Hardcopy Path .............................................................. 256
Hardware Config ...................................................... 83, 249
Hardware failure (10) .................................................... 437
Hardware options ............................................................ 84
HiSLIP
Protocol .................................................................. 202
Resource string ...................................................... 201
HiSLIP - Visa Resource String ................................ 95, 387
Hostname - Setup ............................................................ 90
HTTP
LAN Services ............................................................ 98
I
Identification
remote .................................................................... 241
Identification mode .................................................. 94, 395
IDN String ........................................................................ 94
IdPDbSweepFreqOutVoltStart ...................................... 152
IdPDbSweepFreqOutVoltStop ...................................... 152
IdPDbSweepResAll ........................................................ 381
IFC ........................................................................ 206, 438
IIC bus error (12) ............................................................ 437
Impedance
external input .......................................... 170, 173, 176
External Inputs ........................................................ 354
Impedance Audio Signal ........................................ 181, 367
Impedance - RF outputs ................................................ 273
Import/Export
List Mode data ................................................ 164, 320
Pulse Train data .............................................. 197, 198
User Correction data ...................................... 135, 136
Import/Export - List Mode data .............................. 162, 358
Import/Export - User Correction data ............................ 292
Import License Key .......................................................... 86
INF ................................................................................ 223
INFO key .......................................................................... 58
Input
Stereo Modulation .................................................. 178
Input connector .......................................................... 20, 23
Installed Assembly .......................................................... 84
Instrument Config .................................................... 83, 249
Instrument messages .................................................... 200
Instrument settings
recall ................................................................ 243, 269
save ................................................................ 243, 270
Instrument settings - recall ............................................ 108
Instrument settings - save .............................................. 107
Instrument Trigger .................................. 152, 157, 162, 191
Instrument trigger input slope ........................................ 305
Interface
functions (GPIB bus) .............................................. 439
Interface Clear .............................................................. 438
Interface messages ................................................ 200, 203
Interfaces
GPIB ........................................................................ 205
USB ........................................................................ 204
Interrupt .......................................................................... 236
IP address ...................................................................... 201
Changing .................................................................. 34
IP Address Mode .......................................................... 388
IP Address Mode - Setup ................................................ 90
IP Address - Setup .................................................. 91, 389
IST ................................................................................ 231
452
R&S®SMB100A
IST flag .......................................................................... 234
remote .................................................................... 241
K
Key
Arrow key .................................................................. 20
BACKSPACE ............................................................ 17
Cursor key ................................................................ 20
DIAGRAM .................................................................. 18
ENTER ...................................................................... 19
ESC .......................................................................... 18
FILE .................................................................. 16, 106
FREQ ........................................................................ 17
HELP ........................................................................ 16
INFO .......................................................................... 16
LEVEL ...................................................................... 17
LOCAL ...................................................................... 16
MOD ON/OFF .................................................... 18, 166
ON/OFF TOGGLE .................................................... 17
PRESET ........................................................ 16, 29, 80
RF ON/OFF .............................................................. 18
SETUP ................................................................ 16, 81
WINBAR .................................................................... 16
Keyboard .......................................................................... 99
Keyboard Language ...................................................... 261
Keyboard Layout ...................................................... 92, 262
Key combinations ............................................................ 75
Key - HELP .................................................................... 105
Key - LOCAL .................................................................. 101
Keypad ............................................................................ 18
Keywords
see Mnemonics ...................................................... 219
L
LAN
Configuration ............................................................ 33
Interface .................................................................. 201
IP address .............................................................. 201
Remote control interface ........................................ 199
VISA ........................................................................ 201
VXI protocol ............................................................ 203
Language Keyboard ...................................................... 261
LAN interface
Avahi .......................................................................... 98
enable ........................................................................ 98
FTP ............................................................................ 98
HTTP ........................................................................ 98
LAN over SCPI .......................................................... 98
SMB (Samba) ............................................................ 98
SSH .......................................................................... 98
VNNC ........................................................................ 98
LAN Interface
services .................................................................... 98
setup .......................................................................... 98
Layout Keyboard ...................................................... 92, 262
Learn List Mode Data ............................................ 160, 325
Level ............................................................................ 120
limit .................................................................. 122, 131
Power Sensors ........................................................ 141
RF output ........................................................ 122, 336
Step width ................................................................ 343
uninterrupted setting ................................................ 123
Level control .......................................................... 126, 334
Level display .................................................................... 56
Level display EMF .......................................................... 126
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
Index
Level limit ...................................................................... 337
RF level .......................................................... 122, 131
Level mode
RF level .................................................................. 338
Level offset ............................................................ 122, 336
Level Offset
Power Sensors ........................................................ 143
LEVEL OFFSET ............................................................ 432
Level - Step width .......................................................... 124
LevelSweep .................................................................. 433
Level Sweep .......................................................... 152, 339
Level - Uninterrupted setting .......................................... 272
Level user correction ...................................................... 132
LF Connector - Sweep Voltage ...................................... 374
LFF output - Source Impedance .................................... 186
LF generator .................................................................. 184
LF Generator
Shape .............................................. 169, 172, 175, 186
LFGen Frequency .................................................. 180, 366
LF Gen Frequency ........................ 169, 172, 175, 186, 307
LF Gen Voltage ...................................................... 186, 314
LF output ........................................................................ 185
LF output - Source Impedance ...................................... 314
LF Output State ...................................................... 185, 309
LF Output - Sweep Voltage .................................... 152, 373
LF Source Impedance ............................................ 186, 314
LFSweep ........................................................................ 433
LF Sweep .............................................................. 189, 308
Licence for software option .............................................. 85
License Key .................................................................... 85
Limit
Level ........................................................ 122, 131, 337
Linux ................................................................................ 32
Linux controller ................................................................ 38
ListMode ........................................................................ 433
List mode .............................................................. 157, 339
manual processing of lists ...................................... 159
List Mode Data .............................................................. 161
List Range In .......................................................... 162, 324
LLO ................................................................................ 206
Load instrument settings ................................ 108, 243, 269
Local - Remote Channel Control ...................................... 95
Local to remote switchover .................................... 207, 208
Lock keyboard ................................................................ 395
LOC-LLO ........................................................................ 433
Low harmonic
Filter ........................................................................ 122
Filter mode .............................................................. 123
Filter state ................................................................ 123
M
Malfunctions
reacting .................................................................... 238
Manual Remote Control .................................................. 36
MAX .............................................................................. 223
Maximal deviation .......................................................... 175
FM .................................................................. 172, 295
PhiM ................................................................ 330, 331
Max Modulation Freq ............................................ 181, 367
Measured level
NRP-Z level control ................................................ 130
Menu structure
access denied ............................................................ 60
header ...................................................................... 60
menu area ................................................................ 60
453
R&S®SMB100A
Messages
commands .............................................................. 200
instrument ................................................................ 200
instrument responses .............................................. 201
interface .................................................................. 200
MIN ................................................................................ 223
Mnemonics .................................................................... 219
Optional .................................................................. 221
Mode .............................................................................. 174
FM .................................................................. 171, 296
IP Address .............................................................. 388
Level Sweep ............................................ 153, 339, 378
LF Gen ............................................................ 187, 308
LF Sweep ................................................ 187, 308, 310
List Mode ........................................................ 159, 325
Low harmonic filter .................................................. 123
PhiM ........................................................................ 331
RF Frequency .......................................................... 301
RF frequency Sweep .............................................. 146
RF level .................................................................. 121
RF Sweep ........................................................ 301, 373
Mode Import/Export
List Mode data ........................................................ 321
Pulse Train data ...................................................... 197
Mode Import/Export - List Mode data .................... 163, 358
Mode Import/Export - User Correction data ..... ..... 135, 293
Mode IP Address - Setup ................................................ 90
Mod Gen block ................................................................ 47
MOD OFF ...................................................................... 431
MOD ON/OFF Key ........................................................ 166
Modulation
AM .......................................................................... 167
FM .......................................................................... 170
PhiM ........................................................................ 173
PM .......................................................................... 176
Pulse modulation .................................................... 176
Stereo modulation .................................................. 178
Modulation depth
PhiM ........................................................................ 175
Modulation depth - AM .................................................. 168
Modulation depth exponential
AM .......................................................................... 284
Modulation depth linear
AM .......................................................................... 284
Modulation deviation
FM .......................................................... 172, 295, 296
PhiM ................................................................ 330, 331
Month Hardcopy File Name .......................................... 259
MPX Deviation ...................................................... 179, 371
Multiplier
Frequency Offset .................................................... 302
Multiplier - Frequency .................................................... 116
Multi transmitter measurements .................................... 126
N
NAN .............................................................................. 223
Navigation keys ................................................................ 19
NDAC ............................................................................ 438
Network Settings .............................................................. 89
Network Status ................................................................ 90
New Password - Setup .................................................... 97
NINF .............................................................................. 223
No-load voltage (EMF) .................................................. 126
NRFD ............................................................................ 438
NRP-Z Info ...................................................................... 87
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
Index
NRP-Z level control ........................................................ 128
catch range .............................................................. 131
delay time ................................................................ 131
measured level ........................................................ 130
sensor ...................................................................... 129
state ........................................................................ 130
target level .............................................................. 131
use peak power ...................................................... 131
NRP-Z power control
catch range .............................................................. 340
delay time ................................................................ 341
RF level limit .................................................... 122, 131
sensor ...................................................................... 341
state ........................................................................ 341
target level .............................................................. 342
use peak power ...................................................... 341
use SParameter .............................................. 131, 144
NRP-Z power viewer
use SParameter .............................................. 131, 144
NTRansition .................................................................. 232
Number Hardcopy File Name ........................................ 259
Number of licences .......................................................... 85
Numeric values
Special .................................................................... 223
O
OCXO .............................................................................. 23
Offset
Frequency ................................................................ 302
Level ........................................................................ 336
Offset - Frequency ........................................................ 115
Offset - Level .................................................................. 122
Offtime
Pulse Train ...................................................... 195, 350
Old password - Setup ...................................................... 97
Online help
Working with .............................................................. 70
Ontime
Pulse Train ...................................................... 195, 351
Operating concept ............................................................ 44
Operating system ............................................................ 32
Operation complete
remote .................................................................... 242
Operation hours ...................................................... 83, 250
Option
Hardware .................................................................. 84
Software .................................................................... 84
Option: expiration date .................................................... 85
Option identification
remote .................................................................... 242
Options - Hardcopy ........................................................ 102
OPT String ...................................................................... 94
Output buffer .................................................................. 231
Output connector ................................................ 20, 21, 23
Output - LF .................................................................... 185
Output Voltage - LF output ............................................ 186
Output Voltage Start ...................................................... 152
Output Voltage Stop ...................................................... 152
OvenCold ...................................................................... 434
Overlapping
preventing ................................................................ 229
Overlapping commands ................................................ 227
Overload ........................................................................ 125
OVERLOAD .................................................................. 432
454
R&S®SMB100A
P
Packing .......................................................................... 430
Parallel poll register enable
remote .................................................................... 242
Parameters
Block data ................................................................ 225
Boolean .................................................................. 224
SCPI ........................................................................ 222
Special numeric values ............................................ 223
String ...................................................................... 225
Text .......................................................................... 225
Units ........................................................................ 223
Parity .............................................................................. 391
Parity - RS232 Interface .................................................. 94
Part numbers .................................................................. 83
Paste .............................................................................. 111
Path reset ...................................................................... 245
PCI bus ............................................................................ 84
Phase
RF output signal ...................................................... 329
Phase - RF output signal .............................................. 117
PhiM Depth .................................................................... 175
PhiM Deviation .............................................................. 331
PhiM External Coupling ........................................ 176, 330
PhiM Mode .................................................................... 174
PhiM Sensitivity .............................................................. 175
PhiM Source .......................................................... 174, 333
PhiM State ............................................................ 174, 333
PI error (121) .................................................................. 437
Pilot Deviation ........................................................ 181, 368
Pilot Phase .................................................................... 182
Stereo modulation .................................................. 367
Pilot State .............................................................. 181, 368
PM Deviation .................................................................. 330
PM Frequency ................................................................ 307
PM Sensitivity ................................................................ 332
PniM Mode .................................................................... 331
Point-to-point connection ................................................ 34
Polarity
Pulse Modulation ............................................ 178, 348
Power
List Mode ................................................................ 161
Power-On Count ........................................................ 83, 84
Power-On Counter ........................................................ 250
Power-On State .................................................... 125, 274
Power sensors
NRP-Z level control ................................................ 128
zero .................................................................. 130, 142
PPC ................................................................................ 206
PPE ................................................................................ 231
PPE register .................................................................. 234
PPU ................................................................................ 206
Preemphasis .................................................. 181, 365, 366
Prefix Hardcopy File Name .................................... 259, 260
Preset .............................................................................. 29
Preset instrument settings .............................................. 29
Preset - instrument settings .................................... 80, 245
Protection ........................................................................ 95
Protocol
VXI .......................................................................... 203
PSN error (122) .............................................................. 437
PTRansition .................................................................. 232
Pulse Delay ............................................................ 193, 345
Pulse External Impedance ............................................ 194
Pulse generator .............................................................. 191
Signal valid as pulse sync .............................. 194, 347
Operating Manual 1407.0806.32 ─ 12
Index
Pulse Generator
Pulse Train .............................................................. 194
Pulse generator state ............................................ 192, 328
Pulse Mode ............................................................ 192, 346
Pulse modulation .......................................................... 176
repetition frequency ................................ 193, 307, 347
Signal valid as pulse sync .............................. 194, 347
Pulse period .......................................................... 193, 347
Pulse Train .................................................................... 192
Pulse Generator ...................................................... 194
Pulse Train Data ............................................................ 195
Pulse trigger input slope ........................................ 193, 354
Pulse width ............................................................ 193, 359
Q
Queries .................................................................. 200, 227
Status ...................................................................... 237
Question mark ........................................................ 225, 227
Quotation mark .............................................................. 225
R
Rackmounting .................................................................. 27
RDS Data Set ........................................................ 183, 368
RDS Deviation ...................................................... 183, 370
RDS error (120) ............................................................ 437
RDS Program Identification .......................................... 184
RDS Program Service Name ........................................ 183
RDS State .............................................................. 183, 369
RDS Traffic Announcement .................................. 184, 369
RDS Traffic Program .............................................. 184, 369
Real time clock error (13) .............................................. 437
Recall instrument settings ...................... 108, 109, 243, 269
Recall intermediate ........................................................ 243
Recall Intermediate ........................................................ 110
Recent data sets ............................................................ 109
Recommendations
remote control programming .................................. 238
Reference frequency
external .................................................................... 118
Reference frequency adjustment mode ................ 118, 361
Reference frequency - external ...................................... 360
Reference oscillator ...................................................... 117
REF OUT output ............................................................ 117
Registers ........................................................................ 231
REM-LLO ...................................................................... 433
REMOTE ........................................................................ 432
Remote access ................................................................ 36
Remote control
Basics ...................................................................... 199
GPIB address .......................................................... 206
Interfaces ................................................................ 199
Protocols .................................................................. 199
Remote Control
GPIB ........................................................................ 208
Remote control switchover ............................................ 207
REN .............................................................................. 438
Rename ................................................................ 111, 269
Repetition
Pulse Train .............................................................. 195
Reset
List Mode ................................................................ 160
Reset Delta Phase Display .................................... 117, 329
Reset device parameters .............................................. 245
Reset instrument settings .................................. 29, 80, 245
Reset path ...................................................................... 245
455
R&S®SMB100A
Reset values
remote .................................................................... 243
Restart Network - Setup .................................................. 91
Reverse power protection .............................................. 125
Revisions ........................................................................ 83
RF block .......................................................................... 48
RF During Power Search - ALC ............................ 128, 272
RF frequency ........................................................ 115, 299
RF level
Mode ........................................................................ 121
RF Level
level mode .............................................................. 338
l